Nissan - Xterra - Workshop Manual - 2005 - 2005

Page 11850 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 913 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 6773 Case 2 Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Classification: EC04-025 Reference: NTB04-126 Date: October 29, 2004 MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284 IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor) ^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor) ACTIONS: 1. Repair the vehicle as necessary. ^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information. 2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning. IMPORTANT: If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared: ^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists. ^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair). CLAIMS INFORMATION The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a separate repair item. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284). ^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle. ^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information. Page 10761 Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation NOTE: The steering angle sensor is an integral part of the spiral cable. - If the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". See: Adjustments Page 8375 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14332 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4607 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation ECM Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. Page 8043 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2552 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 13568 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 8310 14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N 999MP-9G001P). 15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt. 16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. Disclaimer Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7556 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11472 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. Display Item List NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: - CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU". 5. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Page 8616 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9924 2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. 3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Page 4577 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3704 Mating mark (F) Yellow link Copper link - When it is difficult to align mating marks (A) with (B) and (E) with (F) of the primary timing chain with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft to align it with the mating marks. - During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary timing chains. 4. Install internal chain guide. Page 5484 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 751 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. Page 5855 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Page 9986 Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) 5. If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten the drive pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments without overtightening. Refer to COMPONENTS. Tighten until proper rotating torque is achieved. CAUTION: ^ Do not loosen the drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque. ^ Do not exceed specified rotating preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new collapsible spacer must be installed. ^ Do not exceed maximum tightening torque. If maximum tightening torque is reached prior to reaching the required rotating torque, the collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace the collapsible spacer. 6. Check the gear oil level. Refer to "Checking Differential Gear Oil". 7. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Page 2368 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 4731 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 13080 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 13172 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 14285 License Plate Lamp: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Terminals And Reference Values For BCM Part 1 Page 8348 5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3. ^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail. 6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown. 7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows: Page 639 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6 Page 4238 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5159 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13521 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 7787 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12840 11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4. 12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor. 13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order. ^ Reuse the original cover. ^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor. ^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb). 14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the codes: ^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function, SELF-DIAG [PAST]. 15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows: a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure 5). b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF. c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the Service Manual for diagnosis and repair. ^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this bulletin. 16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector. Page 1113 Page 9083 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 13120 Body Control Module: Description and Operation BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description - BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. Description - BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. - BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). 2. Operation description - BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. - If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. - At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. Page 911 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1957 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5739 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4523 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Upper Link Ball Joint: Service and Repair Upper Link INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Upper Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Upper Link Ball Joint Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary Page 7568 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 13956 c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock ring holder as shown in Figure 8. NOTE: The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring. NOTE: ^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring. ^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring. ^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). Page 4729 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Service and Repair Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 12582 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 1 Page 5878 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. C200 Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection C200 Checking Differential Gear Oil OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly or around it. Page 12211 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 14263 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2353 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4297 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 194 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12413 Page 1307 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8707 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 16 Page 489 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 2525 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6803 Case 8 Case 9 Page 1977 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 11460 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3705 - If removed, reinstall slack guide. CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a gap to exist under the bolt seats when bolts are tightened to specification. - Remove stopper pin from primary timing chain tensioner. 5. Make sure again that the mating marks on camshaft sprockets and timing chain have not slipped out of alignment. 6. Tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specification with all timing chains installed and Ring Gear Stopper Tool holding the crankshaft. Tool number : (J-48761) 7. Install front timing chain case. Refer to EM-4, Front Timing Chain Case, Installation. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Before starting the engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the levels are lower than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. Page 4286 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 2813 Locations Page 11637 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Wheel Turning Angle FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection. 1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on stands so that vehicle can be level. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels. 2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning angle. Wheel turning angle (full turn): Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check if the following parts are worn or damaged. Steering gear - Steering column - Front suspension components If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new ones. Page 12601 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 527 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 13631 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5547 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Combination Meters Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1125 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11441 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7414 Page 6237 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 9680 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11006 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6767 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 8) Page 1940 EC-APPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS3 Page 4084 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4054 Systems Controlled By BCM Directly Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM". - Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE - Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP". - Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME". - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS". - Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. Page 10876 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 1310 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14119 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly. Page 92 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Classification: EC04-025 Reference: NTB04-126 Date: October 29, 2004 MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284 IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor) ^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor) ACTIONS: 1. Repair the vehicle as necessary. ^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information. 2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning. IMPORTANT: If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared: ^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists. ^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair). CLAIMS INFORMATION The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a separate repair item. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284). ^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle. ^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information. Page 6660 LAN-CAN-36 CAN System (Type 12) Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 2159 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 14447 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 179 Page 2629 ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 11298 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13761 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9692 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Page 2252 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to "REMOVAL" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat cushion. Page 5102 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11013 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 14455 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Squeak On Bumps Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Squeak On Bumps Classification: RA05-003 Reference: NTB05-117 Date: December 9, 2005 2005-2006 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; SQUEAK NOISE FROM LEAF SPRING APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a squeak from the rear of the leaf spring wind-up clip when: ^ going over bumps Or ^ by compressing the rear suspension ACTION ^ Inspect the inside of the rear leaf spring wind-up clip plastic cover for contact (rubbing) with the leaf spring. ^ If signs of rubbing are present, apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the leaf spring and wind-up clip plastic cover. Page 5612 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 1865 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 375 Page 6726 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Page 7807 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9530 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 6146 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2981 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type...................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................HFC-134a (R-134a) Page 3289 Camshaft: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove front timing chain case, camshaft sprocket, timing chain and rear timing chain case. Page 2711 Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31) Page 3792 6. Disconnect MAF sensor and remove air cleaner case (upper). 7. Remove coolant reservoir hose. 8. Disconnect upper radiator hose from radiator. 9. Disconnect and remove engine cooling fan (Motor driven type). 10. Remove upper fan shroud. 11. Remove drive belt. 12. Remove drive belt auto-tensioner. 13. Remove chain tensioner cover. 14. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows: a. Loosen clip of timing chain tensioner (primary), and release plunger stopper (1). b. Depress plunger into tensioner body by pressing slack guide (2). c. Keep slack guide pressed and insert stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove (3) to hold plunger in. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. d. Remove timing chain tensioner bolts and remove timing chain tensioner (primary). CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside timing chain case. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - When installing timing chain tensioner (primary), push in plunger and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. - Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of primary timing chain tensioner. - After installation, pull out stopper pin. Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner) REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains (primary) and (secondary). 2. Remove the rocker covers. 3. Remove the camshaft brackets (No. 1). 4. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioners. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe) Page 11421 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 8844 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 7751 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 10066 Model 2S1330-BJ100 REMOVAL 1. Put the transmission in neutral and release the parking brake. 2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft flange yoke and the rear final drive companion flange as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft flange yoke or the companion flange. 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the propeller shaft from the rear final drive and transmission or transfer. INSPECTION ^ Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Propeller shaft runout limit Page 6867 Case 12 Case 13 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 2491 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Classification: EC04-025 Reference: NTB04-126 Date: October 29, 2004 MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284 IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor) ^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor) ACTIONS: 1. Repair the vehicle as necessary. ^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information. 2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning. IMPORTANT: If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared: ^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists. ^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair). CLAIMS INFORMATION The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a separate repair item. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284). ^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle. ^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information. Page 1925 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER ^ Install lower cylinder block without installing main bearings, and tighten lower cylinder block bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure. ^ Measure the inner diameter of main bearing housing with bore gauge. Standard: 74.993 - 75.017 mm (2.9525 - 2.9534 inch) ^ If out of the standard, replace cylinder block and lower cylinder block as assembly NOTE: Cylinder block cannot be replaced as a single part, because it is machined together with lower cylinder block. MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE Method by Calculation ^ Install main bearings to cylinder block and lower cylinder block, and tighten lower cylinder block bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure. ^ Measure the inner diameter of main bearing with bore gauge. (Bearing clearance) = (Main bearing inner diameter) - (Crankshaft main journal diameter) Standard: 0.035 - 0.045 mm (0.0014 - 0.0018 inch) (actual clearance) Limit: 0.065 mm (0.0026 inch) ^ If the calculated value exceeds the limit, select proper main bearing according to main bearing inner diameter and crankshaft main journal diameter to obtain specified bearing oil clearance. Refer to "HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING". Method of Using Plastigage ^ Remove engine oil and dust on crankshaft main journal and the surfaces of each bearing completely. ^ Cut plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. ^ Install main bearings to cylinder block and lower cylinder block, and tighten lower cylinder block bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure. CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft. ^ Remove lower cylinder block and bearings, and using scale on plastigage bag, measure the plastigage width. NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is same as that described in the "Method by Calculation". Page 915 Page 4991 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 5908 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5540 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4832 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PHSB1 EC-PHSB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-PHSB2 Page 14648 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7944 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5297 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Interior - Manual Front Seat Recliner Inoperative Seat Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Manual Front Seat Recliner Inoperative Classification: BT05-029a Reference: NTB05-069a Date: July 26, 2005 2005 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER; FRONT SEAT MANUAL RECLINER INOPERATIVE This bulletin amends NTB05-069. This version amends Step 9 to include the bolt torque specification. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2005 Frontier (D40), Xterra (N50), Pathfinder (R51) (Applies to Non-Fold Flat front seat ONLY) IF YOU CONFIRM The driver and/or passenger seat does not recline or tilt forward when lifting up on the recliner handle. ACTION ^ Re-align the recliner linkage which may have slipped out of position (off pin). (See Figure 1) ^ Adjust the seat cushion rear bracket to prevent the above. IMPORTANT The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 2152 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14015 c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock ring holder as shown in Figure 8. NOTE: The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring. NOTE: ^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring. ^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring. ^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). Page 14413 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5565 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 13184 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6272 Page 4134 6. Disconnect harness connector and remove air fuel ratio sensor 1 (left bank) using Tool. Tool number: (J-44626) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage air fuel ratio sensor 1. ^ Discard any air fuel ratio sensor 1 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor. 7. Remove three-way catalyst (left bank). 8. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as shown. NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal. 9. Remove gaskets. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) Page 13217 SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). - Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Page 5665 Exhaust Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter". Available Valve Lifter CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, "U" and "N", at each of proper positions. (Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 6. Install selected valve lifter. 7. Install camshaft. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 8. Manually turn crankshaft pulley a few turns. 9. Make sure that the valve clearances for cold engine are within the specifications by referring to the specified values. Page 7212 Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning Configuration DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: - READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. - WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: - When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. - Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. - If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. - Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link Connector Schematic Page 8266 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11908 Swing Torque ^ Measure the swing torque, using Tool. When ball stud and inner socket start moving the measured value must be within the specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace the socket. Tool number: (J-44372) Rotating Torque ^ Measure the rotating torque, using Tool. If the value is outside the specification, replace the outer sockets. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Rotating torque: 0.3 - 2.9 Nm (0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3 - 25 inch lbs.) Axial End Play ^ Apply a load of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lbs.) to the ball stud axially. Use a dial gauge to measure the amount of the movement that the stud makes. If the value is outside the specification, replace the sockets. Outer socket: 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) or less Inner socket: 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) or less ASSEMBLY 1. Install the inner sockets. Page 12953 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6643 LAN-CAN-19 Page 746 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 9778 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 939 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Stabilizer Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Classification: FA10-003A Reference: NTB10-072A Date: October 6, 2010 FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN 6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct 23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All IF YOU CONFIRM A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following actions: ^ turning the steering wheel left or right ^ driving over speed bumps ^ driving on rough roads ^ accelerating or decelerating AND The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing. ACTIONS Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and installation instructions. Page 8154 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6468 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 9135 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 10963 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 9749 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 13602 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 11276 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 2022 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13710 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Electrical Diagrams EC-ASC/BS EC-ASC/BS-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-ASCBOF Page 6537 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 14012 3. Unwind the harness. 4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows: a. Press in on the lock tab. b. Slide the sender unit off. C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor. 5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order. Page 9239 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8207 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11490 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 555 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: - If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. - Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. - Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 9475 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 13708 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 2490 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9292 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5066 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6037 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 4513 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 3896 Page 14573 Page 9268 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 5675 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 14700 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2018 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11947 PARTS INFORMATION Page 13090 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3046 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11670 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12957 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 341 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 9069 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1604 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1942 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Fuel Injector: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Component Inspection INJECTOR 1. Disconnect injector harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5 Ohms [at 10 - 60 °C (50 - 140 °F)] Page 1279 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2853 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Page 5246 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10115 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged Roof Rack Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged Classification: BT06-026A Reference: NTB06-093A Date: January 5, 2010 2005 - 2010 XTERRA AND FRONTIER; ROOF RACK DECAL DAMAGE This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and the Parts Information have been updated. No other changes have been made. Please discard the earlier version of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The "NISSAN", "FRONTIER", or "XTERRA" roof rack decal(s) need to be replaced for any reason. ACTIONS 1. Use a heat gun to carefully remove the damaged decal. 2. Clean the side rail or air dam surface. 3. Apply a new decal listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the roof rack, rails, or air dam for damaged decals. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service\ Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: Page 2897 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid 1. Run the engine to warm up the ATF. 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the bolt for the ATF level gauge. 4. Drain the ATF from the drain plug hole and refill the transmission with new ATF. Always refill same volume with drained fluid and use the dipstick to check the fluid level as shown. Add fluid as necessary. ^ To flush out the old fluid from the coolers pour new fluid into the charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same time drain the old fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line. ^ When the color of the fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is about the same as the color of the new fluid flushing out the old fluid is complete. The amount of new transmission fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% of the specified capacity. Transmission fluid type: Genuine NISSAN Matic Fluid J ATF Transmission fluid capacity (with torque converter): 10.6 L (11 1/4 US qt. 9 3/8 Imp qt) CAUTION: ^ Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid. ^ Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty. ^ When filling the transmission with fluid, do not spill the ATF on any heat generating parts such as the exhaust manifold. Drain plug: 34 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.) 5. Check the fluid level and condition. Refer to "Checking AT Fluid". If the fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5. 6. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification. Level gauge bolt: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 8410 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 187 Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2312 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3307 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Page 11265 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 5976 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Service and Repair Shift Interlock Cable: Service and Repair KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Components CAUTION: ^ Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts. ^ After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lbs.), replace key interlock cable with new one. Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster holder. 2. Remove casing cap from bracket of control device assembly and remove interlock rod from adjuster holder. Page 5910 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7113 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions. Page 13926 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. 2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector. Page 2301 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. Page 7608 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12487 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 14638 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 379 Page 5083 CAUTION: - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 Ohms at 25 °C (77 °F) Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6. Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: - Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Specifications Page 4579 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 14056 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 428 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 9687 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 12972 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11959 Repair Overview SERVICE PROCEDURE Lower Link Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower links. ^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below. ^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links. ^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links. 3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below. Page 6776 Case 5 Page 265 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 2942 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 13439 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Preparation for seat removal. ^ Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), section SE, for seat removal information. Make sure to follow all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS. ^ Before disconnecting any SRS connectors: A. Write down all radio station presets. B. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). C. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected. 2. Remove the seat from the vehicle. Page 1023 Cruise Control Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11685 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1206 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6642 LAN-CAN-18 CAN System (Type 6) Page 5787 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 11611 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 12292 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 2 Page 7098 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5316 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s) Engine Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s) Classification: EM11-002 Reference: NTB11-014 Date: February 16, 2011 05-11 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; FRONT ENGINE MOUNT VIBRATION / NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 ONLY APPLIED VINS/DATES: R51: Vehicles built before: 5N1AN0N(**)BC510794/ 19-Jan-11 N50: Vehicles built before: 5N1AR1N(**)BC614925/ 19-Jan-11 D40: ALL VINs / Dates IF YOU CONFIRM The front engine mount insulator is leaking or cracked resulting in engine vibration / noise. ACTION Replace both front engine mounts, stoppers, and bolts with the ones from the Parts Information table below Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal and installation instructions. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 13841 Mirror Compass Operational Description ^ This electronic compass is able to display 8 primary directions: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW. ^ All standard compasses determine direction relative to Magnetic North; however, this electronic compass is designed to display direction relative to True North. ^ The difference between Magnetic North and True North varies from place to place across the surface of the earth. ^ This electronic compass must be "told" approximately where it is on the earth's surface so that the Magnetic North reading can be properly converted into a True North display. ^ To tell the electronic compass where it's at, the earth is separated into numbered "Zone Variances" (see zone variance). The Zone Variance number in which the compass is to function must be entered into this electronic compass. ^ Each zone is magnetically about 4.20 wide. Typically, anything under 22.50 total zone change is not noticed on the electronic compass display. However, over 22.50, a reading may be off by one or more primary directions. ^ On long trips, a vehicle may leave its original zone and enter one or more new zones. Generally, you do not need to reset the compass zone if you travel between 3 or 4 zones, such as business travel or vacation. The typical driver will not notice any difference on the display within 3 or 4 zones. However, if the vehicle is "permanently" moved to a new location, it is recommended that the compass zone be reset. Compass Troubleshooting ^ The electronic compass is highly protected from changes in most magnetic fields. However, some large changes in magnetic fields can affect it. Some examples are (but not limited to): high tension power lines, large steel buildings, subways, steel bridges, automatic car washes, large piles of scrap metal, etc. While this does not happen very often, it is possible. ^ During normal operation, the Compass Mirror will continuously update the compass calibration to adjust for gradual changes in the vehicle's magnetic 'remnant" field. If the vehicle is subjected to high magnetic influences, the compass may appear to indicate false headings, become locked, or appear that it is unable to be calibrated. If this occurs, perform the calibration procedure. ^ If at any time the compass continually displays the incorrect direction or the reading is erratic or locked, you need to verify the correct zone variance (see steps 1, 2 and 3 of the Compass Calibration Procedure). Compass Troubleshooting Chart Mirror Compass Calibration Procedure NOTE: The compass calibrates itself under normal driving conditions. However, occasional circumstances may cause the compass to operate inaccurately. Example: Page 4855 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11827 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8047 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4910 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13440 NOTE: Place the seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt/and or scuff marks. 3. Remove the seat cushion assembly from the seat by removing the mounting bolt from each corner (see Figure 1). Page 8012 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9117 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8196 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 11730 Page 8398 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8197 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 670 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 9789 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4301 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard .......................................................................................................................................................... 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 165 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................................................................................................................... 961 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential Limit between cylinders ....................................................................................................................... 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm Page 6022 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 953 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 14601 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13852 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11209 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5560 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6026 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6275 Page 2391 Page 2703 Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 7303 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 1204 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5966 Page 1890 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2923 Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential Checking Differential Gear Oil OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly or around it. Page 14404 Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3) Page 8819 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4603 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8 Page 4274 Optional Splice Part 1 Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4 Page 11580 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 1147 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13676 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 13808 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6694 Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Work Flow TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW When Displaying CAN Communication System Errors WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED BY CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - CAN communication line is open. (CAN H, CAN L, or both) - CAN communication line is shorted. (Ground, between CAN lines, or other harnesses) - The areas related to CAN communication of unit is malfunctioning. WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED EXCEPT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Removal and installation of parts : When the units that perform CAN communication or the sensors related to CAN communication are removed and installed, malfunction may be detected (or DTC other than CAN communication may be detected). - Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may be stopped at such time. - Low voltage : If the voltage decreases because of battery discharge when IGN is ON, malfunction may be detected by self-diagnosis according to the units. Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart Page 10395 Page 13801 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13994 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH The illumination control switch is a function of the combination meter, and not serviced separately. For replacement, refer to "COMBINATION METER". Page 13826 Key Warning Chime And Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) (Steps 1 - 2) Key Warning Chime And Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) (Step 3) Page 11327 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 6699 Case 3 Page 14453 Page 9428 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2065 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 13119 Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM". - Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -". - Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". - Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER". Page 14462 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8377 Page 14711 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8265 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4447 Page 14345 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 5009 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6325 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 11036 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 10488 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation Part 1 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". Part 2 3. Remove union bolt and cylinder body bolts, then remove cylinder body. 4. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION Page 14275 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 801 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 4726 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5935 - CAN communication is not active. - When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. - When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Ignition switch - Key switch - Hazard switch - Door lock/unlock switch - Front door switch (LH, RH) - Rear door switch (LH, RH) - Back door switch - Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) - Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) - Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) - Back door key cylinder switch - When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. - Status of combination switch reading function is changed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM". - Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE - Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP". - Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME". - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS". - Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM". - Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -". - Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". - Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER". Page 11078 Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications LUBRICANT Capacity (total in system) ml (US fl oz, Imp fl oz) ............................................................................................................................................200 (6.8, 7.0) Page 9416 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13875 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8321 9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab. 10. Install the bracket on the frame rail. NOTE: The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in. 11. Torque the bolt to: 11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb) NOTE: Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt. Page 12116 Part 1 Part 2 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Support the rear final drive and suspension assembly using a suitable jack. Page 4456 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 8278 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2294 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 130 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 832 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 9409 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5184 Page 1707 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5909 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4420 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 8289 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 820 Page 11385 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 389 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 5377 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7460 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 10278 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4024 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4259 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Work Support WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 11636 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe-In TOE-IN WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. - Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 meters (16 ft.). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring points. 4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B". Total toe-in: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)". 7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tie-rods. a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out. Standard length L: Refer to POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE. c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification. Page 9422 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 3563 b. Remove oil pan (lower) using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. ^ Do not insert screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. NOTE: Slide seal cutter (1) by tapping on the side (2) of the tool with hammer. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean oil strainer if any object attached. INSTALLATION (LOWER) 1. Install oil pan (lower) as follows: a. Use scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces. ^ Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper). ^ Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt holes and thread. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to the oil pan (lower) as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". CAUTION: Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating. Page 2650 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability. NOTE: - Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because N50 models do not have fuel return system. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to "INTAKE MANIFOLD". - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. - Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. - During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) 7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5400 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4470 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 11969 Page 7635 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose. 3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting their joints. ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^ Do not shock it. ^ Do not disassemble it. ^ Do not touch its sensor. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^ If anything found, replace air duct. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly. Removal and Installation Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir tank. 2. Remove the engine room cover. 3. Remove the air duct assembly. 4. Remove the serpentine drive belt from the auto tensioner and power steering oil pump. 5. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the high pressure and low pressure piping from the power steering oil pump. Refer to "HYDRAULIC LINE". 7. Remove the power steering oil pump bolts, then remove the power steering pump. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "HYDRAULIC LINE" for tightening torque. ^ After installation, bleed the air from the hydraulic circuit thoroughly. Refer to "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System". NOTE: Belt tension is automatic and requires no adjustment. Page 7518 Wiring Diagram Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3) Page 10795 Page 906 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7305 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 14721 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 10214 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10582 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 12669 6. Turn the ignition OFF. 7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows: The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment. ^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON). ^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed. ^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the sensor is completely installed. ^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing. 8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2). 9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3. ^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused. 10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover. Page 3844 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation IVT CONTROL Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Description Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. Page 9353 EC-PHSB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 4581 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 12526 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5496 Page 11005 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 12070 SERVICE PROCEDURE Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5136 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 526 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 11588 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Front Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 2. Using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4. Remove union bolt and then remove brake hose from caliper assembly. INSTALLATION 1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on caliper assembly, and tighten union bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Hydraulic Circuit". NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer. 2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten flare nut to the specified torque using a flare nut wrench. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Page 6288 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 11909 2. Install the large-diameter side of the boots to the gear housing assembly. 3. Install the small-diameter side of the boots to the groove of the inner sockets. 4. Install the boot clamps to the boots, as shown. CAUTION: Do not reuse the large-diameter boot clamps. 5. Crimp the large-diameter boot clamps, using Tool. Tool number: KV40107300 (-) 6. Install the cylinder tubes to the gear housing assembly 7. Install the lock nuts and outer sockets to the inner sockets. 8. Thread the outer sockets onto the inner sockets to the specified length L, then tighten the lock nuts to the specified torque. Refer to Disassembly and Assembly. Reconfirm that the tie-rod length L is within specification. Page 5232 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6255 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 750 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Page 12255 Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Classification: WT06-002 Reference: NTB06-076 Date: November 7, 2006 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels SERVICE INFORMATION The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during wheel and tire service. Tire Changing: ^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside (internal jaws). ^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel. ^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or have rubber/plastic protective covers. Wheel Balancing: Page 5448 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2070 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS1 EC-TPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS2 Page 9677 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 13223 INSTALLATION 1. Install the regulator assembly. a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window motor or crank assembly to install the assembly in the door. b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom front regulator bolt. d. Install the bottom rear regulator bolt. e. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. f. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. g. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt h. Install the rear window motor or crank assembly bolt. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) 2. If equipped, connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass bolts. Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. On the drivers door, reset the motor (if equipped). Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". 6. Install the inside seal. 7. Install front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". Page 8229 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 14276 License Plate Lamp: Description and Operation System Description Control of the parking, license plate, and tail lamp operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting switch (combination switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST position, the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. This relay, when energized, directs power to the parking, license plate and tail lamps, which then illuminate. Power is supplied at all times - to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and - through 20 A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R) - to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and - to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and - through 50 A fusible link (letter g, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to BCM terminal 70. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied - to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and - through 10 A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 67 - through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and - to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 - through grounds E9, E15 and E24. OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated), the BCM receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil, which when energized, directs power - through 10 A fuse (No. 37, located in the IPDM E/R) - through IPDM E/R terminal 57 - to license plate lamp terminal 1 - to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 1, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R) - through IPDM E/R terminal 28 - to front combination lamp LH (side marker) terminal 7 - to front combination lamp LH (parking) terminal 4, and - through IPDM E/R terminal 49 - to front combination lamp RH (side marker) terminal 7 - to front combination lamp RH (parking) terminal 4. Ground is supplied - to front combination lamp LH and RH (side marker) terminal 8 - to front combination lamp LH and RH (parking) terminal 5 - to license plate lamp terminal 2 - through grounds E9, E15 and E24, and - to rear combination lamp LH terminal 1 through ground B85, and - to rear combination lamp RH terminal 1 - through ground B160. With power and ground supplied, the parking, side marker, license plate and tail lamps illuminate. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION". EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST (or 2ND) position, and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Page 9014 Page 594 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations Page 12502 16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no refrigerant leaks. 17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to "Operational Check". Page 2015 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 1969 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 13215 3. for power windows, operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. Remove the inside seal. 6. Remove the glass bolts. 7. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 8. If equipped, disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 9. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part Page 3711 13. Remove collared O-rings from front timing chain case (left and right side). 14. Remove rocker covers (right and left banks). NOTE: When only timing chain (primary) is removed, rocker cover does not need to be removed. 15. Obtain No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke as follows: NOTE: When timing chain is not removed/installed, this step is not required. a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. b. Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank) are located as shown. ^ If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown. NOTE: When only timing chain (primary) is removed, rocker cover does not need to be removed. To make sure that No. 1 cylinder is at its compression TDC, remove front timing chain case first. Then check mating marks on camshaft sprockets. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 16. Remove crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Remove starter motor and set Tool. Tool number KV10117700 (J-44716) Page 5694 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2333 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9317 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 14443 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 748 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 8127 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 8438 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Front Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation of Brake Pad REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Remove lower sliding pin bolt. 3. Suspend cylinder body with a wire and remove pad and shim from torque member. INSTALLATION 1. Push piston into cylinder body NOTE: Using a commercially available disc brake piston tool, makes pushing in the piston easier. Page 5314 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10122 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4525 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 9729 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 12219 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 7063 EC-O2H2B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2S2B1 Page 5478 EC-PHSB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 6156 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3014 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 1536 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 11993 Page 7452 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 1788 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8387 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Diagram Information and Instructions Neutral Safety Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9651 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1838 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7482 Page 14025 7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: ^ Use a new seal (0-Ring). ^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6. 8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows: a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders. b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly. Page 813 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9012 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14737 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 12272 ^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary. ^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "AXLE SHAFT". Rear Axle Bearing ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. ^ Replace as necessary Check axial end play Page 2008 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Front Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Front CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. - Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. - Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. Page 9177 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11619 > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Page 14736 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1314 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 782 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 13557 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 4063 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 11259 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 2638 Page 10634 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation Part 1 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". Part 2 3. Remove union bolt and cylinder body bolts, then remove cylinder body. 4. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 6934 Case 7 Page 1036 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12500 The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate device. To use the leak detector properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance. 1. Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked as shown. 2. When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the probe as shown. 3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second as shown. CHECKING PROCEDURE NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed. 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports. Refer to "Precautions for Service Equipment". 3. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) above a temperature of 16 °C (61 °F). If less than specification, Page 3775 a. Install crankshaft pulley, taking care not to damage front oil seal. - When press-fitting crankshaft pulley with plastic hammer, tap on its center portion (not circumference). b. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt in two steps. Step 1 : 44.1 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb) Step 2 : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise c. Remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Tool number : (J-48761) 9. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly. 10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Before starting the engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the levels are lower than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down the engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: Timing Chain Page 2474 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Page 8045 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1794 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2347 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 4423 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 13088 Page 7314 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 11092 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Classification: EC04-025 Reference: NTB04-126 Date: October 29, 2004 MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284 IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor) ^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor) ACTIONS: 1. Repair the vehicle as necessary. ^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information. 2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning. IMPORTANT: If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared: ^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists. ^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair). CLAIMS INFORMATION The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a separate repair item. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284). ^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle. ^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information. Page 3293 ^ Measure the following parts if out of the limit. - Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard: 27.500 - 27.548 mm (1.0827 - 1.0846 inch) - Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal bearing Standard: 27.360 - 27.385 mm (1.0772 1.0781 inch) ^ Refer to the standards above, and then replace camshaft and/or cylinder head. Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of camshaft. CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a different diameter from the other three locations. 2. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout with dial indicator. (Total indicator reading) Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket. Valve Lifter Check if surface of valve lifter has any wear or cracks. ^ If anything above is found, replace valve lifter. Refer to "Available Valve Lifter". Valve Lifter Clearance VALVE LIFTER OUTER DIAMETER Page 10194 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5378 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 9508 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 7805 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 12639 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). 3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any air bag connectors. 4. From under the front of the driver seat, drill 2 holes in the connector bracket as shown in Figure 2. ^ The seat does not need to be removed. ^ Use a 1/4 inch drill bit. CAUTION: Make sure to use a rag or other suitable material to catch the metal shavings from the drilled holes. Don't let the shavings fall into the electrical connectors, carpet, seat track or other components that are under the seat. Page 9753 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 13134 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT ITEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information to check CONSULT II data link connector (DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Data Link Connector/Data Link Connector Schematic 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 5116 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7185 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5523 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 11363 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 8435 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 1919 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11076 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 10095 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 2236 SRS Components Parts Location Page 8320 a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper. b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry. c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer). d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour. 8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows: a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown. b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4. c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5. Page 931 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11606 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 6779 Case 8 Page 12404 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 13898 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH The illumination control switch is a function of the combination meter, and not serviced separately. For replacement, refer to "COMBINATION METER". Page 13081 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5053 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5251 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 2137 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 13010 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8135 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4857 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10191 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8137 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 12956 Page 1988 b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Page 7902 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 9113 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8598 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 10323 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 4365 Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid .......................................................................................................................... Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3 Page 12251 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 1372 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 653 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 14) Diagnostic Procedure Page 6858 Case 2 Page 8168 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2287 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 10600 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 9107 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5134 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9132 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12971 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6489 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 14725 Page 12999 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14625 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 1844 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10945 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14597 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 3834 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6353 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 7560 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 7373 Page 13905 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 2478 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3946 Exhaust Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter". Available Valve Lifter CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, "U" and "N", at each of proper positions. (Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 6. Install selected valve lifter. 7. Install camshaft. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 8. Manually turn crankshaft pulley a few turns. 9. Make sure that the valve clearances for cold engine are within the specifications by referring to the specified values. Page 137 Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 8966 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 648 Page 10272 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 4970 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 2743 ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 5 cylinder at compression TDC 3. For the measured value out of the standard, perform adjustment. Refer to EM-86, "ADJUSTMENT". See: Adjustments Page 11226 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11341 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5118 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5323 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Service and Repair Tie Rod: Service and Repair INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Boot Check boot for tears, cracks and deformation. Replace if necessary. Gear Housing Assembly Check gear housing assembly for dents, cracks or damage. Replace as an assembly if necessary. Outer Socket and Inner Socket Swing Torque ^ Measure the swing torque, using Tool. When ball stud and inner socket start moving the measured value must be within the specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace the socket. Tool number: (J-44372) Rotating Torque ^ Measure the rotating torque, using Tool. If the value is outside the specification, replace the outer sockets. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Rotating torque: 0.3 - 2.9 Nm (0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3 - 25 inch lbs.) Axial End Play ^ Apply a load of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lbs.) to the ball stud axially. Use a dial gauge to measure the amount of the movement that the stud makes. If the value is outside the specification, replace the sockets. Outer socket: 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) or less Inner socket: 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) or less Page 11448 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6349 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 14650 Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 14514 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9265 Optional Splice Part 1 Service Limits & General Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Service Limits & General Specifications CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER ^ Install connecting rod bearing cap without installing connecting rod bearing, and tightening connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure. ^ Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod big end with inside micrometer. Standard: 57.000 57.013 mm (2.2441 - 2.2446 inch) ^ If out of the standard, replace connecting rod assembly. CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bushing with inside micrometer. Standard: 22.000 22.012 mm (0.8661 - 0.8666 inch) Piston Pin Outer Diameter Measure the outer diameter of piston pin with micrometer. Standard: 21.989 - 22.001 mm (0.8657 0.8662 inch) Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Connecting rod bushing oil clearance) = (Connecting rod bushing inner diameter) - (Piston pin outer diameter) Standard: 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 inch) Limit: 0.030 mm (0.0012 inch) ^ If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly. ^ If replacing piston and piston pin assembly, refer to "HOW TO SELECT PISTON". Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4 Page 13576 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8956 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 4745 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode. 4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Without CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts Page 6487 Page 14645 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9464 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4983 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8649 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 6108 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7852 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6432 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 14257 Page 2459 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly. Page 9075 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6946 Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection Page 11925 Upper: 0.5 - 4.9 Nm (0.05 - 0.49 kg-m, 5 - 43 inch lbs.) Lower: 0.5 - 6.4 Nm (0.05 - 0.65 kg-m, 5 56 inch lbs.) VERTICAL END PLAY Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Vertical end play C: 0 mm (0 inch) Page 918 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 253 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4445 Page 13004 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 11492 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 14393 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12387 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6145 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 10282 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11948 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1554 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6576 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13512 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 10263 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 116 Power Distribution Module: Locations Page 1550 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6359 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 9790 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6072 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6055 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6431 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 7237 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 1176 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 8564 Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31) Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications FRONT WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC Wheel Bearing (Front) / 2WD MODELS Wheel bearing axial end play............................................................................................................... ................................................................ 0 mm (0 in) Wheel bearing lock nut Tightening torque Nm (kgf-cm, ft. lbs.)....................................................................................................................................... 34 - 39 (3.5 - 4.O, 25 - 29) Return angle degree ............................................................................................................................ ..................................................................... 45° - 60° Wheel bearing starting torque At wheel hub bolt With new grease seal N (kg, lb)............................................................................................................. 9.8 - 28.4 N (1.0 - 2.9, 2.2 6.4) With used grease seal N (kg, lb).............................................................................................................................................. 9.8 23.5 (1.0 - 2.4, 2.2 - 5.3) Page 9179 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1415 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5042 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2443 Repair Flow Chart Page 7019 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4 Page 14797 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 2084 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 829 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 11025 Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement Page 1914 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6191 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9242 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13123 - CAN communication is not active. - When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. - When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Ignition switch - Key switch - Hazard switch - Door lock/unlock switch - Front door switch (LH, RH) - Rear door switch (LH, RH) - Back door switch - Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) - Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) - Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) - Back door key cylinder switch - When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. - Status of combination switch reading function is changed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM". - Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE - Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP". - Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME". - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS". - Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM". - Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -". - Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". - Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER". Page 10768 NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number 205-D002 Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation (C200), or "Removal and Installation" (M226). CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 1781 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4975 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5 and 6 under the given conditions. 2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). Page 6729 - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Check Sheet Part 1 Description and Operation Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for engine control. Page 4946 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 12948 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5364 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 9649 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3136 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: By Symptom Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 7437 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 10248 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 7486 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3172 c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. 3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. 5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams (0.18 ounces) each or below. ^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures. Wheel balance (Maximum allowable imbalance) Components Page 4601 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6 Page 3401 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Garage Jack and Safety Stand Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand LIFTING POINT Garage Jack and Safety Stand CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. Page 13638 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9164 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11075 Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 10500 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Front Brakes 1. Replace the front brake pads and brake hardware using all of the parts in the hardware kit. ^ Make sure to use the new brake pads and new brake pad shims (included in the hardware kit). ^ Refer to section BR in the Service Manual (ESM) for brake pad replacement and brake service information. IMPORTANT: Page 6375 Page 14055 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4182 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 13467 CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat back trim. 2. Locate the recliner shaft and side link pins on the back of the seat. 3. Confirm the recliner shaft link slot and pin (inner and/or outer side) are misaligned. Page 4514 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 30 Page 2694 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 1775 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 6416 Page 9067 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8654 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14466 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 3708 REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains (secondary). Refer to EM-9, Timing Chain. 2. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe by evenly prying at base of shoe with suitable tool as shown. INSTALLATION 1. Install new secondary timing chain tensioner shoe using Tool (A) as shown - Tighten the bolt until the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe is fully seated on the secondary timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolt. Tool number : (J-50246) 2. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 7896 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 13942 3. Unwind the harness. 4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows: a. Press in on the lock tab. b. Slide the sender unit off. C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor. 5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order. Page 5965 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6104 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 8374 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8113 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9140 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5235 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13043 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Page 14770 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2577 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 4916 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 7882 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System Capacity (Approximate) With reservoir ...................................................................................................................................... .......................... 2 3/4 gal. (2 1/4 Imp gal, 10.2 L) Page 11188 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 10349 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 10302 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Page 11824 Page 7764 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Fuel Gauge: Customer Interest Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Classification: EL07-027D Reference: NTB07-069D Date: November 30, 2010 FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3 The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8 405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273 2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614 APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007* *IMPORTANT: Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are working on is instead covered under that Campaign. IF YOU CONFIRM: The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative. And/Or The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis. ACTIONS: Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION Page 12403 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8795 3. Unwind the harness. 4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows: a. Press in on the lock tab. b. Slide the sender unit off. C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor. 5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order. Page 2052 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14707 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 7383 Page 13138 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of BCM REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower knee protector. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH". 3. Remove screws and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: - When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-105, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System - NATS) - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT-12, "ID Registration Procedure". Page 8730 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 8078 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6321 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 1202 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 11164 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8720 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 11009 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 13787 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Locations Location of Electrical Parts A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Cowl Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9912 Location of Electrical Parts Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1832 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Front Wiper Arm: Adjustments Front ADJUSTMENT INSTALLATION 1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF" (auto stop). 2. Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set the blade center to clearance "L1" and "L2" immediately before tightening nut. 3. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF". 4. Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance "L1" and "L2". Clearance "L1": 24.5 - 39.5 mm (0.965 - 1.555 in) Clearance "L2": 23.5 - 38.5 mm (0.925 - 1.516 in) - Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. - Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque. Front wiper arm nuts: 23.6 Nm 2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb Page 1459 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6886 Case 8 Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4767 Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3826 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 11718 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 5969 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4670 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 8284 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2970 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Changing Engine Oil WARNING: ^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. ^ Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Warm up engine, put vehicle on flat and level surface then check for engine oil leakage from engine components. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE". 2. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 3. Loosen oil filler cap and then remove drain plug. 4. Drain engine oil. 5. Install drain plug with new washer. Refer to "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER". CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug: 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.) 6. Refill with new engine oil. Engine oil specification and viscosity: Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Engine oil capacity (Approximate) CAUTION: ^ When filling engine oil, do not pull out oil level gauge. ^ The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. ^ Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in engine. 7. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 8. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 9. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL". Page 486 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 9802 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12254 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 8630 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 13110 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 12537 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8955 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2828 a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper. b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry. c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer). d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour. 8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows: a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown. b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4. c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5. Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11299 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7998 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 11435 Page 1595 Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. 3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to "CLUTCH PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4829 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 815 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 7920 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4 Page 11201 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 615 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10622 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 10623 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 7453 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 8941 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. ABS Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Page 7957 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 11280 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 3672 Page EM-13 Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 11273 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 14250 Page 4685 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7085 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1426 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10445 Tool number 205-D002 Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation" (C200), or "Removal and Installation" (M226). CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 2925 Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection M226 With Electronic Lock Differential Checking Differential Gear Oil OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly or around it. Page 11661 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 7188 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12750 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 941 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 11079 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5013 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9834 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Page 1937 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4252 5. Operation mode - Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current- consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption. 1. CAN communication status - With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. - Control by BCM is being operated properly. - When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. - Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status - This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. - It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. - Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status - With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. - With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. - Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status - BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. Page 787 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7092 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2664 Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33) DETAILED PROCEDURE Page 13083 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 13609 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Impact Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS) housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 1319 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 995 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1) Page 11676 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6691 NOTE: There is a case that some of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" and "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" are not needed for diagnosis. In the case, "UNKWN" and "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" in "Check sheet results (example)" change to "-". Then, ignore check marks on the check sheet table. 4. Perform system diagnosis for possible causes identified. 5. Perform diagnosis again after inspection and repair. Make sure that repair is completely performed, and then end the procedure. Start CAN system trouble diagnosis if this procedure can be confirmed. Refer to "CAN Communication Unit". Page 11014 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 14262 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4501 Page 1928 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5075 EC-O2H2B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2H2B2 Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Page 7577 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 843 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Locations Page 9983 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair M226 With Electronic Locking Differential Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove the brake calipers and rotors. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". Page 2156 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 3768 b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt so that there is a 10 mm (0.39 in) gap between bolt and crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping. c. Pull crankshaft pulley with both hands to remove it. 19. Loosen two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in reverse order as shown. Page 819 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6504 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 72 Cooling Fan Motor The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as shown. The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under middle speed condition. Page 1792 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7559 Page 6258 Page 9722 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7232 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6561 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Replaced Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Page 10181 Location of Electrical Parts Page 6629 LAN-CAN-05 Page 10948 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 5322 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9423 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5522 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 10422 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS On-Vehicle Service Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II. BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. G Sensor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE". Page 2579 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 3660 Page EM-1 Page 2932 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair M226 With Electronic Lock Differential Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine. Page 7820 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 1612 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 14755 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1119 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 8480 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Description and Operation Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for engine control. Page 8984 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 14166 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE SWITCH Description Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. Page 14874 Windshield: Service and Repair WINDSHIELD GLASS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove inside mirror. 2. Partially remove the headlining (front edge). 3. Remove cowl top cover. 4. Apply a protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage. - If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. - Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION - Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. - Install parts removed. Page 14543 Vanity Lamp: Service and Repair Removal and Installation VANITY MIRROR LAMP Removal The vanity mirror lamp is replaced as part of the sunvisor assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14029 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1500 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 11553 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Page 7713 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9646 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 359 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 9228 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3489 Page 4797 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 3689 6. Install two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in numerical order as shown. Front oil pan bolts : 22.0 N-m (2.2kg-m, 16 ft-lb) 7. Install right and left intake valve timing control covers as follows: a. Install new seal rings in shaft grooves. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to intake valve timing control covers as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Tool number : WS39930000 c. Install new collared O-rings in front timing chain case oil hole (left and right sides). d. Being careful not to move seal ring from the installation groove, align dowel pins on front timing chain case with the holes to install intake valve timing control covers. e. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. 8. Install crankshaft pulley as follows: Page 143 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8424 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 11890 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 2307 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11817 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12390 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 8429 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5902 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Warning Light After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off. This light warns of low tire pressure. NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and Owner's Manual. The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound for about 10 seconds. Page 2414 IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: P/N 44003-7S000 is considered a shop supply. Do NOT include it on your Warranty Claim. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Insert a flat blade screw driver between the wind-up clip (not plastic cover) and the leaf springs to spread the wind up clip approximately 2 mm/ 1/16 inch. Caution: Do not insert screw driver blade between plastic clip cover and leaf spring. Insert the blade at the highest corner of the clip to avoid doing this. Page 4279 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1508 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4957 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 2983 The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate device. To use the leak detector properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance. 1. Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked as shown. 2. When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the probe as shown. 3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second as shown. CHECKING PROCEDURE NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed. 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports. Refer to "Precautions for Service Equipment". 3. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) above a temperature of 16 °C (61 °F). If less than specification, Page 5206 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 1010 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 338 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 14251 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 5276 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 541 Page 6464 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 10468 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Removal and Installation COMPONENTS REMOVAL WARNING: Do not deform the brake tube. CAUTION: ^ Do not disassemble the brake pedal assembly. ^ Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling. ^ Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water. 1. Remove the lower driver instrument panel. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH". 2. Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch from the pedal assembly. 3. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the clevis of the brake booster. 4. Remove the pedal assembly. ^ Temporarily install the nuts by hand to support the booster. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Page 5577 Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9) Page 6943 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) TCM Circuit Inspection Page 14689 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 2695 Service and Repair Carpet: Service and Repair FLOOR TRIM Removal and Installation REMOVAL Front Carpet 1. Remove front seats. Refer to "FRONT SEAT". 2. Remove lower seat belt anchors. Refer to "SEAT BELTS". 3. Remove lower body side trim panels. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 4. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE". 5. Remove floor mat hook from front carpet. 6. Remove front carpet. Rear Carpet 1. Remove luggage side lower finisher LH/RH. 2. Remove back door kick plate. 3. Remove cargo floor rails, luggage floor cover and storage tray. 4. Remove the rear seats. Refer to "REAR SEAT". 5. Remove the rear carpet. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11509 Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8401 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 9412 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1120 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2892 Disclaimer Page 8884 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 2295 Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR Component Description The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And Charging. CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then the battery discharge may occur. Page 6396 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 5039 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8114 Page 5581 Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24) Diagram Information and Instructions Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13795 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1303 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 3514 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 11495 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13711 EC-ASCBOF-01 Page 14654 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3633 Page EM-6 Page 6623 CAN System (Type 11) Schematic Page 8938 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6902 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 624 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6692 Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced 1. See "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of all units attached to the check sheet. If "CAN COMM CIRCUIT", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" or "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1001]" is displayed, put a check mark to the applicable column of self-diagnostic results of the check sheet table. NOTE: For "ENGINE", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1001]" are displayed. Put a check mark to it. - For "A/T", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it. - For "BCM", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it. - For "METER", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it. - For "ALL MODE AWD/4WD", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it. - For "ABS", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it. - For "IPDM E/R", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it. Page 13771 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ASCD STEERING SWITCH 1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable). 2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 17 and 18 with pushing each switch. Locations Page 7502 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1 Page 8498 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8276 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4549 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 6540 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 6921 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 7099 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 14566 Page 6835 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 9394 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9776 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 11501 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5105 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Diagram Information and Instructions Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10602 Brake Drum: Specifications REAR DRUM BRAKE BRAKES / GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Page 14405 Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 4 - 5) Page 5487 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 2492 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5399 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 12600 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 13113 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2912 Fluids and Lubricants Oil" capacity. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". 2. After refilling the oil, check oil level. Set a gasket to the filler plug, then install it to the transmission. Tighten the filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to "Case Components". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Service and Repair Sound Proofing / Insulation: Service and Repair Foam Repair During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators. URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read instructions on product for fill procedures. FILL PROCEDURES 1. Fill procedures after installation of service part. - Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. - Clean area in which foam was removed. - Install service part. - Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the service part. 2. Fill procedures before installation of service part. - Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. - Clean area in which foam was removed. - Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side. NOTE: Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange area. - Install service part. NOTE: Refer to label for information on working times. Page 12955 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6196 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12529 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2951 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Page 7479 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 13505 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 10068 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY Journal 1. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft and flange yoke as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft or flange yoke. 2. Remove the snap rings. 3. Push out and remove the journal bearings by lightly tapping the flange yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or flange yoke hole. NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed. 4. Push out and remove the remaining journal bearings at the opposite side by lightly tapping the flange yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or flange yoke hole. Page 6721 Case 9 Case 10 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 11451 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9081 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6111 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7434 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8921 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 11180 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Page 1552 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 13785 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5375 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4016 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 1273 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation For details, refer to "SPIRAL CABLE". Page 12137 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear C200 Removal and Installation The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. M226 Removal and Installation The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/M226 CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 11137 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13864 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7499 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Preliminary Check Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Classification: EL07-027D Reference: NTB07-069D Date: November 30, 2010 FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3 The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8 405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273 2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614 APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007* *IMPORTANT: Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are working on is instead covered under that Campaign. IF YOU CONFIRM: The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative. And/Or The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis. ACTIONS: Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION Page 6414 Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 14246 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13087 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5532 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9439 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 2656 Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5) Page 2786 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 14769 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Locations Electronic Throttle Actuator: Locations Page 622 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 1593 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6336 VDC/TCS/ABS Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 6600 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4584 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 5137 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6969 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 11378 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8974 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 14014 7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: ^ Use a new seal (0-Ring). ^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6. 8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows: a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders. b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly. Page 13790 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7234 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3905 Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5) Page 10209 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 10388 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 13234 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 13677 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1315 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5463 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3793 REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains (secondary). Refer to EM-9, Timing Chain. 2. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe by evenly prying at base of shoe with suitable tool as shown. INSTALLATION 1. Install new secondary timing chain tensioner shoe using Tool (A) as shown - Tighten the bolt until the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe is fully seated on the secondary timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolt. Tool number : (J-50246) 2. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3761 24. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from water pump cover, chain tensioner cover and intake valve timing control covers. INSTALLATION 1. Hammer dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in order to shorten protrusion length. 2. Install new front oil seal on the front timing chain case. ^ Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip. ^ Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. ^ Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with front timing chain case end face using suitable drift [outer diameter: 60 mm (2.36 inch)]. ^ Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted. Page 14828 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 7863 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5 and 6 under the given conditions. 2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). Page 7454 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 1499 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3038 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 11401 4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 1723 CAUTION: - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 Ohms at 25 °C (77 °F) Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6. Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: - Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Page 6511 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5 Page 9240 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9185 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10182 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 2041 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5011 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 12378 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6478 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8548 Page 9022 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13633 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Page 168 Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Page 6852 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 5) Page 471 Attachment General Procedure Page 1361 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4146 The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs. NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair. 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following: ^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube. ^ Separated/missing band clamp(s). ^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4). 3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040 inch) space. ^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair. 4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed. Page 6938 Case 11 Page 11673 Page 13527 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Testing and Inspection Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 7981 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6836 Case 1 Page 8079 Page 141 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1024 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3242 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8754 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability. NOTE: - Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because N50 models do not have fuel return system. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to "INTAKE MANIFOLD". - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. - Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. - During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) 7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 4368 Page 10901 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13882 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4888 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5916 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12492 Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Components Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to "Discharging Refrigerant". 2. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT". 3. Disconnect the battery negative and positive terminals. Page 5396 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 11534 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 8588 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3060 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift 2-Pole Lift WARNING: - When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. - When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines. Page 9007 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 2699 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. Page 1040 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6096 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4467 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 11397 Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Page 269 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 1214 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6569 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4878 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Page 940 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5603 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 6883 Case 5 Page 14749 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 640 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7 Page 5663 ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 5 cylinder at compression TDC 3. For the measured value out of the standard, perform adjustment. Refer to EM-86, "ADJUSTMENT". See: Adjustments Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a) Capacity .......................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. 0.70 kg (1.54 lb) Page 9830 Valve Body: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 5141 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 2098 Page 638 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5 Page 5552 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 8183 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6674 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Input/output signal chart TYPE 6/TYPE 7 Page 6112 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 8204 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1975 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5236 Page 2308 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 234 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 8912 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 8129 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 1128 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5489 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 142 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Specifications Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 8227 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6722 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer Page 2158 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) 10.3L (10 7/8 qt. US, 9 1/8 qt. Imp) Diagram Information and Instructions Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12622 Part 2 SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) For Side Collision Check the SRS components using the given table. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION 1. Replace the following components: - Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated) - Diagnosis sensor unit - (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated) 2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the given table. - Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation). 3. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION 1. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the given table. - If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. 2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Part 1 Page 10574 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 8675 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1572 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 5014 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 14564 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8716 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8573 Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14) Page 1338 EC-APPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS3 Page 5838 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9454 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 583 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 4265 6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation". 7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. 8. Touch "YES". For canceling, touch "NO". 9. Using the given flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item according to the configuration list. Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the CONSULT-II "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be manually set or changed. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation". 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. Page 476 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 2543 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 959 Page 6319 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 7735 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5397 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7102 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1099 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Intake Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Engine Control Component Parts Location Power Distribution Module: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1807 EC-TPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS3 Page 14838 SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). - Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Page 7774 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 833 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 12764 Page 9024 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5579 Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18) Page 9275 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7509 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8 Page 7190 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4424 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 13656 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13419 11. Install an 1/8 inch short steel blind rivet (Marson Klik-Fast (5B4-2) 1/8" diameter 1/8" grip Steel or equivalent) in the 4 holes drilled in Steps 7, 8 and 9. 12. Reassemble the seat base, install the seat in the vehicle, attach the battery cables (negative cable last), and reset the radio stations. Disclaimer Page 12513 8. Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant at this time. Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor. Page 9503 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 2855 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove oil filter access in undercover. 2. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: ^ Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN Oil Filter or equivalent. ^ Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil may be hot. ^ When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage. ^ Do not allow engine oil to adhere to drive belts. ^ Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine and vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. Remove foreign materials adhering to oil filter installation surface. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of new oil filter. 3. Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification. Oil filter: 17.7 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft. lbs.) INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL". 2. Start engine, and check there are no leaks of engine oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL". Page 2684 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 908 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Classification: EC04-025 Reference: NTB04-126 Date: October 29, 2004 MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284 IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor) ^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor) ACTIONS: 1. Repair the vehicle as necessary. ^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information. 2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning. IMPORTANT: If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared: ^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists. ^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair). CLAIMS INFORMATION The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a separate repair item. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284). ^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle. ^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information. Page 247 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Locations Power Distribution Relay: Locations Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement Page 14077 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6584 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3819 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6856 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 404 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 9061 Page 8167 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 5794 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9721 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 8200 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11149 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 315 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1883 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6854 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 10) IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Page 3758 13. Remove collared O-rings from front timing chain case (left and right side). 14. Remove rocker covers (right and left banks). NOTE: When only timing chain (primary) is removed, rocker cover does not need to be removed. 15. Obtain No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke as follows: NOTE: When timing chain is not removed/installed, this step is not required. a. Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. b. Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank) are located as shown. If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown. NOTE: When only timing chain (primary) is removed, rocker cover does not need to be removed. To make sure that No. 1 cylinder is at its compression TDC, remove front timing chain case first. Then check mating marks on camshaft sprockets. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 16. Remove crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Remove starter motor and set Tool. Tool number KV10117700 (J-44716) Page 4820 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4593 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 14684 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 3774 6. Install two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in numerical order as shown. Front oil pan bolts : 22.0 N-m (2.2kg-m, 16 ft-lb) 7. Install right and left intake valve timing control covers as follows: a. Install new seal rings in shaft grooves. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to intake valve timing control covers as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Tool number : WS39930000 c. Install new collared O-rings in front timing chain case oil hole (left and right sides). d. Being careful not to move seal ring from the installation groove, align dowel pins on front timing chain case with the holes to install intake valve timing control covers. e. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. 8. Install crankshaft pulley as follows: Page 8261 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13358 3. Disconnect the 2 actuator connectors. (Power mirror only) ^ Connectors are gray and black and are labeled on the actuator. 4. Install the new actuator in the reverse order of removal. 5. Install the mirror A. At the top of the mirror, insert the holder slides (hooks) into the grooved cutouts in the actuator. NOTE: If it is a heated mirror, make sure to connect the 2 electric terminals to glass. B. Then fold the glass DOWN against the actuator. Page 6859 Case 3 Page 2597 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 1018 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5799 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 14329 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4325 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 7993 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 897 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II. BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 1911 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 6864 Case 8 Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb Page 13593 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2328 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 14362 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 667 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 1744 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14780 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 886 Tool number 205-D002 Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation" (C200), or "Removal and Installation" (M226). CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 1906 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1918 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1506 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 459 Page 4426 Page 9702 2. Install transfer to transmission (4WD models). 3. Install rear propeller shaft. 4. Check the A/T fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to "Checking the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". Page 5475 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 470 Page 1186 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14450 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11095 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Fuel Gauge: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Classification: EL07-027D Reference: NTB07-069D Date: November 30, 2010 FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3 The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8 405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273 2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614 APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007* *IMPORTANT: Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are working on is instead covered under that Campaign. IF YOU CONFIRM: The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative. And/Or The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis. ACTIONS: Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION Page 10403 Page 1405 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10257 Page 13607 EC-ASCBOF-01 Page 11382 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9843 shown. First step: 15 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) Final step: 25 Nm (2.6 kg-m, 19 ft. lbs.) Tool number: ST20630000 (J-26366) 3. Install the manual transmission. Refer to "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD models)" or "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD models)". Page 2428 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 4595 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 1804 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 8400 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1559 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3892 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 1786 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1364 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2061 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13513 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 8836 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8595 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Balancing Wheels Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Wheels Balancing Wheels REMOVAL 1. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. ^ After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. 1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ^ Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed. Calculation example: 23 grams (0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ^ Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. ^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. ^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights. CAN System (Type 1) Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2140 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5308 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 14703 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6481 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 9241 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Engine Compartment Electrical Units Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 1714 EC-AF1HB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2H2B1 Diagnostic Aids Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3210 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack LIFTING POINT Pantograph Jack WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. Page 403 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 5991 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13760 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9862 Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY ^ Remove the dust cover, push rod and piston assembly from the cylinder body. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Inspect for the following, replace parts as necessary. ^ Damage, foreign material, wear, corrosion, and pinholes on the cylinder inner surface, piston, and sliding part of piston cup ^ Weak spring ^ Cracked or deformed dust cover ASSEMBLY 1. Apply rubber lubricant to the cylinder body inner surface and rubber grease to the piston cup and piston. 2. Insert the piston assembly and piston spring into the cylinder body. 3. Apply rubber grease to the dust cover and install the push rod and dust cover. Page 221 Page 595 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5337 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5366 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9392 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6508 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2 Page 7650 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4260 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SET". 6. The setting will be changed and "RESETTING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END". Display Item List Page 7799 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1263 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9111 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7562 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9131 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 9961 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately. Page 14757 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14342 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 1496 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5725 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 10478 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 8064 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 9052 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 502 Page 8361 5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3. ^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail. 6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown. 7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows: Page 2014 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9724 Page 12259 Wheels: Service and Repair Balancing Wheels REMOVAL 1. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. ^ After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. 1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ^ Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed. Calculation example: 23 grams (0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ^ Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. ^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. ^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights. Page 12071 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Locations Page 3639 Page EM-12 Page 6907 Case 5 Page 6711 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Page 8046 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9408 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9985 CAUTION: Do not damage axle housing. INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the new oil seal lips, and gear oil onto the circumference of the new oil seal. Install the new front oil seal into the axle housing using Tool. Tool number: ST15310000 CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse oil seal. ^ Do not incline oil seal when installing. ^ Apply multi-purpose grease onto oil seal lips, and gear oil onto the circumference of oil seal. 2. Align the matching mark of the drive pinion with the matching mark B of the companion flange, then install the companion flange. 3. Install the new washer (if required), and new drive pinion nut. Tighten the nut until there is zero bearing end play using Tool. Tool number: KV40104000 CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer. 4. Rotate the drive pinion using Tool. Rotating torque should be equal to the reading recorded in step 4 above during removal plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 inch lbs.). Page 9806 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 14607 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2815 a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper. b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry. c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer). d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour. 8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows: a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown. b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4. c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5. Page 6795 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 3044 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4735 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13802 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 296 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 852 Door Switch Check (Step 4) Page 13820 When the ignition switch is turned ON with the driver seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened), warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds. Ground is supplied - to combination meter terminal 24 - through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1. Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B19. The combination meter sends seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal to BCM via CAN communication line. BCM receives seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal from combination meter via CAN communication line, and sends seat belt warning signal to the combination meter via CAN communication line. When the combination meter receives the seat belt warning signal, it sounds the warning chime. The BCM controls the (6 second) duration of the seat belt warning chime. CAN Communication System Description Refer to Information Bus. Page 5754 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 121 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 5163 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 14217 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 9635 Refer to the figure for air breather hose removal and installation procedure. CAUTION: ^ When installing an air breather hose, do not to crush or block by folding or bending the hose. ^ When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the tube bend portion. Page 318 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 12825 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Connect C-III to the vehicle. 3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs. a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode. b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST]. ^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function. ^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure. ^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this bulletin. NOTE: All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with this procedure. 4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle. 5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds. Page 6110 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4) Page 5405 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 9219 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10848 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7743 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11178 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION - In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license, front fog, and parking lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-29, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom/Symptom Diagnostic Procedures/Door Switch Check INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps activate in order. These six steps cycle three times before the auto active test automatically terminates. 1. Rear window defogger on for 10 seconds. 2. Front wipers operate on low speed for 5 seconds then on high speed for 5 seconds. 3. License, tail, parking and fog lamps on for 10 seconds. 4. Headlamps on low for 10 seconds then high beams turn on and off 5 times. 5. A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) cycles on and off 5 times. 6. Cooling fan operates on low speed for 5 seconds then on high speed for 5 seconds. Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Page 11205 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1349 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9509 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Page 5292 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13580 Page 4298 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Diagram Information and Instructions Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7878 Page 2013 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 9405 Optional Splice Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 14465 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10891 Page 6572 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10509 2. Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the front brake pad retainers in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer. 3. Reinstall the brake calipers in reverse order. Page 10381 Page 12959 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". - Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Page 8887 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 13762 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 10988 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 274 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6441 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 2767 Page 1683 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 12970 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4156 The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs. NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair. 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following: ^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube. ^ Separated/missing band clamp(s). ^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4). 3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040 inch) space. ^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair. 4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed. Page 14717 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 9127 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7763 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 6032 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 11988 Repair Overview SERVICE PROCEDURE Lower Link Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower links. ^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below. ^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links. ^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links. 3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below. Page 8901 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4521 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 9267 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2588 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 7804 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 7329 Disclaimer Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open Side Air Bag: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open Classification: RS05-006 Reference: NTB06-046 Date: June 13, 2006 2005 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; DRIVER'S SEAT SIDE AIR BAG OPEN CIRCUIT (DTC B1134) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) 2005 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM An "open circuit" DTC code (SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] /B1134) is stored in the SRS control unit, and The connector for the driver's seat side impact air bag module is disconnected (either completely or partially, NOTE: If CONSULT-II shown the above code (B1134), and the driver's seat side air bag connector is not disconnected, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ACTION Change the location of the driver's seat side impact air bag connector by installing the kit listed in the Parts Information. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1762 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Page 6730 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 6747 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 10) IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Page 14069 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1826 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8033 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Service and Repair Shift Linkage: Service and Repair SHIFT CONTROL Removal and Installation COMPONENTS REMOVAL 1. Remove the shift knob. 2. Remove the M/T finisher. Refer to "M/T FINISHER". 3. Remove the retaining plate and dust boot covers. 4. Remove the clip (B) and then separate the boot from the control housing. 5. Remove the guide plate bolts and then separate the guide plate. 6. Remove the shift lever assembly and spring from the transmission. INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ^ Apply multi-purpose grease to the socket and bushing. ^ Do not reuse clip. ^ Apply cement to threads of the shift lever assembly. ^ Tighten guide plate bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". Page 8729 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 2509 11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 7790 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14059 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9318 Optional Splice Part 1 Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling.......................................................................................................................... ..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) Page 4080 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5058 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 14777 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 5331 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Component Tests and General Diagnostics Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT EC-MAIN-01 Page 11769 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Leakage Checking Fluid Leakage Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. 1. Run the engine until the fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F) in the reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle. CAUTION: Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank frequently and add fluid as needed. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the right and left several times. 3. Hold the steering wheel at each locked position for five seconds to check for fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that the oil pump may be damaged.) 4. If fluid leakage at a connection is noticed, loosen the connection and then retighten. Do not over-tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. Refer to "POWER STEERING OIL PUMP" and "HYDRAULIC LINE". 5. If fluid leakage from the oil pump is noticed, check the oil pump. Refer to "POWER STEERING OIL PUMP". 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid, indicating a leak from the steering gear. CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers. Page 14058 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6151 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Classification: WT04-010 Reference: NTB05-003 Date: January 12, 2005 NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers) to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven. Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires. If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied, consider the following: 1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings. 2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires grooves/treads. 3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely. Disclaimer Page 7258 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6350 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 13592 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 13697 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 295 ITEMS OF EACH PART With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 6830 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Page 1671 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3779 c. Remove timing chain (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets. - Turn camshaft slightly to secure slack of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side. - Insert 0.5 mm (0.020 in)-thick metal or resin plate between timing chain and timing chain tensioner plunger (guide). Remove timing chain (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets with timing chain loose from guide groove. CAUTION: Be careful of plunger coming off when removing timing chain (secondary). NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design with sprockets for timing chain (primary) and for timing chain (secondary). Page 8745 b. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached. ^ Insert it while matching it to the axial center. ^ Insert fuel injector so that protrusion "B" of fuel tube matches cutout "B" of clip. ^ Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip. c. Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off. ^ Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation. 4. Connect fuel tube (RH) to fuel tube (LH), and tighten bolts temporarily. ^ Tighten bolts with the specified torque after installing fuel tube and fuel injector assembly. CAUTION: ^ Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves. ^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. ^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent. ^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. ^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly into fuel tube. ^ Insert new O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not twist it. 5. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold. CAUTION: Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts. ^ Tighten bolts in two steps in numerical order as shown. Fuel injector tube assembly bolts 1st step: 10.1 Nm (1.0 kg-m, 7 ft. lbs.) 2nd step: 22.0 Nm (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft. lbs.) 6. Tighten bolts which connects fuel tube (RH) and fuel tube (LH) with the specified torque. 7. Connect fuel injector harness connector. 8. Install intake manifold collector. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 9. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check on Fuel Leakage 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking at points out of clear sight. 2. Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopped, as engine becomes extremely hot. Page 14583 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12380 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2149 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11015 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 10283 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate Page 12018 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13758 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3691 1. Internal chain guide 2. O-ring 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Slack guide 10. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (LH) 13. O-ring 14. Tension guide Removal and Installation CAUTION: - After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. - When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. - Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft pulley. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the rocker covers or intake manifold collector to remove or install the timing chain(s). REMOVAL Page 3857 Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5) Page 6825 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Diagram Information and Instructions Neutral Safety Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6200 Page 5994 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 4813 Page 3204 Towing Information: Service and Repair TOW TRUCK TOWING Tow Truck Towing WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. CAUTION: - All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation must be obeyed. - It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. - Always attach safety chains before towing. - When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and powertrain are in good order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. - Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. 2WD MODEL NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive wheels on the ground. CAUTION: - When towing with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and move the transmission selector lever to N (neutral) position, turn the ignition key to OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. Page 14516 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 3671 Page EM-12 Page 2494 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 13314 NOTE: Use an assistant to steady the headlining while lowering from roof. - Remove clips from center of headlining. - Remove clips from rear of headlining. - Disconnect rear washer tube at front connection, allow to drain. - Disconnect harnesses and rear washer tube rear connections. - Thread seat belt escutcheon through cutout in headlining. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11847 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 7690 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 10099 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 14741 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Locations Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 11104 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 11141 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 5070 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4702 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation Page 9217 Page 6633 LAN-CAN-09 CAN System (Type 3) Page 6636 LAN-CAN-12 CAN System (Type 4) Page 2770 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 14641 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 2275 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7191 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 2072 EC-TPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Diagram Information and Instructions Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9395 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4305 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 7313 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 5106 Page 5126 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions. Page 14773 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 13770 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. Page 6187 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8281 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6075 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6206 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 10331 Page 6213 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5584 Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33) DETAILED PROCEDURE Page 6802 Case 7 Page 817 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11538 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 2578 Page 13163 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 2380 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7086 Page 2322 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 10686 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Vacuum Lines Removal and Installation Brake Booster Vacuum Hose 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from hose clip. 2. Release clamps and disconnect vacuum hose. 3. Remove check valve from brake booster. 4. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ^ Insert vacuum hose for at least 24 mm (0.94 inch). ^ Do not use lubricating oil during assembly. Inspection VISUAL INSPECTION Check for improper assembly, damage and deterioration. CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Airtightness Inspection Page 4218 Page 13735 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 7377 Page 1325 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 10250 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14742 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5806 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5406 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5067 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 264 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13189 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Components Page 10364 11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 3908 Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18) Page 2657 Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9) Page 2792 Drive Belt: Adjustments DRIVE BELT TENSION There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted by the drive belt auto-tensioner. Page 6517 Engine Control Module: Electrical Diagrams Additional Diagrams Additional related diagrams can also be found at the vehicle level Diagrams By Diagram Name EC Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-ECM/PW EC-ECM/PW-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 10427 Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off. Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1177 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL Page 3470 9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab. 10. Install the bracket on the frame rail. NOTE: The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in. 11. Torque the bolt to: 11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb) NOTE: Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt. Page 8022 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9379 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13558 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 12401 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5152 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 920 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10216 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transmission Gear Oil Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 4 1/4 qt (3.98L) Page 4076 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Page 377 Page 10739 Repair Flow Chart Page 10034 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base) Page 2091 Page 10687 Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster side of check valve. Check valve specification: Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inch Hg) for 15 seconds under a vacuum of - 66.7 kPa (- 500 mmHg, - 19.69 inch Hg) Page 1483 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 2473 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11531 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Page 8725 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7459 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6541 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 11684 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7664 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 7855 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3893 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 12610 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 14813 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 13825 Audible Warning Device: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Strategies How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. 2. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to "System Description". 3. Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-45, "Preliminary Check". See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 4. Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. 5. Does the warning chime operate properly? If so, go to 6. If not, go to 3. 6. Inspection End. All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate Page 6494 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Specifications Page 5355 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7672 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8821 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4254 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description Refer to INFORMATION BUS". Page 6605 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 3712 b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface as 10 mm (0.39 inch) from its original position. CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place protect removed crankshaft pulley from dropping. c. Pull crankshaft pulley with both hands to remove it. 17. Loosen two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in reverse order as shown. 18. Remove front timing chain case as follows: a. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown. b. Insert suitable tool into the notch at the top of the front timing chain case as shown (1). c. Pry off case by moving tool as shown (2). ^ Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Do not use screwdriver or something similar. ^ After removal, handle front timing chain case carefully so it does not tilt, cant, or warp under a load. Page 11067 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6058 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9870 3. Adjust clearance "C" while depressing clutch pedal fully. (With clutch interlock switch) Clearance C: 0.1 - 1.0 mm (0.004 - 0.039 inch) 4. Check clutch hydraulic and system components (clutch master cylinder, clutch operating cylinder, clutch withdrawal lever and clutch release bearing) for sticking or binding. a. If any sticking or binding noted, repair or replace related parts as necessary. b. If hydraulic system repair was necessary, bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to "Bleeding". NOTE: Do not use a vacuum assist or any other type of power bleeder on this system. Use of a vacuum assist or power bleeder will not purge all the air from the system. Page 7134 Page 12717 SRS Components Parts Location Page 14386 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5342 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 6285 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 5253 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 14669 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1649 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13944 7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: ^ Use a new seal (0-Ring). ^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6. 8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows: a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders. b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly. Page 6276 Page 4694 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 6. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 7. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 8. Remove the bolts and the glass. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) - Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Rear Door Glass Regulator REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. for manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. Page 13687 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13378 Page 6440 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 11182 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. 3. Touch "START". Page 10872 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 6719 Case 6 Page 12236 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 12234 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 9227 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7654 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12790 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 7256 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 13705 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 12398 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 400 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 9833 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Page 14609 Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6344 Attachment General Procedure Page 4691 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 13095 Page 12480 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 5550 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1158 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. 2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector. Page 4592 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 13788 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 6997 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 3147 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 5797 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8053 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3444 5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1. ^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6. ^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12. 6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool. 7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See Figure 2. Page 1567 Page 6799 Case 4 Page 4744 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 12715 5. Install the new connector holder in the holes you just drilled. ^ A new connector holder is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information. ^ Position the connector holder as shown in Figure 3 and snap it in place. 6. Unsnap the side air bag connector from its original location and snap it into the new connector holder as shown in Figure 4. ^ Remove and discard the old connector holder. ^ Leave the buckle connector in the same location (don't move it). 7. Install the edge guard as shown in Figure 4. ^ Edge Guard is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information. 8. Re-connect the battery cables; positive cable first. 9. Re-set the radio station presets. Page 11386 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 13591 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 9016 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14783 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8070 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14722 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14627 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 13451 4. Remove the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube. 5. Apply thread locker to each of the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube. 6. Reinstall the synchronization tube using the screws with thread locker applied. Torque screws to: Page 8169 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 12875 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 1250 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4150 WARNING: Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp. 7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair. Page 5139 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 10446 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS Wheel Sensor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". ^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly Page 12043 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. 2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as given. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step. 3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. 4. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed. Page 841 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Locations Power Distribution Relay: Locations Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement Page 11778 10. Install new bolts (see PARTS INFORMATION) into the holes from the backside (see Figure 7). 11. Install the new oil cooler, placing the existing and added brackets onto their studs and bolts. 12. Install and then torque the nuts on the existing studs. 13. Install and then torque the new nuts on the bolts. ^ Nuts torque: 6.5 Nm (0.66 kg-m, 57.5 in lb) ^ Hold the bolts with a wrench while torquing the nuts. 14. Install the power steering hoses to both ends of the oil cooler. ^ Make sure to leave the upper bracket in place (see Figure 1). 15. Complete installation of the oil cooler. 16. Air bleed the power steering system as needed. ^ Refer to the G>STEERING section of the ESM, if needed. Page 8370 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 215 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 2779 15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield. 16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved. Page 13015 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 235 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 6219 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. Page 516 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 12654 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 8614 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 8882 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12987 Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation System Description Power is supplied at all times - to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and - through 50 A fusible link (letter g, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and - through 20 A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R) - to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R, and - to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R) - to IPDM E/R terminal 61 - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 3, and - through 30 A fusible link (letter m, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to trailer tow relay 2 terminals 3 and 6, and - through 30 A fusible link (letter h, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 5. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied - to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and - through 10 A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to BCM terminal 38, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R) - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1 and - to backup lamp relay terminal 3 (with M/T). Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 67 and - to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1 - through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and - to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 2 - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 2 - to trailer connector terminal 2 and - to backup lamp relay terminal 1 (with M/T) - through grounds E9, E15 and E24. TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow relay 1. With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied from the tail lamp relay - through 10 A fuse (No. 37, located in the IPDM E/R) - through IPDM E/R terminal 29 - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 1. When energized, trailer tow relay 1 tail lamp power is supplied - through trailer tow relay 1 terminal 5 - to trailer connector terminal 4. TRAILER STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION The trailer stop, turn signal and hazard lamps are controlled by the BCM. If either turn signal or the hazard lamps are turned on, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer lamps to make them flash. If the BCM receives stop lamp switch signal, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer lamps to make them illuminate. Left stop, turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied - to trailer connector terminal 3 - through BCM terminal 52. Right stop, turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied - to trailer connector terminal 6 - through BCM terminal 51. Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 1650 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5580 Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20) Page 10995 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4454 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 8536 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 7674 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 13682 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8717 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 5271 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 6866 Case 10 Case 11 Page 7975 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 7252 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10805 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 10212 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2229 6. Turn the ignition OFF. 7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows: The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment. ^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON). ^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed. ^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the sensor is completely installed. ^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing. 8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2). 9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3. ^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused. 10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover. Page 7659 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3694 c. Remove timing chain (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets. - Turn camshaft slightly to secure slack of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side. - Insert 0.5 mm (0.020 in)-thick metal or resin plate between timing chain and timing chain tensioner plunger (guide). Remove timing chain (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets with timing chain loose from guide groove. CAUTION: Be careful of plunger coming off when removing timing chain (secondary). NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design with sprockets for timing chain (primary) and for timing chain (secondary). Page 7950 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1141 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH The illumination control switch is a function of the combination meter, and not serviced separately. For replacement, refer to "COMBINATION METER". Page 10931 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 11360 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 5722 Optional Splice Part 1 LAN System Component Parts Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13016 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4650 Spark should be generated. CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. - It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. 17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. CONDENSER-1 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance............................................................................................................................................ ....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F) Page 11383 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 3829 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6781 Case 10 Case 11 Page 10389 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 5861 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 1306 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 12653 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 6846 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 14535 Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement (Rear Turn Signal Lamp) Bulb Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear combination lamp. 2. Rotate each bulb socket (1, 2, 3) counterclockwise to unlock it. 3. Pull bulb straight out away from socket to release. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 12399 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8563 Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28) Page 2556 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11210 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14340 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 14899 Page 11073 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1467 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 14876 CAUTION: - Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully Page 2483 Page 7924 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9029 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6333 Page 9243 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4494 Page 13635 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9440 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 3343 ^ If the measured value exceeds the limit, or if there are scratches and/or seizure on the cylinder inner wall, hone or re-bore the inner wall. ^ Oversize piston is provided. When using oversize piston, rebore cylinder so that the clearance of the piston-to-cylinder bore satisfies the standard. CAUTION: When using oversize piston, use oversize pistons for all cylinders with oversize piston rings. Oversize(OS): 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) Piston Skirt Diameter Measure the outer diameter of piston skirt with micrometer. Measure point: Distance from the top 43.03 mm (1.6941 inch) Standard: 95.480 - 95.510 mm (3.7590 - 3.7602 inch) Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance Calculate by piston skirt diameter and cylinder bore inner diameter (direction "X", position "B"). (Clearance) = (Cylinder bore inner diameter) - (Piston skirt diameter). Standard: 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 inch) Limit: 0.08 mm (0.0031 inch) If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace piston and piston pin assembly. Refer to "HOW TO SELECT PISTON". Re-boring Cylinder Bore 1. Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston to cylinder bore clearance to piston skirt diameter. Re-bored size calculation: D = A + B - C where, D: Bored diameter A: Piston skirt diameter as measured B: Piston to cylinder bore clearance (standard value) C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) 2. Install lower cylinder block, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted in final assembly. 3. Cut cylinder bores. NOTE: ^ When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored. ^ Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at a time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) or so in diameter at a time. 4. Hone cylinders to obtain the specified piston to cylinder bore clearance. 5. Measure finished the cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper. NOTE: Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down. PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN Page 6912 Case 10 Page 14666 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 3835 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1414 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3947 10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. 11. Start the engine, and check for unusual noise and vibration. Locations Page 1037 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6873 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 1646 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-004D Reference: NTB05-099D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2011 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2011 Frontier (D40) APPLIED DATE Vehicles built on or after August 15, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Page 197 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12376 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1522 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 7506 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5 Page 271 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 14395 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 12361 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch REMOVAL 1. Remove the compressor. Refer to "Removal and Installation for Compressor". 2. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary using Tool as shown. Tool number: J-44614 3. Remove the clutch disc. 4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable tool. Page 5363 Page 13392 Procedure shown here is for side rail decals. Use similar steps for air dam decal. 1. Bring the vehicle to room temperature (approximately 70°F / 21°C). 2. Mark the side rails with a pencil on the left and right corners of the damaged decal (see Figure 1). ^ This will help you align the new label on the side rail when installing it. 3. Remove the roof rack center cross members (see Figure 2). Damaged Decal Removal: 4. Remove the damaged decal as follows: Page 1222 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Switch STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. 3. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 2 again. Page 331 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 9581 Page 4823 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8445 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12260 c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. 3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. 5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams (0.18 ounces) each or below. ^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures. Wheel balance (Maximum allowable imbalance) Page 9330 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5036 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 136 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 626 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11223 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 8178 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6785 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) TCM Circuit Inspection Page 11153 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 6241 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 1720 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 element at the specified range. A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygenpump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement Lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide Lambda range (0.7 < Lambda < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at Lambda = 1. Therefore, the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 °C (1,292 - 1,472 °F). Page 4772 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 14415 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7645 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8853 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Replaced Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Page 7340 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 7259 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. Page 7643 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 186 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 8029 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 8663 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9365 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4462 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 1738 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10944 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11156 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6755 Case 6 Page 10632 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. 4. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. - Do not reuse piston seal. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert seal into groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. 2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston boot. Cover the piston end with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot securely into a groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. Page 12908 Disclaimer Page 9906 2. Disconnect the parking brake cable and brake tube from the carrier cover. 3. Remove the carrier cover bolts. Then separate the carrier cover from the axle housing using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 2. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Connect the brake tube and parking brake cable to the carrier cover and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to PB-4, "Components". See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair 4. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug hole. Refer to "Checking Differential Gear Oil". Page 880 Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off. Page 9376 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14389 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6805 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection Page 6296 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 4009 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Diagram Information and Instructions Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12115 4. Remove the shock absorber lower bolt and nut using power tool. 5. Remove the three shock absorber upper mounting nuts using power tool. 6. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly. ^ Turn steering knuckle out to gain enough clearance for removal. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ The step in the strut assembly lower seat faces outside of vehicle. ^ Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to "Components". ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". Removal and Installation Page 2493 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7871 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11496 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11547 Repair Flow Chart Page 12396 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 8560 Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18) Page 13941 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. 2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector. Page 13104 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4386 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 664 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 14694 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7662 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 14621 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4388 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 5792 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2175 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6833 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 10) IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Page 6956 DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR IPDM E/R Page 6900 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 14) IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Page 1416 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 14511 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 994 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10) Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11) Page 6673 System Diagram System diagram Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Page 6752 Case 3 Page 10325 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7015 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 9410 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5143 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14365 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5207 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1873 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5920 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5402 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 2435 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 14629 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 5414 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2744 Valve Clearance: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT ^ Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter. 1. Measure the valve clearance. Refer to "INSPECTION". 2. Remove camshaft. 3. Remove valve lifters at the locations that are out of the standard. 4. Measure the center thickness of removed valve lifters with micrometer. 5. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation: t=t1 + (C1-C2) t =Valve lifter thickness to be replaced t1 = Removed valve lifter thickness C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance: Intake: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch)* Exhaust: 0.33 mm (0.013 inch)* *: Approximately 20°C (68°F) ^ Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Intake Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter". Page 9426 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 7080 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1548 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 149 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 582 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 7463 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6596 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4712 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Testing and Inspection Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 4895 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4721 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 2153 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124 Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Reference: NTB09-001 Date: January 24, 2009 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807 NHTSA #: 08V-690 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier (D40) Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor. Eligible Vehicles Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan, Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues. Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected vehicles begins on January 26, 2009. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5466 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7233 Page 8975 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 12954 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9326 Page 3662 Page EM-3 Page 8667 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8650 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9738 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2758 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed. 2. Remove air duct. 3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not move it clockwise. 4. Remove drive belt. Page 11016 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1285 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to "CLUSTER LID C". 2. Disconnect the hazard switch connector. 3. Remove the screws and remove the hazard switch. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 7806 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 11782 Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal and installation. Page 11901 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1932 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13587 Page 11070 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8880 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5661 Valve clearance ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC c. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 3 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke. NOTE: Crankshaft pulley bolt flange has a stamped line every 60°. They can be used as a guide to rotation angle. Page 4751 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 644 Engine Control Module: Electrical Diagrams Additional Diagrams Additional related diagrams can also be found at the vehicle level Diagrams By Diagram Name EC Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-ECM/PW EC-ECM/PW-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open Air Bag Harness: Customer Interest Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open Classification: RS05-006 Reference: NTB06-046 Date: June 13, 2006 2005 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; DRIVER'S SEAT SIDE AIR BAG OPEN CIRCUIT (DTC B1134) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) 2005 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM An "open circuit" DTC code (SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] /B1134) is stored in the SRS control unit, and The connector for the driver's seat side impact air bag module is disconnected (either completely or partially, NOTE: If CONSULT-II shown the above code (B1134), and the driver's seat side air bag connector is not disconnected, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ACTION Change the location of the driver's seat side impact air bag connector by installing the kit listed in the Parts Information. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 1686 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 7632 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 7930 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 806 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11739 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 6123 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1823 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2510 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Page 3951 Water Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation CAUTION: ^ When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belts. ^ Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. ^ After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using tool. REMOVAL 1. Remove undercover with power tool. 2. Remove drive belts. 3. Drain engine coolant. Refer to "ENGINE COOLANT". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 4. Remove radiator hoses (upper and lower) and cooling fan assembly. Refer to "ENGINE COOLING FAN". 5. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover from front timing chain case, using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) 6. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows: Page 134 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 548 Page 13225 Front Door Window Regulator: Overhaul DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Remove the regulator motor or crank assembly from the regulator assembly. Page 4437 Page 6668 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Input/output signal chart TYPE 2 Page 9466 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7702 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6891 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 7639 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 7766 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Page 426 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 10538 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 5924 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 12015 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5191 Page 11107 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Page 6211 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 1019 Page 11224 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14057 Page 6116 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6279 Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 7744 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 8507 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9855 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the snap pin and clevis pin from the clevis, and separate it from the clutch pedal. 2. Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system. CAUTION: Do not spill brake fluid onto painted surfaces. If it spills, wipe up immediately and wash the affected area with water. 3. Remove the hose clamp and hose from the clutch master cylinder. 4. Remove the clutch tube using suitable tool. 5. Remove the clutch master cylinder nuts, and remove the clutch master cylinder from the vehicle. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Before installation, check the position of the clevis and push rod. If L is outside standard length, adjust the position of the clevis and push rod. Length L: 120.5 mm (4.74 inch) ^ After installation, inspect and adjust the clutch pedal as necessary, then bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to "On Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment", and "Bleeding". Page 12016 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4471 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 1934 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1845 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 11949 Page 4029 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 5147 Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations PG-POWER-09 Page 278 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 9389 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Diagram Information and Instructions Neutral Safety Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2482 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information Compressor Clutch: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information Classification: HA10-006 Reference: NTB10-043 Date: March 17, 2010 A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2008 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION The A/C compressor clutch is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles. If the compressor clutch needs to be replaced for any reason AND the compressor is operating normally: ^ Replace the compressor clutch only. Do not replace the compressor assembly. ^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for compressor clutch removal and installation instructions. Page 934 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 14756 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 14032 - The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. - Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (semitransparent colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 7. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield. 8. Remove the propeller shaft. Refer to "REAR PROPELLER SHAFT". 9. Support the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack. 10. Remove the three fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 11. Remove the fuel tank straps and slowly lower the fuel tank to access the top of the fuel level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. CAUTION: Do not lower the fuel tank too far to prevent damage to the fuel feed hose and the fuel level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly connector 12. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, and the fuel feed hose. Page 4612 Wiring Diagram Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3) Page 9089 EC-TPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 13525 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Page 9465 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 7624 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9728 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 12583 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Connector Locations Page 6581 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11891 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9407 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 574 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 6068 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 10217 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 14489 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9558 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 6760 Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1) Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4) Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 5178 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6603 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7945 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 9582 Page 8109 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 969 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3636 Page EM-9 Page 7877 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1316 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3287 Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of camshaft. CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a different diameter from the other three locations. 2. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout with dial indicator. (Total indicator reading) Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket. Valve Lifter Check if surface of valve lifter has any wear or cracks. ^ If anything above is found, replace valve lifter. Refer to "Available Valve Lifter". Valve Lifter Clearance VALVE LIFTER OUTER DIAMETER ^ Measure the outer diameter at 1/2 height of valve lifter with micrometer since valve lifter is in barrel shape. Standard (intake and exhaust): 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 inch) VALVE LIFTER HOLE DIAMETER ^ Measure the inner diameter of valve lifter hole of cylinder head with inside micrometer. Page 2545 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 12917 Door Switch Check (Step 4) Page 11142 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14823 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9059 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9424 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 14068 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Engine Control Component Parts Location Power Distribution Module: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 346 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Impact Sensor: Recalls Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS) housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Classification: EL07-027D Reference: NTB07-069D Date: November 30, 2010 FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3 The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8 405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273 2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614 APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007* *IMPORTANT: Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are working on is instead covered under that Campaign. IF YOU CONFIRM: The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative. And/Or The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis. ACTIONS: Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1216 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 7172 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14637 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5347 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode. 4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Without CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts Page 9387 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6100 Page 4530 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 10254 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7131 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 2055 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2790 Drive Belt: Specifications DRIVE BELT Page 10210 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7079 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 2190 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6295 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 14728 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6054 Page 10421 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-142, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: Yaw Rate Sensor/Service and Repair/HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS Page 933 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 13636 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Classification: EL07-027D Reference: NTB07-069D Date: November 30, 2010 FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3 The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8 405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273 2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614 APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007* *IMPORTANT: Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are working on is instead covered under that Campaign. IF YOU CONFIRM: The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative. And/Or The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis. ACTIONS: Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2063 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8896 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11535 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 12758 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 8039 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 8175 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4390 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 5662 ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 3 cylinder at compression TDC d. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 5 cylinder at TDC of compression stroke. Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 402 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 9569 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Page 8224 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6268 Page 13076 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 1028 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 6114 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 11731 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 11395 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 5380 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8657 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5334 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 11436 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 550 Attachment General Procedure Page 6812 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 10) IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Page 2705 Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9) Page 1545 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 798 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6916 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection Page 11295 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 14796 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 306 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of BCM REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower knee protector. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH". 3. Remove screws and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: - When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-105, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System - NATS) - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT-12, "ID Registration Procedure". Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 13616 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1) Page 1159 3. Unwind the harness. 4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows: a. Press in on the lock tab. b. Slide the sender unit off. C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor. 5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order. Page 978 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5551 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13523 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle Nut ............................................................................................................................................... .................................... 137 Nm (14kg-m, 101 ft.lbs) Page 6791 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 7 - 9) Page 9935 2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to drain plug. Install drain plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". FILLING 1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug hole. Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". 2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Page 6635 LAN-CAN-11 Page 14380 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10218 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5531 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 2933 2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to drain plug. Install drain plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". FILLING 1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug hole. Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". 2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Specifications Piston: Specifications PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE Piston Pin Hole Diameter Measure the inner diameter of piston pin hole with inside micrometer. Standard: 21.993 - 22.005 mm (0.8659 - 0.8663 inch) Piston Pin Outer Diameter Measure the outer diameter of piston pin with micrometer. Standard: 21.989 - 22.001 mm (0.8657 0.8662 inch) Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance (Piston to piston pin oil clearance) = (Piston pin hole diameter) (Piston pin outer diameter) Standard: 0.002 - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 inch) ^ If the calculated value is out of the standard, replace piston and piston pin assembly ^ When replacing piston and piston pin assembly, refer to "HOW TO SELECT PISTON". NOTE: ^ Piston is available together with piston pin as assembly. ^ Piston pin (piston pin hole) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no piston pin grades can be selected. (Only "0" grade is available.) PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE Cylinder Bore Inner Diameter ^ Using bore gauge, measure cylinder bore for wear, out-of-round and taper at six different points on each cylinder. ("X" and "Y" directions at "A", "B" and "C") ("X" is in longitudinal direction of engine) Standard inner diameter: 95.500 - 95.530 mm (3.7598 - 3.7610 inch) Out-of-round (Difference between "X" and "Y"): 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Taper limit (Difference between "A" and "C"): 0.01 mm (0.0004 inch) Page 1015 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14247 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 10621 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 3335 CYLINDER BLOCK Page 588 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 8259 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 11303 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 7287 Page 1848 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4194 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 7466 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9339 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 3635 Page EM-8 Page 1379 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4997 Page 3937 Replace valve or valve seat accordingly. ^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, cylinder head gaskets are leaking. In such a case, replace cylinder head gaskets. 9. After inspection is completed, install removed parts. 10. Start engine, and make sure that engine runs smoothly. 11. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to EC-62, "How to Erase DTC". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Warning Light After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off. This light warns of low tire pressure. NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and Owner's Manual. The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound for about 10 seconds. Page 6502 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 1505 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 13011 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 14053 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5943 Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning Configuration DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: - READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. - WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: - When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. - Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. - If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. - Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link Connector Schematic Page 5470 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Page 5495 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Timing Chain Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3129 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 4369 Attachment General Procedure Page 13857 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5962 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4971 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair Air Bleeding Hydraulic System Incomplete air bleeding causes the following: ^ Air bubbles in reservoir tank ^ Clicking noise in oil pump ^ Excessive buzzing in oil pump ^ When this happens bleed the air again. NOTE: When the vehicle is stationary or while the steering wheel is being turned slowly, some noise may be heard from the oil pump or gear. This noise is normal and does not affect any system. 1. Check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Checking Fluid Leakage". 2. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel fully to the right and left several times. CAUTION: Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank frequently and add fluid as needed. 3. Run the engine at idle speed. Hold the steering wheel at each locked position for three seconds. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. Repeat step 3 several times at about three second intervals. 5. Check for air bubbles, cloudy fluid and fluid leakage. 6. If air bubbles or cloudiness exists, perform steps 3 and 4 again until air bubbles and cloudiness do not exist. 7. Stop the engine and check fluid level. Page 13027 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3686 1. Hammer dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in order to shorten protrusion length. 2. Install new front oil seal on the front timing chain case. - Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip. - Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. - Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with front timing chain case end face using suitable drift [outer diameter: 60 mm (2.36 in)]. - Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted. Page 10811 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1501 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 9905 Differential Cover: Service and Repair M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. Refer to "DRAINING". Page 8133 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2495 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6153 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13809 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5280 Service and Repair Page 6338 Page 11406 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 14162 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 10751 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-142, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: Yaw Rate Sensor/Service and Repair/HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS Page 997 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 4) Page 13122 5. Operation mode - Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current- consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption. 1. CAN communication status - With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. - Control by BCM is being operated properly. - When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. - Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status - This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. - It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. - Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status - With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. - With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. - Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status - BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. Page 11888 Page 11665 Optional Splice Part 1 Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Page 10797 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13577 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2050 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 9138 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 7048 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12062 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 12402 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8350 9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab. 10. Install the bracket on the frame rail. NOTE: The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in. 11. Torque the bolt to: 11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb) NOTE: Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt. Page 8161 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1605 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8306 5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3. ^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail. 6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown. 7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows: Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 6503 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 11379 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11474 4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 13813 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5928 BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 2 Page 1538 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6253 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 11447 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 8797 7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: ^ Use a new seal (0-Ring). ^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6. 8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows: a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders. b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly. Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10330 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1849 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 998 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 5 - 9) Page 14000 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10197 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5703 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6103 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1429 Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR Component Description The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And Charging. CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then the battery discharge may occur. Page 4492 Page 10767 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS Wheel Sensor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". ^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly Page 7291 Page 9662 Page 12384 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6544 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to "Application and ID". 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. Page 4770 Service and Repair Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Removal and Installation for Condenser REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to "RADIATOR". CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. 3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible A/C hose and the high-pressure A/C pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. 5. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. 6. Lift the condenser out of the mounting grommets and remove the condenser. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure A/C pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible A/C hose with new ones, apply compressor oil to them for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. - Replace the mounting grommets as necessary. Page 9670 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Tires: Customer Interest Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Classification: WT04-010 Reference: NTB05-003 Date: January 12, 2005 NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers) to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven. Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires. If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied, consider the following: 1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings. 2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires grooves/treads. 3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely. Disclaimer Page 3564 c. Install oil pan (lower). ^ Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. 2. Install oil pan drain plug. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: At least 30 minutes after oil pan is installed, pour engine oil. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check engine oil level and adjust engine oil. Refer to "ENGINE OIL". 2. Start engine, and check there is no leak of engine oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level again. Refer to "ENGINE OIL". REMOVAL (UPPER) WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, do not drain engine oil when engine is hot. 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. 3. Drain engine oil. Refer to "Changing Engine Oil". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine oil on drive belts. 4. Drain engine coolant. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 5. Remove front final drive (4WD). 6. Disconnect steering gear lower joint shaft bolt and steering gear mounting nuts and bolts, position out of the way. 7. Remove starter motor. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler tube brackets and position out of the way. Refer to "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY". 9. Remove oil filter, as necessary. 10. Remove oil cooler. 11. Remove oil pan (lower). Refer to "REMOVAL (Lower)". 12. Remove oil strainer. 13. Remove transmission joint bolts which pierce oil pan (upper). Refer to "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY". 14. Remove rear cover plate. 15. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown to remove. Page 2620 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 11793 8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket. 9. Finger tighten the two front bolts. 10. Finger tighten the two side bolts. 11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence: ^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb). 12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4). ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner. ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner. 13. Install a new drive belt. ^ Do not reuse the existing belt. 14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal. Page 1875 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8623 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 3791 - After cooling down the engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level if necessary. Timing Chain Tensioner 1. Internal chain guide 2. O-ring 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Slack guide 10. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (LH) 13. O-ring 14. Tension guide Removal and Installation (Primary Timing Chain Tensioner) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover. 2. Remove engine under cover. 3. Partially drain engine coolant. 4. Remove lower fan shroud. 5. Disconnect crankcase ventilation hose and remove air duct and resonator assembly. Page 5726 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5519 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 5120 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 5155 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 10610 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 14579 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 3999 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2865 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible A/C Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front right mud guard. 3. Remove the front right splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 5. Remove the low-pressure flexible A/C hose. Refer to "Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible A/C Hose". INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible A/C hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 6526 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 14) Diagnostic Procedure Page 6138 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 7928 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 12998 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6501 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4683 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3666 Page EM-7 Page 12574 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 2 Page 6821 Case 7 Front Suspension Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension Page 10816 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 5379 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3255 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5820 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8007 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 10685 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Inspection 1. Using a suitable vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inch Hg) to brake booster. 2. Check output rod length. Standard dimension when vacuum -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, - 19.69 inch Hg): 15.6 - 15.9 mm (0.614 - 0.626 inch) INSTALLATION 1. Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length "B" (in the figure) satisfies the specified value. Length "B": 125 mm (4.92 inch) 2. After adjusting "B", temporarily tighten lock nut and install booster assembly to the vehicle. ^ Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly and the dash panel. 3. Connect brake pedal to clevis of input rod. 4. Install brake booster nuts. 5. Install brake piping from brake master cylinder to actuator and electric unit. Refer to "Hydraulic Circuit". 6. Connect vacuum hose to brake booster. 7. Install master cylinder to booster assembly. 8. Adjust the height and play of brake pedal. 9. Tighten lock nut of input rod. 10. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Page 10890 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2056 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 10643 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Changing Brake Fluid Drain and Refill CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so when splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water. ^ Before servicing, disconnect actuator connector or battery negative cable. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve. 2. Depress brake pedal, then loosen each bleed valve using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool and gradually remove brake fluid. 3. Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 4. Rest foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve. Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid flows out. Bleed air from brake system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Page 3862 Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24) Page 4190 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Page 5140 Page 6670 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Input/output signal chart TYPE 3 System Diagram System diagram TYPE 4 Page 9120 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6148 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 5417 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 10753 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/ decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-212, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: On-Vehicle Service Page 6800 Case 5 Page 13575 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 6482 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12961 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1239 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11219 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4900 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13556 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 6193 Page 6872 Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2) IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 1) IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 12489 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 13651 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5825 Page 8509 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. 2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the given conditions. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). 4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Page 1695 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8130 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10743 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Page 300 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation" in General Information. 7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. Page 9005 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 14377 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8835 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5790 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Stabilizer Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises Classification: FA10-003A Reference: NTB10-072A Date: October 6, 2010 FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN 6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct 23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All IF YOU CONFIRM A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following actions: ^ turning the steering wheel left or right ^ driving over speed bumps ^ driving on rough roads ^ accelerating or decelerating AND The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing. ACTIONS Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and installation instructions. Page 1820 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11458 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: By Symptom Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 13129 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Work Support WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 7948 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 628 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6415 Illumination Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3886 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 1038 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7626 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 13716 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1) Page 5371 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13792 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10675 6. Remove back plate. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Apply brake grease to the specified points during assembly. Refer to "Components". ^ Install adjuster so that threaded part expands when rotating it in the direction shown by the arrow. ^ Shorten adjuster by rotating it in the opposite direction as shown by the arrow. NOTE: After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if parking brake does not function well, perform break-in operation as follows. 1. Adjust parking brake pedal stroke. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT". 2. Perform parking brake burnishing operation by driving the vehicle forward under the following conditions: ^ Vehicle speed 40 km/h (25 MPH) set (forward) ^ Parking brake operating force 196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 lbs.) set ^ Apply time 30 seconds CAUTION: ^ To prevent lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes after every break-in operation. ^ Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of lining. 3. After burnishing operation, check parking brake pedal stroke. Readjust if it is now longer than the specified stroke. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT". Page 10847 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7070 CAUTION: - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 Ohms at 25 °C (77 °F) Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6. Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: - Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Page 10885 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Component Inspection ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 11800 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed. 2. Remove air duct. 3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not move it clockwise. 4. Remove drive belt. Page 11774 Page 10971 Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair REAR DOOR LOCK Component Structure Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. Refer to "Rear Door Glass". 2. Remove door grommets, and remove outside handle nuts from the hole. 3. Remove outside handle. 4. Disconnect the outside handle cable connection. 5. Remove the inside door handle. 6. Disconnect the door lock and inside door handle cables from the inside door handle. 7. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector and remove the assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1149 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Front Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Front REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR CAUTION: - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove the center pillar upper/lower finishers. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 2. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and assembly. - On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor. 3. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner electrical connector. CAUTION: - For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into the notch, lift the lock and remove the connector. - Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock into the connector. INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the seat belt retractor upper bolt first. - Ensure that seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation. Page 4845 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 2693 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 3932 CAUTION: ^ Do not drop or shock spark plug. ^ Do not use wire brush for cleaning. ^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kgf/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds ^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1098 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 2 Page 7853 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13666 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. Page 14639 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14249 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1304 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1581 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 5900 Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Remove engine undercover using power tools. 2. Remove drive belts. 3. Remove engine cooling fan assembly. Refer to "ENGINE COOLING FAN". 4. Remove crankshaft pulley. 5. Remove front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front timing chain case and crankshaft. INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip of new front oil seal. 2. Install front oil seal. ^ Install front oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. ^ Press-fit until the height of front oil seal is level with the mounting surface using suitable tool. Suitable drift: outer diameter 60 mm (2.36 inch), inner diameter 50 mm (1.97 inch). CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage front timing chain case and crankshaft. ^ Press-fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil seal. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal after this step. Page 4587 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 5875 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 8527 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 4362 Page 11158 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 5704 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 13476 CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the seat back trim. 2. Locate the recliner shaft and side link pins on the back of the seat. 3. Confirm the recliner shaft link slot and pin (inner and/or outer side) are misaligned. Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds Classification: BR11-001 Reference: NTB11-021 Date: March 2, 2011 FRONT BRAKE NOISE AT SLOW SPEEDS APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM: Squeal/Squeak noise from the front brakes: ^ While moving forward or reverse ^ With very light brake application (pedal pressure) ^ After the vehicle has been sitting, typically overnight ("cold" brakes) ^ At speeds less than 10MPH ^ While traveling straight or turning. NOTE: This is intended to be a partial list of examples of the types of conditions when you may be able to duplicate front wheel brake squeal/squeak. When attempting to duplicate this noise it is important to have a second person safely standing outside of the vehicle to determine if the noise being heard is coming from the front or rear brakes. ACTION: Apply Molykote 7439 grease to the front brake pad retainers. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 6364 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 7741 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4843 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 1116 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 11094 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9418 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle Nut ............................................................................................................................................... .................................... 137 Nm (14kg-m, 101 ft.lbs) Page 4974 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation IAT SENSOR Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor 1. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 4005 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1891 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6080 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 6361 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 11007 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5288 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Brakes - Front/Rear Brakes Make Squeaking Noises Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front/Rear Brakes Make Squeaking Noises Classification: BR06-006D Reference: NTB06-037D Date: March 2, 2011 2005 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; SQUEAKING NOISE FROM BRAKES The application of Molykote(R) 7439 has been added to the Service Procedure. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Frontier built before: 1N6(*)DO7(**)5C461154 Xterra built before: 5N1AN08(**)5C651886 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before August 15, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM A squeaking noise coming from the brakes. ACTIONS Perform repairs as follows: Front Brakes 1. Replace the front brake pads. 2. Install the new brake pad hardware kit (which includes new shims). Rear Brakes 1. Replace the rear brake pads. 2. Install the new brake pad hardware kit (which includes new shims). IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 8158 Page 5627 Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18) Page 6499 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1944 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 830 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 14585 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1706 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2132 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5619 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. Page 13548 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 7142 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 4044 8. Remove the upper mount bracket bolts. 9. Remove the two A/C condenser bolts. 10. Remove radiator as follows: CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch A/C condenser and radiator core when removing. a. With lifting and pulling radiator in a rear direction, disassemble lower mount from radiator core support center. CAUTION: Because A/C condenser is onto the front-lower portion of radiator, moving to rear direction should be at minimum. b. Lift A/C condenser up and remove radiator after disengaging the fitting as front-bottom surface. CAUTION: Lifting A/C condenser should be minimum to prevent a load to A/C piping. c. After removing radiator, put A/C condenser on radiator core support center to prevent a load to A/C piping, and temporarily fix it with rope or similar means. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS". Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7828 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7557 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 11064 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4263 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE". 9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Timing Chain Tensioner: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 343 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10952 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 821 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3646 Page EM-19 Page 6017 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7187 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 12108 Removal and Installation CAUTION: When installing the components with rubber bushings, the final tightening of the nuts and bolts must be done with the vehicle in an unladen condition (the fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil full; the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in their designated positions) with the tires on the ground. REMOVAL 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. For the RH side, remove the tailpipe. Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM. 3. Support the rear final drive assembly with a suitable jack to relieve the tension from the rear leaf spring. ^ The axle weight should be supported, but there should be no compression in the rear leaf spring. 4. Remove the shock absorber lower nut and bolt using power tool. 5. Remove the four rear spring clip U-bolt nuts using power tool, then remove the rear spring pad. 6. Remove the rear spring shackle and bushings using power tool. 7. Remove the rear leaf spring front nut and bolt using power tool. 8. Remove the rear leaf spring. INSTALLATION VDC/TCS/ABS Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS On-Vehicle Service Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. G Sensor G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE". Page 491 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 11105 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION - In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license, front fog, and parking lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-29, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom/Symptom Diagnostic Procedures/Door Switch Check INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps activate in order. These six steps cycle three times before the auto active test automatically terminates. 1. Rear window defogger on for 10 seconds. 2. Front wipers operate on low speed for 5 seconds then on high speed for 5 seconds. 3. License, tail, parking and fog lamps on for 10 seconds. 4. Headlamps on low for 10 seconds then high beams turn on and off 5 times. 5. A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) cycles on and off 5 times. 6. Cooling fan operates on low speed for 5 seconds then on high speed for 5 seconds. Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Page 232 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 11301 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4981 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: By Symptom Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 9425 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 8116 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1884 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 540 Page 4280 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 438 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 11109 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. 3. Touch "START". Page 9192 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 14507 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4343 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 8011 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 10145 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Manual Transmission Gear Oil Type .................................... Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90. Page 2485 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6277 Page 2090 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8812 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 1208 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 8854 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. Page 2408 2. Apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the wind-up clip and the spring leafs. ^ Use a flat metal ruler to spread the grease. ^ Make sure the grease covers the entire contact surface between the plastic cover and the spring leafs. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each side of both leaf springs. (Grease applied to 4 places) 4. Confirm the squeak is not present by compressing the suspension. Disclaimer Page 10831 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9078 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4590 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6675 System Diagram System diagram Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Page 1245 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6014 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Locations Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7109 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 5751 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Description and Operation Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 4956 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Draining & Filling Fluid Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Draining & Filling Fluid Changing DRAINING 1. Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transmission. 2. Stop the engine. Remove the transmission drain plug and drain the oil. 3. Set a gasket on the drain plug and install it to the transmission. Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to "Case Components". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug hole. Oil grade and Viscosity. Refer to " Page 9174 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10172 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Page 7535 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 8927 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 10230 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 497 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 792 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 9205 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 8600 Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11318 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 7695 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 2500 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Component Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6612 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4302 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5138 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7990 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4073 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 8115 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 7700 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 12960 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 1180 Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: - The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. - Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (semitransparent colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Cowl Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2450 Repair Flow Chart Page 11391 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - Daytime running lamps (Canada only) - Parking lamps - Tail lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger and heated mirror relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger and heated mirror relay (if equipped). 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the A/C compressor (magnetic clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the TCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control - When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown. Page 9186 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9861 Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Drain the brake fluid from the clutch hydraulic system. CAUTION: Do not spill brake fluid on painted surfaces. If it spills, wipe up immediately and wash the affected area with water. 2. Remove the clutch hose and copper washer from the operating cylinder. CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer. 3. Remove the operating cylinder bolts, and remove the operating cylinder from the vehicle. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Tighten the clutch hose fitting to the specified torque. CAUTION: Make sure the clutch hose is not bent or twisted. ^ After installation, bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to Bleeding procedure. Page 3833 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10416 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 1887 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 11274 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 9385 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4448 Attachment General Procedure Page 4299 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1130 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1696 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8624 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 10486 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. 4. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. - Do not reuse piston seal. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert seal into groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. 2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston boot. Cover the piston end with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot securely into a groove on cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. Page 5255 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. Page 5079 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HO2S2 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description Page 6495 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 9548 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 3638 Page EM-11 Page 11822 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Description and Operation Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for engine control. Page 6534 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7 Page 2683 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 10845 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 10837 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 7622 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9648 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1624 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11758 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair On-Vehicle Inspection and Service On-Vehicle Inspection and Service Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear, damage) are within specifications. Refer to "Ball Joint". Page 323 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Page 54 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2180 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5539 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 12097 IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: P/N 44003-7S000 is considered a shop supply. Do NOT include it on your Warranty Claim. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Insert a flat blade screw driver between the wind-up clip (not plastic cover) and the leaf springs to spread the wind up clip approximately 2 mm/ 1/16 inch. Caution: Do not insert screw driver blade between plastic clip cover and leaf spring. Insert the blade at the highest corner of the clip to avoid doing this. Page 5810 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7480 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13132 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation" in General Information. 7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. Page 2952 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 14470 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Service and Repair Valve Cover: Service and Repair ROCKER COVER Removal and Installation REMOVAL (LEFT BANK) 1. Remove engine cover. 2. Separate engine harness removing their brackets from rocker covers. 3. Remove harness bracket from cylinder head, if necessary. 4. Remove ignition coil. 5. Remove PCV hoses from rocker covers. 6. Remove oil filler cap from rocker cover (left bank), if necessary. Page 5885 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1868 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9128 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 7631 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1839 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 1468 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 1588 Page 2117 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PHSB1 EC-PHSB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-PHSB2 Page 7789 Page 4363 Page 7179 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 9718 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1783 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3402 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 13797 Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Specifications Flywheel: Specifications FLYWHEEL DEFLECTION (M/T MODELS) ^ Measure the deflection of flywheel contact surface to clutch with a dial indicator. ^ Measure the deflection at 210 mm (8.27 inch) dia. Standard: 0.45 mm (0.0177 inch) or less. ^ If measured value is out of the standard, replace flywheel. CAUTION: When measuring, keep magnetic fields (such as dial indicator stand) away from signal plate of the rear end of crankshaft. MOVEMENT AMOUNT OF FLYWHEEL (M/T MODELS) CAUTION: Do not disassemble double mass flywheel. Movement Amount of Thrust (Fore-and-Aft) Direction ^ Measure the movement amount of thrust (fore-and-aft) direction when 100 N (10.2 kg, 22 lbs.) force is added at the portion of 125 mm (4.92 inch) radius from the center of flywheel. Standard: 1.3 mm (0.051 inch) or less ^ If measured value is out of the standard, replace flywheel. Movement Amount in Radial (Rotation) Direction Check the movement amount of radial (rotation) direction with the following procedure: 1. Install a bolt to clutch cover mounting hole, and place a torque wrench on the extended line of the flywheel center line. ^ Tighten bolt at a force of 9.8 Nm (1.0 kg-m, 87 inch lbs.) to keep it from loosening. 2. Put a mating mark on circumferences of the two flywheel masses without applying any load (Measurement standard points). 3. Apply a force of 9.8 Nm (1.0 kg-m, 87 inch lbs.) in each direction, and mark the movement amount on the mass on the transmission side. 4. Measure the dimensions of movement amounts "A" and "B" on circumference of flywheel on the transmission side. Standard: 24 mm (0.94 inch) or less. ^ If measured value is out of the standard, replace flywheel. Drive Plate: M/T Models .......................................................................................................................................... ............................. 88.0 Nm (9.0 kg-m, 65 ft. lbs.) Page 7968 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 element at the specified range. A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygenpump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement Lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide Lambda range (0.7 < Lambda < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at Lambda = 1. Therefore, the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 °C (1,292 - 1,472 °F). Page 10559 2. Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the front brake pad retainers in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer. 3. Reinstall the brake calipers in reverse order. Page 4669 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 13047 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 6823 Case 9 Case 10 Page 8731 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4664 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Description and Operation Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. Page 10835 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4570 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 13653 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 7519 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7) Page 356 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 4064 Optional Splice Part 1 Diagrams Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR LOCK Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door window regulator. Refer to "Front Door Glass". 2. Remove door side grommet, and remove door key cylinder assembly (driver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger side) bolts (TORX T30) from grommet hole. CAUTION: Do not forcibly remove the TORX bolts (T30). TORX bolt 5.3 Nm (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb) 3. Separate the key cylinder rod (driver side only) and outside handle rod connection (on the handle). 4. While pulling the outside handle, remove door key cylinder assembly or escutcheon. 5. While pulling outside handle, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle. Page 11462 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic Service and Repair Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair SIDE WINDOW GLASS Page 9039 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 14565 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2058 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4918 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 14080 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1790 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 9452 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 10332 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 9751 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Page 3331 NOTE: Use TORX socket (size E14) for bolts No. 1 to 16 (M10 bolt). Bolts 1 - 16: 35.3 Nm (3.6 kg-m, 26 ft. lbs.) ii. Turn M10 bolts 90° clockwise in numerical order from No. 1 to 16 using Tool. Tool number KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) CAUTION: Use angle wrench Tool to check tightening angle. Do not make judgement by visual inspection. ^ After installing the bolts, make sure that crankshaft can be rotated smoothly by hand. ^ Wipe off completely any protruding liquid gasket on front side of the engine. ^ Check the crankshaft end play. Refer to "CRANKSHAFT END PLAY". Page 8280 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 8258 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Locations Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13743 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2415 2. Apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the wind-up clip and the spring leafs. ^ Use a flat metal ruler to spread the grease. ^ Make sure the grease covers the entire contact surface between the plastic cover and the spring leafs. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each side of both leaf springs. (Grease applied to 4 places) 4. Confirm the squeak is not present by compressing the suspension. Disclaimer Page 1580 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 13394 6. Carefully apply the decal to the side rail (see Figure 5). NOTE: Use the pencil marks you made on the side rail in step 2, to align the decal. 7. Without removing the decal's protective covering, apply pressure all along the decal with a squeegee (3M(TM) Scotchcal(TM) Squeegee (blue), P/N 051141-71601 or equivalent). Pay close attention to the edges of the label (see Figure 6). 8. Carefully peel away the decal's protective covering, making sure not to peel away the edges of the decal (see Figure 7). Page 11183 4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 6939 Case 12 Case 13 Page 4244 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Description and Operation Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for engine control. Page 5119 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Interior Room Lamp Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10448 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number 205-D002 Page 7965 EC-O2S2B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2S2B2 Page 2273 Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5630 Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28) Page 8487 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1609 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825 Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Reference: NTB10-071A Date: August 25, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION LOWER LINK This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049 NHTSA# 10E-019 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification. Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know whether a lower link was replaced during that time. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin. Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. Page 14683 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9378 Diagram Information and Instructions Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7271 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 6587 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6724 BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Combination Meter Circuit Inspection Page 630 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 8596 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13061 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 11497 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11587 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 5226 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12977 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 7273 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 10706 Page 9968 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately. Page 1997 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10954 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 280 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 7182 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11964 Page 13849 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 872 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS On-Vehicle Service Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II. BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. G Sensor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE". Page 11693 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 7508 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7 Page 5452 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 12306 Air Duct: Service and Repair DUCTS AND GRILLES Page 1514 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9731 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7218 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. Page 8577 Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28) Page 14690 Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6158 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13026 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4028 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1560 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 8093 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8380 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12359 Compressor Clutch: Specifications Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance:.....................................................................................................................................0.3 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) Page 4092 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 3986 Page 8948 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9971 ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. Page 2183 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812 Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Classification: EM-10-009 Reference: NTB10-094 Date: August 12, 2010 EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM: A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle. ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION). ^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE. NOTE: Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure WARNING: Page 608 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 7376 Page 8945 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 12768 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Page 6420 Page 8800 Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Page 10529 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer Page 14646 Page 8351 12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP). 13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve. Page 6029 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6990 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7859 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 12608 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. Page 9325 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9588 Page 2476 Page 1746 Page 5747 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 11071 Page 13681 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6826 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Inspection Page 4122 ^ Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration. Page 14382 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5974 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12023 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 925 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 12019 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1123 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 41 NOTE: For the following steps 9 and 10, you will have best results if: ^ You carefully heat a 12" (305 mm) section of the decal with the heat gun (step 9), THEN, ^ You rub the 12" (305 mm) section of decal with the soft rag (step 10) while the decal is still warm, THEN ^ You repeat the above process (switching between steps 9 and 10) until the entire length of the decal has been heated and rubbed. 9. After removing the decal's protective covering (step 8), carefully apply heat with a heating gun all along the surface of the decal. Hold the heating gun nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the side rail (see Figure 8). CAUTION: Too much heat will damage the decal and paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.). Important Points ^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts. ^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal. 10. Apply pressure along the entire surface of the warm decal with a soft rag to "set" the decal firmly onto the side rail surface (see Figure 9). Page 12235 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 11674 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 697 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 5285 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 8246 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold and Three Way Catalyst EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation REMOVAL (LEFT BANK) 1. Remove air cleaner case and air duct. 2. Remove engine undercover with power tool. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove heated oxygen sensor 2 on both banks using Tool. Tool number: KV10114400 (J-38365) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensor 2. ^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor 2 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor. 4. Remove center exhaust tube, main muffler and left front exhaust tube. 5. Remove exhaust manifold cover (left bank). Page 3557 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 5963 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14500 Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 7885 Page 6081 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 5413 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 1955 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 4613 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7) Page 2324 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9037 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 13538 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 5301 EC-APPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 10370 7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". Page 7566 Page 9481 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 12009 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Diagram Information and Instructions Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 6582 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8885 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5510 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 8529 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 243 Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 10611 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 4866 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 1931 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 652 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11) Page 13563 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 6786 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection Page 7074 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 586 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Specifications Page 13750 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12611 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9) Page 5225 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5149 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 729 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 14520 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4245 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 1 Page 8271 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4228 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1399 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5595 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes With Manufacturer's Scan Tool CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 12523 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11396 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION - In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license, front fog, and parking lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-29, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom/Symptom Diagnostic Procedures/Door Switch Check INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps activate in order. These six steps cycle three times before the auto active test automatically terminates. 1. Rear window defogger on for 10 seconds. 2. Front wipers operate on low speed for 5 seconds then on high speed for 5 seconds. 3. License, tail, parking and fog lamps on for 10 seconds. 4. Headlamps on low for 10 seconds then high beams turn on and off 5 times. 5. A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) cycles on and off 5 times. 6. Cooling fan operates on low speed for 5 seconds then on high speed for 5 seconds. Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Page 7189 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 14002 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11997 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 13680 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14367 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 10481 Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Rear CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. - Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. - Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. - Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them. Page 5548 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 10655 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 4672 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 2336 Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation PNP SWITCH Component Description When the selector lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. Page 1383 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7891 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 13191 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Warning Light After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off. This light warns of low tire pressure. NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and Owner's Manual. The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound for about 10 seconds. Page 13632 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 11512 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 8138 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 2315 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14076 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5922 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 7526 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4 Page 4006 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9390 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9657 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7960 EC-AF1B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1HB1 Garage Jack and Safety Stand Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand LIFTING POINT Garage Jack and Safety Stand CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. Page 10368 8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". Page 10802 Page 139 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3955 b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket, to mating surface of chain tensioner and water pump cover, using Tool. Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". CAUTION: Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating. c. Tighten bolts to specified torque. 5. Refill engine coolant system. Refer to "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT". ^ Apply liquid gasket to the thread of water drain plug (front). Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". 6. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal after this step. ^ After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the high-pressure chamber of chain tensioner. Engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS". ^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant. Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations PG-POWER-09 Page 8150 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 14665 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4936 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Universal Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 7052 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1867 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14824 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9393 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 4389 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 7694 Page 5044 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 408 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 800 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2627 > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 4465 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 4035 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6797 Case 2 Page 3695 -When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following: CAUTION: - Handle carefully to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket. - Do not disassemble. (Do not loosen bolts (A) as shown). NOTE: For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary) INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. Inspect all timing chains and associated parts for wear or damage, replace as necessary. INSTALLATION Page 7226 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11831 Description and Operation Ignition Coil: Description and Operation IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. Page 1710 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10822 Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR 1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground. Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V 6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. Page 7040 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8275 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: - If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. - Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. - Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 2551 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 11794 15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield. 16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved. A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Page 8221 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS CAN System (Type 1) Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2541 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4555 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8211 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6893 BCM Circuit Inspection Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 12449 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 2 Locations Power Distribution Relay: Locations Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement Page 9244 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 6751 Case 2 Page 612 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9184 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5817 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8514 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability. NOTE: - Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because N50 models do not have fuel return system. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to "INTAKE MANIFOLD". - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. - Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. - During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) 7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Locations Fuse Block: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 584 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 831 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8940 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7870 Optional Splice Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2654 OVERALL SEQUENCE Page 7066 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HO2S2 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description Page 1417 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 1910 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6023 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Locations Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System Capacity (Approximate) With reservoir ...................................................................................................................................... .......................... 2 3/4 gal. (2 1/4 Imp gal, 10.2 L) Page 1648 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8451 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification Idle Speed: Adjustments Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Page 372 Page 14165 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1404 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Page 3703 b. Install the primary timing chain. - Water pump (G). - Install primary timing chain so the mating mark punched (B) on camshaft sprocket is aligned with the link (A) on the timing chain, while the mating mark notched (E) on the crankshaft sprocket (D) is aligned with the link (F) on the timing chain, as shown. Model Year 2005 - 2007 2008 - 2010 Mating mark (A) Copper link Blue link Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10662 ^ Adjust brake pedal. Refer to "Inspection and Adjustment". Description and Operation Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE The engine oil pressure gauge indicates the engine oil pressure. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied - through combination meter terminal 8 - to oil pressure sensor terminal 1. Ground is supplied - to oil pressure sensor terminal 3 - from combination meter terminal 10. The combination meter receives the oil pressure signal from oil pressure sensor - through oil pressure sensor terminal 2 - to combination meter terminal 19. Page 324 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Diagram Information and Instructions Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1443 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5700 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12980 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 6624 CAN System (Type 12) Schematic LAN-CAN Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Classification: EM06-004B Reference: NTB06-072B Date: September 3, 2009 DRIVE BELT NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION, and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008 IF YOU CONFIRM: A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the morning especially in cold or damp conditions. OR A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1) hour. AND In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt. ACTION: ^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed. ^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, if needed. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5505 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 9197 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 11035 Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement Page 2268 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9273 Page 192 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 4413 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 451 2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows: [START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>. Page 5109 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4959 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2006 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Intake Door Motor Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Intake Door Motor INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY". 2. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11520 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5055 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8749 - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. Page 13161 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 13642 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10654 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1252 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 10193 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. CAN System (Type 1) Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10339 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2742 ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 3 cylinder at compression TDC d. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 5 cylinder at TDC of compression stroke. Page 556 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 3724 ^ Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. ^ Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with front timing chain case end face using suitable drift [outer diameter: 60 mm (2.36 inch)]. ^ Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted. 12. Install water pump cover and chain tensioner cover to front timing chain case. ^ Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". 13. Install front timing chain case as follows: Page 7699 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2204 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 4087 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5904 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5272 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 81 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Front Blower Motor Relay Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay. Page 5877 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 547 Page 10531 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 3149 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 11749 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly. Page 5925 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9366 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8288 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 11618 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) Page 2549 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7770 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 9925 Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential Checking Differential Gear Oil OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly or around it. Page 8170 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2093 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7461 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Battery Current Sensor: Locations Page 2195 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10168 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Diagnostic Aids Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Front Wiper and Washer System Service and Repair Antenna, Radio: Service and Repair Fixed Antenna Rod Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove antenna rod. 2. Remove rubber seal. 3. Remove cowl top. Refer to "COWL TOP". 4. Remove antenna base bolts. 5. Remove audio unit. Refer to "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit". 6. Disconnect antenna cable from audio unit. 7. Remove antenna base and cable. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may bend or break during vehicle operation. Page 8828 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2374 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2106 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 4833 EC-PHSB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 3778 6. Remove internal chain guide. 7. Remove timing chain (primary). Caution: After removing timing chain (primary), do not turn crankshaft and camshaft separately, or valves will strike the piston heads. 8. Remove crankshaft sprocket, if necessary. 9. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: a. Attach stopper pin to the right and left timing chain tensioners (secondary). NOTE: - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts. Page 2639 Page 1981 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 10270 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 13441 4. Remove the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube. 5. Apply thread locker to each of the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube. 6. Reinstall the synchronization tube using the screws with thread locker applied. Torque screws to: Page 14052 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 7488 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 8815 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 10850 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7929 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 5248 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9271 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 11000 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 12491 Housing Assembly HVAC: Locations Components Page 976 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13428 26.5-35.4 in-lb/ 3.5 +/- 0.5 Nm. 7. Turn the seat over to access the bottom surface of the U-brackets. Clamp one U- bracket with narrow nose locking pliers so that it flexes and contacts the synchronization tube as shown in Figure 5. 8. Using a center punch, mark the spot on the bottom surface of the U-bracket 10 mm/0.39 inch from the each edge and drill an 1/8 inch hole that passes through the U-bracket and the wall of the synchronization tube (see Figure 6). 9. Repeat the procedure on the top surface of the U-bracket. 10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9 on the other end of the synchronization tube. Page 14397 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 4214 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1463 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2023 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6521 Page 7498 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9382 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 14914 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Adjustments Rear Rear Washer Nozzle Adjustment - Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure. Adjustable range: ±15° (In any direction) Page 14357 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-Up Lamp Switch BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ^ Check continuity. Page 11136 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 3471 12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP). 13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve. Page 4972 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 2115 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1234 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1473 EC-PHSB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 3391 5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1. ^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6. ^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12. 6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool. 7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See Figure 2. Page 2139 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1551 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5521 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6777 Case 6 Page 3748 Part 2 Timing Chain Tensioner Page 6794 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 6015 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 7996 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 2539 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5336 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4985 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9821 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 5979 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 1479 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1741 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 619 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 8924 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 12336 Blower Motor: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR Components Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower glove box assembly. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX". 2. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14748 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 14255 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 793 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 11267 Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways Seat Bottom Frame: Customer Interest Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways Classification: BT05-050 Reference: NTB05-092 Date: October 7, 2005 RIGHT FRONT SEAT BACK ASSEMBLY RATTLES AND EXCESSIVE SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (1A60) (Applies ONLY to vehicles with Manual seats WI Fold Flat Feature) APPLIED VINS: Frontier, Xterra, & Pathfinder: ALL Titan: vehicles built before 1N6AAO6A * 6N507692 Armada: vehicles built before 5N1AAO8B * 6N704123 IF YOU CONFIRM An unoccupied front passenger seat back rattles and moves side-to-side when driven ^ Over speed bumps at 5 mph or above ^ On bumpy roads at 15 mph or above ACTION ^ Remove the seat from the vehicle. ^ Remove the seat cushion, apply thread locker to 4 existing screws, and reinforce the seat by adding pop rivets as per the Service Information section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 13183 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 3787 3. Install timing chain (primary) as follows: a. Install crankshaft sprocket. - Make sure the mating marks on crankshaft sprocket face the front of engine. Page 4893 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5123 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1034 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 3265 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVCB1 EC-IVCB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-IVCB2 Page 6273 Page 11130 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 5008 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 11880 Page 2964 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F) API Certification Mark API grade SG, SH or SJ, Energy Conserving II or API grade SL, Energy Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III Page 5062 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8323 14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N 999MP-9G001P). 15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt. 16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. Disclaimer Page 6793 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Step 14) IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Page 11439 Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4948 Page 13839 Sensor Action ^ When the front sensor detects daytime conditions, the rear sensor is inactive and the mirror remains in a "no dimming" mode. ^ When the front sensor detects nighttime conditions, the rear sensor is active and detects any source of glare (light) coming from the rear (mainly headlights from approaching vehicles). The mirror will automatically adjust the amount of dimming needed to remove the unwanted glare from the inside rear view mirror. NOTE: Don't let anything get in the way of the front or rear sensors. If anything blocks the sensors, they may not work correctly. Auto Dimming Mirror Trouble Shooting Always verify the customer concern before performing diagnosis. Auto Dimming Mirror Operational Check Page 7537 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. Page 8574 Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18) Page 10460 Part 1 Bleeding Brake System CAUTION: While bleeding, monitor the master cylinder brake fluid level. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed and using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool, loosen the bleed valve to let air out, then tighten bleed valve immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to "Components (front disc brake), "Components (rear disc brake)". 7. Perform steps 2 to 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleed air from the front left, rear left, and front right bleed valve, in that order. Page 2377 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 11861 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3842 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVCB1 EC-IVCB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-IVCB2 Page 9349 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 4987 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 6. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 7. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 8. Remove the bolts and the glass. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) - Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Rear Door Glass Regulator REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. for manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. Page 8928 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14271 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 12876 Door Switch Check (Step 4) Page 6300 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 8478 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3962 Coolant: Application and ID ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary. CAUTION: ^ When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water or distilled water. ^ Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system. Page 5789 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7151 Page 7748 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 2261 Optional Splice Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11992 Page 6358 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. - If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to GI-37, "CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking System Page 7473 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 250 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13044 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4422 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair DOOR FINISHER Removal and Installation REAR DOOR Removal 1. Remove window crank handle or power window switch assembly (if equipped). - Disconnect harness connector. 2. Remove pull handle cover. - Remove rear door finisher screw behind pull handle cover. 3. Remove pull handle escutcheon. 4. Lift upward to release clips and remove armrest. - Remove rear door finisher screws behind armrest. 5. Release the clips and remove rear door finisher. - Disconnect the rear door tweeter (if equipped). Installation Page 818 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 13276 Rear Fender Liner: Service and Repair Components Removal and Installation of Rear Fender Protector REMOVAL 1. Remove screws. 2. Remove pushpins. 3. Remove rear fender protector. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14169 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Switch STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. 3. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 2 again. Page 11306 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 13395 NOTE: For the following steps 9 and 10, you will have best results if: ^ You carefully heat a 12" (305 mm) section of the decal with the heat gun (step 9), THEN, ^ You rub the 12" (305 mm) section of decal with the soft rag (step 10) while the decal is still warm, THEN ^ You repeat the above process (switching between steps 9 and 10) until the entire length of the decal has been heated and rubbed. 9. After removing the decal's protective covering (step 8), carefully apply heat with a heating gun all along the surface of the decal. Hold the heating gun nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the side rail (see Figure 8). CAUTION: Too much heat will damage the decal and paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.). Important Points ^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts. ^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal. 10. Apply pressure along the entire surface of the warm decal with a soft rag to "set" the decal firmly onto the side rail surface (see Figure 9). Page 10322 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5913 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6804 Case 10 Case 11 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 7411 Page 4689 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 3663 Page EM-4 Page 8653 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3628 Page EM-1 Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 7703 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 3251 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Testing and Inspection Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection On-Vehicle Service OPERATING CHECK With engine stopped, change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure by depressing brake pedal several times. Then with brake pedal fully depressed, start engine and when the vacuum pressure reaches the standard, make sure the clearance between brake pedal and floor panel decreases. CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds. AIRTIGHT CHECK ^ Run engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after applying vacuum to booster. Depress brake pedal normally to change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure. Make sure distance between brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases. ^ Depress brake pedal while engine is running and stop engine with pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds. CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds. Page 13946 e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver. f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the pocket screwdriver was inserted. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. 10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 1173 c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock ring holder as shown in Figure 8. NOTE: The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring. NOTE: ^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring. ^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring. ^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 9529 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Blower Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5168 EC-TPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 5604 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 3961 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant Type Use Genuine Nissan Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water when adding or replacing coolant. Page 4400 Page 1530 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8082 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3720 e. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. There are two type of bolts. Refer to the following for locating bolts. Bolt length: Bolt position 20 mm (0.79 inch): 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 16 mm (0.63 inch): Except the above Rear timing case bolt torque: 12.7 Nm (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft. lbs.) f. After all bolts are tightened, retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. ^ If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately g. After installing rear timing chain case, check the surface height difference between following parts on oil pan (upper) mounting surface. Standard Rear timing chain case to lower cylinder block: -0.24 to 0.14 mm (-0.0094 to 0.0055 inch) ^ If not within the standard, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Install water pump with new O-rings. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 4. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown. (No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC) ^ NOTE: Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose, it is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same direction of the figure. Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side): At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side): At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Crankshaft key: At cylinder head side of right bank. CAUTION: Hole on small dia. side must be used for intake side dowel pin hole. Do not misidentify (ignore big dia. side). 5. Install timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark positions repeatedly during the installation process. Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2046 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11516 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Cowl Weatherstrip: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4631 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. Page 6880 Case 2 Page 13550 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 10992 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 10423 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/ decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-212, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: On-Vehicle Service Page 11860 Page 8597 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Specifications Page 7776 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7842 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8489 Page 10892 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10883 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10301 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Page 5815 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1375 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14211 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to "CLUSTER LID C". 2. Disconnect the hazard switch connector. 3. Remove the screws and remove the hazard switch. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6078 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 8417 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8439 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 119 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 1532 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9404 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9436 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9082 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 31 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 13957 e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver. f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the pocket screwdriver was inserted. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. 10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 4562 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 469 Page 5689 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5193 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 1516 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6242 Page 2870 Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal and installation. Page 12982 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams Trailer Tow Schematic LT-T/TOW Page 11221 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 7036 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 12117 2. Remove the shock absorber upper and lower nuts and bolts using power tool. 3. Remove the shock absorber. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Shock absorber upper and lower nuts. Refer to "Components". Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect the shock absorber for any oil leaks, cracks, or deformations. Replace the shock absorber as necessary. Page 7058 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-AF1B1 EC-AF1B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1B2 Page 9661 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7317 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 8605 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8268 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation Trailer Hitch: Recalls Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Xterra 2005 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V458000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: September 30, 2005 COMPONENT: Trailer Hitches POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12500 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with a Nissan accessory tow hitch, inadequate quality of some welded joints in the hitch assembly may result in separation of the hitch from the vehicle when being used to tow. CONSEQUENCE: This could result in the trailer separating from the vehicle and cause a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the tow hitches. The recall is expected to begin on October 24, 2005. Owners should contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers can contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236; (TTY:1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 12988 TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION The trailer power supply is controlled by trailer tow relay 2. When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied - through 10 A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R) - through IPDM E/R terminal 27 - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1 and - to backup lamp relay terminal 3 (with M/T). When trailer tow relay 2 is energized, power is supplied - through trailer tow relay 2 terminals 5 and 7 - to trailer connector terminal 5. Page 8453 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. 2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the given conditions. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). 4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Page 8660 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 374 Page 9761 3. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock cable. INSTALLATION 1. Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder. 2. Turn ignition key to lock position. 3. Set selector lever to "P" position. 4. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder. 5. Install casing cap to bracket. Page 13663 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 4160 WARNING: Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp. 7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair. Page 1787 Page 12826 6. Turn the ignition OFF. 7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows: The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment. ^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON). ^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed. ^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the sensor is completely installed. ^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing. 8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2). 9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3. ^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused. 10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover. Page 7497 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 14630 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2351 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 9362 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 2267 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7177 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11146 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Adjustments Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T). 4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 4293 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2864 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure A/C Pipe Removal and Installation for High-pressure A/C Pipe REMOVAL 1. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front right mud guard. 3. Remove the front right splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 5. Remove the low pressure A/C pipe. Refer to "Removal and Installation for Low-pressure A/C Pipe". 6. Remove the high-pressure A/C pipe. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure A/C pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 6254 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 8902 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5561 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 3330 Undersize Lower Cylinder Block Install lower cylinder block as follows: NOTE: Lower cylinder block cannot be replaced as a single part, because it is machined together with cylinder block. a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to lower cylinder block as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". CAUTION: After liquid gasket is applied, rear oil seal installation must be finished within 5 minutes. Therefore, the following procedure must be performed quickly. b. Tighten lower cylinder block as follows: i. Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of the bolts. ii. Tighten M8 bolts in numerical order as shown from No. 17 to 24. Bolts 17 - 24: 22.1 Nm (2.3 kg-m, 16 ft. lbs.) CAUTION: Wipe off completely any protruding liquid gasket on rear oil seal installation surface. NOTE: There are more processes to complete the tightening bolts. However stop procedure here to install rear oil seal. c. Install rear oil seal. Refer to "INSTALLATION". d. Restart tightening of lower cylinder block bolts as follows: i. Tighten M10 bolts in numerical order as shown from No. 1 to 16. Diagram Information and Instructions Cruise Control Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Steering - Power Steering Oil Cooler Service Procedure Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Power Steering Oil Cooler Service Procedure Classification: ST10-006 Reference: NTB10-115 Date: September 27, 2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; POWER STEERING OIL COOLER SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINs and DATES SERVICE INFORMATION If a power steering oil cooler needs to be replaced for any reason, please refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE. NOTE: For vehicles built from 10/5/2009 to 11/1/2009, mounting studs are already installed. Skip Step 3-11 in the SERVICE PROCEDURE. Do not order the two (2) hex bolts listed in PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1943 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 14758 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 492 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Blower Switch Check continuity between terminals at each switch position. Page 8615 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 11998 Page 3831 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 3357 Valve Clearance: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT ^ Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter. 1. Measure the valve clearance. Refer to "INSPECTION". 2. Remove camshaft. 3. Remove valve lifters at the locations that are out of the standard. 4. Measure the center thickness of removed valve lifters with micrometer. 5. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation: t=t1 + (C1-C2) t =Valve lifter thickness to be replaced t1 = Removed valve lifter thickness C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance: Intake: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch)* Exhaust: 0.33 mm (0.013 inch)* *: Approximately 20°C (68°F) ^ Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Intake Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter". Page 9286 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11138 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4232 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6899 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 10 - 13) Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Bulb: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9472 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 12385 Condenser Fan: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 14344 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds Brake Rotor/Disc: Customer Interest Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds Classification: BR11-001 Reference: NTB11-021 Date: March 2, 2011 FRONT BRAKE NOISE AT SLOW SPEEDS APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM: Squeal/Squeak noise from the front brakes: ^ While moving forward or reverse ^ With very light brake application (pedal pressure) ^ After the vehicle has been sitting, typically overnight ("cold" brakes) ^ At speeds less than 10MPH ^ While traveling straight or turning. NOTE: This is intended to be a partial list of examples of the types of conditions when you may be able to duplicate front wheel brake squeal/squeak. When attempting to duplicate this noise it is important to have a second person safely standing outside of the vehicle to determine if the noise being heard is coming from the front or rear brakes. ACTION: Apply Molykote 7439 grease to the front brake pad retainers. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 6992 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 13425 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Preparation for seat removal. ^ Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), section SE, for seat removal information. Make sure to follow all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS. ^ Before disconnecting any SRS connectors: A. Write down all radio station presets. B. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). C. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected. 2. Remove the seat from the vehicle. Page 1425 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 10004 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately. Page 9055 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8983 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1330 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2068 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 8084 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6036 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13954 Make sure: ^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected. ^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together. ^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip. ^ Sender unit is locked in place. ^ Temp sensor is clipped in place. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit. 6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit. ^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place. ^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place. ^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly. ^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no interference. Page 6095 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 6035 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 7161 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 11710 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 2144 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3268 When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. Page 5898 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 13764 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9982 0.56 Nm (5 inch lbs.). Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) 5. If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten the drive pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments without overtightening. Refer to COMPONENTS. Tighten until proper rotating torque is achieved. CAUTION: ^ Do not loosen the drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque. ^ Do not exceed specified rotating preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new collapsible spacer must be installed. ^ Do not exceed maximum tightening torque. If maximum tightening torque is reached prior to reaching the required rotating torque, the collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace the collapsible spacer. 6. Check the gear oil level. Refer to "Checking Differential Gear Oil". 7. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Page 9429 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5016 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 8728 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 7634 b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Page 382 Page 557 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 9354 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 3000 Part 1 Bleeding Brake System CAUTION: While bleeding, monitor the master cylinder brake fluid level. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed and using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool, loosen the bleed valve to let air out, then tighten bleed valve immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to "Components (front disc brake), "Components (rear disc brake)". 7. Perform steps 2 to 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleed air from the front left, rear left, and front right bleed valve, in that order. Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 6986 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 13869 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 6516 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 1032 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 49 6. Carefully apply the decal to the side rail (see Figure 5). NOTE: Use the pencil marks you made on the side rail in step 2, to align the decal. 7. Without removing the decal's protective covering, apply pressure all along the decal with a squeegee (3M(TM) Scotchcal(TM) Squeegee (blue), P/N 051141-71601 or equivalent). Pay close attention to the edges of the label (see Figure 6). 8. Carefully peel away the decal's protective covering, making sure not to peel away the edges of the decal (see Figure 7). Page 14668 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 528 Page 4780 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9015 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6397 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 7432 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 14774 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2489 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Disassembly and Assembly Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Remove the regulator motor or crank assembly from the regulator assembly. Page 11297 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Part 1 Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 1412 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 559 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 4295 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 12624 2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SRS INSPECTION (FOR ROLLOVER) Page 4224 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 12890 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 983 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1209 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Page 3588 Intake Manifold ^ If stud bolts were removed from cylinder head, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Intake manifold studs: 11.0 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft. lbs.) ^ Tighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque in two or more steps in numerical order as shown. Intake manifold bolt and nuts 1st step: 7.4 Nm (0.75 kg-m, 5 ft. lbs.) 2nd step and after: 29.0 Nm (3.0 kg-m, 21 ft. lbs.) Page 3032 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11241 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6933 Case 6 Page 10549 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear Part 1 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Remove bolt from the top mount of cylinder body 3. Swing cylinder body open, and remove pads. INSTALLATION 1. Push piston into cylinder body NOTE: Using a commercially available disc brake piston tool, makes it easier to push in the piston. CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the level of the surface of reservoir tank. 2. Install pads to cylinder body making sure they are firmly attached. 3. Rotate cylinder body up and install top mount bolt. 4. Check brake for drag. 5. Install wheel and tire assembly. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 7765 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 1621 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Removal and Installation Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Removal and Installation Part 1 Part 2 Page 7933 Page 11687 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 975 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8076 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 10964 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Classification: EL07-027D Reference: NTB07-069D Date: November 30, 2010 FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3 The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8 405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273 2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614 APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007* *IMPORTANT: Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are working on is instead covered under that Campaign. IF YOU CONFIRM: The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative. And/Or The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis. ACTIONS: Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION Page 14160 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 12968 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3790 - If removed, reinstall slack guide. CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a gap to exist under the bolt seats when bolts are tightened to specification. - Remove stopper pin from primary timing chain tensioner. 5. Make sure again that the mating marks on camshaft sprockets and timing chain have not slipped out of alignment. 6. Tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specification with all timing chains installed and Ring Gear Stopper Tool holding the crankshaft. Tool number : (J-48761) 7. Install front timing chain case. Refer to EM-4, Front Timing Chain Case, Installation. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Before starting the engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the levels are lower than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. Page 5234 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 14051 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7666 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Locations Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Page 7942 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Locations Power Distribution Relay: Locations Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement Page 6322 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 14801 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5135 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8905 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 3411 15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield. 16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved. Description and Operation Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE The engine oil pressure gauge indicates the engine oil pressure. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied - through combination meter terminal 8 - to oil pressure sensor terminal 1. Ground is supplied - to oil pressure sensor terminal 3 - from combination meter terminal 10. The combination meter receives the oil pressure signal from oil pressure sensor - through oil pressure sensor terminal 2 - to combination meter terminal 19. Page 11720 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6898 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 7 - 9) C200 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair C200 Part 1 Page 4927 Page 7667 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14811 Page 4812 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8066 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6422 Page 13008 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13551 Cowl Weatherstrip: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420 A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9837 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Page 10624 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Locations Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 1713 EC-AF1HB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1HB2 Page 11171 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic Page 4249 Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM". - Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -". - Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". - Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER". Page 13518 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 5329 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 5345 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10102 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4221 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3777 1. Set No. 1 cylinder to TDC. - Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (A) (grooved line without color) with timing indicator (B). 2. Remove front timing chain case. Refer to EM-1, Front Timing Chain Case. 3. Check timing chain markings to confirm No. 1 cylinder is at TDC of its compression stroke. - If not, remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool and turn crankshaft clockwise 360° (one revolution). Re-install Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Tool number : (J-48761) - If the original timing chain markings are not legible, use paint or equivalent to mark the timing chains to the sprockets. 4. If removing the secondary timing chains, loosen camshaft sprocket bolts. 5. Compress the primary timing chain tensioner. 1. Loosen clip of primary timing chain tensioner, and release plunger stopper (1). 2. Depress plunger into tensioner body by pressing slack guide (2). 3. Keep slack guide pressed and insert stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove (3) to hold plunger in. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. Page 14598 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7100 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9762 6. Move slider in order to secure adjuster holder to interlock rod. Page 8592 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6447 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 7714 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9031 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7350 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 6749 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 2740 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION In cases of removing/installing or replacing camshaft and valve-related parts, or of unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance (found malfunctions during stating, idling or causing noise), perform inspection as follows: 1. Remove rocker covers (right and left banks). 2. Measure the valve clearance as follows: a. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke. ^ Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. ^ Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank) are located as shown. ^ If not, rotate crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown. b. Use feeler gauge, measure the clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. Page 6175 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12296 Air Mix Door Motor (Front) The air mix door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling unit. This motor rotates so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the front air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air control by the PBR built into the air mix door motor. Page 1261 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 13658 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8048 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9819 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Page 5697 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6651 LAN-CAN-27 CAN System (Type 9) Page 6598 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2325 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2746 10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. 11. Start the engine, and check for unusual noise and vibration. Page 5294 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 3367 4. Tighten bolts in two steps separately in numerical order as shown. 1st step: 1.96 Nm (0.20 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) 2nd step: 8.33 Nm (0.85 kg-m, 74 inch lbs.) 5. Install oil filer cap to rocker cover (left bank), if removed. 6. Install PCV hose. ^ Insert PCV hose by 25 to 30 mm (0.98 to 1.18 inch) from connector end. ^ When installing, be careful not to twist or come in contact with other parts. 7. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL (RIGHT BANK) 1. Remove intake manifold collector. CAUTION: Perform this step when engine is cold. 2. Separate engine harness removing their brackets from rocker covers. 3. Remove harness bracket from cylinder head (right bank). Refer to "CYLINDER HEAD". 4. Remove ignition coil. 5. Remove PCV hoses from rocker cover. 6. Remove PCV valve and O-ring from rocker cover (right bank), if necessary. 7. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown. 8. Remove rocker cover gaskets from rocker covers. 9. Use scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from cylinder head and camshaft bracket (No. 1). CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surface when cleaning off old liquid gasket. INSTALLATION (RIGHT BANK) Page 2371 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7886 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6620 CAN System (Type 8) Schematic Page 9458 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3167 Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Classification: WT06-002 Reference: NTB06-076 Date: November 7, 2006 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels SERVICE INFORMATION The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during wheel and tire service. Tire Changing: ^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside (internal jaws). ^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel. ^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or have rubber/plastic protective covers. Wheel Balancing: Page 14223 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 11017 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Power Sockets NOTE: Removal and installation is common for all power sockets. REMOVAL 1. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 2. Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 951 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 13584 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. High-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible A/C Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the front left wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front left mud guard. 3. Remove the front left splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 5. Remove the high-pressure flexible A/C hose. Refer to "Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible A/C Hose". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible A/C hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Drum: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 784 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6179 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. 2. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6. Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ohms [at 25 °C (77 °F)] 3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. 4. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 8003 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 144 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4681 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3841 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13133 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE". 9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. Page 10167 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 4107 2. Check valve operation. ^ If the malfunctioning condition, when valve seating at ordinary room temperature, or measured values are out of the standard, replace water inlet and thermostat assembly INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following. ^ Be careful not to spill engine coolant over engine room. Use rag to absorb engine coolant. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS". ^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant. Page 10815 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 11471 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Page 9298 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3288 Standard (intake and exhaust): 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 inch) VALVE LIFTER CLEARANCE ^ (Valve lifter clearance) = (Valve lifter hole diameter) - (Valve lifter outer diameter), Refer to "Valve Clearance". Standard (intake and exhaust): 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 inch) ^ If the calculated value is out of the standard, referring to each standard of valve lifter outer diameter and valve lifter hole diameter, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head. Page 2062 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 3459 14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N 999MP-9G001P). 15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt. 16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. Disclaimer Page 14789 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10966 Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ^ Check continuity. Page 437 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 842 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8646 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 5032 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4 Page 7224 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 6638 LAN-CAN-14 Page 1356 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7378 Page 13814 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 10014 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately. Page 811 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 871 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-142, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: Yaw Rate Sensor/Service and Repair/HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS Page 1876 Page 11344 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Classification: EM06-004B Reference: NTB06-072B Date: September 3, 2009 DRIVE BELT NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION, and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008 IF YOU CONFIRM: A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the morning especially in cold or damp conditions. OR A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1) hour. AND In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt. ACTION: ^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed. ^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, if needed. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5068 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 8786 7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: ^ Use a new seal (0-Ring). ^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6. 8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows: a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders. b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly. Page 12017 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 13999 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11669 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 4851 Fuse and Fusible Link Box Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 2278 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6840 Case 5 Page 1643 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2487 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 12727 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 891 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". ^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number 205-D002 Installation Page 1350 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 2094 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5891 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 6286 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 1497 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5656 Replace valve or valve seat accordingly. ^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, cylinder head gaskets are leaking. In such a case, replace cylinder head gaskets. 9. After inspection is completed, install removed parts. 10. Start engine, and make sure that engine runs smoothly. 11. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to EC-62, "How to Erase DTC". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool Page 3163 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 11465 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status - Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 3 seconds have elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status - IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description Refer to Information Bus. Page 10213 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7833 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3747 Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Part 1 Page 6476 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9592 Attachment General Procedure Page 12511 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Oil Name:................................................................................................................................................... ............ Nissan A/C System Oil Type R or equivalent Page 1179 - The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. - Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (semitransparent colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 7. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield. 8. Remove the propeller shaft. Refer to "REAR PROPELLER SHAFT". 9. Support the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack. 10. Remove the three fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 11. Remove the fuel tank straps and slowly lower the fuel tank to access the top of the fuel level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. CAUTION: Do not lower the fuel tank too far to prevent damage to the fuel feed hose and the fuel level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly connector 12. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, and the fuel feed hose. Page 6941 Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1) Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4 ) Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 7939 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3980 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 9856 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the spring pin, using suitable tool. 2. Remove the nipple and reservoir seal from the cylinder body 3. Loosen the push rod lock nut then remove the clevis and lock nut, if necessary. NOTE: Clutch pedal height is controlled with the position of the clevis and push rod. 4. Remove the dust cover from the cylinder body. 5. Remove the stopper ring and stopper. Remove the push rod from the cylinder body while holding it securely to prevent the piston assembly from popping out. 6. Remove the piston assembly and return spring. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Inspect for the following, replace parts as necessary ^ Damage, foreign material, wear, corrosion, and pin holes on the cylinder inner surface ^ Damaged or deformed nipple ^ Weak spring ^ Cracked or deformed dust cover ASSEMBLY 1. Apply rubber lubricant to the internal surface of the cylinder body, sliding surface of piston assembly, and the piston cup. Insert the return spring and piston assembly to the cylinder body. 2. Apply silicone grease to the push rod and install the stopper and stopper ring. CAUTION: Restrain the push rod while doing this because there is a danger the piston assembly will fly out of the master cylinder. 3. Install the dust cover to the cylinder body. 4. Install the reservoir seal and nipple to the cylinder body. 5. Install the clevis to the push rod. 6. Check and adjust the position of the clevis and push rod. After adjusting L, tighten lock nut to the specified torque. Length "L" (for QR25DE engine models): 119.5 mm (4.70 inch) (for VQ40DE engine models): 120.5 mm (4.74 inch) Intake Manifold Collector Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Collector Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain engine coolant when engine is hot. 1. Remove engine cover. 2. Remove air cleaner case (upper) with mass air flow sensor and air duct assembly. 3. Remove electric throttle control actuator as follows: a. Drain engine coolant, or when water hoses are disconnected, attach plug to prevent engine coolant leakage. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT". CAUTION: ^ Perform when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt. b. Disconnect water hoses from electric throttle control actuator. When engine coolant is not drained from radiator, attach plug to water hoses to prevent engine coolant leakage. Page 11285 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12119 1. Set the shock absorber in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod lock nut as shown. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. 2. Compress the spring using commercial service tool until the shock absorber mounting insulator can be turned by hand. WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring. 3. Remove the piston rod lock nut. ^ Discard the piston rod lock nut, use a new nut for assembly 4. Remove the components from the shock absorber. ^ Keep the spring compressed in the commercial service tool if reusing it for assembly. ASSEMBLY 1. When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as shown. 2. Install the shock absorber mounting insulator as shown in line with lower shock mount and step in lower seat. ^ The step in the strut assembly lower seat faces outside of vehicle. Page 5946 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT ITEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information to check CONSULT II data link connector (DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link Connector Schematic 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 8144 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T). 5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 7848 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5945 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE". 9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. Page 452 Disclaimer Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14738 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6228 Page 14716 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 7704 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2218 Page 3236 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8953 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 14388 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 12353 4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit housing. NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Close the lower glove box completely. Page 13665 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7111 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1535 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 13238 6. Raise the rear door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. - If equipped, disconnect the connector from the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Gear wear - Regulator deformation - Spring damage - Grease condition for each sliding part INSTALLATION Page 2830 12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP). 13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve. Page 11625 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 10728 Page 6128 EC-MIL/DL-02 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 14615 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 13469 5. Position seat cushion rear bracket out of the way as needed. (See Figure 5) 6. Align shaft linkage on both inner and outer sides by inserting pins into shaft link slots. NOTE: ^ In some cases, the white bushing I clip may come off the shaft. If this occurred, reinstall the clip to it's proper position (refer to Figure 1). The seat back will need to be removed to do this. ^ Using the recliner handle lever may assist with aligning pin and shaft linkage. 7. Reinstall seat cushion rear bracket (but do not fully tighten bolts). 8. Place seat on its side. 9. Adjust seat cushion rear bracket. (See Figure 6) NOTE: Adjust to the minimum width by pushing both seat sides together while tightening lower bracket bolts. Page 4012 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6419 Page 12763 Seat Belt: Locations Page 6155 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10896 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5200 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2337 Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ^ Check continuity. Page 10477 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 8209 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 10777 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II. BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 5209 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6318 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 1803 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 7623 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5779 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 263 Page 2047 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 236 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 985 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Electrical Diagrams EC-ASC/BS EC-ASC/BS-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-ASCBOF Page 14527 Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 4 - 5) Page 11099 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 14870 Most windshield damage that occurs due to impact is easily identified as shown above. Cracks can spread and become larger from the original strike point or crush mark due to: ^ Thermal stresses caused by temperature fluctuation ^ External physical stresses, such as hand touch, wind force, or vehicle vibration during driving (pot holes) A lead, or crack from one of the star cracked impact points can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Single crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass Single cracks must be inspected along the entire crack for impact marks. ^ If any impact mark is found anywhere along the crack, it indicates the damage occurred from an object striking the windshield. This is not covered under warranty. Page 8160 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9459 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 3727 Crankshaft bolt torque: 44.1 Nm (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft. lbs.) c. Put a paint mark on crankshaft pulley aligning with angle mark on crankshaft pulley bolt. Then, further retighten bolt by 60° (equivalent to one graduation). 17. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly. 18. Install oil pans (upper and lower). 19. Install rocker covers (right and left banks). 20. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal after this step. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Inspection for Leaks The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks. ^ Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". ^ Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. ^ Turn ignition switch "ON" (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. ^ Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. ^ Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. ^ Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. ^ Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the specified level, if necessary. Summary of the inspection items Page 10327 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12596 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9300 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 3435 5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1. ^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6. ^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12. 6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool. 7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See Figure 2. Page 47 Procedure shown here is for side rail decals. Use similar steps for air dam decal. 1. Bring the vehicle to room temperature (approximately 70°F / 21°C). 2. Mark the side rails with a pencil on the left and right corners of the damaged decal (see Figure 1). ^ This will help you align the new label on the side rail when installing it. 3. Remove the roof rack center cross members (see Figure 2). Damaged Decal Removal: 4. Remove the damaged decal as follows: Page 13052 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 14778 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 8559 Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14) Page 6910 Case 8 Page 14623 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 3556 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Page 14402 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking System 4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Specifications Camshaft: Specifications INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of camshaft. CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a different diameter from the other three locations. 2. Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal. 3. Turn camshaft to one direction with hands, and measure the camshaft runout on dial indicator. (Total indicator reading) Standard: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) 4. If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft. Camshaft Cam Height 1. Measure the camshaft cam height with micrometer. Standard: Intake: 45.465 - 45.655 mm (1.7900 - 1.7974 inch) Exhaust: 45.075 - 45.265 mm (1.7746 - 1.7821 inch) Limit: Intake: 45.265 mm (1.7821 inch) Exhaust: 44.875 mm (1.7667 inch) 2. If wear exceeds the limit, replace camshaft. Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance CAMSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER ^ Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal with micrometer. Standard: No. 1: 25.935 25.955 mm (1.0211 - 1.0218 inch) No.2,3,4: 23.445 - 23.465 mm (0.9230 - 0.9238 inch) Page 5954 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 13692 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11293 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". - Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Page 416 Disclaimer Page 5132 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 11577 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Specifications Engine Oil Drain Plug: Specifications Oil pan drain plug ................................................................................................................................ .................................. 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.) Page 11170 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 11585 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 5341 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 7838 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3456 a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper. b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry. c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer). d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour. 8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows: a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown. b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4. c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5. Page 6064 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6238 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 3813 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2169 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 6822 Case 8 Page 6979 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7685 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 7140 Repair Flow Chart Page 5217 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4686 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 9462 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1758 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 828 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3041 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6606 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 10037 ^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear and damage. Replace as necessary ^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary. ^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AXLE SHAFT. Rear Axle Bearing ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary. ^ Check axial end play. Refer to Axle Specifications. Page 14768 Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Classification: EC07-006 Reference: NTB07-058 Date: September 6, 2007 2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored: ^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. 2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin). 3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 2659 Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18) Page 14591 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9068 Page 13540 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 2451 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations FIRING ORDER 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 11696 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1954 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Page 4176 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 3981 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Cooling Fan Motor The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as shown. The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under middle speed condition. Page 9359 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 772 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 2096 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9130 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 987 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 4457 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 2475 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2760 8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket. 9. Finger tighten the two front bolts. 10. Finger tighten the two side bolts. 11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence: ^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb). 12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4). ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner. ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner. 13. Install a new drive belt. ^ Do not reuse the existing belt. 14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal. Page 3033 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 10888 Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 14158 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6339 Page 7904 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 12063 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 5424 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 13834 Terminals And Reference Value For BCM Part 2 Terminals And Reference Value For Combination Meter Page 14857 3. for power windows, operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. Remove the inside seal. 6. Remove the glass bolts. 7. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 8. If equipped, disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 9. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". Page 458 Page 4903 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 11222 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 8164 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10407 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4854 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Impact Sensor: Recalls Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS) housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 1665 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 7423 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 466 Page 1441 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 4886 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7060 EC-AF1HB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1HB2 Page 329 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 13009 Page 13679 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1751 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 11085 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 241 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14642 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9979 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove the brake calipers and rotors. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". Page 9752 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Page 8028 Page 3643 Page EM-16 ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 5832 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 14468 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 4235 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7642 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - On-Vehicle Check Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection On-Vehicle Check SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly. ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. ALR Function Stationary Check 1. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. 2. Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. 3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly. 4. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode. ELR Function Moving Check WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten drivers seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. Page 780 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2825 2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1). ^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top. 3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1). 4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and remove the hose (see Figure 2). Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve. A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Page 9090 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 7396 Page 2586 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 11266 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 4008 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2051 Page 8604 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11247 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 6690 2. Confirm the unit name that "UNKWN" is displayed from the copy of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" screen of "ENGINE" attached to the check sheet, and then put a check mark to the check sheet table. NOTE: In "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" screen, "UNKWN" is displayed on "ICC", "BCM/SEC" and "EPS". But put a check mark to "BCM/SEC" because "UNKWN" is listed on the column of reception diagnosis of the check sheet table. 3. Confirm the unit name that "UNKWN" is displayed on the copy of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" screen of "A/T", "ALL MODE AWD/4WD", "ABS" and "IPDM E/R" as well as "ENGINE". And then, put a check mark to the check sheet table. NOTE: For "A/T", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ICC/e4WD". But, do not put a check mark to their columns of reception diagnosis of the check sheet table because "UNKWN" is not listed. - For "ALL MODE AWD/4WD", "UNKWN" is not displayed". Do not put a check mark to it. - For "ABS", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ICC". But, do not put a check mark to their columns of reception diagnosis of the check sheet table because "UNKWN" is not listed. - For "IPDM E/R", "UNKWN" is displayed on "BCM/SEC". Put a check mark to it. Page 956 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1042 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1525 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 6376 2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows: [START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 3785 c. Install timing chains (secondary) (8) and camshaft sprockets [INT (1) and EXH (9)]. - Left bank mating marks (6) - Align the timing chain mating marks (secondary) (2) with the ones on camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH) (4), (5), (7) and (10) (punched), and install them. Model Year 2005 - 2007 2008 - 2010 Mating mark (2) Copper link Blue link Page 5340 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8842 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 9613 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 9824 7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". Page 2674 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 6004 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8659 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3725 a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case back side as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". b. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. c. Assemble front timing chain case as follows: i Fit lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top face of oil pan (upper). From the fitting point, make entire front timing chain case contact rear timing chain case completely. ii. Since front timing chain case is offset for difference of bolt holes, tighten bolts temporarily while holding front timing chain case from front and top as shown. iii. Same as the previous step, insert dowel pin while holding front timing chain case from front and top completely. d. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. ^ There are four type of bolts. Refer to the following for locating bolts. Bolt position Bolt diameter 1-5: 10 mm (0.39 inch) 6-25: 6 mm (0.24 inch) Bolt position Tightening specification 1-5: 55.0 Nm (5.6 kg-m, 41 ft. lbs.) Page 10096 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 3812 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Illumination Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14932 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7054 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Page 11456 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 13310 4. Fold the new cup holder closed and push it (snap it) into the center console. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7941 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13932 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation FUEL GAUGE The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit and a variable resistor signal supplied - to combination meter terminal 9 - through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2 - through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 - from combination meter terminal 4. Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Page 3282 CAMSHAFT BRACKET INNER DIAMETER ^ Tighten camshaft bracket bolt with the specified torque. Refer to "INSTALLATION" for the tightening procedure. ^ Measure the inner diameter "A" of camshaft bracket with bore gauge. Standard: No. 1: 26.000 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 inch) CAMSHAFT JOURNAL OIL CLEARANCE ^ (Oil clearance) = (Camshaft bracket inner diameter) - (Camshaft journal diameter). Standard: No. 1: 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 0.035 - 0.076 mm (0.0014 - 0.0030 inch) Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) ^ If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head. NOTE: Camshaft bracket cannot be replaced as a single part, because it is machined together with cylinder head. Replace whole cylinder head assembly. Camshaft End Play ^ Install dial indicator in thrust direction on front end of camshaft. Measure the end play of dial indicator when camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard: 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 inch) Limit: 0.24 mm (0.0094 inch) ^ Measure the following parts if out of the limit. Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard: 27.500 - 27.548 mm (1.0827 - 1.0846 inch) - Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal bearing Standard: 27.360 - 27.385 mm (1.0772 1.0781 inch) ^ Refer to the standards above, and then replace camshaft and/or cylinder head. Page 13596 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 173 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Idle speed ............................................................................................................................................ .................... More than 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi) 2,000 ................................................................ ...................................................................................................... More than 294 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43 psi) Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F) Page 834 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6652 LAN-CAN-28 Page 2366 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1836 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 8431 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14054 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8763 6. Remove bolts which connects fuel tube (RH) and fuel tube (LH). 7. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube as follows: a. Carefully open and remove clip. b. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube by pulling straight. CAUTION: ^ Be careful with remaining fuel that may go out from fuel tube. ^ Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal. ^ Do not bump or drop fuel injector. ^ Do not disassemble fuel injector. 8. Disconnect fuel tube (RH) from fuel tube (LH). 9. Loosen bolts, to remove fuel damper cap and fuel damper, if necessary INSTALLATION 1. Install fuel damper as follows: a. Install new O-ring to fuel tube as shown. ^ When handling new O-rings, be careful of the following caution: Page 4944 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1772 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 14457 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3773 b. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. c. Assemble front timing chain case as follows: i. Fit lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top face of oil pan (upper). From the fitting point, make entire front timing chain case contact rear timing chain case completely. ii. Since front timing chain case is offset for difference of bolt holes, tighten bolts temporarily while holding front timing chain case from front and top as shown. iii. Same as the previous step, insert dowel pin while holding front timing chain case from front and top completely. d. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. e. After all bolts are tightened, retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. - There are two type of bolts Bolt position Bolt diameter 1 - 5 : 10 mm (0.39 in) 6 - 25 : 6 mm (0.24 in) Bolt position Tightening specification 1 - 5 : 55.0 N-m (5.6 kg-m, 41 ft-lb) 6 - 25 : 12.7 N-m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) Page 6002 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 13876 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6505 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11086 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 617 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 10700 Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove crash zone sensor nuts and shield from support member. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor. CAUTION: - Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 8765 b. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached. ^ Insert it while matching it to the axial center. ^ Insert fuel injector so that protrusion "B" of fuel tube matches cutout "B" of clip. ^ Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip. c. Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off. ^ Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation. 4. Connect fuel tube (RH) to fuel tube (LH), and tighten bolts temporarily. ^ Tighten bolts with the specified torque after installing fuel tube and fuel injector assembly. CAUTION: ^ Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves. ^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. ^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent. ^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. ^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly into fuel tube. ^ Insert new O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not twist it. 5. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold. CAUTION: Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts. ^ Tighten bolts in two steps in numerical order as shown. Fuel injector tube assembly bolts 1st step: 10.1 Nm (1.0 kg-m, 7 ft. lbs.) 2nd step: 22.0 Nm (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft. lbs.) 6. Tighten bolts which connects fuel tube (RH) and fuel tube (LH) with the specified torque. 7. Connect fuel injector harness connector. 8. Install intake manifold collector. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 9. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check on Fuel Leakage 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking at points out of clear sight. 2. Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopped, as engine becomes extremely hot. Page 5343 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 7527 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5 Page 4575 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 12277 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear C200 Removal and Installation The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. M226 Removal and Installation The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/M226 CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 171 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. 3. Touch "START". Page 10530 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 8996 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 4197 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 1691 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4027 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1829 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12926 Disclaimer Page 2407 IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: P/N 44003-7S000 is considered a shop supply. Do NOT include it on your Warranty Claim. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Insert a flat blade screw driver between the wind-up clip (not plastic cover) and the leaf springs to spread the wind up clip approximately 2 mm/ 1/16 inch. Caution: Do not insert screw driver blade between plastic clip cover and leaf spring. Insert the blade at the highest corner of the clip to avoid doing this. Page 12974 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Front Front final drive oil 0.85L (1 3/4 pt US, 1 1/2 pt Imp) C200 Rear final drive oil C200 .................................................................................................................................................... 1.6L (3 3/8 pt US, 2 7/8 pt Imp.) M226 M226 .................................................................................................................................................... ............................. 2.0L (4 1/4 pt. US, 3 1/2 pt. Imp) Page 9708 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 4675 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 7839 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7931 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4374 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 6016 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7737 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7738 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13706 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Preliminary Inspection Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Inspection PRELIMINARY INSPECTION WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface. NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts before making any adjustments. 1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. Unladen conditions means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions. 2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. Refer to "Inspection". 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION". 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height. Refer to "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)". Page 805 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4794 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6217 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Drive Plate: A/T Models .......................................................................................................................................... ............................. 88.0 Nm (9.0 kg-m, 65 ft. lbs.) Page 13858 Page 3876 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 6696 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 6486 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7270 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 2785 Page 3670 Page EM-11 Page 4996 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2127 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9176 Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Impact Sensor: Recalls Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS) housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 8965 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 13798 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11081 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3936 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine thoroughly. Then, stop it. 2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 3. Disconnect fuel pump fuse to avoid fuel injection during measurement. 4. Remove intake manifold collector. 5. Remove spark plug from each cylinder. 6. Connect engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-II). 7. Install compression tester with adapter onto spark plug hole. ^ Use compression gauge whose picking up end inserted to spark plug hole is smaller than 20 mm (0.79 inch) in diameter. Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during removal. 8. Turn ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. Compression pressure CAUTION: Always use a fully changed battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^ If the engine speed is out of specified range, check battery liquid for proper gravity Check engine speed again with normal battery gravity ^ If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated with combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again. ^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. ^ If the added engine oil improves the compression, piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. ^ If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, valves may be malfunctioning. Check valves for damage. Page 5202 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7693 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14371 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11284 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14842 5. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION - Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. - Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal. - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. - Install parts removed. WARNING: - Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. - Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the rear window in case of an accident. CAUTION: - Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Page 11699 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 8985 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5335 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 355 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5289 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8173 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 17 Repair Flow Chart Page 9040 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS1 EC-TPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS2 Page 8946 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7288 Page 3661 Page EM-2 Page 8724 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 3457 9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab. 10. Install the bracket on the frame rail. NOTE: The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in. 11. Torque the bolt to: 11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb) NOTE: Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt. Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4618 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2 Page 11664 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9533 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 1195 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5629 Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24) Page 213 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 11609 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 5824 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6313 Disclaimer Page 12748 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3884 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 390 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 11551 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 5101 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8544 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 11900 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12683 11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4. 12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor. 13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order. ^ Reuse the original cover. ^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor. ^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb). 14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the codes: ^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function, SELF-DIAG [PAST]. 15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows: a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure 5). b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF. c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the Service Manual for diagnosis and repair. ^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this bulletin. 16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector. Page 11275 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6714 Case 1 Page 9017 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 9791 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7201 Body Control Module: Description and Operation BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description - BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. Description - BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. - BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). 2. Operation description - BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. - If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. - At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. Page 11481 Page 5988 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6033 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Component Inspection ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 12540 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 1280 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 824 Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 2929 Part 2 Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. 3. Set a new gasket on drain plug and install it to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. FILLING 1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified level near filler plug hole. Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". 2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to COMPONENTS. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Page 7710 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8806 13. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove the fuel tank. 14. Disconnect the EVAP hose from the fuel pump and remove the EVAP hose from the molded clip in the top of the fuel tank. 15. Remove the lock ring using Tool. Tool number : - (J-45722) 16. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. CAUTION: - Do not bend the float arm during installation. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipe and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 12708 10. Using CONSULT-II, erase any DTCs that are stored in the air bag control unit. Page 169 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Page 5537 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11135 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 7819 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 13720 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1) Page 3146 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 5879 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 8678 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode. 4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Without CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts Page 13756 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 12520 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission assembly. Refer to "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove rear oil seal with a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder block. INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to new rear oil seal joint surface and seal lip. 2. Install rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. ^ Press in rear oil seal to the position as shown. ^ Install new rear oil seal using Tool. Tool number: (J-47128) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder block. Page 7992 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8443 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2661 Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24) Page 5176 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5456 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8019 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 4115 b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket, to mating surface of chain tensioner and water pump cover, using Tool. Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". CAUTION: Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating. c. Tighten bolts to specified torque. 5. Refill engine coolant system. Refer to "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT". ^ Apply liquid gasket to the thread of water drain plug (front). Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". 6. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal after this step. ^ After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the high-pressure chamber of chain tensioner. Engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS". ^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant. Page 912 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 9927 Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection M226 With Electronic Lock Differential Checking Differential Gear Oil OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly or around it. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12391 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1958 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 1777 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7028 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1682 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14441 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 6580 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6125 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 5984 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 5031 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 965 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10234 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 7249 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11450 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 776 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9507 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. Page 268 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 14613 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10063 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection On-Vehicle Service APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION Check the propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft assembly PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION If a vibration is present at high speed, inspect the propeller shaft runout first. 1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive companion flange with your hands. Propeller shaft runout limit 2WD: 1.02 mm (0.040 inch) or less 4WD: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) or less 2. If the runout exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180° and 270° and reconnect the propeller shaft. 3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft assembly 4. After installation, check for vibration by driving vehicle. Page 5857 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 267 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair HYDRAULIC LINE Part 1 Part 2 Removal and Installation Page 3744 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 5731 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Classification: EC04-025 Reference: NTB04-126 Date: October 29, 2004 MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284 IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor) ^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor) ACTIONS: 1. Repair the vehicle as necessary. ^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information. 2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning. IMPORTANT: If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared: ^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists. ^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair). CLAIMS INFORMATION The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a separate repair item. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284). ^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle. ^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information. Page 10265 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2984 recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". NOTE: At temperatures below 16 °C (61 °F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) pressure. 4. Perform the leak test from the high-pressure side (A/C compressor discharge "a" to evaporator inlet "f") to the low-pressure side (A/C evaporator drain hose "g" to shaft seal "k"). Refer to MTC-96, "Components". See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Diagrams/Exploded Views Clean the component to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe completely around the following connections and components. Check the compressor shaft seal - Check the high and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, relief valve, and compressor shaft seal - Check the liquid tank - Check the refrigerant pressure sensor - Check all around the service valves. Check that the service valve caps are screwed tightly on the service valves (to prevent leaks). NOTE: After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue from the service valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). - Evaporator With engine OFF, turn blower fan on "High" for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly drain hose. NOTE: Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose. 5. If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the suspected leak, then repeat the leak check. 6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. 7. If no leaks are found, perform steps 8 - 11. 8. Start the engine. 9. Set the heater A/C controls as follows: NOTE: For the automatic system, turn OFF the automatic controls and set the heater A/C controls manually. a. A/C switch to ON b. Air flow to VENT mode c. Intake position to RECIRCULATION mode d. Temperature to MAX cold e. Blower speed to HIGH 10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes. 11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above. Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning the engine OFF. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after the refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when the pressure is high. 12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity. 13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment. 14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. 15. Discharge the A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 10015 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Page 10502 ^ Make sure to install the brake pad spreader spring as shown in Figure 3. Rear Brakes 1. This step was missing from the OE bulletin. 2. Replace the rear brake pads and brake hardware using all of the parts in the hardware kit. ^ Make sure to use the new brake pads and new brake pad shims (included in the hardware kit). ^ Refer to section BR in the Service Manual (ESM) for brake pad replacement and brake service information. IMPORTANT: Apply Molykote(R) M77 grease to the back side of the inboard brake pads ONLY (see Figure 3). 3. Reinstall all other parts removed in reverse order. Page 12478 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Technician Safety Information Information Bus: Technician Safety Information Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in Restraint Systems. WARNING: - To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see Restraint Systems. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 10956 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10107 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1745 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1576 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 177 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 1025 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4958 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3665 Page EM-6 Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb Page 4602 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7 Page 11747 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 12779 SRS Components Parts Location Page 1978 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Rear Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Wiper Motor Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Motor REMOVAL 1. Remove rear wiper arm and blade. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment of Rear Wiper Arm Stop Location". 2. Remove back door finisher. Refer to "BACK DOOR TRIM". 3. Remove rear wiper motor cover. 4. Disconnect rear wiper motor harness connector. 5. Remove rear wiper motor bolts (3), and remove rear wiper motor from back door. INSTALLATION CAUTION: - Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. 1. Clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. 2. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear wiper motor bolts: 6.8 Nm (0.69 kg-m, 60 in-lb 3. Attach wiper arm and blade. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment of Rear Wiper Arm Stop Location". Page 1370 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 13856 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 11308 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Power Sockets NOTE: Removal and installation is common for all power sockets. REMOVAL 1. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 2. Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5284 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1673 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6783 Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1) Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4) Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 5227 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4814 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3424 Drive Belt: Adjustments DRIVE BELT TENSION There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted by the drive belt auto-tensioner. Page 13103 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 13127 ITEMS OF EACH PART With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 10236 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. Page 7143 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 13612 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1) Page 6772 Case 1 Page 12088 ^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1 above. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 7510 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9 Page 1406 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5503 Page 14647 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 8136 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 12411 When the A/C switch is pressed, or the mode switch is turned to the defroster position, the front air control outputs a compressor ON signal to BCM. The BCM then sends a compressor ON signal to ECM, via CAN communication line. ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor. Description of Control System The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and outputs. The relationship of these components is shown in the figure: Page 8879 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11666 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Locations Battery Current Sensor: Locations Page 13105 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1894 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 14816 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 11350 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6466 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2318 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12616 Page 9291 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 465 Page 4822 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1640 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3171 Wheels: Service and Repair Balancing Wheels REMOVAL 1. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. ^ After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. 1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ^ Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed. Calculation example: 23 grams (0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ^ Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. ^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. ^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights. Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 7846 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6168 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 14065 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13019 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4771 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11402 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5989 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 671 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to "Application and ID". 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. Page 8373 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6178 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Component Description The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 11197 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 773 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 9616 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 11052 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7320 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 12696 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation Occupant Classification System The occupant classification system identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The occupant classification system receives inputs from the occupant classification system sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of passenger, the occupant classification system sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signal received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely. If this occurs the air bag diagnosis sensor unit will turn on the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator. Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove crash zone sensor nuts and shield from support member. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor. CAUTION: - Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 9804 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4777 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9187 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 5734 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5801 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation IAT SENSOR Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor 1. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 12267 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base) Page 7227 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3198 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Nut Torque ............................................................................................................................... ....................................... 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft.lb) Page 8346 2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1). ^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top. 3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1). 4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and remove the hose (see Figure 2). Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve. Page 8697 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 988 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-004D Reference: NTB05-099D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2011 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2011 Frontier (D40) APPLIED DATE Vehicles built on or after August 15, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Page 10067 2WD: 1.02 mm (0.040 inch) or less 4WD: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) or less ^ While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the joint as shown. If the journal axial play exceeds the specification, repair or replace the journal parts. Journal axial play: 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) or less ^ Check the propeller shaft for dents or cracks. If damage is detected, replace the propeller shaft assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to "NVH Troubleshooting Chart". CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones. Page 4123 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold and Three Way Catalyst EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation REMOVAL (LEFT BANK) 1. Remove air cleaner case and air duct. 2. Remove engine undercover with power tool. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove heated oxygen sensor 2 on both banks using Tool. Tool number: KV10114400 (J-38365) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensor 2. ^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor 2 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor. 4. Remove center exhaust tube, main muffler and left front exhaust tube. 5. Remove exhaust manifold cover (left bank). Page 4215 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2824 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace Vent Control Valve 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. ^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information. Install Filter Kit 1. Remove the spare tire. Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9845 ^ Check contact surface of flywheel for slight burns or discoloration. If any are found, repair flywheel with emery paper. ^ Check the flywheel runout. Refer to "FLYWHEEL DEFLECTION (M/T MODELS)". Page 5365 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6983 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 8111 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11430 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1446 Page 7349 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 4842 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 2199 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard .......................................................................................................................................................... 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 165 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................................................................................................................... 961 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential Limit between cylinders ....................................................................................................................... 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm Page 5701 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4835 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 7884 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7193 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 8262 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 2279 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Component Tests and General Diagnostics Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT EC-MAIN-01 Page 11882 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb Page 9771 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Control Device Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/T finisher. Refer to "A/T FINISHER". 2. Disconnect the following from the A/T control device assembly. ^ A/T selector control cable ^ A/T key interlock cable ^ A/T device connector 3. Remove the A/T control device assembly INSTALLATION Installation is in reverse order of removal. Page 6814 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 14678 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8978 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6611 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 12728 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 11775 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE WARNING: The steering system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs. 1. Remove the power steering oil cooler. ^ Refer to the G>STEERING section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. ^ Remove the oil cooler from the bracket, but leave the bracket mounted to the radiator core support (see Figure 1). > This bracket will remain installed for support of the hood lock cable. 2. Temporarily put the new oil cooler in place with the two existing mounting studs and nuts. Page 1146 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10715 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 9726 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 9796 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4083 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 10114 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 11521 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5687 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 14022 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. 2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector. Page 4217 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6853 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 9) Page 14351 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 12271 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection M226 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Rear Axle Parts ^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary. Page 2187 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications LUBRICANT Capacity (total in system) ml (US fl oz, Imp fl oz) ............................................................................................................................................200 (6.8, 7.0) Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Page 14574 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10900 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11084 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 8406 Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Always replace O-ring with a new one. Page 11371 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4441 Page 3240 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 10668 Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair PARKING BRAKE CONTROL Components Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect return spring from equalizer. 2. Remove right and left rear cables from equalizer. 3. Remove front parking brake cable bolts from under vehicle. 4. Remove rear half of center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE". 5. Remove four control lever assembly bolts, then remove control lever assembly. Page 4378 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 4589 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 2769 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 1647 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4) Page 7236 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1980 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8908 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11791 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed. 2. Remove air duct. 3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not move it clockwise. 4. Remove drive belt. Page 5516 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9639 Fluid Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 2. Remove oil pan and gasket. 3. Check for foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, has some burned smell, or contains foreign particles then friction material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. CAUTION: If friction material is detected, flush the transmission cooler after repair. Refer to "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning". 4. Remove magnets from oil pan. Installation 1. Install the oil pan magnets as shown. 2. Install the oil pan and new oil pan gasket. CAUTION: Page 1677 Optional Splice Part 1 Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter VISCOUS PAPER TYPE NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). 4. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 5. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 6. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 7830 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9213 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11115 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 8141 EC-TPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS3 Page 14446 VDC/TCS/ABS Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 4871 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5043 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4179 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 11364 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14339 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4733 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6062 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5304 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 4196 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 7418 Attachment General Procedure Page 9348 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 4853 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3549 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 464 Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE ^ Measure side clearance of piston ring and piston ring groove with feeler gauge. Standard: Top ring: 0.045 - 0.080 mm (0.0018 - 0.0031 inch) 2nd ring: 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 inch) Oil ring: 0.065 - 0.135 mm (0.0026 - 0.0053 inch) Limit: Top ring: 0.11 mm (0.0043 inch) 2nd ring: 0.10 mm (0.0039 inch) ^ If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace piston ring, and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace piston also. PISTON RING END GAP ^ Make sure that the cylinder bore inner diameter is within the specification. Refer to "Cylinder Bore Inner Diameter". ^ Lubricate with new engine oil to piston and piston ring, and then insert piston ring until middle of cylinder with piston, and measure the piston ring end gap with feeler gauge. Standard: Top ring: 0.23 - 0.33 mm (0.0091 - 0.0130 inch) 2nd ring: 0.33 - 0.48 mm (0.0130 - 0.0189 inch) Oil ring: 0.20 - 0.50 mm (0.0079 - 0.0197 inch) Limit: Top ring: 0.56 mm (0.0220 inch) 2nd ring: 0.68 mm (0.0268 inch) Oil ring: 0.85 mm (0.0335 inch) ^ If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace piston ring, and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, re-bore cylinder and use oversize piston and piston rings. PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN Page 11440 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13973 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2292 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 2288 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3837 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 9397 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 166 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 503 2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows: [START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>. Page 9189 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 11261 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 4113 b. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.049 inch) length: approximately 50 mm (1.97 inch)] into water pumps upper and lower bolt holes until they reach timing chain case. Then, alternately tighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out water pump. CAUTION: ^ Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket in installation area. ^ Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain. c. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump. CAUTION: Do not disassemble water pump. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly ^ Check for rough operation due to excessive end play ^ Replace water pump, if necessary. INSTALLATION 1. Install new O-rings to water pump. NOTE: ^ Apply engine oil to O-rings ^ Locate O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side. Page 229 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 7504 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3 Page 6400 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 10818 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 727 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 6500 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 1305 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 2457 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 5471 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8952 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 1556 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 10366 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Page 6746 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 9) Page 11198 Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7581 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 11833 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6980 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5829 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8002 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2707 Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18) Page 14346 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Description and Operation Variable Induction Control Valve: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Power Valve The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to control the suction passage of the variable induction air control system. It is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power valve actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The vacuum in the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve. Page 13962 - The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. - Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (semitransparent colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 7. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield. 8. Remove the propeller shaft. Refer to "REAR PROPELLER SHAFT". 9. Support the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack. 10. Remove the three fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 11. Remove the fuel tank straps and slowly lower the fuel tank to access the top of the fuel level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. CAUTION: Do not lower the fuel tank too far to prevent damage to the fuel feed hose and the fuel level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly connector 12. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, and the fuel feed hose. Page 13927 3. Unwind the harness. 4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows: a. Press in on the lock tab. b. Slide the sender unit off. C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor. 5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order. Page 8834 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2501 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8627 EC-APPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS3 Page 11455 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6732 Case 2 Page 9479 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4931 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 9693 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. Page 7646 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11556 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 11631 Page 11160 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5745 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 8706 Page 1819 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 6810 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 5) Page 7165 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3256 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13794 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 10314 Location of Electrical Parts Page 6763 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2) BCM Circuit Inspection Page 12374 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8578 Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31) Page 8418 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6811 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 9) Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4177 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 5050 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7247 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 5515 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10279 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 12546 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 9817 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 4519 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 4383 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 14762 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9798 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2283 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 8437 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 11678 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13688 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 1778 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 1403 Page 14788 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 5460 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 5508 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7269 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 10788 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8898 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2547 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10731 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3788 b. Install the primary timing chain. - Water pump (G). - Install primary timing chain so the mating mark punched (B) on camshaft sprocket is aligned with the link (A) on the timing chain, while the mating mark notched (E) on the crankshaft sprocket (D) is aligned with the link (F) on the timing chain, as shown. Model Year 2005 - 2007 2008 - 2010 Mating mark (A) Copper link Blue link Testing and Inspection Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off. Page 5446 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 13024 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 14512 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4810 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 8736 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 4) Page 11388 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Exhaust System Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System Removal and Installation Exhaust System CAUTION: ^ Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape. ^ Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled. The system will be hot just after the engine stops. ^ Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge. REMOVAL Remove exhaust system components using power tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ^ Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling. ^ Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean and lube the exhaust tube threads using tool. Tool number A: (J-43897-18) B: (J-43897-12) ^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; install a new one. ^ Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. ^ If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the mounting insulators, clean and inspect them. ^ Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the mounting bolts on the vehicle side. Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to specification. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ With the engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises. Page 14557 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 2708 Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20) Page 6274 Page 1232 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 1420 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5748 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 11807 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Inspection After Disassembly INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Body Assembly Inspection Check the power steering oil pump body assembly for damage. If any damage is found, replace with a new power steering oil pump assembly. Page 1161 7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: ^ Use a new seal (0-Ring). ^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6. 8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows: a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders. b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly. Page 13094 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1907 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8484 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6543 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 11604 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 6030 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10456 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II. BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 4045 ^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant and A/T fluid. Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Front DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any of them is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, fix disc rotor to wheel hub. (two or more positions.) 2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. [Measured at 10 mm (0.39 inch) inside the disc edge.] Runout limit (on vehicle): 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring runout. Refer to "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION". 3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake lathe. Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is either at or below the wear limit, or exceeds maximum uneven wear, replace disc rotor. Standard thickness: 28.0 mm (1.102 inch) Repair limit thickness: 26.0 mm (1.024 inch) Maximum uneven wear (Measured at 8 positions): 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5480 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 4096 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 2696 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. With GST Check idle speed with GST. Page 3238 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Paint: Customer Interest Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Classification: WT04-010 Reference: NTB05-003 Date: January 12, 2005 NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers) to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven. Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires. If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied, consider the following: 1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings. 2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires grooves/treads. 3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely. Disclaimer Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 851 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 14039 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10849 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 14066 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 10166 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 6006 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 14118 Page 6087 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1377 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6411 Page 11168 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 10982 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8362 a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper. b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry. c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer). d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour. 8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows: a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown. b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4. c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5. Page 7660 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 9054 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14070 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 5464 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 783 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10917 Page 5921 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 9679 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 655 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1 Page 478 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 1257 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7489 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9831 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 10935 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5693 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 12307 Components Removal and Installation DEFROSTER NOZZLE Removal 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the defroster nozzle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCTS Removal 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the RH or LH side demister duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14366 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5678 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 14808 Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4746 b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Page 5723 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Page 7257 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Service and Repair Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to "Removal and Installation 2. Remove spark plug using spark plug wrench (commercial service tool). CAUTION: Do not drop or shock it. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. Hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ^ Frequent engine starts ^ Low ambient temperatures Cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ^ Extended highway driving ^ Frequent high engine revolution Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 inch) Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Cowl Weatherstrip: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 1965 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2100 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 12132 ^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary. ^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "AXLE SHAFT". Rear Axle Bearing ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. ^ Replace as necessary Check axial end play Page 10972 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove engine undercover, using power tools. 3. Remove exhaust manifold cover from exhaust manifold (bank 1) to gain access to starter cover bolts. Refer to "REMOVAL". 4. Remove starter cover bolts and starter cover. 5. Disconnect terminal "1" connector and terminal "2" nut. 6. Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools. 7. Remove the starter. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 214 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 14266 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12774 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to "REAR SEAT". 2. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle. INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 629 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5161 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 7655 Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1880 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 6532 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5 Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 13595 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5814 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 147 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4239 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 3759 b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface as 10 mm (0.39 inch) from its original position. CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping. c. Pull crankshaft pulley with both hands to remove it. 17. Loosen two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in reverse order as shown. 18. Remove front timing chain case as follows: a. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown. b. Insert suitable tool into the notch at the top of the front timing chain case as shown (1). c. Pry off case by moving tool as shown (2). Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Do not use screwdriver or something similar. ^ After removal, handle front timing chain case carefully so it does not tilt, cant, or warp under a load. Page 5492 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2193 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6465 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 14353 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE SWITCH Description Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. Page 9137 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 13654 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3084 Page 14463 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10344 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 8090 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7563 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9542 Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4 Page 38 Procedure shown here is for side rail decals. Use similar steps for air dam decal. 1. Bring the vehicle to room temperature (approximately 70°F / 21°C). 2. Mark the side rails with a pencil on the left and right corners of the damaged decal (see Figure 1). ^ This will help you align the new label on the side rail when installing it. 3. Remove the roof rack center cross members (see Figure 2). Damaged Decal Removal: 4. Remove the damaged decal as follows: Page 11473 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. 3. Touch "START". Page 6951 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 9 - 11) Page 4282 Page 8230 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12597 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5439 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4623 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7 Page 9235 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7384 Attachment General Procedure Page 4897 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10356 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7883 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11100 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - Daytime running lamps (Canada only) - Parking lamps - Tail lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger and heated mirror relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger and heated mirror relay (if equipped). 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the A/C compressor (magnetic clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the TCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control - When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown. Page 11202 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Removal and Installation Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal and Installation COMPONENTS Model 2S1330 Page 9537 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1765 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Service and Repair Front Door Panel: Service and Repair DOOR FINISHER Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR Removal 1. Remove window crank handle or power window switch assembly (if equipped). - Disconnect harness connectors. 2. Remove pull handle escutcheon. 3. Remove pull handle cover and remove screw. 4. Lift armrest upward to release clips and remove armrest. - Remove front door finisher screws behind armrest. Page 1623 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1711 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-AF1B1 EC-AF1B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1B2 Page 5705 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 1651 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 12039 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVCB1 EC-IVCB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-IVCB2 Page 13919 c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock ring holder as shown in Figure 8. NOTE: The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring. NOTE: ^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring. ^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring. ^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). Page 1598 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4701 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 7934 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 779 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 10261 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 2021 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 763 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 7688 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3641 Page EM-14 Page 1789 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 12531 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 5896 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5434 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T). 5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 7094 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7471 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9755 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. Page 14142 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 C200 Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection C200 Checking Differential Gear Oil OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from final drive assembly or around it. Page 13866 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13867 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 3860 Detailed Procedure (Steps 15 - 18) Page 12861 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation Occupant Classification System The occupant classification system identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The occupant classification system receives inputs from the occupant classification system sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of passenger, the occupant classification system sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signal received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely. If this occurs the air bag diagnosis sensor unit will turn on the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator. Page 12692 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Satellite Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove front door sill finisher and lift carpet. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts and release the clip. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor connector. CAUTION: - Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 14011 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. 2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector. Page 6186 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9934 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair M226 With Electronic Lock Differential Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine. Page 9134 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4392 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 14161 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 10275 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6869 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Inspection Page 14274 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 5545 Page 2103 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 9438 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11368 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1265 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8648 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3419 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 13426 NOTE: Place the seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt/and or scuff marks. 3. Remove the seat cushion assembly from the seat by removing the mounting bolt from each corner (see Figure 1). Page 8933 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10340 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 5469 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 14474 LT-T/TOW-02 Page 3637 Page EM-10 Page 10990 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5001 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 9087 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS1 EC-TPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS2 Page 5562 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 11106 Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Page 8609 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6370 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 9531 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8497 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2313 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6996 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11493 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 7687 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8378 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 9732 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 1029 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 14709 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 960 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 468 Page 8565 Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33) DETAILED PROCEDURE Page 14705 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13796 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12729 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove center console. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: - Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG)". Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 8371 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5384 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2613 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 7061 EC-AF1HB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2H2B1 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6796 Case 1 Page 1321 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5303 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 10069 NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed. ASSEMBLY Journal 1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multi-purpose grease on the bearing inner surface. NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down. 2. Select snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install them. Refer to "Snap". NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch). 3. Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke. 4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the joint flex effort specification. Joint flex effort: 2.26 Nm (0.23 kg-m, 20 inch lbs.) or less Page 8796 Make sure: ^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected. ^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together. ^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip. ^ Sender unit is locked in place. ^ Temp sensor is clipped in place. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit. 6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit. ^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place. ^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place. ^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly. ^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no interference. Page 2118 EC-PHSB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 14809 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13955 7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: ^ Use a new seal (0-Ring). ^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6. 8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows: a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders. b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly. Page 8619 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8838 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 11294 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4253 - CAN communication is not active. - When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. - When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Ignition switch - Key switch - Hazard switch - Door lock/unlock switch - Front door switch (LH, RH) - Rear door switch (LH, RH) - Back door switch - Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) - Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) - Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) - Back door key cylinder switch - When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. - Status of combination switch reading function is changed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM". - Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE - Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP". - Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME". - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS". - Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM". - Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -". - Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". - Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER". Page 4266 11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. Page 2616 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 7673 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 3187 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6. Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power tool. 7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A) CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut. 8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. Page 3799 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Impact Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS) housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 14806 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3222 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Page 7059 EC-AF1B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1HB1 Page 1258 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Diagram Information and Instructions Trip Computer: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11924 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Upper Ball Joint and Lower Ball Joint Removal and Installation Removal and Installation The ball joints are part of the upper and lower links. Refer to "Removal and Installation (upper link)", "Removal and Installation (lower link)". Inspection Inspection ^ Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the upper or lower link assembly if any of the following exists: ^ Ball joint stud is worn. ^ Ball joint is hard to swing. ^ Ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive. SWINGING FORCE NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. 1. Measure the ball joint swinging force using a suitable tool. ^ Measure at the cotter pin hole for upper ball joint as shown. ^ Measure at the groove for lower ball joint as shown. 2. Verify the ball joint swinging force is within specification. Swinging force A Measurement point at either cotter pin hole or groove of ball stud) Upper: 8.1 - 79 N (0.83 - 8.1 kg-f, 1.82 - 17.8 lbs.) at hole Lower: 11.4 - 145.5 N (1.16 - 14.84 kg-f, 2.56 - 32.71 lbs.) at groove TURNING FORCE NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Turning torque B Page 1637 Page 7610 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9974 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately. 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Page 9573 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. Page 12242 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 3336 CRANKSHAFT Page 8442 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4099 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Description and Operation Tachometer: Description and Operation TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). ECM provides an engine speed signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 9480 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6684 Information Bus: Description and Operation CAN Communication Line CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. TCS COMMUNICATION LINE Description This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)". Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair. Page 7750 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 11348 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 6937 Case 10 Page 11358 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 10910 Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR Component Description The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And Charging. CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then the battery discharge may occur. Page 840 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9589 Specifications Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Specifications Valve Lifter Available Valve Lifter Page 952 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7547 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4531 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 8502 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 5513 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4090 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb Page 6608 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6586 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 156 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 13170 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 1606 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8421 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 14781 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7176 Page 7173 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6744 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 8035 Page 13799 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8075 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 2172 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5065 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 522 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 11302 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8701 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 7887 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 10338 Page 7573 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9681 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate Page 14814 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 495 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 401 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 2533 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8855 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 13603 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 11245 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Page 6599 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1774 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9787 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1043 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 8743 6. Remove bolts which connects fuel tube (RH) and fuel tube (LH). 7. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube as follows: a. Carefully open and remove clip. b. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube by pulling straight. CAUTION: ^ Be careful with remaining fuel that may go out from fuel tube. ^ Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during removal. ^ Do not bump or drop fuel injector. ^ Do not disassemble fuel injector. 8. Disconnect fuel tube (RH) from fuel tube (LH). 9. Loosen bolts, to remove fuel damper cap and fuel damper, if necessary INSTALLATION 1. Install fuel damper as follows: a. Install new O-ring to fuel tube as shown. ^ When handling new O-rings, be careful of the following caution: Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11845 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 5775 Page 14936 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor and Linkage Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage REMOVAL 1. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Remove the cowl top. Refer to "COWL TOP". 3. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 4. Remove wiper frame assembly mounting bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 5. Remove wiper motor to linkage nut and washer from wiper motor pivot. 6. Remove wiper motor from wiper frame assembly. INSTALLATION CAUTION: - Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. - Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary. 1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install link to wiper motor pivot with nut and washer. 4. Install wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install assembly into the vehicle. 5. Connect wiper motor connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 6. Install cowl top. Refer to "COWL TOP". Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1410 Page 8886 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4505 Attachment General Procedure Page 9455 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9640 ^ Be sure the oil drain plug is located to the rear of the transmission assembly. ^ Before installing oil pan bolts, remove any traces of old sealant from the sealing surfaces and threaded holes. ^ Do not reuse old gasket, replace with a new one. ^ Always replace the oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing. ^ Partially install the oil pan bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of the gasket. 3. Tighten oil pan bolts in numerical order as shown. Oil pan bolts: 7.9 Nm (0.81 kg-m, 70 inch lbs.) 4. Install drain plug to oil pan. CAUTION: Do not reuse old drain plug gasket replace with a new one. Drain plug: 34 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.) 5. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". Page 11990 Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples. Page 3817 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 11452 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4261 Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning Configuration DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: - READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. - WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: - When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. - Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. - If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. - Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link Connector Schematic Page 128 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 14765 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 8163 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Drive Belt Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Classification: EM06-004B Reference: NTB06-072B Date: September 3, 2009 DRIVE BELT NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION, and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008 IF YOU CONFIRM: A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the morning especially in cold or damp conditions. OR A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1) hour. AND In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt. ACTION: ^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed. ^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, if needed. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 8352 14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N 999MP-9G001P). 15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt. 16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. Disclaimer Page 5194 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8249 2. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as shown. NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal. 3. Remove gaskets. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) ^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION (RIGHT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Exhaust Manifold Gasket Install in direction as shown. Combination Meters Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3392 8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket. 9. Finger tighten the two front bolts. 10. Finger tighten the two side bolts. 11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence: ^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb). 12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4). ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner. ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner. 13. Install a new drive belt. ^ Do not reuse the existing belt. 14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal. Page 11554 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 4498 Page 14460 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 5613 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 6627 LAN-CAN-03 CAN System (Type 1) Page 5275 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14253 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4984 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6542 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. Page 4868 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12846 SRS Components Parts Location Page 1537 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14618 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 916 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 2348 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 10109 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12641 10. Using CONSULT-II, erase any DTCs that are stored in the air bag control unit. Page 8419 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124 Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Reference: NTB09-001 Date: January 24, 2009 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807 NHTSA #: 08V-690 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier (D40) Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor. Eligible Vehicles Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan, Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues. Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected vehicles begins on January 26, 2009. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2320 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3696 NOTE: The figure above shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed. Page 9750 11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 5265 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8245 ^ Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration. Page 9363 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6863 Case 7 Page 5800 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7372 Page 13655 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5506 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4361 Page 12952 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 10989 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 10428 Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation NOTE: The steering angle sensor is an integral part of the spiral cable. - If the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". See: Adjustments Page 4469 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 642 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9 Page 1264 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 9660 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 785 Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5918 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 10539 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 2535 Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 3721 a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. b. Install timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH). ^ Align the mating marks on timing chain (secondary) (copper color link) with the ones on camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH) (punched), and install them. NOTE: ^ Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary). ^ There are two types of mating marks, circle and oval types. They should be used for the right and left banks, respectively. Right bank Use circle type. Left bank Use oval type. ^ Align dowel pin and pin hole on camshafts with the groove and dowel pin on sprockets, and install them. ^ On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft front end with dowel pin on the back side of camshaft sprocket, and install them. ^ On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove on camshaft sprocket, and install them. ^ In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin are not fit on mating parts, make fine adjustment to the position holding the hexagonal portion on camshaft with wrench or equivalent. ^ Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins. ^ It may be difficult to visually check the dislocation of mating marks during and after installation. To make the matching easier, make a mating mark on the top of sprocket teeth and its extended line in advance with paint. Page 6756 Case 7 Page 3765 Inspection for Leaks The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks. ^ Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". ^ Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. ^ Turn ignition switch "ON" (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. ^ Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. ^ Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. ^ Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. ^ Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. ^ After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the specified level, if necessary. Summary of the inspection items Page 1808 EC-TPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 277 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 7155 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5268 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 14464 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 12457 Expansion Valve: Service and Repair Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY". 3. Remove the heater core and evaporator pipes grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Expansion valve bolts: Refer to "Components". A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt: Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-rings on then expansion valve and the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 12576 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake Sensor After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table. Page 6056 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6649 LAN-CAN-25 Page 6644 LAN-CAN-20 Page 8943 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 5990 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 12305 Page 2000 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11830 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14610 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10207 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 11374 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 9181 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7204 - CAN communication is not active. - When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. - When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Ignition switch - Key switch - Hazard switch - Door lock/unlock switch - Front door switch (LH, RH) - Rear door switch (LH, RH) - Back door switch - Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) - Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) - Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) - Back door key cylinder switch - When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. - Status of combination switch reading function is changed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM". - Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE - Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP". - Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME". - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS". - Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM". - Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -". - Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". - Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER". Page 919 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 7529 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7 Page 13594 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 10565 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ This service bulletin does not require the replacement of the brake pads or machining of the rotors. It is up the technician to determine the need to replace the brake pads and/or machine the brake rotors on a case-by-case basis. ^ Follow all Service Manual Cautions and Warning when removing and replacing brake pads. ^ If needed, use an environmentally appropriate brake cleaner to clean brake parts. Consult local environmental regulations to decide which brake cleaner to use. ^ DO NOT GET ANY GREASE ON THE BRAKE PAD "FRICTION" SURFACES. 1. Remove the front brake calipers. ^ Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for front brake service information. Page 13131 Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning Configuration DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: - READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. - WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: - When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. - Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. - If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. - Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Data Link Connector/Data Link Connector Schematic Page 3811 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9754 8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". Page 1492 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 10203 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6885 Case 7 Page 7408 Page 325 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8662 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8950 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 2468 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 10893 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 6865 Case 9 Page 2471 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 4191 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 9478 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8661 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7095 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 3263 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 13619 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 5 - 9) Page 7903 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10204 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Front Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Front REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove screw and seat cushion inner finisher. 3. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle. 4. Disconnect the buckle switch connector from the seat connector. INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8038 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 10202 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 8670 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 12720 Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Side Curtain Air Bag Side Curtain Air Bag Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining Vehicles with side curtain air bags are equipped with labels as shown. Page 11056 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4318 2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows: [START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>. Page 5247 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4094 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 13871 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 3417 Page 9038 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 12105 2. Apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the wind-up clip and the spring leafs. ^ Use a flat metal ruler to spread the grease. ^ Make sure the grease covers the entire contact surface between the plastic cover and the spring leafs. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each side of both leaf springs. (Grease applied to 4 places) 4. Confirm the squeak is not present by compressing the suspension. Disclaimer Page 14599 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9667 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1462 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13819 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation System Description FUNCTION Power is supplied at all times - through 50 A fusible link (letter g, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to BCM terminal 70, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 25, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to key switch terminal 2. With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied - through 10 A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 67 - through body grounds M57, M61, and M79. NOTE: When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime are required at the same time, the priorities for each chime are the following. 1. Light warning chime 2. Ignition key warning chime 3. Seat belt warning chime LIGHT WARNING CHIME With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver's door open, and the lighting switch (part of the combination switch) in 1st or 2nd position, the warning chime will sound. [Except when headlamp battery saver control operates (5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC position) and headlamps do not illuminate.] Signal is supplied - from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16 - to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36. NOTE: Lighting switch (detected by BCM) is in 1st or 2nd position. Refer to "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION". Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 47 - through front door switch LH terminal 2. Front door switch LH is case grounded. BCM detects headlamps are illuminated, and sends light warning signal to combination meter CAN communication lines. When the combination meter receives light warning signal, it sounds warning chime. IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME With the key inserted in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in OFF position, and the driver's door open, the warning chime will sound. Power is supplied - through key switch terminal 1 - to BCM terminal 37. Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 47 - through front door switch LH terminal 2. Front door switch LH is case grounded. BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and sends key warning signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. When the combination meter receives key warning signal, it sounds warning chime. SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME Page 11279 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4574 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12801 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 8210 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11759 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Inspection After Removal INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^ Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection". Page 14656 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 127 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4367 Page 8025 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1160 Make sure: ^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected. ^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together. ^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip. ^ Sender unit is locked in place. ^ Temp sensor is clipped in place. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit. 6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit. ^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place. ^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place. ^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly. ^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no interference. Page 5201 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1892 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 11065 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10881 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2508 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 13442 26.5-35.4 in-lb/ 3.5 +/- 0.5 Nm. 7. Turn the seat over to access the bottom surface of the U-brackets. Clamp one U- bracket with narrow nose locking pliers so that it flexes and contacts the synchronization tube as shown in Figure 5. 8. Using a center punch, mark the spot on the bottom surface of the U-bracket 10 mm/0.39 inch from the each edge and drill an 1/8 inch hole that passes through the U-bracket and the wall of the synchronization tube (see Figure 6). 9. Repeat the procedure on the top surface of the U-bracket. 10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9 on the other end of the synchronization tube. Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent. Page 488 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Description and Operation Page 4414 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Information Bus: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Diagnosis Procedure SELECTING CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE SPECIFICATION TABLE) Page 4788 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Diagram Information and Instructions Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 10592 3. Remove union bolt and cylinder body bolts, then remove cylinder body. 4. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten bolts to specification. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer for union bolt. - Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body. 4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". 5. Install tires to the vehicle. Page 5186 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7335 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 6150 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3348 Available Piston Piston Ring Page 14241 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 3037 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 4548 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard .......................................................................................................................................................... 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 165 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................................................................................................................... 961 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential Limit between cylinders ....................................................................................................................... 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm Page 10875 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5048 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4787 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 5242 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 10491 CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. 3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 4. Install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body Page 7730 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5709 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-APPS1 EC-APPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS2 Page 1921 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13645 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 735 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Classification: MT02-001B Reference: NTB03-015B Date: December 21, 21009 2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above. IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil is not used. Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift quality, for customer pay use as well. Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program. Disclaimer Page 1358 ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 6413 Page 1687 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6388 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 4594 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 614 Page 1212 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10475 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 14723 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7035 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3875 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Page 8107 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13021 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4869 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 1491 Page 13830 Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Step 5) Page 1739 Page 10208 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 9320 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9133 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 6531 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4 Page 3469 a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper. b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry. c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer). d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour. 8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows: a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown. b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4. c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5. Page 3472 14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N 999MP-9G001P). 15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt. 16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. Disclaimer Page 5822 Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6020 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4276 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8255 Page 14810 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13309 3. Inspect the rear finisher of the center console for damage. ^ If there is any damage, replace the rear finisher. ^ This bulletin does not cover rear finisher replacement. Refer to the Service Manual and the Warranty Flat Rate Manual as needed. Page 7516 Page 167 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION - In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license, front fog, and parking lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-29, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom/Symptom Diagnostic Procedures/Door Switch Check INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps activate in order. These six steps cycle three times before the auto active test automatically terminates. 1. Rear window defogger on for 10 seconds. 2. Front wipers operate on low speed for 5 seconds then on high speed for 5 seconds. 3. License, tail, parking and fog lamps on for 10 seconds. 4. Headlamps on low for 10 seconds then high beams turn on and off 5 times. 5. A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) cycles on and off 5 times. 6. Cooling fan operates on low speed for 5 seconds then on high speed for 5 seconds. Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Page 4560 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 4444 Page 9895 Disclaimer Page 7831 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 3631 Page EM-4 Page 12174 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9734 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4289 Page 10909 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6160 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4391 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s) Engine Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s) Classification: EM11-002 Reference: NTB11-014 Date: February 16, 2011 05-11 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; FRONT ENGINE MOUNT VIBRATION / NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 ONLY APPLIED VINS/DATES: R51: Vehicles built before: 5N1AN0N(**)BC510794/ 19-Jan-11 N50: Vehicles built before: 5N1AR1N(**)BC614925/ 19-Jan-11 D40: ALL VINs / Dates IF YOU CONFIRM The front engine mount insulator is leaking or cracked resulting in engine vibration / noise. ACTION Replace both front engine mounts, stoppers, and bolts with the ones from the Parts Information table below Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal and installation instructions. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 12109 1. Apply soapsuds to all of the rubber bushings. 2. Install the rear spring shackle and rear leaf spring front nut and bolt. Finger-tighten the nuts. 3. Install the rear spring clip U-bolts on top of the axle case. 4. Install the rear spring pad, and nuts under the rear spring. 5. Tighten the rear spring clip U-bolt nuts diagonally and evenly to specification. ^ Tighten the rear spring clip U-bolt nuts so the lengths of all the exposed rear spring clip U-bolt threads under spring pad are equal in length within a tolerance of 3 mm (0.12 inch), as shown. 6. Install the shock absorber, and finger-tighten the upper and lower nuts. 7. Remove the jack supporting the rear final drive assembly and bounce the rear of the vehicle to stabilize the suspension. 8. For the RH side, install the tailpipe. Refer to EXHAUST SYSTEM. 9. Install the spare tire. 10. Tighten the rear spring shackle nuts, rear leaf spring front nut, and shock absorber upper and lower nuts to specification. ^ When installing the components with rubber bushings, the final nut tightening must be carried out under unladen* conditions with the tires on level ground. ^ (Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.) Page 11717 Specifications Firing Order: Specifications FIRING ORDER 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 4969 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 13524 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420 A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 1427 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 5827 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6527 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value PREPARATION 1. ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir tank. 2. Remove ECM harness connector. 3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. - Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. - Data is for comparison and may not be exact. Page 1667 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 5819 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 10273 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6209 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10791 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1200 Page 9013 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5999 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 9709 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6678 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Input/output signal chart TYPE 10 Page 5786 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 479 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 5983 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Diagram Information and Instructions Electronic Throttle Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications FRONT WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC Wheel Bearing (Front) / 2WD MODELS Wheel bearing axial end play............................................................................................................... ................................................................ 0 mm (0 in) Wheel bearing lock nut Tightening torque Nm (kgf-cm, ft. lbs.)....................................................................................................................................... 34 - 39 (3.5 - 4.O, 25 - 29) Return angle degree ............................................................................................................................ ..................................................................... 45° - 60° Wheel bearing starting torque At wheel hub bolt With new grease seal N (kg, lb)............................................................................................................. 9.8 - 28.4 N (1.0 - 2.9, 2.2 6.4) With used grease seal N (kg, lb).............................................................................................................................................. 9.8 23.5 (1.0 - 2.4, 2.2 - 5.3) Page 1326 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7124 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Page 3354 Valve clearance ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC c. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 3 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke. NOTE: Crankshaft pulley bolt flange has a stamped line every 60°. They can be used as a guide to rotation angle. Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 7970 6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. 7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%. CAUTION: - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.68 V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.68 V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18 V at least once during this procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. Page 7409 Page 7721 EC-PHSB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 5933 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch - BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table. NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) - When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Step 1) Page 8704 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 610 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3358 Exhaust Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter". Available Valve Lifter CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, "U" and "N", at each of proper positions. (Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 6. Install selected valve lifter. 7. Install camshaft. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 8. Manually turn crankshaft pulley a few turns. 9. Make sure that the valve clearances for cold engine are within the specifications by referring to the specified values. Page 11376 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6701 Case 5 Page 10324 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14657 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to "WARNING LAMPS". 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. Page 14695 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 1428 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7835 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Classification: EM06-004B Reference: NTB06-072B Date: September 3, 2009 DRIVE BELT NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION, and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008 IF YOU CONFIRM: A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the morning especially in cold or damp conditions. OR A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1) hour. AND In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt. ACTION: ^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed. ^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, if needed. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 11748 Page 3508 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 6445 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 9570 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Page 11994 LINK REPLACEMENT 1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. Page 10382 Repair Flow Chart Page 8897 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 8626 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-APPS1 EC-APPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS2 Page 6360 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 3488 Garage Jack and Safety Stand Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand LIFTING POINT Garage Jack and Safety Stand CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9386 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5124 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5948 11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. Page 13650 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5874 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 3654 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 2826 Page 304 11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. Page 2930 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. Page 656 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2 Page 8684 Fuel: Service Precautions Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline Recommended) Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity. Page 9033 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10315 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 3698 a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. Page 5558 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 11933 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 2. Using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4. Remove union bolt, and then remove brake hose from caliper assembly INSTALLATION 1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on caliper assembly, and tighten union bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Hydraulic Circuit". NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer. 2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten flare nut to the specified torque using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Page 14693 Page 11622 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Page 11605 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 8784 3. Unwind the harness. 4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows: a. Press in on the lock tab. b. Slide the sender unit off. C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor. 5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order. Page 287 Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM". - Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -". - Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". - Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER". Page 291 - CAN communication is not active. - When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. - When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Ignition switch - Key switch - Hazard switch - Door lock/unlock switch - Front door switch (LH, RH) - Rear door switch (LH, RH) - Back door switch - Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) - Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) - Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) - Back door key cylinder switch - When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. - Status of combination switch reading function is changed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM". - Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE - Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP". - Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME". - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS". - Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM". - Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -". - Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". - Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER". Page 11216 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 440 Page 9740 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 11816 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 2003 Page 7711 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1242 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10905 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8576 Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24) Page 10106 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13843 Page 13859 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 13375 An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers) to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven. Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires. If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied, consider the following: 1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings. 2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires grooves/treads. 3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely. Disclaimer Page 9343 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9788 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14149 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 9319 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11968 CLAIMS INFORMATION Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb Page 4030 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Page 6792 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 10 - 13) Page 11821 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11335 Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications Clutch Fluid ......................................................................................................................... Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3 Page 1466 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 2480 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 2484 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7760 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7068 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as shown. 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897- 18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Page 13012 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 565 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 11003 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 11555 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13959 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3737 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Page 6362 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 7786 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11468 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 6831 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 5) Page 9190 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1107 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Connector Locations Page 1582 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8801 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3085 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly. Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 1106 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 1 Page 12372 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 13753 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6467 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations Page 13091 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9470 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6190 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6184 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 14508 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2095 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 8553 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 1930 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14495 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3781 NOTE: The figure above shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed. Page 4284 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6522 EC-MAIN-02 Page 2595 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 7994 Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8433 Page 5887 Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 2499 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 3260 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 376 Specifications Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications Page 14509 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11677 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Removal and Installation Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Page 12069 Page 13073 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4213 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 10336 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3131 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 3963 Coolant: Testing and Inspection System Check WARNING: ^ Never remove the radiator/reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. ^ Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way. CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES Check hoses for the following: ^ Improper attachment ^ Leaks ^ Cracks ^ Damage ^ Loose connections ^ Chafing ^ Deterioration CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ^ Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX when the engine is cool. ^ Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little. CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using Tool. Tool number: EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Testing pressure: 137 kPa (1.4 kg/cm2, 20 psi) WARNING: Never remove the radiator/reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage. Page 10895 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2658 Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14) Page 5300 EC-APPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS3 Page 10223 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 154 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6697 Case 1 Page 6868 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection Page 10252 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 10195 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7186 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14074 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7856 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 3825 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 512 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 13765 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2364 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 5864 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 9110 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11802 8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket. 9. Finger tighten the two front bolts. 10. Finger tighten the two side bolts. 11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence: ^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb). 12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4). ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner. ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner. 13. Install a new drive belt. ^ Do not reuse the existing belt. 14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal. Page 9780 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8926 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13918 7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: ^ Use a new seal (0-Ring). ^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6. 8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows: a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders. b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly. Page 5311 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 7678 Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR 1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground. Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V 6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. Page 494 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 1351 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8622 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6655 LAN-CAN-31 Page 5190 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 9822 8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". Page 2392 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 7127 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 3154 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 7792 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5691 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3558 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove oil filter access in undercover. 2. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: ^ Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN Oil Filter or equivalent. ^ Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil may be hot. ^ When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage. ^ Do not allow engine oil to adhere to drive belts. ^ Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine and vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. Remove foreign materials adhering to oil filter installation surface. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of new oil filter. 3. Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification. Oil filter: 17.7 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft. lbs.) INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL". 2. Start engine, and check there are no leaks of engine oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL". Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Page 7532 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Locations Power Distribution Relay: Locations Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement Page 6977 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11053 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 9414 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3223 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6461 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 9532 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Locations Battery Current Sensor: Locations Page 4582 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 12202 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Page 7584 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7126 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 6944 Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection Page 13089 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 14805 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Service and Repair Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair REAR COMBINATION LAMP Bulb Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear combination lamp. 2. Rotate each bulb socket (1, 2, 3) counterclockwise to unlock it. 3. Pull bulb straight out away from socket to release. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 13620 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 10 - 13) Diagnostic Procedure (Step 14) Page 1816 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 11570 Page 5233 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 10591 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Rear Part 1 Part 2 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". Page 7895 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 13393 A. Carefully apply heat with a heat gun. Keep the heat gun's nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the side rail (see Figure 3). CAUTION: Too much heat will damage the paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.). Important Points ^ DO NOT overheat the side rail, it is painted. Paint damage may result. Heat the area just enough to soften the decal for easy removal. ^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts. ^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal. B. Peel away the damaged decal. C. Clean the side rail with Isopropyl Alcohol to remove any glue residue, oil, and dirt. CAUTION: DO NOT use lacquer thinner. New Decal - Apply: 5. Remove the decal backing paper by peeling it away from the decal (see Figure 4). Page 10566 2. Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the front brake pad retainers in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer. 3. Reinstall the brake calipers in reverse order. Page 5707 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 5511 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 14680 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7706 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 8665 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 10326 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 7211 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SET". 6. The setting will be changed and "RESETTING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END". Display Item List Page 13042 Repair Flow Chart Page 13107 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1336 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2120 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 1114 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12199 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 10098 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7761 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5842 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 10027 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately. 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Page 6716 Case 3 Page 5835 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1540 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11246 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 9536 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4680 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 3953 b. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.049 inch) length: approximately 50 mm (1.97 inch)] into water pumps upper and lower bolt holes until they reach timing chain case. Then, alternately tighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out water pump. CAUTION: ^ Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket in installation area. ^ Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain. c. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump. CAUTION: Do not disassemble water pump. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly ^ Check for rough operation due to excessive end play ^ Replace water pump, if necessary. INSTALLATION 1. Install new O-rings to water pump. NOTE: ^ Apply engine oil to O-rings ^ Locate O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 5122 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 12951 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11151 Page 10830 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1622 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8735 Fuel Injector: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 2632 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Page 371 Page 155 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side CAN System (Type 1) Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14864 6. Raise the rear door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. - If equipped, disconnect the connector from the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Gear wear - Regulator deformation - Spring damage - Grease condition for each sliding part INSTALLATION Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments STRIKER ADJUSTMENT Body Side Doors 1. Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. Back Door 1. Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 5968 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7312 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 148 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 3770 23. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front timing chain case. 24. Remove idler pulley, if necessary. 25. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from front and rear timing chain cases, oil pan (upper), and liquid gasket mating surfaces. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket fragments to enter oil pan. - Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole and thread. 26. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from water pump cover, chain tensioner cover (if necessary) and intake valve timing control covers. INSTALLATION Page 6650 LAN-CAN-26 Page 2064 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Service and Repair Front Bumper: Service and Repair FRONT BUMPER Removal and Installation REMOVAL NOTE: Removal of engine undercover is not required for front bumper removal only. 1. Remove radiator grille. Refer to "FRONT GRILLE". 2. Remove front bumper valance. 3. Disconnect fog lamp harnesses, if equipped. 4. Remove front bumper assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8122 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13634 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9557 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 2528 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 252 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1133 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 3707 6. Disconnect MAF sensor and remove air cleaner case (upper). 7. Remove coolant reservoir hose. 8. Disconnect upper radiator hose from radiator. 9. Disconnect and remove engine cooling fan (Motor driven type). 10. Remove upper fan shroud. 11. Remove drive belt. 12. Remove drive belt auto-tensioner. 13. Remove chain tensioner cover. 14. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows: a. Loosen clip of timing chain tensioner (primary), and release plunger stopper (1). b. Depress plunger into tensioner body by pressing slack guide (2). c. Keep slack guide pressed and insert stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove (3) to hold plunger in. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. d. Remove timing chain tensioner bolts and remove timing chain tensioner (primary). CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside timing chain case. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - When installing timing chain tensioner (primary), push in plunger and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. - Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of primary timing chain tensioner. - After installation, pull out stopper pin. Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner) REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains (primary) and (secondary). 2. Remove the rocker covers. 3. Remove the camshaft brackets (No. 1). 4. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioners. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe) Page 8307 a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper. b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry. c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer). d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour. 8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows: a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown. b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4. c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5. Page 2919 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Final Drive Fluid 2WD & 4WD Front final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... API GL-5 SAE 80W-90 For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F) Rear final Drive (except 6 SPD M/T and O/R Vehicles) Use ............................................................... .............................................................................................................. API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-90 gear oil Rear final Drive (only 6 SPD M/T and O/R Vehicles) Use ................................................................... ........................................................................................................ API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-140 gear oil Systems Controlled By BCM Directly Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM". - Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE - Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP". - Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME". - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS". - Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. Page 10118 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Diagram Information and Instructions Cruise Control Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5690 Page 837 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6067 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 13608 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 12525 Page 4014 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2663 Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31) Page 1080 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Page 11757 9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool. Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refer to "Components for tightening torques". CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin. ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake". ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". ^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment". Page 9737 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake Cold ..................................................................................................................................................... ................ 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Hot* (reference data) ....................................................................................................................................... 0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 inch) Exhaust Cold ..................................................................................................................................................... ................ 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) Hot* (reference data) ................................................................................................................................... 0.0308 - 0.0432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 inch) *: Approximately 80°C (176°F) Available Valve Lifter Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications FRONT WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC Wheel Bearing (Front) / 2WD MODELS Wheel bearing axial end play............................................................................................................... ................................................................ 0 mm (0 in) Wheel bearing lock nut Tightening torque Nm (kgf-cm, ft. lbs.)....................................................................................................................................... 34 - 39 (3.5 - 4.O, 25 - 29) Return angle degree ............................................................................................................................ ..................................................................... 45° - 60° Wheel bearing starting torque At wheel hub bolt With new grease seal N (kg, lb)............................................................................................................. 9.8 - 28.4 N (1.0 - 2.9, 2.2 6.4) With used grease seal N (kg, lb).............................................................................................................................................. 9.8 23.5 (1.0 - 2.4, 2.2 - 5.3) Page 2827 5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3. ^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail. 6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown. 7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows: Page 11792 5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1. ^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6. ^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12. 6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool. 7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See Figure 2. Page 10304 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 5958 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 2089 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 12964 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4732 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 11217 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 421 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 3566 c. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to the lower cylinder block mating surfaces of oil pan (upper) to a limited portion as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". CAUTION: ^ For bolt holes with A mark, apply liquid gasket outside the hole. ^ Apply a bead of 4.5 to 5.5 mm (0.177 to 0.217 inch) in diameter to area "A". ^ Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating. d. Install oil pan (upper). CAUTION: Install avoiding misalignment of both oil pan gaskets and O-rings. ^ Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. ^ There are two types of bolts. Refer to the following for locating bolts. M8 x 100 mm (3.97 inch): 7, 11, 12, 13 M8 x 25 mm (0.98 inch): Except the above e. Tighten transmission joint bolts. Refer to "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY". 2. Install oil strainer to oil pan (upper). 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check engine oil level and adjust engine oil. Refer to "ENGINE OIL". 2. Start engine, and check there is no leak of engine oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level again. Refer to "ENGINE OIL". Page 13648 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2005 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9289 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8216 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 13686 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2481 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6905 Case 3 Contaminated Refrigerant Refrigerant: Service and Repair Contaminated Refrigerant Contaminated Refrigerant If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are: - Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. - Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. - Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. - If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. - If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance. Page 6845 Case 11 Case 12 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 4004 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1391 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 415 2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows: [START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>. Page 6157 Page 13528 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 8603 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6514 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8 Page 10200 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4240 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 11131 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14667 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2523 Optional Splice Part 1 Service and Repair Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect fog lamp connector. 2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. CAUTION: Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result. - Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. - Be sure to install the bulb securely for watertightness. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3308 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 2314 Neutral Safety Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4204 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13239 1. Connect the harness connector and install the regulator assembly. a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window motor or crank assembly to install the assembly in the door. b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom regulator bolt. d. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. e. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. f. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt. g. Install the front window motor or crank assembly bolt. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass bolts. Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) 3. Install the partition sash 4. Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. Install the inside seal. 6. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". Page 6745 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 5) Page 2816 9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab. 10. Install the bracket on the frame rail. NOTE: The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in. 11. Torque the bolt to: 11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb) NOTE: Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. - If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to GI-37, "CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking System Page 4250 Body Control Module: Description and Operation BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description - BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. Description - BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. - BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). 2. Operation description - BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. - If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. - At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. Page 5886 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13265 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location LAN System Component Parts Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s) Engine Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s) Classification: EM11-002 Reference: NTB11-014 Date: February 16, 2011 05-11 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; FRONT ENGINE MOUNT VIBRATION / NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 ONLY APPLIED VINS/DATES: R51: Vehicles built before: 5N1AN0N(**)BC510794/ 19-Jan-11 N50: Vehicles built before: 5N1AR1N(**)BC614925/ 19-Jan-11 D40: ALL VINs / Dates IF YOU CONFIRM The front engine mount insulator is leaking or cracked resulting in engine vibration / noise. ACTION Replace both front engine mounts, stoppers, and bolts with the ones from the Parts Information table below Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal and installation instructions. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 9431 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 14252 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8308 9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab. 10. Install the bracket on the frame rail. NOTE: The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in. 11. Torque the bolt to: 11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb) NOTE: Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt. Page 12659 5. Disconnect lighting and turn signal switch connector. Then while pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door to remove. 6. Remove the screws. Then while pressing the tab, pull the spiral cable away from steering column assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble spiral cable. - Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable. 7. Disconnect the spiral cable connectors. CAUTION: With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel, refer to "INSTALLATION". Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.6 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the locating pin at the top. - Reset the steering angle sensor calibration after installing spiral cable. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Steering Angle Sensor/Adjustments - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics CAUTION: - The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position. - With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. Page 12950 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4990 Page 1235 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Service and Repair Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 5778 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11207 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1735 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Page 7961 EC-AF1HB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1HB2 Page 5477 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PHSB1 EC-PHSB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-PHSB2 Page 13928 Make sure: ^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected. ^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together. ^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip. ^ Sender unit is locked in place. ^ Temp sensor is clipped in place. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit. 6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit. ^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place. ^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place. ^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly. ^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no interference. Page 1916 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 4493 Page 1542 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5936 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description Refer to INFORMATION BUS". Page 6498 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 5153 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11355 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4421 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 8499 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8923 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9901 Part 2 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. Refer to "DRAINING". 2. Disconnect the parking brake cable and brake tube from the carrier cover. 3. Remove the carrier cover bolts. Then separate the carrier cover from the axle housing using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 2. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". Page 977 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8140 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS1 EC-TPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS2 Page 14826 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Removal and Replacement Front Door Window Regulator: Removal and Replacement FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Front Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 3. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) - Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". - On the drivers door, reset the motor. Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to adjust the glass position. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Front Door Glass Regulator REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. Page 4834 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 4706 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 9280 Page 12414 Control Assembly: Service and Repair CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation FRONT AIR CONTROL Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to "CLUSTER LID C". 2. Remove the four screws securing the front air control to cluster lid C. 3. Remove the front air control. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5175 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9163 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5245 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8715 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 14459 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 8826 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5845 Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR 1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground. Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V 6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. Page 7141 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Locations Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13862 Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 13827 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 1 - 2) Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 3 - 4) Page 6707 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Page 618 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3745 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Page 6622 CAN System (Type 10) Schematic Locations Page 11098 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic Page 13403 6. Carefully apply the decal to the side rail (see Figure 5). NOTE: Use the pencil marks you made on the side rail in step 2, to align the decal. 7. Without removing the decal's protective covering, apply pressure all along the decal with a squeegee (3M(TM) Scotchcal(TM) Squeegee (blue), P/N 051141-71601 or equivalent). Pay close attention to the edges of the label (see Figure 6). 8. Carefully peel away the decal's protective covering, making sure not to peel away the edges of the decal (see Figure 7). Page 11494 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 4626 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 9733 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1244 Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4846 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1615 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5 and 6 under the given conditions. 2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). Page 9928 2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. 3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Page 8112 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 1396 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14448 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10353 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Squeak On Bumps Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Squeak On Bumps Classification: RA05-003 Reference: NTB05-117 Date: December 9, 2005 2005-2006 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; SQUEAK NOISE FROM LEAF SPRING APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a squeak from the rear of the leaf spring wind-up clip when: ^ going over bumps Or ^ by compressing the rear suspension ACTION ^ Inspect the inside of the rear leaf spring wind-up clip plastic cover for contact (rubbing) with the leaf spring. ^ If signs of rubbing are present, apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the leaf spring and wind-up clip plastic cover. Page 11286 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11431 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8214 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7483 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6386 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 1526 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 13643 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Service and Repair Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Removal and Installation for Evaporator REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater core. Refer to "HEATER CORE". See: Heater Core/Service and Repair 2. Separate the heater and cooling unit case. 3. Remove the evaporator. Page 7032 Page 11346 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6351 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Locations Page 7296 Attachment General Procedure Specifications Valve: Specifications Valve Dimensions Testing and Inspection Coolant Reservoir: Testing and Inspection CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP 1. Check reservoir cap relief pressure using Tool. Tool number: EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Standard: 78 - 98 kPa (0.8 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 11 - 14 psi) Limit: 59 kPa (0.6 kg/cm2, 9 psi) ^ When connecting the reservoir cap to the tester, apply water or coolant to the cap seal surface. ^ Replace the reservoir cap if there is an abnormality in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of the standard values. Page 1590 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Service and Repair Access Cover: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove bolts using power tool. 2. Lift up on engine room cover firmly to dislodge snap fit mounts. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch cover when installing or removing. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1489 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4588 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 4288 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 12061 Page 4695 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 10961 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 591 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3856 Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 4828 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 9832 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 14454 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8037 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Part 1 Page 7195 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 14663 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1238 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8583 Accelerator Pedal: Testing and Inspection ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Components CAUTION: - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Page 7836 Page 5387 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 3231 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6965 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5404 Page 1953 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5490 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1693 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1594 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5005 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 12432 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C low-pressure flexible A/C hose and the high-pressure A/C pipe with new ones. Apply compressor oil to the O-rings for installation. Page 6215 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5578 Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14) Page 6903 Case 1 Page 4624 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8 Page 7611 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10941 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9769 Shifter A/T: Testing and Inspection Checking of A/T Position With the selector lever in the "P" position, turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position with the engine OFF. Confirm that the following conditions apply. ^ The selector lever can be shifted from the "P" position when the brake pedal is depressed. ^ The selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the positions. ^ There is no excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. ^ The actual position of the selector lever matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and the A/T body. ^ The back-up lamps illuminate only when the selector lever is placed in the "R" position. ^ The back-up lamps do not illuminate when the selector lever is pushed against the "R" position when in the "P" or "N" position. ^ The engine can only be started with the selector lever in the "P" and "N" positions. The ^ A/T is locked completely when in the "P" position. Page 3494 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: ^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. ^ Oil pressure check should be done in "Parking position" (A/T models). 1. Check engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL". 2. Remove undercover with power tool. 3. Disconnect oil pressure sensor harness connector. 4. Disconnect harness connector at oil pressure sensor, and remove oil pressure sensor. CAUTION: Do not drop or shock oil pressure sensor. 5. Install Tools. Tool numbers ST25051001 (J-25695-1) ST25052000 (J-25695-2) 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load. NOTE: When engine oil temperature is low, engine oil pressure becomes high. Engine oil pressure [Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F)] If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure sensor to the specification. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Oil pressure sensor torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) c. After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with running engine. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb Page 12110 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Inspection After Removal INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Check the rear leaf spring for any cracks or damage. Replace the rear leaf spring if necessary. ^ Check the rear spring shackle, rear spring clip U-bolts, bumper, and rear spring pad for excessive wear, cracks, straightness, and damage. Replace any components if necessary. ^ Check all bushings for deformation and cracks. Replace any bushings if necessary. Page 5753 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1888 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3814 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8501 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2399 Page 4526 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 5594 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. Page 14655 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13784 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5319 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11203 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 3114 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Page 12237 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 1809 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 4999 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6922 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 5) Page 9793 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5114 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7569 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2887 Coolant: Testing and Inspection System Check WARNING: ^ Never remove the radiator/reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. ^ Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning it all the way. CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES Check hoses for the following: ^ Improper attachment ^ Leaks ^ Cracks ^ Damage ^ Loose connections ^ Chafing ^ Deterioration CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL ^ Check if the reservoir tank coolant level is within MIN to MAX when the engine is cool. ^ Adjust coolant level if it is too much or too little. CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system using Tool. Tool number: EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Testing pressure: 137 kPa (1.4 kg/cm2, 20 psi) WARNING: Never remove the radiator/reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage. Page 573 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 7046 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4666 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 4567 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 10793 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 13579 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 13613 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2) Page 8579 Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33) DETAILED PROCEDURE Page 9931 Part 2 Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. 3. Set a new gasket on drain plug and install it to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. FILLING 1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified level near filler plug hole. Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". 2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to COMPONENTS. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Page 7579 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 12386 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6320 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 5534 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1449 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14652 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2555 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1761 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 11336 - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation Diagram Information and Instructions Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 606 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation Trailer Hitch: Recalls Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Xterra 2005 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V458000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: September 30, 2005 COMPONENT: Trailer Hitches POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12500 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with a Nissan accessory tow hitch, inadequate quality of some welded joints in the hitch assembly may result in separation of the hitch from the vehicle when being used to tow. CONSEQUENCE: This could result in the trailer separating from the vehicle and cause a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the tow hitches. The recall is expected to begin on October 24, 2005. Owners should contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers can contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236; (TTY:1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 1422 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3237 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4696 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8877 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5145 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10199 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1066 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. Page 7837 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Diagram Information and Instructions Condenser Fan: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1211 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 13850 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 881 Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation NOTE: The steering angle sensor is an integral part of the spiral cable. - If the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". See: Adjustments Page 13520 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420 A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 6167 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2426 Page 8008 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1653 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 6170 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 1515 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-004D Reference: NTB05-099D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2011 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2011 Frontier (D40) APPLIED DATE Vehicles built on or after August 15, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Page 8804 - The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. - Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (semitransparent colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. 7. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield. 8. Remove the propeller shaft. Refer to "REAR PROPELLER SHAFT". 9. Support the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack. 10. Remove the three fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 11. Remove the fuel tank straps and slowly lower the fuel tank to access the top of the fuel level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. CAUTION: Do not lower the fuel tank too far to prevent damage to the fuel feed hose and the fuel level sensor, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly connector 12. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, and the fuel feed hose. Page 5882 Page 3699 b. Before installing timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets, confirm mating marks are visible. If necessary, use paint or equivalent to re-mark the camshaft sprockets at each mating mark. Page 1749 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6574 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2576 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Page 9023 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7229 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14403 Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 9669 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4898 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 11443 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 336 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10897 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 12534 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5360 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8594 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13099 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Service and Repair Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to "Removal and Installation 2. Remove spark plug using spark plug wrench (commercial service tool). CAUTION: Do not drop or shock it. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. Hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ^ Frequent engine starts ^ Low ambient temperatures Cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ^ Extended highway driving ^ Frequent high engine revolution Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 inch) Page 10129 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2316 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5931 Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM". - Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -". - Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". - Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER". VDC/TCS/ABS Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS On-Vehicle Service Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. G Sensor G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE". Page 13840 All checks must be performed with the ignition ON, and the auto dimming function turned ON (green LED indicator is ON). Page 302 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT ITEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information to check CONSULT II data link connector (DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Data Link Connector/Data Link Connector Schematic 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 11517 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8488 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7614 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3664 Page EM-5 Page 4902 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4730 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1885 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11001 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8495 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 9547 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 11422 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1871 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7916 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 3995 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 929 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 1733 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9323 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5858 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 6106 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11510 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12479 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 9009 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 2327 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14156 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7709 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2177 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5415 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1722 6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. 7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%. CAUTION: - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.68 V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.68 V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18 V at least once during this procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. Page 8379 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 249 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4776 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 14850 6. Raise the rear door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. - If equipped, disconnect the connector from the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Gear wear - Regulator deformation - Spring damage - Grease condition for each sliding part INSTALLATION Page 61 Repair Flow Chart Page 4178 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Page 4174 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 13062 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 887 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS Wheel Sensor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). ^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". ^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly Page 9835 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. Page 2691 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 14073 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8223 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7522 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value PREPARATION 1. ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir tank. 2. Remove ECM harness connector. 3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. - Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. - Data is for comparison and may not be exact. Page 6208 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 4287 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4393 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 8711 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1482 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 13690 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1870 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 231 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 10998 Page 9122 Page 13253 5. Install the cable securely to the lock. 6. Adjust the hood lock. Refer to "HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT". Page 5718 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 9889 ^ Check contact surface of flywheel for slight burns or discoloration. If any are found, repair flywheel with emery paper. ^ Check the flywheel runout. Refer to "FLYWHEEL DEFLECTION (M/T MODELS)". Page 7424 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 1442 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6754 Case 5 Page 5512 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2989 Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant Page 10838 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1118 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 8773 8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set Page 13717 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2) Page 1067 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Page 5708 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3344 Available Piston Piston Ring Piston Pin Page 8108 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7587 EC-APPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 11868 Page 634 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1 Page 6723 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection Page 6630 LAN-CAN-06 CAN System (Type 2) Page 1217 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4939 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 6788 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection Page 5756 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 8571 Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5) Page 4811 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5602 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 2909 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Manual Transmission Gear Oil Type .................................... Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90. Page 14198 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Description and Operation Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. Page 11172 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 10350 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8575 Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20) Page 13647 Page 1828 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11700 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions. Diagram Information and Instructions Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12148 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift 2-Pole Lift WARNING: - When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. - When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines. Page 12927 Towing Information: Service and Repair TOW TRUCK TOWING Tow Truck Towing WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. CAUTION: - All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation must be obeyed. - It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. - Always attach safety chains before towing. - When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and powertrain are in good order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. - Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. 2WD MODEL NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive wheels on the ground. CAUTION: - When towing with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and move the transmission selector lever to N (neutral) position, turn the ignition key to OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. Page 357 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Balancing Wheels Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Wheels Balancing Wheels REMOVAL 1. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. ^ After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. 1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ^ Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed. Calculation example: 23 grams (0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ^ Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. ^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. ^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights. ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 8091 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11162 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 2092 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 8824 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4993 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11862 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 2334 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1589 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1717 EC-O2S2B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2S2B2 Page 12707 5. Install the new connector holder in the holes you just drilled. ^ A new connector holder is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information. ^ Position the connector holder as shown in Figure 3 and snap it in place. 6. Unsnap the side air bag connector from its original location and snap it into the new connector holder as shown in Figure 4. ^ Remove and discard the old connector holder. ^ Leave the buckle connector in the same location (don't move it). 7. Install the edge guard as shown in Figure 4. ^ Edge Guard is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information. 8. Re-connect the battery cables; positive cable first. 9. Re-set the radio station presets. Page 11818 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4147 Page 7840 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6069 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 10337 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10842 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13628 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 2102 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1174 e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver. f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the pocket screwdriver was inserted. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. 10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Install oil pan (lower). Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. Install oil pan (upper). Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. There are two types of bolts. Refer to the following for locating bolts. M8 x 100 mm (3.97 inch) .............................................................................................. ................................................................................ 7, 11, 12, 13 M8 x 25 mm (0.98 inch) ................. ........................................................................................................................................................ Except the above Page 12173 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly. Page 7311 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 4821 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5453 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9461 Page 9482 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2310 Page 4307 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8486 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 3443 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed. 2. Remove air duct. 3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not move it clockwise. 4. Remove drive belt. Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 14608 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11697 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 3548 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Testing and Inspection Refueling Vapor Cut Valve: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to "FUEL TANK". 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. c. Drain fuel using "FUEL PUMP RELAY" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to "FUEL TANK". 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel gauge retainer. b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". Page 14812 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4909 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5614 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 5768 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3902 Idle Speed: Adjustments Basic Service Procedure Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T). 4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 11228 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12978 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6060 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. - If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to GI-37, "CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking System Page 11437 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6169 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5774 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8762 a. Remove quick connector cap. b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. c. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool on that position. CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further. d. Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube. CAUTION: ^ Pull quick connector holding it at the "A" position, as shown. ^ Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged. ^ Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out. ^ Avoid fire and sparks. ^ Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage and entry of foreign materials. 3. Remove PCV hose between rocker covers (right and left banks). 4. Disconnect harness connector from fuel injector. 5. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown, and remove fuel tube and fuel injector assembly CAUTION: Do not tilt it, or remaining fuel in pipes may flow out from pipes. Page 3716 ^ When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following: CAUTION: ^ Handle carefully to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket. ^ Do not disassemble. (Do not loosen bolts "A" as shown). 28. Remove water pump. 29. Remove rear timing chain case as follows: a. Loosen and remove bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown. b. Cut liquid gasket using Tool and remove rear timing chain case. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Do not remove plate metal cover of oil passage. ^ After removal, handle rear timing chain case carefully so it does not tilt, cant, or warp under a load. 30. Remove O-rings from cylinder head and camshaft bracket (No. 1). Page 11305 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 6911 Case 9 Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 10487 3. Apply brake fluid to piston, then install piston into cylinder body and insert piston boot side lip into groove of piston as shown. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly to prevent damage to cylinder wall. 4. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 5. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. 6. Install cylinder body Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". Page 7225 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 11243 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 6919 BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Combination Meter Circuit Inspection Page 8074 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Tires: Customer Interest Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Classification: WT04-010 Reference: NTB05-003 Date: January 12, 2005 NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers) to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven. Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires. If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied, consider the following: 1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings. 2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires grooves/treads. 3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely. Disclaimer Page 6303 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 14484 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair HYDRAULIC LINE Part 1 Part 2 Removal and Installation Page 11740 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 5237 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8841 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 12032 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8117 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5154 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Classification: EC07-006 Reference: NTB07-058 Date: September 6, 2007 2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored: ^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. 2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin). 3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 3203 Disclaimer Page 9332 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6924 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 9 - 11) Page 12623 Part 2 SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION) For Rollover Check the SRS components using the given table. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER 1. Replace the following components: - Diagnosis sensor unit - (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated) 2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the given table. - Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation). 3. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER 1. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the given table. - If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. Page 3437 15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield. 16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved. Page 4986 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 737 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 4133 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation REMOVAL (LEFT BANK) 1. Remove air cleaner case and air duct. 2. Remove engine undercover with power tool. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove heated oxygen sensor 2 on both banks using Tool. Tool number: KV10114400 (J-38365) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensor 2. ^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor 2 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor. 4. Remove center exhaust tube, main muffler and left front exhaust tube. 5. Remove exhaust manifold cover (left bank). Page 3083 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 6942 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 3130 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 12270 ^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear and damage. Replace as necessary ^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary. ^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AXLE SHAFT. Rear Axle Bearing ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary. ^ Check axial end play. Refer to Axle Specifications. Page 9223 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7338 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 14561 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11163 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4920 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 8528 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 5939 ITEMS OF EACH PART With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Page 5093 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1020 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4375 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 12800 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 3912 Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31) Page 14493 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5156 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 360 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Removal and Replacement Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement Front Coil Spring And Strut COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Support the lower link using a suitable jack. 3. Remove connecting rod upper joints from stabilizer bar using power tool. Refer to "Components". ^ Swing stabilizer bar down, repositioning it out of the way to access shock absorber lower mount. Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 7427 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 4896 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7677 Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR Component Description The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And Charging. CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then the battery discharge may occur. Page 6602 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2866 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure A/C Pipe Removal and Installation for Low-pressure A/C Pipe REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Disconnect the heater pump connector. 3. Remove the heater pump from the bracket and reposition out of the way. Do not disconnect the heater hoses from the heater pump. 4. Remove the low-pressure A/C pipe. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure A/C pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 3482 ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2488 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4278 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6774 Case 3 Page 9293 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 11459 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4173 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Page 12910 2. Remove the front tweeter screws. 3. Disconnect the connector, and remove front tweeter from instrument panel. INSTALLATION - FRONT TWEETER Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL - REAR DOOR TWEETER (PREMIUM SYSTEM) 1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR". 2. Remove the rear door tweeter screws. 3. Remove rear door tweeter from rear door finisher. INSTALLATION - REAR DOOR TWEETER (PREMIUM SYSTEM) Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear door tweeter screws : 3.5 Nm (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) REMOVAL - SUBWOOFER (PREMIUM SYSTEM) 1. Remove the driver side front seat. Refer to "FRONT SEAT". 2. Remove the subwoofer bolts. Page 3709 Timing Chain: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Part 1 Page 251 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 12014 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6304 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 256 Page 7449 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 7798 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4135 ^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION (LEFT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Exhaust Manifold Gasket Install in direction as shown. Exhaust Manifold ^ If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) ^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown. NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step. Heated Oxygen Sensor CAUTION: ^ Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number: J-43897-12 J-4389718 ^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on. REMOVAL (RIGHT BANK) 1. Remove engine assembly. Page 7949 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2527 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9585 Page 4641 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Fuel Pump Relay Page 7670 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4710 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6013 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12130 ^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear and damage. Replace as necessary ^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary. ^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AXLE SHAFT. Rear Axle Bearing ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary. ^ Check axial end play. Refer to Axle Specifications. Page 4563 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1434 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 11054 Power Distribution Module: Locations Page 7794 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2811 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace Vent Control Valve 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. ^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information. Install Filter Kit 1. Remove the spare tire. Page 4409 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 4212 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8718 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 14063 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4667 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8232 EC-IVCB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 65 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Page 7292 Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 2844 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1628 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4598 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3 Page 5901 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1810 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T). 5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Front Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Front CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. - Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. - Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. Page 6632 LAN-CAN-08 Page 6966 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 5317 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5981 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5087 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 276 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5809 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 11533 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 7985 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9653 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6042 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 7890 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 14724 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4554 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 11461 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 8820 Page 7946 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 921 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8504 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5995 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 2105 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 14026 c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock ring holder as shown in Figure 8. NOTE: The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring. NOTE: ^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring. ^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring. ^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). Page 8951 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 5812 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6998 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 4468 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 10329 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9278 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6239 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 6741 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection Page 11837 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2042 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9370 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14072 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Systems Controlled By BCM Directly Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM". - Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE - Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP". - Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME". - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS". - Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. Page 2269 Page 13121 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch - BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table. NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) - When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. Page 10810 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 12498 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type...................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................HFC-134a (R-134a) Page 7801 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11457 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 13093 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5428 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 6118 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 5223 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9820 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Page 1484 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11367 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12605 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 11449 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 14376 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 370 Page 4803 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5125 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 7861 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2498 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 4019 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4963 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 12346 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the blower motor resistor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8726 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 12841 Page 1731 Optional Splice Part 1 Description and Operation Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 7289 Page 6628 LAN-CAN-04 Page 4921 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 8203 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 1513 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 113 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9587 Page 6594 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1799 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11962 Page 5451 Page 5429 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8428 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10219 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4619 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3 Page 10930 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 12104 IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION NOTE: P/N 44003-7S000 is considered a shop supply. Do NOT include it on your Warranty Claim. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Insert a flat blade screw driver between the wind-up clip (not plastic cover) and the leaf springs to spread the wind up clip approximately 2 mm/ 1/16 inch. Caution: Do not insert screw driver blade between plastic clip cover and leaf spring. Insert the blade at the highest corner of the clip to avoid doing this. Page 9591 Page 7024 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8305 Page 13561 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 10904 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 2029 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FTT SENSOR Component Description The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 5711 EC-APPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 14031 WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General Precautions". 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". 3. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. NOTE: Fuel will be spilled when removing the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly for the fuel level is above the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly fuel tank opening. - As a guide, the fuel level reaches the fuel gauge position as shown, or less, when approximately 15 l (4 US gal, 3 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel are drained from the fuel tank. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe. c. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 4. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 5. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 6. Disconnect the lower fuel filler hose from the fuel tank, the EVAP hose, and the vent pipe quick connector. - Disconnect the fuel feed hose from the molded clip in the side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". - Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Page 3809 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1365 Page 4034 Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE Components Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY". See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair 2. Remove the three screws and remove the heater core cover. 3. Remove the heater core and evaporator pipe bracket. 4. Remove the heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core. INSTALLATION Page 3036 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14228 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2831 14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N 999MP-9G001P). 15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt. 16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. Disclaimer Page 6479 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1743 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5104 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7921 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 11843 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5000 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7663 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2270 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124 Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Reference: NTB09-001 Date: January 24, 2009 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807 NHTSA #: 08V-690 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier (D40) Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor. Eligible Vehicles Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan, Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues. Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected vehicles begins on January 26, 2009. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. PARTS INFORMATION Page 903 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5332 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 8152 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 14875 WARNING: - Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. - Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident. Page 11607 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 6076 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1689 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11004 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2427 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 9972 ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately. 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Technical Service Bulletin # 10-008 Date: 100115 Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Classification: RA09-003 Reference: NTB10-008 Date: January 15, 2010 2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for identification), AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 13637 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11433 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 13001 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10949 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5196 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5982 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1317 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 13739 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. High-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible A/C Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the front left wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front left mud guard. 3. Remove the front left splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 5. Remove the high-pressure flexible A/C hose. Refer to "Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible A/C Hose". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible A/C hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 4908 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 5012 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Service and Repair Headliner: Service and Repair HEADLINING Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect both the positive and negative battery terminals. CAUTION: Disconnect both the positive and negative battery terminals in advance. 2. Remove body side trim panels. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 3. Remove luggage floor trim upper panels. Refer to "LUGGAGE FLOOR TRIM". 4. Remove sun visor assemblies, both LH/RH. 5. Remove sun visor holders LH/RH. 6. Remove cargo hooks. 7. Remove assist grips. 8. Release the clips and loosen the seat belt escutcheon from the headlining. 9. Remove the center and rear room lamp assemblies. 10. Remove headlining. Page 1122 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 816 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2239 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Satellite Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove front door sill finisher and lift carpet. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts and release the clip. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor connector. CAUTION: - Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 7043 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 627 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 14152 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14494 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8474 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7621 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 8446 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 10745 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Page 11667 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13404 NOTE: For the following steps 9 and 10, you will have best results if: ^ You carefully heat a 12" (305 mm) section of the decal with the heat gun (step 9), THEN, ^ You rub the 12" (305 mm) section of decal with the soft rag (step 10) while the decal is still warm, THEN ^ You repeat the above process (switching between steps 9 and 10) until the entire length of the decal has been heated and rubbed. 9. After removing the decal's protective covering (step 8), carefully apply heat with a heating gun all along the surface of the decal. Hold the heating gun nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the side rail (see Figure 8). CAUTION: Too much heat will damage the decal and paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.). Important Points ^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts. ^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal. 10. Apply pressure along the entire surface of the warm decal with a soft rag to "set" the decal firmly onto the side rail surface (see Figure 9). Page 6875 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 5 - 7) Page 14702 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10962 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10580 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 5367 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5160 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5575 Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 2133 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7604 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7539 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to "Application and ID". 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. Page 6664 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in Restraint Systems. WARNING: - To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see Restraint Systems. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 3188 9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool. Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refer to "Components for tightening torques". CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin. ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake". ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". ^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment". Inspection After Removal INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^ Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection". Page 12975 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 637 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4 Page 6019 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9502 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 5750 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 3284 Standard (intake and exhaust): 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 inch) VALVE LIFTER CLEARANCE ^ (Valve lifter clearance) = (Valve lifter hole diameter) - (Valve lifter outer diameter), Refer to "Valve Clearance". Standard (intake and exhaust): 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 inch) ^ If the calculated value is out of the standard, referring to each standard of valve lifter outer diameter and valve lifter hole diameter, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head. CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING Page 10348 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9383 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 6484 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 10352 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 3645 Page EM-18 Page 10808 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 161 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4622 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6 Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. Page 4545 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 10558 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ This service bulletin does not require the replacement of the brake pads or machining of the rotors. It is up the technician to determine the need to replace the brake pads and/or machine the brake rotors on a case-by-case basis. ^ Follow all Service Manual Cautions and Warning when removing and replacing brake pads. ^ If needed, use an environmentally appropriate brake cleaner to clean brake parts. Consult local environmental regulations to decide which brake cleaner to use. ^ DO NOT GET ANY GREASE ON THE BRAKE PAD "FRICTION" SURFACES. 1. Remove the front brake calipers. ^ Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for front brake service information. Page 14473 LT-T/TOW-01 Page 13958 Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Page 14649 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5541 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3885 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 7160 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8052 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 6070 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8385 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4230 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6513 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7 Page 11689 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3555 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1800 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6554 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 14451 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3250 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 9413 Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4283 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3434 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed. 2. Remove air duct. 3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not move it clockwise. 4. Remove drive belt. Page 8041 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VSS Description The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Idle speed ............................................................................................................................................ .................... More than 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi) 2,000 ................................................................ ...................................................................................................... More than 294 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43 psi) Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F) Page 4072 Page 9296 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 4060 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 13503 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 1136 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Apply compressor oil to the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 10363 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VSS Description The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. Page 7235 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9220 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12547 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9) Page 3684 20. Remove front timing chain case as follows: a. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown. b. Insert suitable tool into the notch at the top of the front timing chain case as shown (1). c. Pry off case by moving tool as shown (2). - Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: - Do not use screwdriver or something similar. - After removal, handle front timing chain case carefully so it does not twist, bend, or warp under a load. 21. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case. 22. If necessary, remove water pump cover and chain tensioner cover from front timing chain case. - Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) Page 13621 Page 7183 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 1272 Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures With Manufacturer's Scan Tool (CONSULT-II) DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. 6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Combination Switch Reading Function Combination Switch Reading Function For details, refer to Body Control System, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION". Page 7462 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations Page 13816 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 3294 ^ Measure the outer diameter at 1/2 height of valve lifter with micrometer since valve lifter is in barrel shape. Standard (intake and exhaust): 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 inch) VALVE LIFTER HOLE DIAMETER ^ Measure the inner diameter of valve lifter hole of cylinder head with inside micrometer. Standard (intake and exhaust): 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 inch) VALVE LIFTER CLEARANCE ^ (Valve lifter clearance) = (Valve lifter hole diameter) - (Valve lifter outer diameter), Refer to "Valve Clearance". Standard (intake and exhaust): 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 inch) ^ If the calculated value is out of the standard, referring to each standard of valve lifter outer diameter and valve lifter hole diameter, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head. INSTALLATION 1. Install timing chain tensioners (secondary) on both sides of cylinder head. ^ Install timing chain tensioner with its stopper pin attached. ^ Install timing chain tensioner with sliding part facing downward on right-side cylinder head, and with sliding part facing upward on left-side cylinder head. ^ Install new O-rings as shown. 2. Install valve lifters. ^ Install it in the original position. 3. Install camshafts. ^ Install camshaft with dowel pin attached to its front end face on the exhaust side. Page 6121 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 12591 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 8473 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5816 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 3726 6-25: 12.7 Nm (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft. lbs.) e. After all bolts tightened, retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. 14. Install two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in numerical order as shown. Front oil pan bolt torque: 22.0 Nm (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft. lbs.) 15. Install right and left intake valve timing control covers as follows: a. Install new seal rings in shaft grooves. b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to intake valve timing control covers as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". c. Install new collared O-rings in front timing chain case oil hole (left and right sides). d. Being careful not to move seal ring from the installation groove, align dowel pins on front timing chain case with the holes to install intake valve timing control covers. ^ Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. 16. Install crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Install crankshaft pulley, taking care not to damage front oil seal. ^ When press-fitting crankshaft pulley with plastic hammer, tap on its center portion (not circumference). b. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt. Page 3577 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: ^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. ^ Oil pressure check should be done in "Parking position" (A/T models). 1. Check engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL". 2. Remove undercover with power tool. 3. Disconnect oil pressure sensor harness connector. 4. Disconnect harness connector at oil pressure sensor, and remove oil pressure sensor. CAUTION: Do not drop or shock oil pressure sensor. 5. Install Tools. Tool numbers ST25051001 (J-25695-1) ST25052000 (J-25695-2) 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load. NOTE: When engine oil temperature is low, engine oil pressure becomes high. Engine oil pressure [Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F)] If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure sensor to the specification. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Oil pressure sensor torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) c. After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with running engine. Page 2886 Coolant: Application and ID ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary. CAUTION: ^ When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water or distilled water. ^ Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system. Page 822 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7520 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11) Page 6918 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection Page 12049 9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool. Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refer to "Components for tightening torques". CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin. ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake". ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". ^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment". Page 6832 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 9) Page 2479 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9725 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 60 Page 10524 2. Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the front brake pad retainers in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer. 3. Reinstall the brake calipers in reverse order. Page 4097 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13188 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 14576 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 11776 ^ This will position the two new oil cooler brackets (see Figure 2). ^ There is no need to connect the oil cooler hoses at this time. 3. Using the added brackets, mark the location of the two (2) new holes to be drilled with a suitable marker (see Figure 3). 4. After marking, dismount and move the new oil cooler out of the way. 5. Place suitable protective covering (approx. 10 x 20cm) in between the condenser and the area to be drilled (see Figure 4). ^ Support the covering by clamping it to the radiator support bracket see Figure 4). Page 12275 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6. Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power tool. 7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A) CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut. 8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. Page 2251 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation Occupant Classification System The occupant classification system identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The occupant classification system receives inputs from the occupant classification system sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of passenger, the occupant classification system sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signal received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely. If this occurs the air bag diagnosis sensor unit will turn on the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator. Page 668 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 3418 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 4510 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 11381 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4267 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. Page 3668 Page EM-9 Page 942 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Page 11057 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 10367 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedures Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedures Classification: EM09-012 Reference: NTB10-001 Date: January 4, 2010 2005-2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; REVISED VQ40 ENGINE TIMING CHAIN PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) - VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the VQ40 engine front timing chain case and timing chains (primary and secondary) have been updated to no longer require removal of the rocker covers and intake collector. In addition, new removal and installation procedures have been added for the timing chain tensioners (primary and secondary) and secondary timing chain tensioner shoe. Nissan Service Manuals for 2005-2010 Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown in this bulletin for any VQ40 engine front timing chain case, timing chain, or timing chain tensioner-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. ON-VEHICLE REPAIR - FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE Page 7523 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1 Page 1825 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4095 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 4408 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 11851 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions. Page 13600 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 2071 EC-TPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS3 Page 6073 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7795 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 836 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 2054 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1026 Service and Repair Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to "REMOVAL". 3. Disconnect the steering wheel switches. 4. Remove the steering wheel center nut. 5. Remove the steering wheel, using Tools. Tool number: A: - (J-1859A) B: - (J-42578) CAUTION: Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position. 6. Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damage is found, replace the steering wheel. ^ Remove the steering wheel rear cover and steering wheel switches, if required. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Align the spiral cable correctly when installing the steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.6 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the locating pin at the top. CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap during steering operation if the cable is installed in an improper position or if the steering wheel is turned beyond the limited number of turns with the steering linkage disconnected. (The spiral cable can be turned up to 2.6 turns from the neutral position to both the right and left.) Page 13064 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 14352 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9518 Location of Electrical Parts Page 4481 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 2598 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 12389 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4482 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 8131 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13740 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 4941 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1529 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 10516 ^ Make sure the shims are installed as shown in Figure 1. ^ Apply Molykote(R) M77 grease to the back side of the outboard brake pads ONLY (see Figure 1). ^ Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the pad retainers in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ NEVER interchange the greases used in this bulletin. These greases have completely different characteristics and properties. They are only compatible with the specific areas they are intended for. ^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer. Page 8172 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6057 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12301 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Air Mix Door Motor AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Components Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY". 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10351 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5615 Page 12995 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7133 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 9593 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 1861 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6953 Information Bus: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR ECM Page 8669 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8166 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11366 Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4317 Page 11806 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the following items are found. ^ Deformed or damaged pulley, bracket, connector or suction pipe. ^ Oil leakage from the suction pipe or connector. DISASSEMBLY NOTE: Mount the power steering oil pump in a vise as needed. 1. Remove the connector bolt, connector and copper washers. CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washers. 2. Remove the suction pipe and O-ring. CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring. 3. Remove the pulley. 4. Remove the bracket bolts and bracket. ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse the copper gaskets ^ Do not reuse the O-ring. Apply a coat of Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent to the O-ring. Page 11326 Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement Page 6298 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 5631 Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31) Page 4585 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS LAN System Component Parts Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9191 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 7749 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 10112 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9469 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5197 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Specifications Valve Seat: Specifications Page 7168 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4805 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7412 Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124 Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Reference: NTB09-001 Date: January 24, 2009 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807 NHTSA #: 08V-690 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier (D40) Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor. Eligible Vehicles Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan, Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues. Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected vehicles begins on January 26, 2009. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. PARTS INFORMATION Page 13709 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5802 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor (1) terminals 5 and 6 under the given conditions. 2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). Page 9194 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9668 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 7337 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 258 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8448 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5497 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 8584 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. a. Pull the connector lock back to unlock the connector from the accelerator pedal position sensor as shown. b. Pull up on the connector to disconnect it from the accelerator pedal position sensor as shown. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Accelerator pedal total pedal: 48 mm (1.89 in) applied stroke "A" - Check that the accelerator pedal smoothly returns to the original position. - Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to "DTC P2138 APP SENSOR". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2138 CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Blower Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4659 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 160 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic Page 11239 Repair Flow Chart Page 14662 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14407 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation For details, refer to "SPIRAL CABLE". Page 2540 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 13659 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10787 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5169 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 5783 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11111 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6771 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 10255 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14528 Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures With Manufacturer's Scan Tool (CONSULT-II) DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. 6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Combination Switch Reading Function Combination Switch Reading Function For details, refer to Body Control System, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION". Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 14497 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 10164 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 2053 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4157 Page 1527 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4342 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 6195 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13585 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9620 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5057 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1843 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7047 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 8823 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 4181 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 5203 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10879 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 13917 Make sure: ^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected. ^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together. ^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip. ^ Sender unit is locked in place. ^ Temp sensor is clipped in place. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit. 6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit. ^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place. ^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place. ^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly. ^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no interference. Page 14260 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 14310 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 1904 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 10276 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6743 Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2) IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 1) IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 11801 5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1. ^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6. ^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12. 6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool. 7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See Figure 2. Page 12377 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14603 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8476 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3653 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Page 12029 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1233 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4086 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3086 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Page 7012 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 6683 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3 Input/output signal chart Locations Variable Induction Control Actuator: Locations Page 1129 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 13931 e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver. f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the pocket screwdriver was inserted. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. 10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 3182 ^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear and damage. Replace as necessary ^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary. ^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AXLE SHAFT. Rear Axle Bearing ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary. ^ Check axial end play. Refer to Axle Specifications. Page 5626 Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14) Page 14284 Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Step 6) Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes) Page 6024 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 3678 Page EM-19 Page 3865 Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33) DETAILED PROCEDURE Page 6471 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8817 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6369 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 12541 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1240 Front Page 7997 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3906 Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9) Page 14605 Page 8475 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1926 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2198 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 5833 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6974 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6757 Case 8 Page 8676 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6950 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 7 - 8) Page 6925 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 12 - 14) IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Page 11123 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 7754 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6973 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7093 Page 8937 Page 10603 REAR DRUM BRAKE Page 198 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5243 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 13590 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1547 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6267 Page 8557 Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5) Page 7435 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 4754 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 13571 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 135 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9299 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 14719 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10834 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 2401 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 4610 Page 13549 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 8095 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 604 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4827 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 3783 a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. Page 14145 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6698 Case 2 Page 10192 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13478 5. Position seat cushion rear bracket out of the way as needed. (See Figure 5) 6. Align shaft linkage on both inner and outer sides by inserting pins into shaft link slots. NOTE: ^ In some cases, the white bushing I clip may come off the shaft. If this occurred, reinstall the clip to it's proper position (refer to Figure 1). The seat back will need to be removed to do this. ^ Using the recliner handle lever may assist with aligning pin and shaft linkage. 7. Reinstall seat cushion rear bracket (but do not fully tighten bolts). 8. Place seat on its side. 9. Adjust seat cushion rear bracket. (See Figure 6) NOTE: Adjust to the minimum width by pushing both seat sides together while tightening lower bracket bolts. Page 1629 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13017 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 1893 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 2950 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 2160 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4715 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4183 Page 12024 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7112 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 14254 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9777 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7979 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 645 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation ECM Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. Page 11356 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 963 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4435 Page 1013 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 513 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 2110 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7283 Page 2280 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7860 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 7162 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14083 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate Locations Location of Electrical Parts Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Evaporative Canister Filter: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Classification: EC07-006 Reference: NTB07-058 Date: September 6, 2007 2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored: ^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. 2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin). 3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 5960 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Page 9091 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T). 5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 1533 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4511 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 8732 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation INJECTOR CIRCUIT Component Description The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. Page 1936 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 14846 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the luggage side upper finisher. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". a. Disconnect the antenna. b. If the window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. c. Remove the glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal. - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: - Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. - Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the glass in case of an accident. CAUTION: - Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Repairing Water Leaks for Side Window Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the side window area while pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Page 9417 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6769 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 12 - 14) IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Oil Capacity Drain and refill (Approximate) With oil filter change .......................................................................................................................................................... 5 3/8 qt. (4 1/2 Imp qts., 5.1 L) Without oil filter change ...................................................................................................................................................... 5 1/8 qt. (4 1/4 Imp qts., 4.8 L) Page 4385 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 1690 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4905 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 10789 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8656 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Fuse and Fusible Link Box Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 2618 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 12320 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 7987 Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Classification: EL07-027D Reference: NTB07-069D Date: November 30, 2010 FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3 The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8 405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273 2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614 APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007* *IMPORTANT: Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are working on is instead covered under that Campaign. IF YOU CONFIRM: The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative. And/Or The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis. ACTIONS: Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5763 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to Drain and Refill. NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle. 3. Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body from the vehicle. M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Classification: MT02-001B Reference: NTB03-015B Date: December 21, 21009 2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above. IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil is not used. Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift quality, for customer pay use as well. Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program. Disclaimer Page 12994 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6512 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6 Page 9792 Page 11756 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6. Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power tool. 7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A) CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut. 8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. Page 4698 EC-APPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS3 Page 2049 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 8157 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 129 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 279 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 6639 LAN-CAN-15 CAN System (Type 5) Page 11290 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5411 Page 11695 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 13547 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Components Page 10489 CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten bolts to specification. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer for union bolt. - Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body. 4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". 5. Install tires to the vehicle. Disassembly and Assembly Part 1 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Page 5283 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 14584 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7536 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 5520 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Diagnostic Aids Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9818 11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 5514 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7493 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Description and Operation Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for engine control. Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 14726 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 5231 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5278 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7580 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8986 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 188 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1440 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5859 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 11442 Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a) Capacity .......................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. 0.70 kg (1.54 lb) Page 5742 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7438 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 1983 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 2088 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5795 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8644 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6384 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 55 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 14440 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 14157 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12030 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5419 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 788 Page 6491 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 12762 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications Clutch Fluid ......................................................................................................................... Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3 Page 592 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 14394 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8231 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVCB1 EC-IVCB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-IVCB2 Systems Controlled By BCM Directly Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM". - Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE - Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP". - Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME". - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS". - Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. Page 254 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 11074 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10573 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 1756 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5932 Body Control Module: Description and Operation BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description - BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. Description - BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. - BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). 2. Operation description - BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. - If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. - At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. Page 6610 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8871 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5843 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10125 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2449 Page 6094 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 13101 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6421 Page 13861 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12330 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 6579 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9269 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6497 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 332 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4673 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1395 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 131 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7050 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4290 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1256 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Service and Repair Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP Removal NOTE: Reach through engine room for bulb replacement access. 1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely for watertightness. Page 8977 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5349 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose. 3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting their joints. ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^ Do not shock it. ^ Do not disassemble it. ^ Do not touch its sensor. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^ If anything found, replace air duct. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly. Page 12966 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Page 7417 Page 14437 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 7478 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11089 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 11961 Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples. Page 14568 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1771 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 13060 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Page 7528 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6 Page 3904 Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 1228 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10799 Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 3944 ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 5 cylinder at compression TDC 3. For the measured value out of the standard, perform adjustment. Refer to EM-86, "ADJUSTMENT". See: Adjustments Page 14270 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9141 Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Description and Operation VIAS Control Solenoid Valve The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve actuator. Page 7253 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 5204 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 10861 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1400 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6843 Case 8 Page 4915 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 11688 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 11249 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Tightening Torques & Sequences Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences Exhaust Manifold LEFT BANK ^ If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud torque ..................................................................................................................................... 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) ^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown. NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step. RIGHT BANK ^ If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud torque ..................................................................................................................................... 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) ^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown. NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step. Page 2228 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Connect C-III to the vehicle. 3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs. a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode. b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST]. ^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function. ^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure. ^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this bulletin. NOTE: All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with this procedure. 4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle. 5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds. Engine Control Component Parts Location Power Distribution Module: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 9180 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 7597 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5354 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 6981 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Page 7661 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6387 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 13793 Page 1108 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1380 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11225 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4088 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 938 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1329 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 12025 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1357 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7791 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 9374 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13881 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 14154 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 11906 9. Remove the high pressure and low pressure piping from the steering gear assembly, then drain the fluid from the piping. 10. Remove the bolt from the lower joint of the lower joint shaft, then separate the lower joint from the steering gear assembly. CAUTION: ^ Do not damage the lower joint. 11. Remove the nuts and bolts of the steering gear assembly, using power tool, then remove the steering gear assembly from the vehicle. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ With the steering wheel in the straight ahead position, align the slit of the lower joint with the projection on the dust cover. Insert the joint until surface A contacts surface B. ^ After removing/installing or replacing steering components, check wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment". ^ After adjusting wheel alignment, adjust neutral position of the steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". ^ Bleed the air from the steering hydraulic system. Refer to "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System". INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ Check that the steering wheel turns smoothly to the left and right locks. ^ Check that the number of turns are the same from the straight-forward position to the left and right locks. ^ Check that the steering wheel is in the neutral position when driving straight ahead. Page 6995 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1073 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy. 5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical connector. 6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal. Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open Classification: RS05-006 Reference: NTB06-046 Date: June 13, 2006 2005 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; DRIVER'S SEAT SIDE AIR BAG OPEN CIRCUIT (DTC B1134) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) 2005 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM An "open circuit" DTC code (SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] /B1134) is stored in the SRS control unit, and The connector for the driver's seat side impact air bag module is disconnected (either completely or partially, NOTE: If CONSULT-II shown the above code (B1134), and the driver's seat side air bag connector is not disconnected, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ACTION Change the location of the driver's seat side impact air bag connector by installing the kit listed in the Parts Information. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 13703 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10991 Page 8358 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace Vent Control Valve 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. ^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information. Install Filter Kit 1. Remove the spare tire. Page 13684 Page 4737 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1187 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9368 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6509 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3 Page 5767 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5826 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9058 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8805 Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: - The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. - Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (semitransparent colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. Page 8318 Page 5964 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 5906 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5702 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5941 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Work Support WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 158 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4013 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6750 Case 1 Page 4757 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13098 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1493 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13249 Hood Latch: Adjustments HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT 1. Move the hood lock to the left or right so that striker center is vertically aligned with hood lock center (when viewed from vehicle front). 2. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height or by pressing it lightly approx. 3 kg (29 N, 7lb). CAUTION: Do not drop the hood from 300 mm (11.81 in) height or higher. 3. After adjusting hood lock, tighten the lock bolts to the specified torque. Page 391 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 11967 PARTS INFORMATION Page 162 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - Daytime running lamps (Canada only) - Parking lamps - Tail lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger and heated mirror relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger and heated mirror relay (if equipped). 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the A/C compressor (magnetic clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the TCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control - When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown. Page 13000 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9584 Page 8452 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. Page 12308 RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCTS Removal 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the RH or LH ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the defroster nozzle. 3. Remove the RH and LH ventilator ducts. 4. Remove the RH and LH side demister ducts. 5. Remove the center ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the floor connector duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT AND REAR FLOOR DUCTS Removal 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to "FLOOR TRIM". 2. Remove the clips and front and rear floor ducts. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. GRILLES Removal 1. Remove the interior trim panel as necessary that contains the grille to be removed. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" and "BODY SIDE TRIM". 2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14197 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7456 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 4802 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12538 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 14822 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 2231 Page 10469 Check brake pedal for following items. ^ Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper ^ Clevis pin deformation ^ Crack of any welded portion ^ Brake pedal bend INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the brake pedal. ^ After installing the brake pedal assembly in the vehicle, be sure to adjust it. Refer to "Inspection and Adjustment". Checking Fluid Level Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Level Checking Fluid Level Check fluid level, referring to the scale on the reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F). CAUTION: ^ Do not overfill. ^ Do not reuse any power steering fluid. ^ Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Page 8631 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 7558 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1645 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 8997 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Service and Repair Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair CAB AND REAR BODY Body Mounting - When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used for all mounting). - Unless otherwise noted, the bushings and insulators have paint marks that are to be installed facing outward. Page 2332 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8863 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Fuel Pump Relay Page 1909 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6236 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to Drain and Refill. NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle. 3. Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body from the vehicle. NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary. Page 4861 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1457 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5770 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 220 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 4630 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. Page 2286 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8369 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 14370 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4550 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 8500 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7682 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 8652 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1684 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8132 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 5860 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Page 12481 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 11487 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11316 Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement Page 7602 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3832 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10517 ^ Make sure to install the brake pad spreader spring as shown in Figure 3. Rear Brakes 1. This step was missing from the OE bulletin. 2. Replace the rear brake pads and brake hardware using all of the parts in the hardware kit. ^ Make sure to use the new brake pads and new brake pad shims (included in the hardware kit). ^ Refer to section BR in the Service Manual (ESM) for brake pad replacement and brake service information. IMPORTANT: Apply Molykote(R) M77 grease to the back side of the inboard brake pads ONLY (see Figure 3). 3. Reinstall all other parts removed in reverse order. Page 9659 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 12584 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 9215 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14259 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 1740 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4233 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 12791 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 5781 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4917 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 5894 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3900 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. Page 1362 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9388 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2330 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 4479 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 7876 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 5759 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose. 3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting their joints. ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^ Do not shock it. ^ Do not disassemble it. ^ Do not touch its sensor. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^ If anything found, replace air duct. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly. Page 8900 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 3059 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack LIFTING POINT Pantograph Jack WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. Page 11066 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 7802 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5695 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5290 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2257 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 10852 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5049 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6105 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2393 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 10211 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11127 Power Distribution Module: Locations Page 5837 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 636 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3 Page 8957 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode. 4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Without CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts Page 8895 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1337 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-APPS1 EC-APPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS2 Diagram Information and Instructions Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12716 10. Using CONSULT-II, erase any DTCs that are stored in the air bag control unit. Page 326 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2302 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 4544 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 10023 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-008 Date: 100115 Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Classification: RA09-003 Reference: NTB10-008 Date: January 15, 2010 2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for identification), AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. Page 5026 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 11206 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9021 Page 6851 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Diagnostic Aids Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6342 Page 8032 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6302 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 2004 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 8212 Page 7601 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 12928 Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances. Speed: Below 95 km/h (60 MPH) Distance: Less than 800 km (500 miles) Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) - Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. - Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems - Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a sideways angle. - Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing or recovery. Page 9306 Spark should be generated. CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. - It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. 17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. CONDENSER-1 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance............................................................................................................................................ ....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F) Page 3246 Page 2128 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 9063 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4992 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Front Timing Chain Case Timing Chain: Service and Repair Front Timing Chain Case "The content of this article/image reflects the changes identified in TSB-NTB10-001" ON-VEHICLE REPAIR FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE 1. O-ring 2. Collared O-ring 3. Intake valve timing control cover (RH) 4. Idler pulley 5. Drive belt auto tensioner 6. Intake valve timing control cover (LH) 7. Collared O-ring 8. O-ring 9. Chain tensioner cover 10. Cooling fan bracket 11. Crankshaft pulley 12. Front oil seal 13. Water pump cover 14. Front timing chain case 15. O-ring A. Refer to Installation Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1.Remove engine room cover. 2.Drain engine oil. CAUTION: - Perform this step when engine is cold. - Do not spill engine oil on drive belts. 3. Drain engine coolant from radiator. CAUTION: Page 9444 CAUTION: ^ Do not drop or shock spark plug. ^ Do not use wire brush for cleaning. ^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kgf/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds ^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14243 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. C200 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection C200 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Rear Axle Parts Page 11240 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Page 7564 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5179 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11432 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5443 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7067 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 element at the specified range. A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygenpump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement Lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide Lambda range (0.7 < Lambda < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at Lambda = 1. Therefore, the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 °C (1,292 - 1,472 °F). Page 8349 a. Remove burs from the edge with a file or sandpaper. b. Clean the hole with solvent and allow to completely dry. c. Apply / cover all bare metal with Zinc Rich primer (see Parts Information for Zinc Rich primer). d. Alloy primer to dry-approximately 1 hour. 8. Prepare bracket for installation as follows: a. Assemble the collapsible nut, spacer nut, and bolt as shown. b. Finger tighten the assembly in Figure 4. c. Install / push the nut and bolt assembly into the bracket as shown in Figure 5. Page 10196 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14242 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7238 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4089 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9487 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate Page 5361 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7145 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2369 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 738 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 7605 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12345 Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Resistor Check continuity between terminals. There will be resistance, but there should not be an open or short between any two terminals. Page 1401 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8802 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL Page 4784 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 5150 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 14628 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9218 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 12524 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8562 Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24) Page 2162 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 892 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4) Page 6536 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9 Page 7507 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6 Page 2119 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 6982 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 635 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2 Page 8958 b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Page 3045 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10800 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 10104 Page 1456 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 11124 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4175 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Front Side Air Bag Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Front Side Air Bag Front Side Air Bag Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies. Vehicles with side air bags are equipped with labels as shown. Page 8180 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5706 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9617 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Page 8094 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 4982 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 4600 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5 Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. 3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to "CLUTCH PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 3297 6. Measure the difference in levels between front end faces of camshaft bracket (No. 1) and cylinder head. Standard: -0.14 to 0.14 mm (-0.0055 to 0.0055 inch) ^ Measure two positions (both intake and exhaust side) for a single bank. ^ If the measured value is out of the standard, re-install camshaft bracket (No. 1). 7. Check and adjust the valve clearance. Refer to "Valve Clearance". 8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove CAUTION: ^ Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 or P0021 are detected in self-diagnostic results of CONSULT-II and it is directed according to inspection procedure. Refer to EC-130, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool (Consult-II)/Self-Diag Results Mode ^ Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil. 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL". 2. Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while checking. a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors. 3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. 4. Crank the engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes out from camshaft bracket (No. 1) oil hole. End crank after checking. WARNING: Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.). CAUTION: Engine oil may squirt from intake valve timing control solenoid valve installation hole during cranking. Use a shop cloth to prevent the engine components and the vehicle. Do not allow engine oil to get on rubber components such as drive belt or engine mount insulators. Immediately wipe off any splashed engine oil. ^ Clean oil groove between oil strainer and intake valve timing control solenoid valve if engine oil does not come out from camshaft bracket (No. 1) oil hole. Refer to "LUBRICATION SYSTEM". 5. Remove components between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT), and then check each oil groove for clogging. ^ Clean oil groove if necessary. Refer to "LUBRICATION SYSTEM". 6. After inspection, install removed parts. Inspection for Leaks The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks. ^ Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer Page 14682 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4285 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11686 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 8119 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12037 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 12006 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 2277 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9844 Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Inspection and Adjustment After Removal INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT AFTER REMOVAL Clutch Disc ^ Check the clutch disc for wear of facing. Wear limit (depth to rivet head): 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) ^ Measure the circumference runout at the point indicated. If it is outside the specification, replace the clutch disc. Runout limit/diameter of the area to be measured: 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) or less/250 mm (9.84 inch) dia. ^ Measure the backlash of the clutch disc spline at the circumference of the disc. If it is outside the specification, replace the clutch disc. Maximum backlash of spline (at outer disc edge): 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) Clutch Cover With the clutch cover installed on the vehicle, check the diaphragm spring toe height for unevenness. If they exceed the tolerance, adjust the height using Tool. Uneven limit of diaphragm spring toe height: 0.7mm (0.028 inch) Tool number: ST20050240 (-) ^ Check clutch cover thrust ring for wear or breakage. If wear or breakage is found, replace clutch cover assembly. NOTE: ^ Worn thrust ring will generate a beating noise when tapped at the rivet with a hammer. ^ Broken thrust ring will make a clinking sound when cover is shaken up and down. ^ If a trace of burn or discoloration is found on the clutch cover pressure plate to clutch disc contact surface, repair the surface with emery paper. If surface is damaged or distorted, replace the assembly. Flywheel Page 5370 Page 12469 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure A/C Pipe Removal and Installation for Low-pressure A/C Pipe REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Disconnect the heater pump connector. 3. Remove the heater pump from the bracket and reposition out of the way. Do not disconnect the heater hoses from the heater pump. 4. Remove the low-pressure A/C pipe. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure A/C pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 5189 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8006 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2048 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 3780 -When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following: CAUTION: - Handle carefully to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket. - Do not disassemble. (Do not loosen bolts (A) as shown). NOTE: For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary) INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. Inspect all timing chains and associated parts for wear or damage, replace as necessary. INSTALLATION Page 6881 Case 3 Page 13873 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Axle Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Classification: RA09-003 Reference: NTB10-008 Date: January 15, 2010 2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for identification), AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. Page 14671 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10365 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Page 2662 Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28) Page 11434 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14800 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Housing Assembly HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 6819 Case 5 Page 14589 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9556 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 313 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14927 3. Install rear wiper arm and blade so that the blade is parallel with the lower edge of back glass as shown and tighten wiper arm nut to specification. Rear wiper arm nut: 5.4 Nm (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb) Page 2902 Disclaimer Page 3533 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection ENGINE OIL LEVEL Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking. 1. Pull out oil level gauge and wipe it clean. 2. Insert oil level gauge and make sure the engine oil level is within the range as indicated on gauge. 3. If the engine oil is out of range, add oil as necessary. ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE ^ Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination. ^ If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair or replace damaged parts. Page 1302 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 6214 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4205 Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 6884 Case 6 Page 9597 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 10149 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Oil Leakage and Oil Level Checking OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL Page 9695 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 13763 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10039 ^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary. ^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "AXLE SHAFT". Rear Axle Bearing ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. ^ Replace as necessary Check axial end play Page 662 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8 Page 6144 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9420 Page 5863 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 8057 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 8395 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 10983 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 12802 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 5045 Page 7216 6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation". 7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. 8. Touch "YES". For canceling, touch "NO". 9. Using the given flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item according to the configuration list. Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the CONSULT-II "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be manually set or changed. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation". 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. Page 10490 DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from cylinder body. 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. 4. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, (KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert into groove on cylinder body CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. 2. Apply brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot into piston groove. Page 9468 Page 4877 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 1131 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2203 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5502 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8279 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7586 EC-APPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS3 Page 13336 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 4241 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 5529 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 14368 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11169 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6368 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 319 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4127 Exhaust Manifold ^ If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) ^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown. NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step. Heated Oxygen Sensor CAUTION: ^ Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number: J-43897-12 J-4389718 ^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on. Page 11623 SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. Page 219 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 1332 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1027 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6955 DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR BCM DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Page 11589 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1748 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 7056 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 9437 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1866 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14745 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 1148 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5082 6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. 7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%. CAUTION: - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.68 V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.68 V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18 V at least once during this procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. Page 4755 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 2854 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9504 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 13114 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 5684 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 13453 11. Install an 1/8 inch short steel blind rivet (Marson Klik-Fast (5B4-2) 1/8" diameter 1/8" grip Steel or equivalent) in the 4 holes drilled in Steps 7, 8 and 9. 12. Reassemble the seat base, install the seat in the vehicle, attach the battery cables (negative cable last), and reset the radio stations. Disclaimer Page 515 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 14256 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5549 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 11552 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 13082 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6448 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 2271 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11530 Repair Flow Chart Page 2467 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 7375 Page 9139 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 11679 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4529 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 4789 Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR Component Description The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And Charging. CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then the battery discharge may occur. Page 546 Page 10267 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 778 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1644 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4766 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13415 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Preparation for seat removal. ^ Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), section SE, for seat removal information. Make sure to follow all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS. ^ Before disconnecting any SRS connectors: A. Write down all radio station presets. B. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). C. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected. 2. Remove the seat from the vehicle. Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Page 13526 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 13085 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8055 EC-TPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS3 Page 11591 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 12965 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 2817 12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP). 13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve. Page 3454 Page 405 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 7873 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 4485 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 13685 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4801 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 3585 c. Disconnect harness connector. d. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown. CAUTION: ^ Handle carefully to avoid any shock to electric throttle control actuator. ^ Do not disassemble. 4. Remove the following parts: ^ Vacuum hose (to brake booster) ^ PCV hose 5. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown to remove intake manifold collector support. 6. Disconnect EVAP hoses and harness connector from EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 7. Remove EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 8. Remove VIAS control solenoid valve and vacuum tank. ^ Add mating marks as necessary for easier installation. 9. Loosen nuts and bolts in reverse order as shown with power tool, and remove intake manifold collector. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Intake Manifold Collector ^ If stud bolts were removed from intake manifold, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Page 8526 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 5146 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 6. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 7. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 8. Remove the bolts and the glass. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) - Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Rear Door Glass Regulator REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. for manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. Page 2496 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 991 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1) Page 8248 ^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION (LEFT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Exhaust Manifold Gasket Install in direction as shown. Exhaust Manifold ^ If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) ^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown. NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step. Heated Oxygen Sensor CAUTION: ^ Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number: J-43897-12 J-4389718 ^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on. REMOVAL (RIGHT BANK) 1. Remove engine assembly. Page 6687 ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II Page 2615 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 7391 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 11390 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Checking Brake Fluid Level Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Brake Fluid Level LEVEL CHECK ^ Check that the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank is within specification, between the MAX and MIN lines as shown. ^ Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks. ^ If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks. ^ If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after the parking brake pedal is released, check the brake system for any brake fluid leaks. Page 8680 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose. 3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting their joints. ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^ Do not shock it. ^ Do not disassemble it. ^ Do not touch its sensor. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^ If anything found, replace air duct. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly. Page 6878 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 12640 5. Install the new connector holder in the holes you just drilled. ^ A new connector holder is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information. ^ Position the connector holder as shown in Figure 3 and snap it in place. 6. Unsnap the side air bag connector from its original location and snap it into the new connector holder as shown in Figure 4. ^ Remove and discard the old connector holder. ^ Leave the buckle connector in the same location (don't move it). 7. Install the edge guard as shown in Figure 4. ^ Edge Guard is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information. 8. Re-connect the battery cables; positive cable first. 9. Re-set the radio station presets. Page 13749 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8556 Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Diagram Information and Instructions Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6975 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5782 Page 10878 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10760 Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off. Page 9346 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 12996 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10042 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6. Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power tool. 7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A) CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut. 8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. Page 11263 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 2692 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 9019 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13915 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. 2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector. Page 8906 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 2350 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 50 NOTE: For the following steps 9 and 10, you will have best results if: ^ You carefully heat a 12" (305 mm) section of the decal with the heat gun (step 9), THEN, ^ You rub the 12" (305 mm) section of decal with the soft rag (step 10) while the decal is still warm, THEN ^ You repeat the above process (switching between steps 9 and 10) until the entire length of the decal has been heated and rubbed. 9. After removing the decal's protective covering (step 8), carefully apply heat with a heating gun all along the surface of the decal. Hold the heating gun nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the side rail (see Figure 8). CAUTION: Too much heat will damage the decal and paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.). Important Points ^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts. ^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal. 10. Apply pressure along the entire surface of the warm decal with a soft rag to "set" the decal firmly onto the side rail surface (see Figure 9). Page 7228 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 2113 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8151 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14505 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open Side Air Bag: Customer Interest Restraints - DTC B1134 Side Air Bag Circuit Open Classification: RS05-006 Reference: NTB06-046 Date: June 13, 2006 2005 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; DRIVER'S SEAT SIDE AIR BAG OPEN CIRCUIT (DTC B1134) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) 2005 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM An "open circuit" DTC code (SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] /B1134) is stored in the SRS control unit, and The connector for the driver's seat side impact air bag module is disconnected (either completely or partially, NOTE: If CONSULT-II shown the above code (B1134), and the driver's seat side air bag connector is not disconnected, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnostic information. ACTION Change the location of the driver's seat side impact air bag connector by installing the kit listed in the Parts Information. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1472 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PHSB1 EC-PHSB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-PHSB2 Page 13694 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4394 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Oil Filter: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 8561 Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20) Diagnostic Aids Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 7316 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 10853 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6385 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 6252 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 11277 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8492 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1081 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 9823 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. Page 8814 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9630 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection A/T FLUID CHECK Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check ^ Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Fluid Condition Check Inspect the fluid condition. Page 5563 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5823 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5699 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11960 Lot Number Locations. Page 3634 Page EM-7 Page 10116 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 9006 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6770 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 2317 Page 4528 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 12448 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy. 5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical connector. 6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal. Page 6847 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection Page 5261 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 2281 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling.......................................................................................................................... ..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) Page 4536 Page 13074 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4962 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Locations Page 8128 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7588 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 10832 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7888 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 13615 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10) Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11) Page 6311 Page 986 EC-ASCBOF-01 Page 4455 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 9080 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3943 ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 3 cylinder at compression TDC d. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 5 cylinder at TDC of compression stroke. Page 6963 Optional Splice Part 1 Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter VISCOUS PAPER TYPE NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). 4. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 5. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 6. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 1694 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 9329 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1877 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2266 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11045 - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1773 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4376 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 3784 b. Before installing timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets, confirm mating marks are visible. If necessary, use paint or equivalent to re-mark the camshaft sprockets at each mating mark. Page 8772 Fuel Supply Line: Tools and Equipment Niss./Toy. Line Disconnect Tool AST tool# 8026 5/16"Fuel Line Disconnect Tool. Used for disconnecting the fuel line from the fuel rail. Applicable to 2004 and newer Nissan and Toyota Models - 5/16" Fuel Line Disconnect Tool - Quick Line Removal*Green-Anodized Aluminum Construction - See Application Chart - Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set. Contact AST for pricing. Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943 This Tool is also available in the following kits: Page 7940 Page 1712 EC-AF1B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1HB1 Page 13559 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420 A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 1676 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8827 Page 14859 SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). - Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Testing and Inspection Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Step 1) Page 233 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Page 11825 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 10820 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 14588 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6860 Case 4 Page 6510 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4 Page 5359 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 10548 CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the level of the surface of reservoir tank. 2. Attach pad retainer to torque member. CAUTION: When attaching pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it sits flush in the torque member, as shown. 3. Install pads making sure they are firmly attached. 4. Rotate cylinder body down and install lower sliding pin bolt then tighten to specification. Refer to "Components". 5. Check brake for drag. 6. Install wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". Page 3446 15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield. 16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5420 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2367 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12462 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 10656 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 11846 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 2706 Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14) Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Part 1 Contaminated Refrigerant Refrigerant: Service and Repair Contaminated Refrigerant Contaminated Refrigerant If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are: - Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. - Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. - Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. - If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. - If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance. Page 4907 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6115 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6161 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1181 13. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove the fuel tank. 14. Disconnect the EVAP hose from the fuel pump and remove the EVAP hose from the molded clip in the top of the fuel tank. 15. Remove the lock ring using Tool. Tool number : - (J-45722) 16. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. CAUTION: - Do not bend the float arm during installation. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipe and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 5785 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 14681 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8208 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 2039 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Description and Operation Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. Page 14586 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 2741 Valve clearance ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC c. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 3 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke. NOTE: Crankshaft pulley bolt flange has a stamped line every 60°. They can be used as a guide to rotation angle. Page 14775 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1445 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Component Locations Oxygen Sensor: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4 Page 132 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1115 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4781 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8737 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 5 - 6) Page 1630 Page 9799 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3452 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace Vent Control Valve 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. ^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information. Install Filter Kit 1. Remove the spare tire. Page 10334 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4779 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12021 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11429 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Component Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6031 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 1864 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 10508 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ This service bulletin does not require the replacement of the brake pads or machining of the rotors. It is up the technician to determine the need to replace the brake pads and/or machine the brake rotors on a case-by-case basis. ^ Follow all Service Manual Cautions and Warning when removing and replacing brake pads. ^ If needed, use an environmentally appropriate brake cleaner to clean brake parts. Consult local environmental regulations to decide which brake cleaner to use. ^ DO NOT GET ANY GREASE ON THE BRAKE PAD "FRICTION" SURFACES. 1. Remove the front brake calipers. ^ Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for front brake service information. Page 8602 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2147 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7503 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2 Page 14398 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 11155 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7082 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7989 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8290 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 7147 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 1840 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4125 ^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION (LEFT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Exhaust Manifold Gasket Install in direction as shown. Exhaust Manifold ^ If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) ^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown. NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step. Heated Oxygen Sensor CAUTION: ^ Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number: J-43897-12 J-4389718 ^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on. REMOVAL (RIGHT BANK) 1. Remove engine assembly. Page 1938 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9658 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3325 Part 2 Page 13672 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 LAN System Component Parts Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8096 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 13755 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 9369 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14024 Make sure: ^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected. ^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together. ^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip. ^ Sender unit is locked in place. ^ Temp sensor is clipped in place. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit. 6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit. ^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place. ^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place. ^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly. ^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no interference. Page 5498 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11568 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 5769 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines C200 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair C200 Part 1 Page 6625 LAN-CAN-01 Page 9980 3. Rotate the pinion three or four times using Tool and record the rotating torque. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) 4. Remove the drive pinion lock nut, using Tool. Tool number: KV40104000 (-) 5. Put a matching mark on the end of the drive pinion in line with the matching mark B on the companion flange. CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark on the drive pinion. Do not damage the companion flange or drive pinion. 6. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool. 7. Remove the front oil seal using Tool. Page 13067 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 2155 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 328 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5094 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 7984 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2027 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 12986 LT-T/TOW-04 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 5183 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8105 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 3040 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6857 Case 1 Page 8911 EC-APPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4597 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2 Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Front Front final drive oil 0.85L (1 3/4 pt US, 1 1/2 pt Imp) C200 Rear final drive oil C200 .................................................................................................................................................... 1.6L (3 3/8 pt US, 2 7/8 pt Imp.) M226 M226 .................................................................................................................................................... ............................. 2.0L (4 1/4 pt. US, 3 1/2 pt. Imp) Page 8285 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7083 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14170 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-Up Lamp Switch BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ^ Check continuity. Page 5115 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3688 b. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. c. Assemble front timing chain case as follows: i. Fit lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top face of oil pan (upper). From the fitting point, make entire front timing chain case contact rear timing chain case completely. ii. Since front timing chain case is offset for difference of bolt holes, tighten bolts temporarily while holding front timing chain case from front and top as shown. iii. Same as the previous step, insert dowel pin while holding front timing chain case from front and top completely. d. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. e. After all bolts are tightened, retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. - There are two type of bolts Bolt position Bolt diameter 1 - 5 : 10 mm (0.39 in) 6 - 25 : 6 mm (0.24 in) Bolt position Tightening specification 1 - 5 : 55.0 N-m (5.6 kg-m, 41 ft-lb) 6 - 25 : 12.7 N-m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) Page 5187 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3247 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7255 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 10198 Page 490 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 6654 LAN-CAN-30 CAN System (Type 10) Page 3261 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6197 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11423 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13929 7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: ^ Use a new seal (0-Ring). ^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6. 8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows: a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders. b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly. Page 4425 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 3267 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation IVT CONTROL Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Description Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. Page 450 Page 2189 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 6207 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Description and Operation Volt Meter Gauge: Description and Operation VOLTAGE GAUGE The voltage gauge indicates the battery/charging system voltage. The voltage gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit. Page 6801 Case 6 Page 7832 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1543 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 8909 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-APPS1 EC-APPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS2 Page 1135 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9) Page 970 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 14261 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5517 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 9126 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8930 Page 10860 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 14372 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 3821 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7208 ITEMS OF EACH PART With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Instruments - Mirror Actuator Availability/Service Power Mirror Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Mirror Actuator Availability/Service Classification: BT06-007a Reference: NTB07-067a Date: August 9, 2007 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; DOOR MIRROR ACTUATOR AVAILABLE SEPARATELY This bulletin has been amended. Applied Vehicles has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51), 2005-2007 Xterra (N50), 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The left or right side door mirror actuator (power or manual) doesn't work and needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION Replace only the Actuator Assembly, not the whole mirror. NOTE: In manual door mirrors, the "Actuator Assemble" allows the mirror to pivot for manual adjustment. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completeing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mirror: A. Angle the mirror all the way UP. Page 5856 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 8664 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 12545 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 10024 ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. Page 6940 Case 14 Case 15 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 922 Page 5348 b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Page 5395 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 4912 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 1299 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 11215 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8876 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 191 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 5611 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: ABS Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Component Inspection ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 2289 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 11389 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic Page 8639 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 14612 Page 3706 - After cooling down the engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level if necessary. Timing Chain Tensioner 1. Internal chain guide 2. O-ring 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Slack guide 10. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (LH) 13. O-ring 14. Tension guide Removal and Installation (Primary Timing Chain Tensioner) REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover. 2. Remove engine under cover. 3. Partially drain engine coolant. 4. Remove lower fan shroud. 5. Disconnect crankcase ventilation hose and remove air duct and resonator assembly. Page 7648 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8189 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 14818 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2700 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 4964 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6984 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 4734 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5459 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Testing and Inspection Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Airtightness Inspection Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster side of check valve. Check valve specification: Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inch Hg) for 15 seconds under a vacuum of - 66.7 kPa (- 500 mmHg, - 19.69 inch Hg) Page 3410 8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket. 9. Finger tighten the two front bolts. 10. Finger tighten the two side bolts. 11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence: ^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb). 12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4). ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner. ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner. 13. Install a new drive belt. ^ Do not reuse the existing belt. 14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal. Page 5158 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8270 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 2524 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 3314 ^ If replacing connecting rod assembly, refer to "CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE" to select the connecting rod bearing. Factory installed parts grading: ^ Service parts apply only to grade "0". CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE Method by Calculation ^ Install connecting rod bearings to connecting rod and cap, and tighten connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure. ^ Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bearing with inside micrometer. (Bearing oil clearance) = (Connecting rod bearing inner diameter) - (Crankshaft pin journal diameter) Standard: 0.034 - 0.059 mm (0.0013 - 0.0023 inch) (actual clearance) Limit: 0.070 mm (0.0028 inch) ^ If the calculated value exceeds the limit, select proper connecting rod bearing according to connecting rod big end diameter and crankshaft pin journal diameter to obtain the specified bearing oil clearance. Refer to "HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING". Method of Using Plastigage ^ Remove oil and dust on crankshaft pin journal and the surfaces of each bearing completely. ^ Cut plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. ^ Install connecting rod bearings to connecting rod and cap, and tighten connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure. Page 6731 Case 1 Page 10259 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 11826 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1205 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 14772 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14424 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1862 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12668 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Connect C-III to the vehicle. 3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs. a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode. b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST]. ^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function. ^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure. ^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this bulletin. NOTE: All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with this procedure. 4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle. 5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds. Front Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front PAD WEAR INSPECTION - Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Standard thickness: 11.88 mm (0.468 inch) Repair limit thickness: 2.0 mm (0.079 inch) Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 5113 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 12334 Blower Motor: Description and Operation Front Blower Motor Circuit SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Blower speed control system components are: - Front air control - Front blower motor resistor - Front blower motor - Front blower motor relay System Operation Page 462 Page 13402 A. Carefully apply heat with a heat gun. Keep the heat gun's nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the side rail (see Figure 3). CAUTION: Too much heat will damage the paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.). Important Points ^ DO NOT overheat the side rail, it is painted. Paint damage may result. Heat the area just enough to soften the decal for easy removal. ^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts. ^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal. B. Peel away the damaged decal. C. Clean the side rail with Isopropyl Alcohol to remove any glue residue, oil, and dirt. CAUTION: DO NOT use lacquer thinner. New Decal - Apply: 5. Remove the decal backing paper by peeling it away from the decal (see Figure 4). Page 292 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description Refer to INFORMATION BUS". Page 8235 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. 2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as given. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step. 3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. 4. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed. Page 5165 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6046 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8394 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10633 3. Apply brake fluid to piston, then install piston into cylinder body and insert piston boot side lip into groove of piston as shown. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly to prevent damage to cylinder wall. 4. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 5. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. 6. Install cylinder body Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". Page 2745 Exhaust Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter". Available Valve Lifter CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, "U" and "N", at each of proper positions. (Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 6. Install selected valve lifter. 7. Install camshaft. Refer to "INSTALLATION". 8. Manually turn crankshaft pulley a few turns. 9. Make sure that the valve clearances for cold engine are within the specifications by referring to the specified values. Page 12131 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection M226 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Rear Axle Parts ^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary. Page 6737 Case 7 Page 2644 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe-In TOE-IN WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. - Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 meters (16 ft.). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring points. 4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B". Total toe-in: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)". 7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tie-rods. a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out. Standard length L: Refer to POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE. c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification. Page 11519 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7415 Page 12051 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Inspection After Removal INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^ Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection". Page 12363 1. Install the magnet coil. CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. 2. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. 3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. Tool number: -(J-38873-A) 4. Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand. 5. Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc from turning and tighten the bolt to specification. Refer to "COMPONENTS". Tool number : J-44614 CAUTION: After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch pulley rotates smoothly. Page 8929 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 6165 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 13804 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1469 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10817 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 4799 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6575 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7620 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6894 Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection Page 8206 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4229 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7341 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 12884 Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 8832 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 14575 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 1941 EC-APPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 10342 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 12805 Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Off-Vehicle Check SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. 2. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration. 15 degrees or less tilt: Belt can be pulled out. 35 degrees or more tilt: Belt locks and cannot be pulled out. If the retractor does not operate within specifications, replace the retractor assembly. Page 11157 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6896 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Page 12323 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 7841 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3184 ^ Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary. ^ Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "AXLE SHAFT". Rear Axle Bearing ^ Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. ^ Replace as necessary Check axial end play Page 11082 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5279 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 493 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 4759 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9998 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Page 5583 Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31) Page 4768 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4965 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8570 Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 13020 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 11634 Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster CAMBER AND CASTER Page 2335 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 14439 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5468 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6647 LAN-CAN-23 Page 1111 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4682 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3458 12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP). 13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve. Page 9714 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Air Conditioner Control Control Assembly: Description and Operation Air Conditioner Control AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL Description The front air control provides regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature. The system is based on the position of the front air control temperature switch selected by the driver. This is done by utilizing a microcomputer, also referred to as the front air control, which receives input signals from the following two sensors: - Intake sensor - PBR (position balanced resistor). The front air control uses these signals (including the set position of the temperature switch) to control: - Outlet air volume - Air temperature - Air distribution Operation AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL The air mix door is controlled so that in-vehicle temperature is changed based on the position of the temperature switch. BLOWER SPEED CONTROL Blower speed is controlled based on front blower switch settings. When blower switch is turned, the blower motor starts and increases air flow volume each time the blower switch is turned clockwise, and decreases air flow volume each time the blower switch is turned counterclockwise. INTAKE DOORS CONTROL The intake doors are controlled by the recirculation switch setting, and the mode (defroster and floor) switch setting. MODE DOOR CONTROL The mode door is controlled by the position of the mode dial. DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL The defroster door is controlled by the mode dial (set to defroster). MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL Compressor can only operate with engine running and blower ON (speed 1-4). Page 6143 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9161 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 4747 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose. 3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting their joints. ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^ Do not shock it. ^ Do not disassemble it. ^ Do not touch its sensor. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^ If anything found, replace air duct. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly. Page 10464 Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection Inspection and Adjustment INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from dash lower panel using Tool. Tool: (J-46532) 2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications. CAUTION: The adjustable pedal must be in the frontmost (closest to the floor) position for pedal height measurement. ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch by turning 45° counterclockwise. 2. Loosen lock nut on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut. CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. Lock nut: 18.6 Nm (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.) 3. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD switch in until threaded ends contact pedal arm. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal arm, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap "C1 or C2" between the rubber stops and switch ends are within specification. 5. Check the pedal play Page 7773 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 14456 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 12973 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12604 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 2145 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 13096 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1534 Page 257 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 2083 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 14159 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9415 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11480 Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation Page 9783 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Axle Shaft: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Classification: RA09-003 Reference: NTB10-008 Date: January 15, 2010 2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for identification), AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. Page 10844 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6045 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 3901 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 10889 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6895 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection Page 8273 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 9434 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 13961 WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General Precautions". 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". 3. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. NOTE: Fuel will be spilled when removing the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly for the fuel level is above the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly fuel tank opening. - As a guide, the fuel level reaches the fuel gauge position as shown, or less, when approximately 15 l (4 US gal, 3 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel are drained from the fuel tank. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe. c. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 4. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 5. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 6. Disconnect the lower fuel filler hose from the fuel tank, the EVAP hose, and the vent pipe quick connector. - Disconnect the fuel feed hose from the molded clip in the side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: Page 9590 Page 14624 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10584 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Front Brake Disc/Rotor Standard thickness (new) .................................................................................................................... ................................................. 28.0 mm (1.102 inch) Repair limit thickness ........................................................................................................................... ............................................... 26.0 mm (1.024 inch) Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions) ........................................................................................................................... 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle) ..................................................................................................................................... 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring runout. Refer to "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION". Rear Brake Disc/Rotor Standard thickness (new) .................................................................................................................... ................................................. 18.0 mm (0.709 inch) Repair limit thickness ........................................................................................................................... ............................................... 16.0 mm (0.630 inch) Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions) ........................................................................................................................... 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle) ..................................................................................................................................... 0.07 mm (0.0028 inch) Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10205 Page 6844 Case 9 Case 10 Page 13477 A. Example of correctly aligned condition (pin inserted into shaft link slot). (See Figures 3) B. Example of misaligned condition (pin not inserted into shaft link slot) (See Figure 4) 4. Remove seat from vehicle. NOTE: Place seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt and scuff marks. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". Page 11844 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 13075 Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 4864 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6038 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Page 13069 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 12135 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6. Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power tool. 7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A) CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut. 8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. Page 4875 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 9114 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6994 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Service and Repair Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Completely drain engine coolant. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 2. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe. Refer to "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY". 3. Remove the rocker cover (right bank). 4. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor as necessary CAUTION: Be careful not to damage engine coolant temperature sensor. 5. Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water bypass hoses and water pipe. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following. ^ Securely insert each hose, and install clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe bulge. ^ When inserting water pipe into water outlet, apply neutral detergent to O-ring INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS". ^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant. Page 7962 EC-AF1HB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2H2B1 Page 12648 5. Install the new connector holder in the holes you just drilled. ^ A new connector holder is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information. ^ Position the connector holder as shown in Figure 3 and snap it in place. 6. Unsnap the side air bag connector from its original location and snap it into the new connector holder as shown in Figure 4. ^ Remove and discard the old connector holder. ^ Leave the buckle connector in the same location (don't move it). 7. Install the edge guard as shown in Figure 4. ^ Edge Guard is included in the kit listed in the Parts Information. 8. Re-connect the battery cables; positive cable first. 9. Re-set the radio station presets. Page 8992 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5254 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 796 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 8260 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5230 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3991 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5780 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1908 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 3800 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5961 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9560 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8067 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 14343 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12681 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Connect C-III to the vehicle. 3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs. a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode. b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST]. ^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function. ^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure. ^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this bulletin. NOTE: All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with this procedure. 4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle. 5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds. Page 5041 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1976 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Electrical Specifications Page 11244 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 1371 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 12706 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). 3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any air bag connectors. 4. From under the front of the driver seat, drill 2 holes in the connector bracket as shown in Figure 2. ^ The seat does not need to be removed. ^ Use a 1/4 inch drill bit. CAUTION: Make sure to use a rag or other suitable material to catch the metal shavings from the drilled holes. Don't let the shavings fall into the electrical connectors, carpet, seat track or other components that are under the seat. Page 1791 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 12011 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 6444 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 14245 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 4711 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9973 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. Page 10165 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: - If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. - Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. - Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 4863 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 124 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8277 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8942 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7231 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 12297 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Intake Door Motor Intake Door Motor Circuit SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Intake door control system components are: - Front air control - Intake door motor - Intake sensor System Operation The intake door control determines the intake door position based on the position of the recirculation switch. When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motor rotates closing off the fresh air inlet and recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed again, the intake door motor rotates in the opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake door motor The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that air is drawn from inlets set by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door. Page 6613 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 13807 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4300 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 14383 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 2142 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6011 Page 658 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4 Page 6071 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. - If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to GI-37, "CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking System Page 13652 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7144 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 14614 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 5267 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9064 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Testing and Inspection Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection Inspection After Installation CAUTION: If a leak is detected at the connections, retighten it or, if necessary, replace the damaged part. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses), and connections for fluid leaks, damage, twist, deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections. Replace any damaged parts. 2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg, 177 lbs.) with engine running for approximately 5 seconds, check for fluid leaks from each part. Page 4486 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Service and Repair Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to "Removal and Installation 2. Remove spark plug using spark plug wrench (commercial service tool). CAUTION: Do not drop or shock it. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. Hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ^ Frequent engine starts ^ Low ambient temperatures Cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ^ Extended highway driving ^ Frequent high engine revolution Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 inch) Page 6047 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4512 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 4961 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 7081 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 7472 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14590 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 8593 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4546 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 4356 Page 7756 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 151 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 14659 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6583 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 2359 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 7393 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 4003 Page 1857 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 8283 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8964 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Service and Repair Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Fuel Line Disconnect/Connect Procedure Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: - The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. - Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (semitransparent colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. Quick Connector Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. Page 10908 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard .......................................................................................................................................................... 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 165 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................................................................................................................... 961 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential Limit between cylinders ....................................................................................................................... 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm Page 5735 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6680 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Input/output signal chart TYPE 11/TYPE 12 Page 9904 2. Disconnect the parking brake cable and brake tube from the carrier cover. 3. Remove the carrier cover bolts. Then separate the carrier cover from the axle housing using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 2. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 3. Connect the brake tube and parking brake cable to the carrier cover and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to PB-4, "Components". See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair 4. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug hole. Refer to "Checking Differential Gear Oil". Page 10190 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 14735 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4816 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3409 5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1. ^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6. ^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12. 6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool. 7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See Figure 2. Page 1591 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13689 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter VISCOUS PAPER TYPE NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). 4. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 5. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 6. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 125 Optional Splice Part 1 ASCD Brake Switch Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection ASCD Brake Switch STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 3031 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13605 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3356 ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 5 cylinder at compression TDC 3. For the measured value out of the standard, perform adjustment. Refer to EM-86, "ADJUSTMENT". See: Adjustments Page 12577 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front kick plate. Refer to "KICK PLATES". 2. Remove the lower dash side finisher. Refer to "LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER". 3. Remove the front pillar lower finisher. Refer to "FRONT PILLAR LOWER FINISHER". 4. Remove the assist grip handle 5. Remove the front pillar upper finisher. Refer to "FRONT PILLAR UPPER FINISHER". 6. Remove the lower glove box. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX". 7. Remove the upper glove box (cluster lid E). Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL". 8. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 9. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 9345 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12012 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14445 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Page 9212 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5423 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2628 Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. Page 9710 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7897 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9671 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6909 Case 7 Page 3715 a. Attach suitable stopper pin to the right and left timing chain tensioners (secondary). NOTE: ^ Use approximately 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) dia. hard metal pin as a stopper pin. ^ For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary), refer to "CAMSHAFT". [Removing camshaft bracket (No. 1) is required.] b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts. ^ Secure the hexagonal portion of camshaft using wrench to loosen bolts. CAUTION: Do not loosen bolts with securing anything other than the camshaft hexagonal portion or with tensioning the timing chain. c. Remove timing chain (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets. ^ Turn camshaft slightly to secure slackness of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side. ^ Insert 0.5 mm (0.020 inch)-thick metal or resin plate between timing chain and timing chain tensioner plunger (guide). Remove timing chain (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets with timing chain loose from guide groove. CAUTION: Be careful of plunger coming off when removing timing chain (secondary). This is because plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) moves during operation, leading to coming off of fixed stopper pin. NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design sprockets for timing chain (primary) and for timing chain (secondary). Page 1607 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 11288 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4806 Page 14499 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14490 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 14786 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 10812 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 11838 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 12548 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Apply compressor oil to the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 12839 6. Turn the ignition OFF. 7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows: The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment. ^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON). ^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed. ^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the sensor is completely installed. ^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing. 8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2). 9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3. ^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused. 10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover. Page 1601 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 9568 11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 8063 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 12612 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Apply compressor oil to the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 7649 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 120 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11307 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9229 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4412 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 14264 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6399 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 8982 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 5554 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2200 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 9538 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7319 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 2789 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 9237 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 14515 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9411 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 3845 When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. Service and Repair Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear combination lamp. 2. Rotate each bulb socket (1, 2, 3) counterclockwise to unlock it. 3. Pull bulb straight out away from socket to release. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8843 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9274 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 539 Page 13092 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5220 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1656 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 8390 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11540 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 6382 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 3673 Page EM-14 Page 2197 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12689 SRS Components Parts Location Page 12392 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2135 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 237 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Service and Repair Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair AIR BREATHER HOSE Removal and Installation 4X2 Refer to the figure for air breather hose removal and installation procedure. CAUTION: ^ When installing an air breather hose, do not to crush or block by folding or bending the hose. ^ When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the tube bend portion. 4X4 Page 10485 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member. Page 5312 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 10803 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1795 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations Page 7014 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 7651 Page 3170 Wheels: Testing and Inspection WHEEL Inspection 1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. a. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. b. Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration. Refer to "Road Wheel". 3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. 4. Check front suspension for looseness. Service and Repair Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Level Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove washer tank. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir". 2. Pull washer fluid level switch out of washer fluid reservoir in the direction of the arrow as shown. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 9663 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14873 ^ These scratches are typically long and have several scratches concentrated together. ^ These scratches can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. 3) How to determine if glass has distortion or cracks due to manufacturing Issue. Disclaimer Page 10251 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4847 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11463 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 13589 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 2926 2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. 3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Page 190 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 7392 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 1655 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling.......................................................................................................................... ..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) Page 3467 Page 3979 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Locations Page 2363 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1079 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service and Repair Amplifier: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Audio Amplifier REMOVAL 1. Remove passenger side front seat. Refer to "FRONT SEAT". =>: Vehicle front 2. Remove audio amplifier and kick shield screws. 3. Disconnect the connectors (1) and remove audio amplifier from the bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 12594 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 9322 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9666 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 10898 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 5676 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1715 EC-O2H2B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2H2B2 Page 7318 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 2542 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 10541 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 2116 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10235 8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". Page 460 Page 5091 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 11174 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status - Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 3 seconds have elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status - IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description Refer to Information Bus. Page 8392 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7913 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Front Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 2. Using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4. Remove union bolt and then remove brake hose from caliper assembly. INSTALLATION 1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on caliper assembly, and tighten union bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Hydraulic Circuit". NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer. 2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten flare nut to the specified torque using a flare nut wrench. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Page 11438 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Front Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Adjustments Front Washer Nozzle Adjustment - This vehicle is equipped with adjustable washer nozzles. - If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the washer nozzle is installed correctly. - If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid spray coverage is not satisfactory, re-aim washer nozzle. Page 13854 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4377 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Service and Repair Throttle Body: Service and Repair Electric Throttle Control Actuator ^ Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. ^ Perform the "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when harness connector of electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ^ Perform the "Idle Air Volume Learning" and "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 12441 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. Page 4231 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 7723 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 7845 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 631 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 8482 Page 10435 Traction Control Module: Description and Operation TCS CONTROL UNIT Description The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair. Electrical Specifications Page 6550 Page 10097 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13258 5. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION - Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. - Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal. - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. - Install parts removed. WARNING: - Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. - Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the rear window in case of an accident. CAUTION: - Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 13868 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7644 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1627 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12967 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 696 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 14501 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3445 8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket. 9. Finger tighten the two front bolts. 10. Finger tighten the two side bolts. 11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence: ^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb). 12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4). ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner. ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner. 13. Install a new drive belt. ^ Do not reuse the existing belt. 14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal. Page 10714 Page 4808 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2895 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid: ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. Nissan Matic Fluid J NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Page 4180 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 10221 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9008 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8036 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4973 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5714 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 9727 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8658 Page 12808 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR - OUTBOARD 1. Remove seat belt lower anchor cover and bolt. 2. Remove the D-ring anchor bolt cover and D-ring anchor bolt. 3. Remove the upper and lower luggage area trim. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 4. Remove seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the seat belt assembly. 5. Remove the seat belt height adjuster assembly. INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR - OUTBOARD Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Ensure that seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation. REMOVAL OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR - CENTER 1. Remove headlining. Refer to "HEADLINING". 2. Remove seat belt guide plate bolts. 3. Remove seat belt retractor and belt assembly bolt and nut. 4. Remove seat belt retractor cover. 5. Remove bolt and remove seat belt retractor and seat belt assembly. INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR - CENTER Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4500 Page 13883 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4226 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14504 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8126 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 333 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11995 2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. 3. Perform a wheel alignment. ^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points). ^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points.) NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. 4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as a non-usable part. NOTE: Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection. Page 10833 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5666 10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. 11. Start the engine, and check for unusual noise and vibration. Page 4199 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 5664 Valve Clearance: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT ^ Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter. 1. Measure the valve clearance. Refer to "INSPECTION". 2. Remove camshaft. 3. Remove valve lifters at the locations that are out of the standard. 4. Measure the center thickness of removed valve lifters with micrometer. 5. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation: t=t1 + (C1-C2) t =Valve lifter thickness to be replaced t1 = Removed valve lifter thickness C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance: Intake: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch)* Exhaust: 0.33 mm (0.013 inch)* *: Approximately 20°C (68°F) ^ Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Intake Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter". Page 9829 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 6149 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6493 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 7720 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PHSB1 EC-PHSB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-PHSB2 Page 9691 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Page 3538 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Oil Cooler Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing through engine coolant inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler. Relief Valve Check relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove relief valve by prying it out using a suitable tool. Install a new relief valve in place by tapping it in. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following. ^ Make sure that no foreign objects are adhering to the installation planes of oil cooler and oil pan (upper). ^ Tighten connector bolt after aligning cutout on oil cooler with protrusion on oil pan (upper) side. Connector bolt torque: 49 Nm (5.0 kg-m, 36 ft. lbs.) INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level and the engine coolant level, and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL" and "ENGINE COOLANT". 2. Start engine, and make sure that there are no leaks of engine oil or engine coolant. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and the engine coolant level again. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL" and "ENGINE COOLANT". Page 11668 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1558 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4882 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Service and Repair Grille: Service and Repair FRONT GRILLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Release upper clips from front grille. 2. Release the tabs (4) at lower edge and remove front grille from member. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 13744 Page 1611 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 12543 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6124 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 6728 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 7 - 10) IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". Page 3827 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5121 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5605 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 9419 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Locations Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Service and Repair Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), remove map lamp lens (1). CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around tool to protect the housing and lens. 3. Release one side of the bulb (2) from the tab, then pull straight downward to remove. Map lamp bulb: 12 V - 8 W Page 5033 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 7245 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6194 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 11719 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 9784 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14821 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2346 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 2896 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection A/T FLUID CHECK Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check ^ Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Fluid Condition Check Inspect the fluid condition. Page 12333 Page 8177 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7450 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 5326 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8420 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3807 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 7894 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Description and Operation ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Cooling Fan Control The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. Cooling Fan Operation Cooling Fan Relay Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 4668 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6968 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11518 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7146 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Page 12752 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 8890 Page 2852 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1753 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9594 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 3468 5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3. ^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail. 6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown. 7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows: Page 6739 Case 10 Case 11 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 9631 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid 1. Run the engine to warm up the ATF. 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the bolt for the ATF level gauge. 4. Drain the ATF from the drain plug hole and refill the transmission with new ATF. Always refill same volume with drained fluid and use the dipstick to check the fluid level as shown. Add fluid as necessary. ^ To flush out the old fluid from the coolers pour new fluid into the charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same time drain the old fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line. ^ When the color of the fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is about the same as the color of the new fluid flushing out the old fluid is complete. The amount of new transmission fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% of the specified capacity. Transmission fluid type: Genuine NISSAN Matic Fluid J ATF Transmission fluid capacity (with torque converter): 10.6 L (11 1/4 US qt. 9 3/8 Imp qt) CAUTION: ^ Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid. ^ Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty. ^ When filling the transmission with fluid, do not spill the ATF on any heat generating parts such as the exhaust manifold. Drain plug: 34 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.) 5. Check the fluid level and condition. Refer to "Checking AT Fluid". If the fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5. 6. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification. Level gauge bolt: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 5596 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 3473 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner and Idler Pulley REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Remove the radiator cooling fan assembly 4. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner and idler pulley using power tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1461 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6834 Check Sheet Part 1 Specifications A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement Expansion Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement Classification: HA10-004 Reference: NTB10-044 Date: March 17, 2010 A/C TXV (THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE) REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2010 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION The A/C TXV (thermal expansion valve) is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles. If the A/C TXV needs to be replaced for any reason AND the evaporator is operating normally: ^ Replace the TXV only. Do not replace the heater and cooling unit assembly or the evaporator assembly. ^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for TXV removal and installation instructions. Page 193 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14338 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Front Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location REMOVAL 1. Operate the wiper motor and stop it at the auto stop position. 2. Remove the wiper arm mounting covers. 3. Remove the wiper arm mounting nuts, then remove the wiper arms. INSTALLATION 1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF" (auto stop). 2. Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set the blade center to clearance "L1" and "L2" immediately before tightening nut. 3. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF". 4. Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance "L1" and "L2". Clearance "L1": 24.5 - 39.5 mm (0.965 - 1.555 in) Clearance "L2": 23.5 - 38.5 mm (0.925 - 1.516 in) - Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. - Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque. Front wiper arm nuts: 23.6 Nm 2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb Page 10451 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 5821 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6842 Case 7 Page 7576 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 3286 CAMSHAFT BRACKET INNER DIAMETER ^ Tighten camshaft bracket bolt with the specified torque. Refer to "INSTALLATION" for the tightening procedure. ^ Measure the inner diameter "A" of camshaft bracket with bore gauge. Standard: No. 1: 26.000 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 inch) CAMSHAFT JOURNAL OIL CLEARANCE ^ (Oil clearance) = (Camshaft bracket inner diameter) - (Camshaft journal diameter). Standard: No. 1: 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 0.035 - 0.076 mm (0.0014 - 0.0030 inch) Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) ^ If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head. NOTE: Camshaft bracket cannot be replaced as a single part, because it is machined together with cylinder head. Replace whole cylinder head assembly. Camshaft End Play ^ Install dial indicator in thrust direction on front end of camshaft. Measure the end play of dial indicator when camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard: 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 inch) Limit: 0.24 mm (0.0094 inch) ^ Measure the following parts if out of the limit. Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard: 27.500 - 27.548 mm (1.0827 - 1.0846 inch) - Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal bearing Standard: 27.360 - 27.385 mm (1.0772 1.0781 inch) ^ Refer to the standards above, and then replace camshaft and/or cylinder head. Page 962 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11536 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 11199 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5241 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6429 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7327 Page 2215 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Connect C-III to the vehicle. 3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs. a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode. b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST]. ^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function. ^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure. ^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this bulletin. NOTE: All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with this procedure. 4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle. 5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds. Page 8072 Page 14692 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1327 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6841 Case 6 Page 1127 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8264 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12602 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 2040 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8020 Optional Splice Part 1 Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) 10.3L (10 7/8 qt. US, 9 1/8 qt. Imp) Page 1455 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 5616 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. With GST Check idle speed with GST. Page 3166 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 7857 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6930 Case 3 Page 11840 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14442 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8830 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5059 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 12535 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9676 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8286 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8606 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6204 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1531 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9717 Page 2321 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5536 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 12962 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7572 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 4341 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 5796 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2771 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 9786 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 927 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 14744 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Classification: EC04-025 Reference: NTB04-126 Date: October 29, 2004 MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284 IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor) ^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor) ACTIONS: 1. Repair the vehicle as necessary. ^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information. 2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning. IMPORTANT: If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared: ^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists. ^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair). CLAIMS INFORMATION The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a separate repair item. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284). ^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle. ^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information. Page 195 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8655 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 14412 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1596 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5346 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 4025 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 1599 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 9208 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 2967 Engine Oil: Technician Safety Information Precautions for Engine Oils Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS - Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. - Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. - Do not put oily rags in pockets. - Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. - Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. - First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. - Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. - Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. - Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin. - If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. - Where practical, degrease components prior to handling. - Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. Page 13051 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 5098 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 76 Page 248 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 1253 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 5865 Page 4800 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5390 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove fuel level sensor unit. 2. Check resistance between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminals 2 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Page 9375 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 3273 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine thoroughly. Then, stop it. 2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 3. Disconnect fuel pump fuse to avoid fuel injection during measurement. 4. Remove intake manifold collector. 5. Remove spark plug from each cylinder. 6. Connect engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-II). 7. Install compression tester with adapter onto spark plug hole. ^ Use compression gauge whose picking up end inserted to spark plug hole is smaller than 20 mm (0.79 inch) in diameter. Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during removal. 8. Turn ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. Compression pressure CAUTION: Always use a fully changed battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^ If the engine speed is out of specified range, check battery liquid for proper gravity Check engine speed again with normal battery gravity ^ If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated with combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again. ^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. ^ If the added engine oil improves the compression, piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. ^ If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, valves may be malfunctioning. Check valves for damage. Page 14746 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8936 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14384 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5274 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6525 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11) Page 2111 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Locations Service Port HVAC: Locations Page 5564 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KS Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Page 3674 Page EM-15 Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2526 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 791 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 10960 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4227 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 9224 Page 8134 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 4268 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of BCM REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower knee protector. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH". 3. Remove screws and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: - When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-105, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System - NATS) - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT-12, "ID Registration Procedure". Page 6412 Page 12789 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 10215 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7834 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 5046 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3822 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Cowl Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1971 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7590 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 7555 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9222 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Description and Operation Engine Load Signal: Description and Operation ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. Page 1702 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8549 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. With GST Check idle speed with GST. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 4220 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4237 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4553 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5518 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 4774 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2710 Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28) Page 980 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 7578 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2194 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5555 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 3863 Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28) Page 3843 EC-IVCB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 11469 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION - In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license, front fog, and parking lamps - Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-29, "Door Switch Check" when the auto active test cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom/Symptom Diagnostic Procedures/Door Switch Check INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps activate in order. These six steps cycle three times before the auto active test automatically terminates. 1. Rear window defogger on for 10 seconds. 2. Front wipers operate on low speed for 5 seconds then on high speed for 5 seconds. 3. License, tail, parking and fog lamps on for 10 seconds. 4. Headlamps on low for 10 seconds then high beams turn on and off 5 times. 5. A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) cycles on and off 5 times. 6. Cooling fan operates on low speed for 5 seconds then on high speed for 5 seconds. Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Page 6667 - Models with ABLS - Models with electronic locking rear differential TYPE 1 System Diagram System diagram Page 6009 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 5432 EC-TPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 4137 Exhaust Manifold ^ If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) ^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown. NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step. Heated Oxygen Sensor CAUTION: ^ Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number: J-43897-12 J-4389718 ^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on. Page 10616 Part 1 Bleeding Brake System CAUTION: While bleeding, monitor the master cylinder brake fluid level. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed and using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool, loosen the bleed valve to let air out, then tighten bleed valve immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to "Components (front disc brake), "Components (rear disc brake)". 7. Perform steps 2 to 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleed air from the front left, rear left, and front right bleed valve, in that order. Page 13128 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 13878 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6563 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 5002 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2922 2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. 3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Page 6459 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 4633 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Control Module Programming and Relearning VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to "Application and ID". 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. C200 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection C200 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Rear Axle Parts Page 5416 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2016 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11291 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6363 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 4849 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8110 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4020 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6962 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5078 EC-O2S2B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 8918 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 14155 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2026 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 7374 Page 1747 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11446 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1218 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7899 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4294 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 8030 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11097 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 7915 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 12625 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belt System Seat Belt Inspection AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: - The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). - The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide). - The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. - Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. - The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows: a. Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should sound for about seven seconds. b. Fasten driver's seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop. 2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag warning lamp. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function ( AIR BAG)". 3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. 4. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely. 5. Check retractor operation: a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the "SEAT BELT TAPE SET" and perform the following steps. Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt. 4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening. NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling. 6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts. ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 6646 LAN-CAN-22 Page 13005 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 3597 ^ Press-fit oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting. ^ Do not touch grease applied onto oil seal lip. 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8081 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4728 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6695 Check Sheet Part 1 Description and Operation Speedometer Head: Description and Operation SPEEDOMETER ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 7783 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3679 Timing Chain: Specifications Timing Chain Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. There are two type of bolts. Refer to the following for locating bolts. Bolt length: Bolt position 20 mm (0.79 inch) ................................................................. ............................................................................................................. 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 16 mm (0.63 inch) ............................................................................................................................................ ....................................... Except the above Rear timing case bolt torque ............................................................................................................................................... 12.7 Nm (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft. lbs.) After all bolts are tightened, retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. Page 4831 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8165 Page 1827 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1511 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9324 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 5476 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9226 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4189 Repair Flow Chart Page 799 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. CAN Communication Information Bus: Description and Operation CAN Communication CAN COMMUNICATION System Description CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN Communication Unit NOTE: Confirming the presence of the following items helps to identify CAN system type. - Models with 4WD - Models with VDC Page 10476 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 9716 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 6. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 7. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 8. Remove the bolts and the glass. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) - Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Rear Door Glass Regulator REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the inside seal. 3. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 4. For power windows, operate the power window switch to raise/ lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. for manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. Locations Location of Electrical Parts Service Precautions Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions Precautions for Three Way Catalyst If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions. - Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst. - When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary. - Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst. Page 13649 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 9598 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 12527 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 11711 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 13401 Procedure shown here is for side rail decals. Use similar steps for air dam decal. 1. Bring the vehicle to room temperature (approximately 70°F / 21°C). 2. Mark the side rails with a pencil on the left and right corners of the damaged decal (see Figure 1). ^ This will help you align the new label on the side rail when installing it. 3. Remove the roof rack center cross members (see Figure 2). Damaged Decal Removal: 4. Remove the damaged decal as follows: Page 14763 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1764 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1488 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7991 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Service and Repair Clutch Release Fork: Service and Repair CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the manual transmission from the vehicle. Refer to "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD models)" or "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD models)". 2. Remove the release bearing sleeve assembly, holder spring, and withdrawal lever from inside the clutch housing. 3. Remove the dust cover. 4. Remove the snap spring from the withdrawal lever. 5. Remove the release bearing from release bearing sleeve using suitable tool. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Replace the release bearing if it is seized, damaged, faulty in rotation direction, or has poor aligning function. ^ Replace the withdrawal lever if its contact surface is worn abnormally. ^ Replace the dust seal if it is deformed or cracked. INSTALLATION Page 2645 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Wheel Turning Angle FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection. 1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on stands so that vehicle can be level. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels. 2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning angle. Wheel turning angle (full turn): Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check if the following parts are worn or damaged. Steering gear - Steering column - Front suspension components If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new ones. Page 1782 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10345 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 14865 1. Connect the harness connector and install the regulator assembly. a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window motor or crank assembly to install the assembly in the door. b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom regulator bolt. d. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. e. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. f. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt. g. Install the front window motor or crank assembly bolt. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass bolts. Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) 3. Install the partition sash 4. Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. Install the inside seal. 6. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". Page 4949 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 10859 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 11062 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 2188 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 327 Page 10262 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11848 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1448 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8125 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5972 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7301 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 1603 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 4358 Interior Room Lamp Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9210 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13829 Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 1 - 4) Page 13884 Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation ASCD INDICATOR Component Description ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD system is ready for operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. - CRUISE indicator is illuminated. - SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting. SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the "ASCD" function. Page 2311 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 126 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4807 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 1700 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7089 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 542 Page 9373 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 398 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 9741 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 10999 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 752 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 7107 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 10862 Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation PNP SWITCH Component Description When the selector lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. Page 4021 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 12344 Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Blower Motor Resistor The front blower motor resistor is located on the cooling unit. The front blower motor resistor grounds the front blower motor through a series of 1, 2 or three resistors, depending upon speed selected. For high speed operation the front blower motor resistor is circumvented and the front blower motor grounds directly. Page 9486 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8714 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2512 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 1311 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 6787 BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Combination Meter Circuit Inspection Page 10466 Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments Inspection and Adjustment INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from dash lower panel using Tool. Tool: (J-46532) 2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications. CAUTION: The adjustable pedal must be in the frontmost (closest to the floor) position for pedal height measurement. ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch by turning 45° counterclockwise. 2. Loosen lock nut on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut. CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. Lock nut: 18.6 Nm (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.) 3. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD switch in until threaded ends contact pedal arm. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal arm, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap "C1 or C2" between the rubber stops and switch ends are within specification. 5. Check the pedal play Page 425 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 932 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5195 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 10397 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 8611 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 6641 LAN-CAN-17 Page 2352 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Classification: EM06-004B Reference: NTB06-072B Date: September 3, 2009 DRIVE BELT NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION, and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008 IF YOU CONFIRM: A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the morning especially in cold or damp conditions. OR A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1) hour. AND In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt. ACTION: ^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed. ^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, if needed. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9978 5. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool. INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the front oil seal lips. 2. Install the new front oil seal using Tool. Tool number: KV38100500 (J-25273) CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse oil seal. ^ Do not incline oil seal when installing. 3. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the matching mark A of companion flange, then install the companion flange. 4. Apply gear oil on the screw part of drive pinion and the seating surface of drive pinion lock nut. 5. Install the new drive pinion lock nut and tighten to the specified torque using Tool. Refer to "COMPONENTS". Tool number: KV38108300 (J-44195) CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion lock nut. 6. Install the propeller shaft. Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 10882 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 13517 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 3408 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed. 2. Remove air duct. 3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not move it clockwise. 4. Remove drive belt. Page 14081 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 11592 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 5362 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8000 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 4200 Page 13874 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7788 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11910 Maximum inner socket length L: 84.0 mm (3.31 inch) Page 1631 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Bulb Replacement Vanity Lamp: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement Bulb Replacement The vanity mirror lamp bulb is replaced as part of the sunvisor assembly. Page 11166 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 3586 ^ Tighten nuts and bolts in numerical order as shown. Intake manifold collector: 11.0 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft. lbs.) bolts and nuts Stud bolts: 6.9 Nm (7.0 kg-m, 61 inch lbs.) Electric Throttle Control Actuator ^ Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. ^ Perform the "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when harness connector of electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ^ Perform the "Idle Air Volume Learning" and "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 5557 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3782 1. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown. (No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC) NOTE: Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose, it is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same direction of the figure. Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side) : At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side) : At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Crankshaft key : At cylinder head side of right bank. 2. Install timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark positions repeatedly during the installation process. Page 10951 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4410 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 8705 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1418 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 12849 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Satellite Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove front door sill finisher and lift carpet. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts and release the clip. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor connector. CAUTION: - Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 9712 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2625 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 5692 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 13243 6. Raise the rear door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. - If equipped, disconnect the connector from the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Gear wear - Regulator deformation - Spring damage - Grease condition for each sliding part INSTALLATION Page 6012 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6473 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6079 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9550 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 8292 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7128 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 5947 6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation". 7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. 8. Touch "YES". For canceling, touch "NO". 9. Using the given flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item according to the configuration list. Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the CONSULT-II "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be manually set or changed. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation". 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. Page 10532 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 11256 Repair Flow Chart Page 9485 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 11698 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5287 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 11593 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 1703 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4693 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 9690 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 11012 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2358 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 654 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value PREPARATION 1. ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir tank. 2. Remove ECM harness connector. 3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. - Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. - Data is for comparison and may not be exact. Page 8440 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 8847 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove fuel level sensor unit. 2. Check resistance between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminals 2 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Page 9136 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 13135 6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation". 7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. 8. Touch "YES". For canceling, touch "NO". 9. Using the given flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item according to the configuration list. Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the CONSULT-II "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be manually set or changed. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation". 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. Page 8572 Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9) Page 7407 Page 7018 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6616 CAN System (Type 3) Schematic CAN System (Type 4) Schematic Page 10253 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4522 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 9118 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5660 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION In cases of removing/installing or replacing camshaft and valve-related parts, or of unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance (found malfunctions during stating, idling or causing noise), perform inspection as follows: 1. Remove rocker covers (right and left banks). 2. Measure the valve clearance as follows: a. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke. ^ Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. ^ Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank) are located as shown. ^ If not, rotate crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown. b. Use feeler gauge, measure the clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. Page 4364 Page 14396 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 2024 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 14374 Page 917 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8345 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace Vent Control Valve 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. ^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information. Install Filter Kit 1. Remove the spare tire. Page 152 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13109 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 3157 c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. 3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. 5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams (0.18 ounces) each or below. ^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures. Wheel balance (Maximum allowable imbalance) Page 10790 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 496 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 4402 Disclaimer Page 3211 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift 2-Pole Lift WARNING: - When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. - When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines. Page 7671 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 11832 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10933 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11264 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 5546 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10113 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 8040 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 12815 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Removal and Installation For removal and installation procedures, refer to Seat Belts, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt". Page 7334 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 14016 e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver. f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the pocket screwdriver was inserted. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. 10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 7215 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT ITEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information to check CONSULT II data link connector (DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link Connector Schematic 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 2290 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1439 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7606 Service and Repair Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Page 11080 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 14525 Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Page 14686 Page 8569 OVERALL SEQUENCE Page 4203 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6162 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 9810 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7321 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 422 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 11373 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Universal Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 8904 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 7881 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11453 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 1755 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12761 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 2731 CAUTION: ^ Do not drop or shock spark plug. ^ Do not use wire brush for cleaning. ^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kgf/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds ^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13920 e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver. f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the pocket screwdriver was inserted. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. 10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 6240 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 5553 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7582 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 3907 Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14) Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4580 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 6736 Case 6 Page 14563 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9605 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 14477 Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation System Description Power is supplied at all times - to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and - through 50 A fusible link (letter g, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and - through 20 A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R) - to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R, and - to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R) - to IPDM E/R terminal 61 - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 3, and - through 30 A fusible link (letter m, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to trailer tow relay 2 terminals 3 and 6, and - through 30 A fusible link (letter h, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 5. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied - to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and - through 10 A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to BCM terminal 38, and - through 10 A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R) - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1 and - to backup lamp relay terminal 3 (with M/T). Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 67 and - to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1 - through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and - to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 2 - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 2 - to trailer connector terminal 2 and - to backup lamp relay terminal 1 (with M/T) - through grounds E9, E15 and E24. TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow relay 1. With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied from the tail lamp relay - through 10 A fuse (No. 37, located in the IPDM E/R) - through IPDM E/R terminal 29 - to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 1. When energized, trailer tow relay 1 tail lamp power is supplied - through trailer tow relay 1 terminal 5 - to trailer connector terminal 4. TRAILER STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION The trailer stop, turn signal and hazard lamps are controlled by the BCM. If either turn signal or the hazard lamps are turned on, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer lamps to make them flash. If the BCM receives stop lamp switch signal, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer lamps to make them illuminate. Left stop, turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied - to trailer connector terminal 3 - through BCM terminal 52. Right stop, turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied - to trailer connector terminal 6 - through BCM terminal 51. Page 8372 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 7715 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2596 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ASCD Brake Switch Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection ASCD Brake Switch STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 9255 Spark should be generated. CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. - It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. 17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. CONDENSER-1 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance............................................................................................................................................ ....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F) Page 2513 8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". Page 1022 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9474 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 10583 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Page 14379 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13887 Page 9367 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5063 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8118 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 12539 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 14034 13. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove the fuel tank. 14. Disconnect the EVAP hose from the fuel pump and remove the EVAP hose from the molded clip in the top of the fuel tank. 15. Remove the lock ring using Tool. Tool number : - (J-45722) 16. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. CAUTION: - Do not bend the float arm during installation. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipe and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Page 10343 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Page 6929 Case 2 Page 8788 e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver. f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the pocket screwdriver was inserted. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. 10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 6218 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Classification: EL07-027D Reference: NTB07-069D Date: November 30, 2010 FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3 The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8 405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273 2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614 APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007* *IMPORTANT: Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are working on is instead covered under that Campaign. IF YOU CONFIRM: The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative. And/Or The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis. ACTIONS: Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION Page 11090 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5282 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4319 Disclaimer Page 10829 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6972 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 9881 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Install the release bearing to release bearing sleeve using suitable tool, as shown. ^ Clean old grease and abrasive materials off the grease application areas. ^ Apply grease to the specified points as shown. ^ Apply approximately 1 mm (0.04 inch) thick coat of clutch sleeve grease to withdrawal lever and holder spring frictional surfaces. ^ Apply a coat of clutch sleeve grease to ball pin contact surface of the withdrawal lever and inner slots of the release bearing. The grease surface should be level with the surrounding area. ^ Apply a thin coat of clutch sleeve grease to the release bearing frictional surface. After grease application, Install release bearing. Wipe off excess grease forced out during bearing installation. CAUTION: ^ Before installing the manual transaxle to the vehicle, check that each sliding surface slides smoothly by operating withdrawal lever. ^ Be careful not to bring any grease into contact with the clutch disc facing, pressure plate surface, or flywheel surface. ^ When assembling, make sure that both ends of the snap spring touch the end face of the withdrawal lever. ^ Be careful with the orientation of the installation. Page 8505 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 2988 Refrigerant: Service and Repair HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. Page 11571 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 5917 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4662 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 2148 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Description and Operation ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Cooling Fan Control The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. Cooling Fan Operation Cooling Fan Relay Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Page 9984 3. Rotate the pinion three or four times using Tool and record the rotating torque. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) 4. Remove the drive pinion lock nut, using Tool. Tool number: KV40104000 (-) 5. Put a matching mark on the end of the drive pinion in line with the matching mark B on the companion flange. CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark on the drive pinion. Do not damage the companion flange or drive pinion. 6. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool. 7. Remove the front oil seal using Tool. Tool number: ST33290001 (J-34286) ABS Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Page 4932 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 1381 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 5080 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 element at the specified range. A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygenpump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement Lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide Lambda range (0.7 < Lambda < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at Lambda = 1. Therefore, the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 °C (1,292 - 1,472 °F). Page 9344 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4026 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 2768 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 10701 Repair Flow Chart IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 2477 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 12042 When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. Page 5752 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 14529 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation For details, refer to "SPIRAL CABLE". Page 13049 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 790 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Service and Repair Rear Bumper: Service and Repair REAR BUMPER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove rear bumper fascia LH/RH front screws at wheel opening. 2. Remove rear bumper fascia lower stay bolts and side step plate bracket LH/RH. 3. Release rear bumper fascia clips and remove rear bumper fascia LH/RH. 4. Remove license lamps and harness. 5. Remove rear bumper to frame bolts and remove rear bumper. 6. Remove drafter duct from lower side of LH quarter panel. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Apply sealant to clips securing rear bumper side step plate during installation. Page 2037 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 607 Page 9157 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 7197 BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 2 Page 5772 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 118 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2633 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 4966 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7669 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1699 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Blower Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Diagram Information and Instructions Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2349 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 2530 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5975 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 504 Disclaimer Page 9254 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. 3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as shown. 4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 7. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part. Page 172 4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 12599 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13598 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 12214 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 9665 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9103 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6926 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 211 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Page 13063 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 7481 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent. Page 679 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Fuel Pump Relay Page 10220 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 10540 wrench. Brake Judder Repair ^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe. ^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout (see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin). PEDAL FEEL ^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes. ^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car. ^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items: a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely. b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly installed. c. Bleed all air from the brake system. d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of the appropriate service manual. NOTE: Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE. BRAKE SERVICE To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to: 1. Finish rotors properly. ^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise. ^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information). 2. Correctly install pads and shims. IMPORTANT: Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations. ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. 3. Perform the following post-installation checks. ^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary. ^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance, including noise. a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. Page 10126 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 3913 Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33) DETAILED PROCEDURE Page 4326 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation Trailer Hitch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Xterra 2005 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V458000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: September 30, 2005 COMPONENT: Trailer Hitches POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12500 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with a Nissan accessory tow hitch, inadequate quality of some welded joints in the hitch assembly may result in separation of the hitch from the vehicle when being used to tow. CONSEQUENCE: This could result in the trailer separating from the vehicle and cause a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the tow hitches. The recall is expected to begin on October 24, 2005. Owners should contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers can contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236; (TTY:1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 7778 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1951 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 12038 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2138 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8004 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 423 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 3315 CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft. ^ Remove connecting rod bearing cap and bearing, and using scale on plastigage bag, measure the plastigage width. NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is same as that described in the "Method by Calculation". CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING ^ When connecting rod bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with connecting rod bearings installed, the tip end of bearing must protrude. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure. Standard: There must be crush height. ^ If the standard is not met, replace connecting rod bearings. CONNECTING ROD BEARING Undersize Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance Page 10256 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3859 Detailed Procedure (Steps 10 - 14) Page 5970 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6555 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 2472 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8601 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4824 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9077 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13916 3. Unwind the harness. 4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows: a. Press in on the lock tab. b. Slide the sender unit off. C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor. 5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order. Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4725 Page 9142 Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Perform "VIAS SOL VALVE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode. 4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the given conditions. Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the given conditions. Page 8202 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5051 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11258 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 5737 Page 10237 7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". Page 13660 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 14272 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged Roof Rack Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged Classification: BT06-026A Reference: NTB06-093A Date: January 5, 2010 2005 - 2010 XTERRA AND FRONTIER; ROOF RACK DECAL DAMAGE This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and the Parts Information have been updated. No other changes have been made. Please discard the earlier version of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The "NISSAN", "FRONTIER", or "XTERRA" roof rack decal(s) need to be replaced for any reason. ACTIONS 1. Use a heat gun to carefully remove the damaged decal. 2. Clean the side rail or air dam surface. 3. Apply a new decal listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the roof rack, rails, or air dam for damaged decals. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service\ Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: Page 242 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9123 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7583 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 7525 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3 Page 11537 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 2601 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 8811 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 11278 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 199 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5892 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8758 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Fuel Pump Relay Page 8391 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 13418 26.5-35.4 in-lb/ 3.5 +/- 0.5 Nm. 7. Turn the seat over to access the bottom surface of the U-brackets. Clamp one U- bracket with narrow nose locking pliers so that it flexes and contacts the synchronization tube as shown in Figure 5. 8. Using a center punch, mark the spot on the bottom surface of the U-bracket 10 mm/0.39 inch from the each edge and drill an 1/8 inch hole that passes through the U-bracket and the wall of the synchronization tube (see Figure 6). 9. Repeat the procedure on the top surface of the U-bracket. 10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9 on the other end of the synchronization tube. Page 14258 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13811 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9921 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Final Drive Fluid 2WD & 4WD Front final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... API GL-5 SAE 80W-90 For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F) Rear final Drive (except 6 SPD M/T and O/R Vehicles) Use ............................................................... .............................................................................................................. API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-90 gear oil Rear final Drive (only 6 SPD M/T and O/R Vehicles) Use ................................................................... ........................................................................................................ API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-140 gear oil Page 9041 EC-TPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS3 Page 5296 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1635 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 12397 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6735 Case 5 Page 7302 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 7390 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 11612 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 13742 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4850 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. C200 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair C200 Part 1 Page 146 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6229 2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows: [START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>. Page 13137 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. Page 12048 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 4. Disconnect wheel sensor and remove bracket from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 5. On 4WD models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6. Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power tool. 7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A) CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut. 8. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. Page 4889 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8998 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5688 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6439 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 283 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 1 Page 1600 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 10396 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1346 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 2382 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions. Page 7494 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 827 Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling.......................................................................................................................... ..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) Page 7474 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1512 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6935 Case 8 Page 345 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10796 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 9473 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 12542 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 8159 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Valve Body: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 407 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 12749 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 5622 OVERALL SEQUENCE Page 8672 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4719 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 12001 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 8479 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1460 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3714 23. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from water pump cover, chain tensioner cover and intake valve timing control covers. 24. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows: a. Loosen clip of timing chain tensioner (primary), and release plunger stopper. (1) b. Insert plunger into tensioner body by pressing slack guide. (2) c. Keep slack guide pressed and hold plunger in by pushing stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove. (3) d. Remove bolts and remove timing chain tensioner (primary). 25. Remove internal chain guide, tension guide and slack guide. NOTE: Tension guide can be removed after removing timing chain (primary). 26. Remove timing chain (primary) and crankshaft sprocket. CAUTION: After removing timing chain (primary), do not turn crankshaft and camshaft separately, or valves will strike the piston heads. 27. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: Page 5757 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode. 4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Without CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts Page 13736 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5103 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 10807 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 11946 2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. 3. Perform a wheel alignment. ^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points). ^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points.) NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. 4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as a non-usable part. NOTE: Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection. Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5182 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 2675 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 14153 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13818 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10404 Repair Flow Chart Page 11966 2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. 3. Perform a wheel alignment. ^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points). ^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and adjustment points.) NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. 4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as a non-usable part. NOTE: Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection. Page 3022 Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement Page 14718 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4684 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 1424 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 13562 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 8925 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8365 14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N 999MP-9G001P). 15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt. 16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. Disclaimer Page 2309 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7200 Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R - Panic system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Vehicle security (theft warning) system. Refer to "VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM". - Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS", "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -". - Front wiper and washer system. Refer to "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". - Rear window defogger system. Refer to "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER". Page 7379 Page 1046 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ASCD STEERING SWITCH 1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable). 2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 17 and 18 with pushing each switch. Page 2086 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1815 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9026 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5828 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3283 Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of camshaft. CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a different diameter from the other three locations. 2. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout with dial indicator. (Total indicator reading) Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket. Valve Lifter Check if surface of valve lifter has any wear or cracks. ^ If anything above is found, replace valve lifter. Refer to "Available Valve Lifter". Valve Lifter Clearance VALVE LIFTER OUTER DIAMETER ^ Measure the outer diameter at 1/2 height of valve lifter with micrometer since valve lifter is in barrel shape. Standard (intake and exhaust): 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 inch) VALVE LIFTER HOLE DIAMETER ^ Measure the inner diameter of valve lifter hole of cylinder head with inside micrometer. Page 12451 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake Sensor After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table. Page 8939 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6188 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 930 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 1878 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 11370 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5374 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8250 Exhaust Manifold ^ If stud bolts were removed, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Exhaust manifold stud torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) ^ Install exhaust manifold and tighten nuts in numerical order as shown. NOTE: Tighten nuts No. 1 and 2 in two steps. The numerical order No. 7 and 8 shown second step. Heated Oxygen Sensor CAUTION: ^ Before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system threads using oxygen sensor thread cleaner and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number: J-43897-12 J-4389718 ^ Do not over torque air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause damage to air fuel ratio sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the "MIL" coming on. Page 2304 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1320 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6176 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Electrical Diagrams EC-ETC1 EC-ETC1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-ETC3 Page 923 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9276 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4329 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 9781 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9188 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12406 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9398 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 10663 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: ^ Master cylinder cannot be disassembled. ^ Remove reservoir tank only when absolutely necessary. Pull reservoir tank off master cylinder sub-assembly, then remove grommets from master cylinder sub-assembly body. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: ^ Never use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process. ^ Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to new grommets, then insert into master cylinder sub-assembly. Refer to "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS". CAUTION: Do not reuse grommet. 2. Install reservoir tank onto master cylinder assembly. Page 13851 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7034 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11815 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5425 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 9713 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14933 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6648 LAN-CAN-24 CAN System (Type 8) Page 11343 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 623 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14336 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7371 Page 5570 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability. NOTE: - Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because N50 models do not have fuel return system. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to "INTAKE MANIFOLD". - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. - Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. - During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) 7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 335 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 11419 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6759 Case 11 Case 12 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 7274 Page 11055 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 13048 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Page 14406 Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures With Manufacturer's Scan Tool (CONSULT-II) DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. 6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Combination Switch Reading Function Combination Switch Reading Function For details, refer to Body Control System, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION". Page 4082 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 10769 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number 205-D002 Page 7827 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 3897 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. With GST Check idle speed with GST. Page 10440 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Page 13904 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2759 5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1. ^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6. ^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12. 6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool. 7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See Figure 2. Page 8044 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 6827 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2) BCM Circuit Inspection Page 12488 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 4741 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1632 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5369 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8174 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7175 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations FIRING ORDER 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 3013 Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 13506 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Valve opening temperature ........................................................................................................................................................ 80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F) Maximum valve lift ....................................................................................................................................................... 8.6 mm / 95°C (0.339 inch / 203°F) valve closing temperature ................................................................. ................................................................................................................ 77°C (171°F) Page 6914 Case 13 Case 14 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 11116 Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation Page 11260 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 13693 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 5462 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 11145 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 5620 11. Wait 20 seconds. 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 2262 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4098 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 7154 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 1872 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1785 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 6098 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 979 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 10636 DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from cylinder body. 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. 4. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, (KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert into groove on cylinder body CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. 2. Apply brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot into piston groove. Page 4989 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9079 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 1841 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14117 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 544 Page 7551 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5766 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 14458 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6117 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13429 11. Install an 1/8 inch short steel blind rivet (Marson Klik-Fast (5B4-2) 1/8" diameter 1/8" grip Steel or equivalent) in the 4 holes drilled in Steps 7, 8 and 9. 12. Reassemble the seat base, install the seat in the vehicle, attach the battery cables (negative cable last), and reset the radio stations. Disclaimer Page 5873 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 6021 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 11965 LINK REPLACEMENT 1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. Page 6074 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 13810 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10801 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2010 Page 14390 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9567 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 14030 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL Page 14572 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13065 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Page 14488 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5249 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 13102 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 8056 EC-TPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 6971 Page 7691 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7156 Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 11671 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8287 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6663 Information Bus: Vehicle Damage Warnings Precautions For Harness Repair Precautions For Harness Repair CAN SYSTEM - Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).] - Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of twisted line will be lost.) Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis CAN SYSTEM - Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals. - Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. - Be sure to turn ignition switch off and disconnect negative battery terminal before checking the circuit. Precautions When Using CONSULT-II Precautions When Using CONSULT-II When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II 1. Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle? - If YES, GO TO 2. - If NO, GO TO 5. 2. Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis results? - If YES, GO TO 3. - If NO, GO TO 4. 3. Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection. 4. Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefore, erase the self-diagnosis results. 5. Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW". Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Page 11427 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 1933 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 10973 Terminal "2" nut : 10.8 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb) CAUTION: Be sure to tighten terminal "2" nut carefully. Page 7808 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 1323 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Page 8837 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12340 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Front Blower Motor Relay Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay. Page 3239 Page 2877 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Changing Brake Fluid Drain and Refill CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so when splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water. ^ Before servicing, disconnect actuator connector or battery negative cable. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve. 2. Depress brake pedal, then loosen each bleed valve using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool and gradually remove brake fluid. 3. Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 4. Rest foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve. Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid flows out. Bleed air from brake system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Classification: RA09-003 Reference: NTB10-008 Date: January 15, 2010 2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for identification), AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. Page 7487 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 845 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8363 9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab. 10. Install the bracket on the frame rail. NOTE: The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in. 11. Torque the bolt to: 11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb) NOTE: Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11939 Repair Overview SERVICE PROCEDURE Lower Link Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower links. ^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below. ^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links. ^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links. 3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below. Page 10661 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal and Installation Brake Master Cylinder CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 2. Disconnect harness connectors for fluid level sensor and pressure sensor. 3. Using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool, disconnect brake tube from master cylinder assembly. 4. Remove master cylinder assembly nuts and master cylinder assembly INSTALLATION ^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". CAUTION: ^ Refill using recommended brake fluid. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". ^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Page 117 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8888 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6917 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) TCM Circuit Inspection Page 10026 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. Locations Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Page 3652 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 12760 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 9650 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 603 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6177 EC-ETC3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 10857 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether For Children) System Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether For Children) System LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM Removal and Installation NOTE: The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable. Page 8721 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways Seat Bottom Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways Classification: BT05-050 Reference: NTB05-092 Date: October 7, 2005 RIGHT FRONT SEAT BACK ASSEMBLY RATTLES AND EXCESSIVE SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (1A60) (Applies ONLY to vehicles with Manual seats WI Fold Flat Feature) APPLIED VINS: Frontier, Xterra, & Pathfinder: ALL Titan: vehicles built before 1N6AAO6A * 6N507692 Armada: vehicles built before 5N1AAO8B * 6N704123 IF YOU CONFIRM An unoccupied front passenger seat back rattles and moves side-to-side when driven ^ Over speed bumps at 5 mph or above ^ On bumpy roads at 15 mph or above ACTION ^ Remove the seat from the vehicle. ^ Remove the seat cushion, apply thread locker to 4 existing screws, and reinforce the seat by adding pop rivets as per the Service Information section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 3623 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 2776 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed. 2. Remove air duct. 3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not move it clockwise. 4. Remove drive belt. Page 9232 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 12854 SRS Components Parts Location Page 11491 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Specifications Firing Order: Specifications FIRING ORDER 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 1917 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5818 Page 13604 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 7553 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8710 Fuel Injector: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11692 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11870 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 5449 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 185 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14414 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4782 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9655 Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4) Page 7254 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6053 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10598 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 2217 11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4. 12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor. 13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order. ^ Reuse the original cover. ^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor. ^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb). 14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the codes: ^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function, SELF-DIAG [PAST]. 15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows: a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure 5). b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF. c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the Service Manual for diagnosis and repair. ^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this bulletin. 16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector. Page 3321 Connecting Rod: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences Rod Bearing Cap Tighten connecting rod bolts. Connecting rod bolt .......................................................................................................................................................... 19.6 Nm (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.) Then tighten all connecting rod bolts 90° clockwise. Page 6438 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1966 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6850 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection Page 2020 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7077 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1901 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 7986 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3296 ^ Install camshaft brackets (No. 2 to 4) aligning the stamp marks as shown. NOTE: There are no identification marks indicating left and right for camshaft bracket (No. 1). ^ Apply liquid gasket to mating surface of camshaft bracket (No. 1) as shown on right and left banks. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". 5. Tighten camshaft bracket bolts in the following steps, in numerical order as shown. Camshaft bracket bolts Step 1: (bolts 7 - 10): 1.96 Nm (0.2kgf-m,17 inch lbs.) Step 2: (bolts 1 - 6): 1.96 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 3: 5.88 Nm (0.6 kg-m, 52 inch lbs.) Step 4: 10.4 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 92 inch lbs.) Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Classification: EL07-027D Reference: NTB07-069D Date: November 30, 2010 FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3 The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8 405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273 2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614 APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007* *IMPORTANT: Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are working on is instead covered under that Campaign. IF YOU CONFIRM: The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative. And/Or The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis. ACTIONS: Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION Page 11626 Page 13646 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3996 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 2534 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11128 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 2263 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11043 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement Page 10298 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 1386 b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Page 1017 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7184 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2585 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 4206 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 587 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 4904 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5266 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11357 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 13597 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 3353 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION In cases of removing/installing or replacing camshaft and valve-related parts, or of unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance (found malfunctions during stating, idling or causing noise), perform inspection as follows: 1. Remove rocker covers (right and left banks). 2. Measure the valve clearance as follows: a. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke. ^ Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. ^ Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank) are located as shown. ^ If not, rotate crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown. b. Use feeler gauge, measure the clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. Page 4578 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7167 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7697 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12375 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5422 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7294 Page 8547 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 12040 EC-IVCB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 12360 Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Magnet Clutch Circuit SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The front air control controls A/C compressor operation based on intake temperature and a signal from ECM. The ECM may not allow A/C compressor operation if refrigerant pressure sensor value is too high. Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the A/C compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor. When intake air temperature is higher than 3.5 °C (38.3 °F), the A/C compressor turns ON. The A/C compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than 2.5 °C (36.5 °F). Page 6733 Case 3 Page 5047 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14567 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 13068 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 12171 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Interior - Manual Front Seat Recliner Inoperative Seat Latch: Customer Interest Interior - Manual Front Seat Recliner Inoperative Classification: BT05-029a Reference: NTB05-069a Date: July 26, 2005 2005 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER; FRONT SEAT MANUAL RECLINER INOPERATIVE This bulletin amends NTB05-069. This version amends Step 9 to include the bolt torque specification. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2005 Frontier (D40), Xterra (N50), Pathfinder (R51) (Applies to Non-Fold Flat front seat ONLY) IF YOU CONFIRM The driver and/or passenger seat does not recline or tilt forward when lifting up on the recliner handle. ACTION ^ Re-align the recliner linkage which may have slipped out of position (off pin). (See Figure 1) ^ Adjust the seat cushion rear bracket to prevent the above. IMPORTANT The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 13662 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 10601 d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process. 4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance. ^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed. ROTOR INDEXING When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor run-out. 1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only). 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub. 4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5. For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only). ^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit, you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Disclaimer Diagram Information and Instructions Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10354 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 11586 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 1447 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 4604 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9 Page 13880 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6789 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Page 11842 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Classification: EC04-025 Reference: NTB04-126 Date: October 29, 2004 MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284 IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor) ^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor) ACTIONS: 1. Repair the vehicle as necessary. ^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information. 2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning. IMPORTANT: If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared: ^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists. ^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair). CLAIMS INFORMATION The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a separate repair item. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284). ^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle. ^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information. Page 5504 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 3677 Page EM-18 Testing and Inspection Fuel Return Line: Testing and Inspection FUEL SYSTEM Checking Fuel Lines Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap and fuel tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts. Page 10771 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". ^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number 205-D002 Installation Page 1504 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2631 SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. Page 138 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14183 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 8723 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2019 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12400 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 2655 Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 954 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1270 Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3) Page 5733 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11387 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3839 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 4524 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 11002 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8485 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6967 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 9283 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 11230 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1970 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 12553 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Front Blower Motor Relay Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay. Page 8218 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 10449 Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Oil Seal REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove transfer from transmission (4WD models). 3. Remove rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models). Installation 1. Install new rear oil seal into the extension case (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models) until it is flush with component face, using suitable tool or Tool. Tool number: ST33400001 (J-26082) CAUTION: ^ Apply ATF to rear oil seal. ^ Do not reuse rear oil seal. Page 4495 Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification Idle Speed: Adjustments Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Page 4149 ^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are located (see Figure 1 and 2 above). > The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield. > If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply. 5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1 above for example. WARNING: Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube. ^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb) 6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end. ^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within 5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for example). Page 1510 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9506 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Page 9535 Page 12393 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 12609 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 7734 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2612 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 2736 Replace valve or valve seat accordingly. ^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, cylinder head gaskets are leaking. In such a case, replace cylinder head gaskets. 9. After inspection is completed, install removed parts. 10. Start engine, and make sure that engine runs smoothly. 11. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to EC-62, "How to Erase DTC". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool Page 5327 Page 4826 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6889 Case 12 Case 13 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 1763 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 13070 Page 1039 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 11110 4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 5993 EC-PHSB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 7952 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3169 Disclaimer Page 7959 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-AF1B1 EC-AF1B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1B2 Page 1368 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4093 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 12362 5. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter. Tool number: KV99233130 (J-29884) CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under the pulley groove and not into the pulley groove. 6. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver, remove the three magnet coil fixing screws and remove the magnet coil. INSPECTION Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation. Coil Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation. INSTALLATION Page 511 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 13872 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 1923 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2626 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) Page 2370 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 1231 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. 2. Disconnect the lighting and turn signal switch connector. 3. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and release from the steering column. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Page 6656 LAN-CAN-32 Page 1860 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Audible Warning Device: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection For Power Supply And Ground Circuit (Step 1) Inspection For Power Supply And Ground Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) Page 14560 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7629 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 774 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7914 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 958 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11709 Page 12300 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Motor MODE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel side finisher. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the lower instrument cover. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 3. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the mode door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Procedures Timing Cover: Procedures FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ This section describes removal/installation procedure of front timing chain case and timing chain related parts without removing oil pan (upper) on vehicle. ^ When oil pan (upper) needs to be removed or installed, or when rear timing chain case is removed or installed, remove oil pans (upper and lower) first. Then remove front timing chain case, timing chain related parts, and rear timing chain case in this order, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "TIMING CHAIN". ^ Refer to "TIMING CHAIN" for component parts location. REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 3. Drain engine oil. Refer to "Changing Engine Oil". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine oil on drive belts. 4. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 5. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly. Refer to "ENGINE COOLING FAN 6. Separate engine harnesses removing their brackets from front timing chain case. 7. Remove drive belts. 8. Remove power steering oil pump from bracket with piping connected, and temporarily secure it aside. 9. Remove power steering oil pump bracket. 10. Remove alternator. 11. Remove water bypass hose, water hose clamp and idler pulley bracket from front timing chain case. 12. Remove right and left intake valve timing control covers. ^ Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown. ^ Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Shaft is internally jointed with camshaft sprocket (INT) center hole. When removing, keep it horizontal until it is completely disconnected. Page 6278 Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 10733 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 14023 3. Unwind the harness. 4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows: a. Press in on the lock tab. b. Slide the sender unit off. C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor. 5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order. Page 8874 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Testing and Inspection Vacuum Reservoir: Testing and Inspection VACUUM TANK 1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank. 2. Connect a vacuum pump to the port A of vacuum tank. 3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B. Page 5368 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6712 Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Check Sheet Part 1 Page 5238 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6306 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 9351 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1996 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7995 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Testing and Inspection Radiator: Testing and Inspection CHECKING RADIATOR Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows. ^ Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins. ^ When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering. 1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core, with the hose pointed vertically downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute. 3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from the radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core, with the air hose pointed vertically downward. ^ Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 inch). 5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out. 6. Check for leaks. Page 7210 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Work Support WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 13747 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10127 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10887 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5530 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8914 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 14787 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview License Plate Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Check Power Supply And Ground Circuit (Step 1) Check Power Supply And Ground Circuit (Steps 1 (Continued) - 3) Page 10798 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14651 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3717 31. Remove O-rings from cylinder block. 32. Remove timing chain tensioners (secondary) from cylinder head if necessary a. Remove camshaft brackets (No. 1). b. Remove timing chain tensioners (secondary) with stopper pin attached. 33. Use scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from front and rear timing chain cases, and opposite mating surfaces. ^ Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole and thread. 34. Use scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from water pump cover, chain tensioner cover and intake valve timing control covers. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Timing Chain Page 5069 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 2082 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9036 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6212 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1451 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2007 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 13644 Cruise Control Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5037 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 4709 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 13930 c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock ring holder as shown in Figure 8. NOTE: The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring. NOTE: ^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring. ^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring. ^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). Page 993 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 4954 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11362 Page 11506 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6174 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 7033 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 288 Body Control Module: Description and Operation BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description - BCM (body control module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. Description - BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. - BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). 2. Operation description - BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. - If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. - At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. Page 1544 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4775 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 14467 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 9596 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 3034 Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14476 LT-T/TOW-04 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 8708 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9165 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8444 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4071 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11068 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6715 Case 2 Page 4453 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 5854 Repair Flow Chart Page 67 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Page 12394 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 12379 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14079 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 12034 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8995 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 11072 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4345 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 2829 9. Take note of which hole will be used for the nut and which hole will be used for the bracket tab. 10. Install the bracket on the frame rail. NOTE: The collapsible nut will be a tight fit and may require tapping with a hammer to get it all the way in. 11. Torque the bolt to: 11.0 N.m (1.1 Kg-m, 96 in-lb) NOTE: Use a 13mm open end wrench to hold the spacer nut while tightening the bolt. Page 1709 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 9331 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7793 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5651 CAUTION: ^ Do not drop or shock spark plug. ^ Do not use wire brush for cleaning. ^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kgf/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds ^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1355 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3816 Page 5131 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 6888 Case 10 Case 11 Page 6874 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4) Page 6454 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 9808 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1117 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1260 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9372 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3760 19. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case. 20. Remove water pump cover and chain tensioner cover from front timing chain case, if necessary Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) 21. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front timing chain case. 22. Remove timing chain and related parts. 23. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from front and rear timing chain cases and oil pan (upper), and liquid gasket mating surfaces. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket fragments to enter oil pan. ^ Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole and thread. Page 8322 12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP). 13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 10501 ^ Make sure the shims are installed as shown in Figure 1. ^ Apply Molykote(R) M77 grease to the back side of the outboard brake pads ONLY (see Figure 1). ^ Apply Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease onto the pad retainers in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ NEVER interchange the greases used in this bulletin. These greases have completely different characteristics and properties. They are only compatible with the specific areas they are intended for. ^ Example of Molykote(R) 7439 (copper) grease applied to pad retainer. Page 13963 Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: - The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. - Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (semitransparent colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. Page 4277 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9000 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove fuel level sensor unit. 2. Check resistance between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminals 2 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Page 9471 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6164 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Draining & Filling Fluid Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Draining & Filling Fluid Changing DRAINING 1. Start the engine and let it run to warm up the transmission. 2. Stop the engine. Remove the transmission drain plug and drain the oil. 3. Set a gasket on the drain plug and install it to the transmission. Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to "Case Components". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug hole. Oil grade and Viscosity. Refer to " Page 10906 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8123 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 2931 3. Apply sealant to drain plug. Install drain plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". FILLING 1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug hole. Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". 2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Page 7733 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8913 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Description and Operation Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description ECM receives turbine revolution sensor signal from TCM through CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for engine control. Page 11454 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 14347 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 13582 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4443 Page 3355 ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown in the table below (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 3 cylinder at compression TDC d. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 5 cylinder at TDC of compression stroke. Page 4065 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5208 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 10609 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 4017 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3769 20. Remove front timing chain case as follows: a. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown. b. Insert suitable tool into the notch at the top of the front timing chain case as shown (1). c. Pry off case by moving tool as shown (2). - Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: - Do not use screwdriver or something similar. - After removal, handle front timing chain case carefully so it does not twist, bend, or warp under a load. 21. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case. 22. If necessary, remove water pump cover and chain tensioner cover from front timing chain case. - Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) Page 3368 1. Apply liquid gasket using Tool to joint part among rocker cover, cylinder head and camshaft bracket (No. 1) as follows: Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". NOTE: The figure shows an example of left bank side [zoomed in shows camshaft bracket (No. 1)]. a. Refer to the figure "a" to apply liquid gasket to joint part of camshaft bracket (No. 1) and cylinder head. b. Refer to the figure "b" to apply liquid gasket to the figure "a" squarely. 2. Install new rocker cover gasket to rocker cover. 3. Install rocker cover. ^ Check if rocker cover gasket is not dropped from installation groove of rocker cover. 4. Tighten bolts in two steps separately in numerical order as shown. 1st step: 1.96 Nm (0.20 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) 2nd step: 8.33 Nm (0.85 kg-m, 74 inch lbs.) 5. Install new O-ring and PCV valve to rocker cover (right bank), if removed. 6. Install PCV hose. ^ Insert PCV hose by 25 to 30 mm (0.98 to 1.18 inch) from connector end. ^ When installing, be careful not to twist or come in contact with other parts. 7. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6492 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7850 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Brakes - Front/Rear Brakes Make Squeaking Noises Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brakes - Front/Rear Brakes Make Squeaking Noises Classification: BR06-006D Reference: NTB06-037D Date: March 2, 2011 2005 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; SQUEAKING NOISE FROM BRAKES The application of Molykote(R) 7439 has been added to the Service Procedure. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Frontier built before: 1N6(*)DO7(**)5C461154 Xterra built before: 5N1AN08(**)5C651886 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before August 15, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM A squeaking noise coming from the brakes. ACTIONS Perform repairs as follows: Front Brakes 1. Replace the front brake pads. 2. Install the new brake pad hardware kit (which includes new shims). Rear Brakes 1. Replace the rear brake pads. 2. Install the new brake pad hardware kit (which includes new shims). IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 11147 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear wiper arm. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment of Rear Wiper Arm Stop Location". 2. If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. 3. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors. 4. Remove the high mount stop lamp. Page 1100 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake Sensor After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table. Page 5830 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 12976 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6091 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5957 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1779 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3710 Part 2 Removal and Installation NOTE: ^ This section describes procedures for removing/installing front timing chain case and timing chain related parts, and rear timing chain case, when oil pan (upper) needs to be removed/installed for engine overhaul, etc. ^ To remove/install front timing chain case, timing chain, and its related parts without removing oil pan (upper), refer to "FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE". REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 3. Drain engine oil. Refer to "Changing Engine Oil". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine oil on drive belts. 4. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 5. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly. Refer to "ENGINE COOLING FAN". 6. Separate engine harnesses removing their brackets from front timing chain case. 7. Remove drive belts. 8. Remove power steering oil pump from bracket with piping connected, and temporarily secure it aside. 9. Remove power steering oil pump bracket. 10. Remove alternator. 11. Remove water bypass hose, water hose clamp and idler pulley bracket from front timing chain case. 12. Remove right and left intake valve timing control covers. ^ Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown. ^ Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Shaft is internally jointed with camshaft sprocket (INT) center hole. When removing, keep it horizontal until it is completely disconnected. Page 5060 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 10722 Page 9056 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes With Manufacturer's Scan Tool CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 11126 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 14658 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 8106 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 873 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown. ^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models. CAUTION: ^ Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/ decel G sensor. ^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After performing the above work, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-212, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor". See: On-Vehicle Service Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 13789 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Service and Repair Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear combination lamp. 2. Rotate each bulb socket (1, 2, 3) counterclockwise to unlock it. 3. Pull bulb straight out away from socket to release. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11010 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Service and Repair Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Description and Operation Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. It operates simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level. When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are securely restrained. When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt web tension while maintaining force. Page 11488 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Specifications Fuel: Specifications Fuel Requirements Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (research octane number 91). CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity. Page 11823 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 358 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 9555 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8215 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8727 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 14471 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2442 Page 14519 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 3164 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 14478 TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION The trailer power supply is controlled by trailer tow relay 2. When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied - through 10 A fuse (No. 38, located in the IPDM E/R) - through IPDM E/R terminal 27 - to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1 and - to backup lamp relay terminal 3 (with M/T). When trailer tow relay 2 is energized, power is supplied - through trailer tow relay 2 terminals 5 and 7 - to trailer connector terminal 5. Page 3763 i Fit lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top face of oil pan (upper). From the fitting point, make entire front timing chain case contact rear timing chain case completely. ii. Since front timing chain case is offset for difference of bolt holes, tighten bolts temporarily while holding front timing chain case from front and top as shown. iii. Same as the previous step, insert dowel pin while holding front timing chain case from front and top completely. d. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. ^ There are four type of bolts. Refer to the following for locating bolts. Bolt position Bolt diameter 1-5: 10 mm (0.39 inch) 6-25: 6 mm (0.24 inch) Bolt position Tightening specification 1-5: 55.0 Nm (5.6 kg-m, 41 ft. lbs.) 6-25: 12.7 Nm (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft. lbs.) e. After all bolts tightened, retighten them to the specified torque in numerical order as shown. 5. Install two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in numerical order as shown. Front oil pan bolt torque: 22.0 Nm (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft. lbs.) 6. Install right and left intake valve timing control covers as follows: a. Install new seal rings in shaft grooves. Page 5712 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 8973 Page 2069 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle Nut ............................................................................................................................................... .................................... 137 Nm (14kg-m, 101 ft.lbs) Page 6591 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12828 Page 2704 Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5) Page 8798 c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock ring holder as shown in Figure 8. NOTE: The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring. NOTE: ^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring. ^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring. ^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). Page 6618 CAN System (Type 6) Schematic Page 2085 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1254 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 11179 Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Page 14620 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 9371 Page 4632 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 6915 Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1) Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4) Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 7619 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 13106 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4697 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-APPS1 EC-APPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS2 Page 1784 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 13723 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 5 - 9) Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 7202 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch - BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table. NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) - When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. Page 8359 2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1). ^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top. 3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1). 4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and remove the hose (see Figure 2). Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve. Adjustments Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T). 4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 8994 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8368 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 803 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5992 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PHSB1 EC-PHSB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-PHSB2 Page 11140 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13691 Page 14378 Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 14282 Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Step 4 (Continued)) Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Step 5) Page 1407 Battery Current Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 14502 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4366 Page 9272 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1959 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6025 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7078 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8703 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8404 Canister Vent Valve: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. 3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Perform "VENT CONTROL/V" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode. 6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. 7. Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. 8. Perform step 6 again. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Page 11420 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8894 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Drive/Propeller Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 12027 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 8608 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5507 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 12467 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure A/C Pipe Removal and Installation for High-pressure A/C Pipe REMOVAL 1. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front right mud guard. 3. Remove the front right splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 5. Remove the low pressure A/C pipe. Refer to "Removal and Installation for Low-pressure A/C Pipe". 6. Remove the high-pressure A/C pipe. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure A/C pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 5244 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 4106 Thermostat: Service and Repair WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Completely drain engine coolant. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 2. Remove air duct and air cleaner case. 3. Disconnect radiator hose (lower) and oil cooler hose from water inlet and thermostat assembly. 4. Remove water inlet and thermostat assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble water inlet and thermostat assembly. Replace them as a unit, if necessary. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly. Page 10740 Traction Control Module: Description and Operation TCS CONTROL UNIT Description The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair. Page 13181 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 7676 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12332 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 9913 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 5162 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes With Manufacturer's Scan Tool CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 4503 Page 7150 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 9364 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7755 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3252 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 7025 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Instruments - Auto Dimming Mirror/Compass Service Compass: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Auto Dimming Mirror/Compass Service Classification: EL05-016 Reference: NTB05-062 Date: July 21, 2005 FACTORY INSTALLED AUTO DIMMING MIRROR AND COMPASS SERVICE INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 Armada (TA60) 2004 Titan (A60) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) 2003 - 2005 Murano (Z50) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2002 - 2005 Altima (L31) 2004 - 2005 Maxima (A34) 2004 - 2005 Quest (V42) 2003-2005 350Z (Z33) SERVICE INFORMATION This bulletin supplements the diagnostic and repair information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for the factory installed auto dimming mirror with compass. When servicing the factory installed auto dimming mirror or compass, refer to the information in this bulletin along with the repair information contained in the ESM. The factory installed auto dimming mirror with compass is manufactured by Gentex. It can be identified by looking for "GNTX" stamped in the back of the mirror case along with patent and other information. Also, the factory installed mirror has the compass display on the mirror face as shown in Figure 1. Auto Dimming Mirror Operational Description ^ The automatic dimming mirror uses two photoelectric sensors to detect front and rear light conditions. ^ Based on input from these sensors, the mirror is adjusted to eliminate unwanted glare. ^ The amount of adjustment is dependant on the amount of light detected by the rear sensor in relationship to the ambient light (surrounding light) detected by the front sensor. ^ The mirror will automatically return to a "no dimming" mode whenever the vehicle is placed in REVERSE to ensure an improved view when backing up. Page 12969 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 13427 4. Remove the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube. 5. Apply thread locker to each of the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube. 6. Reinstall the synchronization tube using the screws with thread locker applied. Torque screws to: Page 7964 EC-O2H2B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2S2B1 Page 8813 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1698 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 4504 Page 4819 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 13824 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to BCS-11, "CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE". See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool 4. Touch "BUZZER" or "BCM". 5. Select "DATA MONITOR" or "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". Page 12118 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY Page 8021 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8201 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 825 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Checking Brake Fluid Level Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Brake Fluid Level LEVEL CHECK ^ Check that the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank is within specification, between the MAX and MIN lines as shown. ^ Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks. ^ If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks. ^ If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after the parking brake pedal is released, check the brake system for any brake fluid leaks. Page 6682 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Shoe: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Page 545 Page 5593 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 1251 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 936 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 7203 5. Operation mode - Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current- consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption. 1. CAN communication status - With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. - Control by BCM is being operated properly. - When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. - Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status - This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. - It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. - Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status - With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. - With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. - Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status - BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. Page 7570 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 9805 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 14926 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment of Rear Wiper Arm Stop Location REMOVAL 1. Operate the rear wiper motor and stop it at the auto stop position. 2. Remove rear wiper arm cover by gripping bottom edge and rotating cover up. Remove mounting nut, and remove the wiper arm. INSTALLATION 1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF" (auto stop). 2. Clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce the possibility of wiper arm looseness. Page 9011 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 114 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location VDC/TCS/ABS Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS On-Vehicle Service Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. G Sensor G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE". Page 13470 Torque bolts to 8.5 N-m (0.86 kg-m, 6.26 ft-lb.) This will prevent the recliner linkage from slipping out of position. 10. Re-install seat and seat back trim. 11. Confirm recliner operates properly. Check manual slide function for effort/binding. Disclaimer Page 8481 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13206 5. Release clips and remove front door finisher. - Disconnect lock cable and handle cable from pull handle/lock lever assembly. Refer to "FRONT DOOR LOCK". Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11058 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6049 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8483 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Testing and Inspection Hood Latch: Testing and Inspection Hood Lock Control Inspection CAUTION: If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. 1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height. 2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front end of the hood is raised by approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make sure the hood opener returns to the original position. 3. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply "body grease" to the points as shown. Page 8077 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5738 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13136 11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. Page 14082 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 297 Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Work Support WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 8405 2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the given conditions. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. 4. Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. 5. Perform step 3 again. Page 5494 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7963 EC-O2H2B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2H2B2 Page 762 Location of Electrical Parts Page 4716 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7469 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7439 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 6323 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 10851 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 4281 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3612 Part 2 Page 13817 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling.......................................................................................................................... ..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) Page 5980 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4078 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text C200 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection C200 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Rear Axle Parts Page 6820 Case 6 Page 928 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 5919 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2131 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 4473 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 4891 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 14820 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9074 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 317 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7351 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 1033 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6301 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 314 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4387 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 8891 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5977 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 10836 Page 4234 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 2296 Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR 1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground. Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V 6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. Page 10943 Neutral Safety Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 3285 Camshaft: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of camshaft. CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a different diameter from the other three locations. 2. Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal. 3. Turn camshaft to one direction with hands, and measure the camshaft runout on dial indicator. (Total indicator reading) Standard: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) 4. If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft. Camshaft Cam Height 1. Measure the camshaft cam height with micrometer. Standard: Intake: 45.465 - 45.655 mm (1.7900 - 1.7974 inch) Exhaust: 45.075 - 45.265 mm (1.7746 - 1.7821 inch) Limit: Intake: 45.265 mm (1.7821 inch) Exhaust: 44.875 mm (1.7667 inch) 2. If wear exceeds the limit, replace camshaft. Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance CAMSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER ^ Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal with micrometer. Standard: No. 1: 25.935 25.955 mm (1.0211 - 1.0218 inch) No.2,3,4: 23.445 - 23.465 mm (0.9230 - 0.9238 inch) Page 971 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2553 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5010 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 7149 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Service and Repair Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to "Removal and Installation 2. Remove spark plug using spark plug wrench (commercial service tool). CAUTION: Do not drop or shock it. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. Hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ^ Frequent engine starts ^ Low ambient temperatures Cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ^ Extended highway driving ^ Frequent high engine revolution Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 inch) Page 981 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5793 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 11829 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1999 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7030 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8176 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8679 b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 698 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove center console. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: - Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG)". Page 6588 Page 4436 Page 4825 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control REMOVAL 1. Remove the front grill. Refer to "FRONT GRILLE". 2. Remove the front fender protector (LH). Refer to "FENDER PROTECTOR". 3. Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core support upper and hood ledge. 4. Remove the bolts, and the hood release handle. 5. Separate the grommet from the lower dash panel. Pull the hood lock cable out through the passenger compartment. CAUTION: While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the hood lock cable. INSTALLATION 1. Pull the hood lock cable through the lower dash panel hole into the engine room. Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keep the radius 100mm (3.94 in) or more. 2. Make sure the cable is not offset from the grommet, and push the grommet into the lower dash panel hole securely. 3. Install the hood release handle. 4. Apply sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly. Page 14487 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 964 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8934 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. LAN System Component Parts Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5388 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8875 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8794 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. 2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector. Page 10038 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection M226 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Rear Axle Parts ^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary. Page 4262 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation" in General Information. 7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. Page 6171 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8309 12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP). 13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve. Page 9321 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8967 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5907 Page 14617 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7381 Page 11195 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14626 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 11941 Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples. Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Fuel Gauge Sender: Customer Interest Fuel/Instruments - Fuel Gauge Inaccuracy/DTC's Set Classification: EL07-027D Reference: NTB07-069D Date: November 30, 2010 FUEL GAUGE ISSUES AND/OR DTC P0461/2/3 The Parts Information and Service Procedure of this bulletin have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008* Frontier (D40) 2005-2008* Xterra (N50) 2005-2008* Pathfinder (R51) APPLIED VINS: 2005-2007* Frontier - ALL 2008 Frontier - Vehicles built before: 1N6(*)D0(***)8 405797 2005-2007* Xterra - ALL 2008 Xterra - Vehicles built before: 5N1AN08(**)8C 504273 2005-2007* Pathfinder - ALL 2008 Pathfinder - Vehicles built before: 5N1(*)R(*)8(**)8C 630614 APPLIED DATES: Vehicles built before: September 19, 2007* *IMPORTANT: Some 2006 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles are not covered by this bulletin; they are covered under Nissan Recall Campaign NTB10-031 (that addresses the separate issue of the fuel gauge reading 1/4 full when the tank is empty). Check Service COMM to see if the vehicle you are working on is instead covered under that Campaign. IF YOU CONFIRM: The fuel gauge is erratic, inaccurate, or inoperative. And/Or The MIL is "ON" with DTC P0461, P0462, or P0463 stored in Self-Diagnosis. ACTIONS: Replace the fuel level sending unit with the one from the Parts Information section of this bulletin. ^ Make sure to use the Clip (Sender Unit Cover) listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the entire fuel pump assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION Page 999 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 10 - 13) Diagnostic Procedure (Step 14) Page 6490 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7613 Page 5110 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 14287 License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair LICENSE PLATE LAMP Removal 1. Disconnect license plate lamp harness. 2. Depress tab to remove license plate lamp from rear bumper. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1796 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6657 LAN-CAN-33 CAN System (Type 11) Page 5170 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T). 5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 11165 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6289 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 330 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7042 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 11407 Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation Page 9060 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 3722 c. After confirming the mating marks are aligned, tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specifications. ^ Secure camshaft using suitable at the hexagonal portion to tighten bolts. d. Pull stopper pins out from timing chain tensioners (secondary). 6. Install tension guide. 7. Install timing chain (primary) as follows: a. Install crankshaft sprocket. ^ Make sure the mating marks on crankshaft sprocket face the front of engine. b. Install timing chain (primary). Page 13586 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 514 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Classification: GI99-001F Reference: NTB99-020F Date: August 8, 2008 LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009 SERVICE INFORMATION This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing"). CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual. 1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT): ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components. 2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: ^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward. ^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH. ^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission. ^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position. Testing and Inspection Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection Inspection After Installation CAUTION: If a leak is detected at the connections, retighten it or, if necessary, replace the damaged part. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses), and connections for fluid leaks, damage, twist, deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections. Replace any damaged parts. 2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg, 177 lbs.) with engine running for approximately 5 seconds, check for fluid leaks from each part. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9340 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 12253 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 8193 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 13675 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1249 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 13860 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10858 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 8959 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose. 3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting their joints. ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^ Do not shock it. ^ Do not disassemble it. ^ Do not touch its sensor. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^ If anything found, replace air duct. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly. Page 14503 Page 3243 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4764 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 7104 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9236 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13468 A. Example of correctly aligned condition (pin inserted into shaft link slot). (See Figures 3) B. Example of misaligned condition (pin not inserted into shaft link slot) (See Figure 4) 4. Remove seat from vehicle. NOTE: Place seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt and scuff marks. Page 1517 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ECT SENSOR Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 2134 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 13618 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 4) Page 7328 2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows: [START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>. Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 1419 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5426 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 487 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 3762 3. Install water pump cover and chain tensioner cover to front timing chain case, if removed. ^ Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". 4. Install front timing chain case as follows: a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case back side as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". b. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. c. Assemble front timing chain case as follows: Page 7051 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Diagram Information and Instructions Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9221 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 2184 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7869 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 12536 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 1045 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. Page 5096 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5097 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 1471 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 947 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 10518 ^ Use a torque wrench to tighten the wheel lug nuts to 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft-lb). CAUTION: Do not tighten the wheel lug nuts with an air impact driver. Uneven or high torque applied to the lugs may "distort" (warp) the brake rotor and hub. This may result in increased rotor runout and excessive rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. 4. Burnish the brake pads. A. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). B. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. C. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. D. Repeat A, B and C (above) ten times to complete the burnishing process. 5. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the brake squeaking noise is gone. Page 12257 Disclaimer Page 10170 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. Page 7589 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 11923 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Lower Link INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Lower Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Lower Link Bushing Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary. Page 1162 c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock ring holder as shown in Figure 8. NOTE: The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring. NOTE: ^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring. ^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring. ^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). Page 13766 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 12041 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation IVT CONTROL Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Description Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. Page 7380 Page 7031 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6122 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 7241 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2709 Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24) Page 9043 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 9027 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 5986 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 2272 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 13002 Page 7762 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9173 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 982 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10439 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 1101 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front kick plate. Refer to "KICK PLATES". 2. Remove the lower dash side finisher. Refer to "LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER". 3. Remove the front pillar lower finisher. Refer to "FRONT PILLAR LOWER FINISHER". 4. Remove the assist grip handle 5. Remove the front pillar upper finisher. Refer to "FRONT PILLAR UPPER FINISHER". 6. Remove the lower glove box. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX". 7. Remove the upper glove box (cluster lid E). Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL". 8. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 9. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1672 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 4 Page 6985 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9175 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5724 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9035 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 973 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7336 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 9281 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4236 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 1210 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 601 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6154 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9057 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5444 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4995 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6312 2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows: [START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>. Page 4219 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4862 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5017 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 4876 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 5576 Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5) Page 14517 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8954 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 10985 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4663 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 961 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12213 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 7900 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 2151 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 4617 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1 Page 9427 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 14677 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 12246 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation Rotation ^ Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". ^ Do not include the spare tire when rotating the tires. CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. Wheel nut torque: 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.) Page 14837 INSTALLATION 1. Install the regulator assembly. a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window motor or crank assembly to install the assembly in the door. b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom front regulator bolt. d. Install the bottom rear regulator bolt. e. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. f. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. g. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt h. Install the rear window motor or crank assembly bolt. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) 2. If equipped, connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass bolts. Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. On the drivers door, reset the motor (if equipped). Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". 6. Install the inside seal. 7. Install front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". Page 5677 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8740 Page 7090 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 8970 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 572 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 2735 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine thoroughly. Then, stop it. 2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 3. Disconnect fuel pump fuse to avoid fuel injection during measurement. 4. Remove intake manifold collector. 5. Remove spark plug from each cylinder. 6. Connect engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-II). 7. Install compression tester with adapter onto spark plug hole. ^ Use compression gauge whose picking up end inserted to spark plug hole is smaller than 20 mm (0.79 inch) in diameter. Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during removal. 8. Turn ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. Compression pressure CAUTION: Always use a fully changed battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^ If the engine speed is out of specified range, check battery liquid for proper gravity Check engine speed again with normal battery gravity ^ If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated with combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again. ^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. ^ If the added engine oil improves the compression, piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. ^ If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, valves may be malfunctioning. Check valves for damage. Page 14739 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 11672 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Squeak On Bumps Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Squeak On Bumps Classification: RA05-003 Reference: NTB05-117 Date: December 9, 2005 2005-2006 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; SQUEAK NOISE FROM LEAF SPRING APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM There is a squeak from the rear of the leaf spring wind-up clip when: ^ going over bumps Or ^ by compressing the rear suspension ACTION ^ Inspect the inside of the rear leaf spring wind-up clip plastic cover for contact (rubbing) with the leaf spring. ^ If signs of rubbing are present, apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the leaf spring and wind-up clip plastic cover. Page 1634 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9062 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 7781 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2365 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6294 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Service and Repair Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Level Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove washer tank. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir". 2. Pull washer fluid level switch out of washer fluid reservoir in the direction of the arrow as shown. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124 Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Reference: NTB09-001 Date: January 24, 2009 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807 NHTSA #: 08V-690 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier (D40) Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor. Eligible Vehicles Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan, Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues. Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected vehicles begins on January 26, 2009. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. PARTS INFORMATION Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 4484 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 13100 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 14521 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 150 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14286 Terminals And Reference Values For BCM Part 2 Terminals And Reference Values For IPDM E/R Page 12714 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). 3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any air bag connectors. 4. From under the front of the driver seat, drill 2 holes in the connector bracket as shown in Figure 2. ^ The seat does not need to be removed. ^ Use a 1/4 inch drill bit. CAUTION: Make sure to use a rag or other suitable material to catch the metal shavings from the drilled holes. Don't let the shavings fall into the electrical connectors, carpet, seat track or other components that are under the seat. Page 3755 Part 2 Timing Cover Page 7847 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1846 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8831 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 344 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 2514 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. Page 7194 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 9381 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2306 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1610 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 9435 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 2154 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9527 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 414 Page 3420 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 8086 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2943 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Page 7718 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1638 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4611 EC-MAIN-02 Page 6092 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5942 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SET". 6. The setting will be changed and "RESETTING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END". Display Item List Page 2028 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7575 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4998 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7023 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 3148 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 7500 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5398 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7784 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2996 8. Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant at this time. Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor. Page 11139 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 4769 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5442 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1199 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13712 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 4951 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5674 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 4649 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. 3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as shown. 4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 7. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part. Page 6672 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Input/output signal chart TYPE 5 Page 8969 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14779 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7736 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 13130 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SET". 6. The setting will be changed and "RESETTING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END". Display Item List Page 8247 6. Disconnect harness connector and remove air fuel ratio sensor 1 (left bank) using Tool. Tool number: (J-44626) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage air fuel ratio sensor 1. ^ Discard any air fuel ratio sensor 1 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor. 7. Remove three-way catalyst (left bank). 8. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as shown. NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal. 9. Remove gaskets. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) Page 8968 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds Classification: BR11-001 Reference: NTB11-021 Date: March 2, 2011 FRONT BRAKE NOISE AT SLOW SPEEDS APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM: Squeal/Squeak noise from the front brakes: ^ While moving forward or reverse ^ With very light brake application (pedal pressure) ^ After the vehicle has been sitting, typically overnight ("cold" brakes) ^ At speeds less than 10MPH ^ While traveling straight or turning. NOTE: This is intended to be a partial list of examples of the types of conditions when you may be able to duplicate front wheel brake squeal/squeak. When attempting to duplicate this noise it is important to have a second person safely standing outside of the vehicle to determine if the noise being heard is coming from the front or rear brakes. ACTION: Apply Molykote 7439 grease to the front brake pad retainers. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 1584 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13960 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL Page 8839 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4586 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Interior Room Lamp Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7214 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE". 9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. Page 4569 Page 8319 5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3. ^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail. 6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown. 7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows: Page 7433 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 6456 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 10877 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8618 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 2522 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1387 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose. 3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting their joints. ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^ Do not shock it. ^ Do not disassemble it. ^ Do not touch its sensor. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^ If anything found, replace air duct. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly. Page 4328 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 13182 Cowl Weatherstrip: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420 A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2845 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Page 11841 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Blower Switch Check continuity between terminals at each switch position. ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 11630 Page 7240 Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Locations Page 11069 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 12949 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13162 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Illumination Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13745 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 13345 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1518 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. 2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Page 9952 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 7243 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4790 Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR 1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground. Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V 6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. Page 4942 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9836 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 14449 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12598 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Locations Page 9675 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 11148 Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5148 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 260 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 8335 C200 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection C200 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Rear Axle Parts Page 4050 Cooling Fan Motor The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as shown. The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under middle speed condition. Page 802 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8989 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4911 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1498 Page 6028 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Control Module: Description and Operation ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Cooling Fan Control The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. Cooling Fan Operation Cooling Fan Relay Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Page 8698 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7971 CAUTION: - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3 Ohms at 25 °C (77 °F) Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6. Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: - Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8272 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3423 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Checking Drive Belts Drive Belt Routing WARNING: Be sure to perform the inspection when the engine is stopped. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet) when inspecting the drive belt. 2. Visually check the entire drive belt for wear, damage or cracks. Page 5741 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 13695 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5418 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4968 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 7599 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 10503 ^ Use a torque wrench to tighten the wheel lug nuts to 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft-lb). CAUTION: Do not tighten the wheel lug nuts with an air impact driver. Uneven or high torque applied to the lugs may "distort" (warp) the brake rotor and hub. This may result in increased rotor runout and excessive rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. 4. Burnish the brake pads. A. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). B. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. C. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. D. Repeat A, B and C (above) ten times to complete the burnishing process. 5. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the brake squeaking noise is gone. Page 7166 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 11319 Fuse: Testing and Inspection Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 7947 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 290 5. Operation mode - Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current- consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption. 1. CAN communication status - With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. - Control by BCM is being operated properly. - When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. - Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status - This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. - It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. - Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status - With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. - With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. - Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status - BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. Page 13578 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Testing and Inspection PCV Valve Hose: Testing and Inspection PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. Page 4347 Page 1642 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6948 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3) Page 6740 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection Page 1373 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 9797 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 9124 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Fuse and Fusible Link Box Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 6018 Page 13964 13. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove the fuel tank. 14. Disconnect the EVAP hose from the fuel pump and remove the EVAP hose from the molded clip in the top of the fuel tank. 15. Remove the lock ring using Tool. Tool number : - (J-45722) 16. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. - Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. - After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: - Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. CAUTION: - Do not bend the float arm during installation. - Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipe and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure. 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 4472 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 6762 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) TCM Circuit Inspection Page 9672 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5628 Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20) Page 11087 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7180 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake Cold ..................................................................................................................................................... ................ 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Hot* (reference data) ....................................................................................................................................... 0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 inch) Exhaust Cold ..................................................................................................................................................... ................ 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) Hot* (reference data) ................................................................................................................................... 0.0308 - 0.0432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 inch) *: Approximately 80°C (176°F) Available Valve Lifter Page 4786 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 7492 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Service and Repair Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Completely drain engine coolant. Refer to "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 2. Remove A/T fluid charging pipe. Refer to "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY". 3. Remove the rocker cover (right bank). 4. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor as necessary CAUTION: Be careful not to damage engine coolant temperature sensor. 5. Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water bypass hoses and water pipe. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following. ^ Securely insert each hose, and install clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe bulge. ^ When inserting water pipe into water outlet, apply neutral detergent to O-ring INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ Check for leaks of engine coolant using tool. Refer to "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS". ^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check there are no leaks of engine coolant. Page 8449 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9483 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 14743 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6048 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10206 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1121 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 3403 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 5967 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 7484 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 13192 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 2673 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 4727 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 8013 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 5501 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4739 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 5454 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1112 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3718 Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates and roller links of timing chain. Replace timing chain as necessary. INSTALLATION NOTE: The figure below shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed. 1. Install timing chain tensioners (secondary) to cylinder head if removed. Refer to "INSTALLATION". a. Install timing chain tensioners (secondary) with stopper pin attached and new O-ring. b. Install camshaft brackets (No. 1). Refer to "INSTALLATION". 2. Install rear timing chain case as follows: a. Install new O-rings onto cylinder block. Page 7347 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 4158 ^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above. Page 12499 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Checking for Refrigerant Leaks Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220). If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component. CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector 1. Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve). 2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis. 4. Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak repair using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). NOTE: - Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean. - Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air. - Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector. Dye Injection NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has seized and must be replaced. 1. Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi). 2. Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) into the HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye injector (J-41459). CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures. 3. Connect the refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve. 4. Start the engine and switch the A/C system ON. 5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC- 134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions. 6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an A/C system leak and become visible. Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR NOTE: When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set properly according to the manufacturer's operating instructions. Page 10005 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Page 2676 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 3941 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION In cases of removing/installing or replacing camshaft and valve-related parts, or of unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance (found malfunctions during stating, idling or causing noise), perform inspection as follows: 1. Remove rocker covers (right and left banks). 2. Measure the valve clearance as follows: a. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke. ^ Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. ^ Make sure that intake and exhaust cam noses on No. 1 cylinder (engine front side of right bank) are located as shown. ^ If not, rotate crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as shown. b. Use feeler gauge, measure the clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. Page 2378 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 6201 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11408 Page 9618 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Page 6645 LAN-CAN-21 CAN System (Type 7) Page 10022 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Page 7251 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 3830 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 5732 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8291 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 12587 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11683 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations Page 4464 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 9328 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5949 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. Page 5052 Page 8384 Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2802 4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit housing. NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Close the lower glove box completely. Page 5004 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2778 8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket. 9. Finger tighten the two front bolts. 10. Finger tighten the two side bolts. 11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence: ^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb). 12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4). ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner. ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner. 13. Install a new drive belt. ^ Do not reuse the existing belt. 14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal. Page 8422 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1639 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6717 Case 4 Page 13640 Page 409 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 11963 Page 2130 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1278 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5535 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4573 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4075 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1384 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 794 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2416 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 7192 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 2176 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4818 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1922 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 11834 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 10804 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Warning Chime Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5064 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8049 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT VDC/TCS/ABS Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8883 Page 2178 Page 5698 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 3895 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 14559 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13519 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Service and Repair Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 3466 2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1). ^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top. 3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1). 4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and remove the hose (see Figure 2). Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve. Page 8671 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8294 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the given conditions. Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the given conditions. Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 4067 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8382 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6738 Case 8 Case 9 Page 7538 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-149, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. Page 10119 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Specifications Page 7513 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation ECM Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. Page 2793 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Rotate the drive belt auto-tensioner in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) as shown, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the tool accidentally comes off. 3. Remove the drive belt. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 100 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 9785 Page 13194 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 305 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. Page 8010 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9333 Page 5500 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4599 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4 Page 6589 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid .......................................................................................................................... Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3 Page 4193 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Page 7171 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8999 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FTT SENSOR Component Description The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 14318 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7627 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1737 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 2635 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 5072 EC-AF1B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1HB1 Page 2643 1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to specification. Camber: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". 2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the adjusting bolts in the front lower link. CAUTION: After adjusting the camber then check the toe-in. NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) minutes with each graduation of one adjusting bolt. Refer to table for examples of lower link adjusting bolt effect on camber and caster. 3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to Components. Page 11996 PARTS INFORMATION Page 8089 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4760 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4066 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5777 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6688 HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE 1. Unit names displayed on CONSULT-II. 2. "No indication" : Put a check mark to it if the unit name described in step 1 is not displayed on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen of CONSULT-II. (Unit communicating with CONSULT-II via CAN communication line) "-" : Column not used (Unit communicating with CONSULT-II excluding CAN communication line) 3. "NG" : Display "NG" when malfunction is detected in the initial diagnosis of the diagnosed unit. Replace the unit if "NG" is displayed. "-" : Column not used (Initial diagnosis is not performed.) 4. "UNKWN" : Display "UNKWN" when the diagnosed unit does not transmit the data normally. Put a check mark to it if "UNKWN" is displayed on CONSULT-II. "-" : Column not used (Transmit diagnosis is not performed.) 5. "UNKWN" : Display "UNKWN" when the diagnosed unit does not receive the data normally. Put a check mark to it if "UNKWN" is displayed on CONSULT-II. "-" : Column not used (It is not necessary for CAN communication trouble diagnosis.) NOTE: CAN communication diagnosis checks if CAN communication works normally. (Contents of data are not diagnosed.) - When the initial conditions are reproduced. Refer to "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced". - When the initial conditions are not reproduced. Refer to "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced". Page 8317 2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1). ^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top. 3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1). 4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and remove the hose (see Figure 2). Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve. Page 8414 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Description and Operation Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. Page 6765 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Service and Repair Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Level Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove washer tank. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir". 2. Pull washer fluid level switch out of washer fluid reservoir in the direction of the arrow as shown. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 270 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3455 5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3. ^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail. 6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown. 7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows: Page 7039 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 728 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 7598 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 12452 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front kick plate. Refer to "KICK PLATES". 2. Remove the lower dash side finisher. Refer to "LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER". 3. Remove the front pillar lower finisher. Refer to "FRONT PILLAR LOWER FINISHER". 4. Remove the assist grip handle 5. Remove the front pillar upper finisher. Refer to "FRONT PILLAR UPPER FINISHER". 6. Remove the lower glove box. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX". 7. Remove the upper glove box (cluster lid E). Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL". 8. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. 9. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 9119 Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 2458 Page 14785 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4919 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 10231 11. Remove bolts A, B and from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 9546 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 12751 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 2532 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 14802 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 1952 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 14660 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3245 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5686 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 4225 A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 4858 Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 996 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2) Page 14369 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 12518 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 1 Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transmission Gear Oil Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 4 1/4 qt (3.98L) Page 1830 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2537 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 669 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. Page 8643 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 163 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status - Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 3 seconds have elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status - IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description Refer to Information Bus. Page 3667 Page EM-8 Page 2074 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T). 5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 4952 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6734 Case 4 Page 9297 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1369 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8666 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 485 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 6003 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 9809 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 6383 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 2087 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2017 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 10433 Page 14350 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 13479 Torque bolts to 8.5 N-m (0.86 kg-m, 6.26 ft-lb.) This will prevent the recliner linkage from slipping out of position. 10. Re-install seat and seat back trim. 11. Confirm recliner operates properly. Check manual slide function for effort/binding. Disclaimer Page 2025 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 2205 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 11849 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8935 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 1490 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Step 1) Page 6332 Page 14461 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 3516 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 14915 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Rear Washer Nozzle 1. Remove back door finisher. Refer to "BACK DOOR TRIM". 2. Disconnect rear washer hose from rear washer nozzle. 3. Release retaining clips and remove washer nozzle. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Inspect rear washer nozzle for proper spray pattern, adjust as necessary. Refer to "Rear Washer Nozzle Adjustment". Page 13865 Page 8376 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s) Engine Mount: Customer Interest Engine - Noise/Vibration From Front Engine Mount(s) Classification: EM11-002 Reference: NTB11-014 Date: February 16, 2011 05-11 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; FRONT ENGINE MOUNT VIBRATION / NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 ONLY APPLIED VINS/DATES: R51: Vehicles built before: 5N1AN0N(**)BC510794/ 19-Jan-11 N50: Vehicles built before: 5N1AR1N(**)BC614925/ 19-Jan-11 D40: ALL VINs / Dates IF YOU CONFIRM The front engine mount insulator is leaking or cracked resulting in engine vibration / noise. ACTION Replace both front engine mounts, stoppers, and bolts with the ones from the Parts Information table below Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal and installation instructions. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 10669 6. Remove the front cable grommet and cover from control lever assembly 7. Remove front cable to control lever assembly bolt. 8. Remove the control lever assembly adjusting nut, then remove front cable. CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it. 9. Remove the rear disc rotors. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 10. Remove parking brake shoes, and remove rear cable from toggle lever. 11. Remove right and left rear cable bolts and nuts, then remove right and left rear cables. INSTALLATION ^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it. ^ Adjust parking brake. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT". Page 5221 Optional Splice Part 1 Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 5111 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 10103 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13059 Repair Flow Chart Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the heater and cooling unit assembly. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Open the lower glove box and press in on the sides so that it will open completely allowing it to hang by the cord. 2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the heater and cooling unit housing. Page 13974 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9042 EC-TPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 8205 Page 2150 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 13007 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5389 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FTT SENSOR Component Description The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 14040 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14799 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 5755 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 955 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 13111 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 11558 Page 301 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE". 9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Turn crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This will prevent valve from dropping into cylinder. 2. Remove camshaft relating to valve oil seal to be removed. 3. Remove valve lifters. 4. Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring using Tool. CAUTION: When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes. Tool numbers : KV10116200 (J-26336-B) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) : KV10109220 ( - ) ^ Compress valve spring using Tool attachment, adapter. Remove valve collet with magnet hand. 5. Remove valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number: KV10107902 (J-38959) INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip. 2. Press in valve oil seal to height "H" using Tool to specified height. Tool number: (J-39386) NOTE: Dimension "H" height measured before valve spring seat installation. Intake and exhaust: 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 inch) 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Page 4566 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1960 Page 6299 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 8388 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 13903 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3366 7. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown. 8. Remove rocker cover gaskets from rocker covers. 9. Use scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from cylinder head and camshaft bracket (No. 1). CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surface when cleaning off old liquid gasket. INSTALLATION (LEFT BANK) 1. Apply liquid gasket using Tool to joint part among rocker cover, cylinder head and camshaft bracket (No. 1) as follows: Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". NOTE: The figure shows an example of left bank side [zoomed in shows camshaft bracket (No. 1)]. a. Refer to the figure "a" to apply liquid gasket to joint part of camshaft bracket (No. 1) and cylinder head. b. Refer to the figure "b" to apply liquid gasket to the figure "a" squarely. 2. Install new rocker cover gasket to rocker cover. 3. Install rocker cover. ^ Check if rocker cover gasket is not dropped from installation groove of rocker cover. Page 9484 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 7656 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6634 LAN-CAN-10 Page 5624 Detailed Procedure (Steps 3 - 5) Page 8555 OVERALL SEQUENCE Page 11470 Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Testing and Inspection Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off. Page 9338 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7633 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode. 4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Without CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1874 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9621 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Page 10266 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7603 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14817 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2030 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Remove fuel level sensor unit. 2. Check resistance between "fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump" terminals 2 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Page 781 Page 6205 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6107 Removal and Installation Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Removal and Installation CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER Removal and Installation CAUTION: ^ Do not clean the clutch disc with solvent. ^ When installing, do not get grease from the main drive shaft onto the clutch disc friction surface. ^ If the flywheel is removed, align the dowel pin with the smallest hole of flywheel. Refer to "ASSEMBLY". REMOVAL 1. Remove the manual transmission from the vehicle. Refer to "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD models)" or "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD models)". 2. Remove the clutch cover bolts using power tool. Remove the clutch cover and clutch disc. INSTALLATION 1. Apply recommended grease to clutch disc and main drive shaft spline. CAUTION: Do not allow grease to contaminate the clutch facing. 2. Install clutch disc and clutch cover. Pre-tighten the bolts and install Tool. Then tighten the clutch cover bolts evenly in two steps in the order Page 2486 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4124 6. Disconnect harness connector and remove air fuel ratio sensor 1 (left bank) using Tool. Tool number: (J-44626) CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage air fuel ratio sensor 1. ^ Discard any air fuel ratio sensor 1 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor. 7. Remove three-way catalyst (left bank). 8. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as shown. NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal. 9. Remove gaskets. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) Page 11345 Power Distribution Module: Locations Locations Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Page 9460 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 10674 Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair PARKING BRAKE SHOE Components Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Clean the brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. NOTE: Remove the disc rotor only with the parking brake pedal completely disengaged. 1. Remove the rear disc rotor. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Remove the return springs. 3. Remove the adjuster. 4. Remove the retainers, anti-rattle pins and shoes. 5. Remove pin retainer, then disconnect the parking brake cable from the toggle lever. Page 7444 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 1972 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 39 A. Carefully apply heat with a heat gun. Keep the heat gun's nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the side rail (see Figure 3). CAUTION: Too much heat will damage the paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.). Important Points ^ DO NOT overheat the side rail, it is painted. Paint damage may result. Heat the area just enough to soften the decal for easy removal. ^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts. ^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal. B. Peel away the damaged decal. C. Clean the side rail with Isopropyl Alcohol to remove any glue residue, oil, and dirt. CAUTION: DO NOT use lacquer thinner. New Decal - Apply: 5. Remove the decal backing paper by peeling it away from the decal (see Figure 4). Page 5293 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 1989 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect harness connector from mass air flow sensor. 2. Disconnect PCV hose. 3. Remove air cleaner case/mass air flow sensor assembly and air duct assembly disconnecting their joints. ^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. ^ Do not shock it. ^ Do not disassemble it. ^ Do not touch its sensor. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect air duct for crack or tear. ^ If anything found, replace air duct. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Align marks. Attach each joint. Screw clamps firmly. Page 9169 Page 11498 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10856 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9182 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 9073 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 13541 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 62 Traction Control Module: Description and Operation TCS CONTROL UNIT Description The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair. Page 8199 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 4192 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 4892 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 2109 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Description and Operation Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. Page 5685 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8065 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13751 Page 7230 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 2112 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 14061 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 14391 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4629 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 12442 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 1915 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 11101 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status - Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 3 seconds have elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status - IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description Refer to Information Bus. Page 7441 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 14827 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10732 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1430 Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR 1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground. Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V 6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. Page 1553 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 281 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1986 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 8647 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5320 Page 1470 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 13842 Driving from rural (wide open) areas to crowded city areas, or if an aftermarket (i.e., non original equipment) antenna with a magnetic base is attached to the vehicle. Calibrate the mirror compass if the display shows only one direction or a limited number of directions. Page 13698 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9266 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 10110 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13702 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7443 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 620 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 14761 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 13759 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7955 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825 Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Reference: NTB10-071A Date: August 25, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION LOWER LINK This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049 NHTSA# 10E-019 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification. Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know whether a lower link was replaced during that time. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin. Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. Page 14199 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2994 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Oil Name:................................................................................................................................................... ............ Nissan A/C System Oil Type R or equivalent Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1697 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5157 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 299 Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning Configuration DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: - READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. - WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: - When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. - Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. - If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. - Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Data Link Connector/Data Link Connector Schematic Page 3808 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 3719 b. Install new O-rings to cylinder head and camshaft bracket (No. 1). c. Apply liquid gasket using Tool to rear timing chain case back side as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 (-) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". CAUTION: ^ For "A" in the figure, completely wipe out liquid gasket extended on a portion touching at engine coolant. ^ Apply liquid gasket on installation position of water pump and cylinder head very completely. d. Align rear timing chain case with dowel pins (right and left) on cylinder block and install rear timing chain case. ^ Make sure O-rings stay in place during installation to cylinder block, cylinder head and camshaft bracket (No. 1). Page 8293 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Description and Operation EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. Page 10903 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13722 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 4) Label Location Page 2538 Page 9072 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 814 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 216 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Page 8058 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T). 5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Locations Page 2009 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7967 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HO2S2 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description Page 6808 Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2) IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 1) IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6066 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3111 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 2536 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10269 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 9196 EC-PHSB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 3864 Detailed Procedure (Steps 29 - 31) Page 9519 Control Unit: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Disconnect the differential lock control unit connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and remove the differential lock control unit. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ When installing differential lock control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.) Page 7879 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 10637 CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. 3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 4. Install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body Page 8450 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 11513 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 9377 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3690 a. Install crankshaft pulley, taking care not to damage front oil seal. - When press-fitting crankshaft pulley with plastic hammer, tap on its center portion (not circumference). b. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt in two steps. Step 1 : 44.1 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb) Step 2 : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise c. Remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Tool number : (J-48761) 9. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly. 10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION - Before starting the engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the levels are lower than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down the engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: Timing Chain Page 6573 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4360 Page 8607 Page 4557 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 6088 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8739 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 10 - 12) Page 1341 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 4327 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 7284 Page 10447 NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number 205-D002 Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation (C200), or "Removal and Installation" (M226). CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 5433 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Description and Operation Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE The engine oil pressure gauge indicates the engine oil pressure. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied - through combination meter terminal 8 - to oil pressure sensor terminal 1. Ground is supplied - to oil pressure sensor terminal 3 - from combination meter terminal 10. The combination meter receives the oil pressure signal from oil pressure sensor - through oil pressure sensor terminal 2 - to combination meter terminal 19. Page 10899 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 8971 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 11415 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13732 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5028 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 14767 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6474 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13449 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Preparation for seat removal. ^ Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), section SE, for seat removal information. Make sure to follow all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS. ^ Before disconnecting any SRS connectors: A. Write down all radio station presets. B. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). C. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected. 2. Remove the seat from the vehicle. Page 8713 Page 7779 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9951 Location of Electrical Parts Page 289 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch - BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table. NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) - When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. Page 3042 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9248 Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. 3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as shown. 4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 7. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part. Spark should be generated. Page 12172 Page 6708 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 6) ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 7932 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 397 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Brake Booster Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster Removal and Installation Brake Booster REMOVAL CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster. Replace clevis pin if it is damaged. ^ Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, dash panel may damage the threads. ^ Attach the check valve in the correct direction. 1. Remove actuator and electric unit. Refer to "Removal and Installation (ABS), "Removal and Installation" (ABLS), "Removal and Installation" (VDC/TCS/ABS), or "Removal and Installation" (HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS). 2. Remove brake piping from brake master cylinder. 3. Remove brake master cylinder. 4. Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to "VACUUM LINES". 5. Remove brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. 6. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly. 7. Remove brake booster assembly from dash panel. Page 9020 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 804 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10738 Page 3019 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 6703 Case 7 Case 8 Page 12670 11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4. 12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor. 13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order. ^ Reuse the original cover. ^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor. ^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb). 14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the codes: ^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function, SELF-DIAG [PAST]. 15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows: a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure 5). b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF. c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the Service Manual for diagnosis and repair. ^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this bulletin. 16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector. Page 1312 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3436 8. Loosen the 2 side bolts on the bracket. 9. Finger tighten the two front bolts. 10. Finger tighten the two side bolts. 11. Torque the bolts in the following sequence: ^ Torque the lower front bolt 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the two side bolts 56.9 - 65.7 Nm (5.8 6.7 kg-m, 42 48 ft-lb). ^ Torque the upper front bolt to 24.5 - 31.4Nm (2.5 3.2kg-m, 18 23 ft-lb). 12. Check the part number on the front of the tensioner arm using a mirror (see Figure 4). ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA20A, DO NOT install a new auto-tensioner. ^ If the part number reads 11955-EA200, install a new auto-tensioner. 13. Install a new drive belt. ^ Do not reuse the existing belt. 14. Install the engine cover in reverse order of removal. Page 9167 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 14807 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9108 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 259 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7248 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2326 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5228 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6954 DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR TCM DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Page 5100 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 7747 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11050 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4756 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5479 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 7775 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12544 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 13855 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3998 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 924 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 11354 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 170 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. Display Item List NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: - CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU". 5. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Page 2107 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13828 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 5 - 6) Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate Page 13522 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove crash zone sensor nuts and shield from support member. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor. CAUTION: - Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 10121 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7530 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8 Page 7937 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Classification: RA09-003 Reference: NTB10-008 Date: January 15, 2010 2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for identification), AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 5224 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1974 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 12506 Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant Page 2282 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 14720 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8027 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8803 WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General Precautions". 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". 3. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. NOTE: Fuel will be spilled when removing the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly for the fuel level is above the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly fuel tank opening. - As a guide, the fuel level reaches the fuel gauge position as shown, or less, when approximately 15 l (4 US gal, 3 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel are drained from the fuel tank. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe. c. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 4. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 5. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 6. Disconnect the lower fuel filler hose from the fuel tank, the EVAP hose, and the vent pipe quick connector. - Disconnect the fuel feed hose from the molded clip in the side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: Page 3274 Replace valve or valve seat accordingly. ^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, cylinder head gaskets are leaking. In such a case, replace cylinder head gaskets. 9. After inspection is completed, install removed parts. 10. Start engine, and make sure that engine runs smoothly. 11. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to EC-62, "How to Erase DTC". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/With Manufacturer's Scan Tool Page 6927 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 10355 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 7707 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11096 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4292 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 11691 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 3818 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1668 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 4576 Page 11282 Page 8612 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 9233 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9230 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 5277 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 2170 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 2846 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4894 Page 4520 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 7692 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7517 EC-MAIN-02 Page 8893 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 12082 ^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1 above. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 13357 B. Then pull the mirror at the bottom corners as shown in Figure 1. ^ This will unsnap the mirror from the actuator. NOTE: If it is a heated mirror, disconnect the 2 electrical terminals from the mirror. 2. Remove 3 screws and remove the actuator. Page 7617 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brakes - Front Brake Noise At Low Speeds Classification: BR11-001 Reference: NTB11-021 Date: March 2, 2011 FRONT BRAKE NOISE AT SLOW SPEEDS APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM: Squeal/Squeak noise from the front brakes: ^ While moving forward or reverse ^ With very light brake application (pedal pressure) ^ After the vehicle has been sitting, typically overnight ("cold" brakes) ^ At speeds less than 10MPH ^ While traveling straight or turning. NOTE: This is intended to be a partial list of examples of the types of conditions when you may be able to duplicate front wheel brake squeal/squeak. When attempting to duplicate this noise it is important to have a second person safely standing outside of the vehicle to determine if the noise being heard is coming from the front or rear brakes. ACTION: Apply Molykote 7439 grease to the front brake pad retainers. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 8931 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 2357 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6592 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 8620 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Page 6506 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 5074 EC-AF1HB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2H2B1 Page 5383 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6671 System Diagram System diagram Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Page 10222 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 5357 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9341 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 14283 Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Step 5 (Continued)) Page 9380 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 8976 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9615 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 1281 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10201 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1636 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 9711 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8069 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1172 7. Carefully reinstall the fuel pump assembly back into the fuel tank. IMPORTANT: ^ Use a new seal (0-Ring). ^ Make sure the fuel pump assembly is installed straight down into the tank as shown in Figure 6. 8. Install the fuel pump assembly lock ring as follows: a. Place the fuel pump assembly locating tab between the lock ring holders. b. Place the lock ring on top of the fuel pump assembly. Page 10631 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member. Page 8396 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8493 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 12947 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1044 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3113 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly. Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Classification: EC04-025 Reference: NTB04-126 Date: October 29, 2004 MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284 IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor) ^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor) ACTIONS: 1. Repair the vehicle as necessary. ^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information. 2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning. IMPORTANT: If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared: ^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists. ^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair). CLAIMS INFORMATION The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a separate repair item. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284). ^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle. ^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information. Page 11750 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Page 7898 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Page 9347 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 12005 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 12381 A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Page 7097 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1586 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 1132 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. Page 5493 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1718 EC-O2S2B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 992 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2) Page 14616 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8219 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 613 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13022 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1248 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11416 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11059 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10044 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear C200 Removal and Installation The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See: Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. M226 Removal and Installation The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See: Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/M226 CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 1290 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14804 Page 9626 Disclaimer Page 5472 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 726 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 14348 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 3692 1. Set No. 1 cylinder to TDC. - Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (A) (grooved line without color) with timing indicator (B). 2. Remove front timing chain case. Refer to EM-1, Front Timing Chain Case. 3. Check timing chain markings to confirm No. 1 cylinder is at TDC of its compression stroke. - If not, remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool and turn crankshaft clockwise 360° (one revolution). Re-install Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Tool number : (J-48761) - If the original timing chain markings are not legible, use paint or equivalent to mark the timing chains to the sprockets. 4. If removing the secondary timing chains, loosen camshaft sprocket bolts. 5. Compress the primary timing chain tensioner. 1. Loosen clip of primary timing chain tensioner, and release plunger stopper (1). 2. Depress plunger into tensioner body by pressing slack guide (2). 3. Keep slack guide pressed and insert stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove (3) to hold plunger in. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. Page 14120 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Page 14740 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Locations Page 4407 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 6061 Page 11323 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 2354 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2660 Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20) Page 3697 1. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown. (No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC) NOTE: Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose, it is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same direction of the figure. Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side) : At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side) : At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Crankshaft key : At cylinder head side of right bank. 2. Install timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark positions repeatedly during the installation process. Page 8738 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9) Page 12256 ^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the outside surface of chrome type wheels. Wheel Alignment: ^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels. ^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be used to cover the metal mounting hooks. Page 6147 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 826 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 14747 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 11569 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 8910 EC-APPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS3 Page 10708 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 5713 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 6. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 7. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 795 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 13514 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 4561 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 4275 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 2124 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1805 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7132 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 339 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 14731 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8393 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13458 Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Assembly REAR SEAT Removal and Installation SEAT CUSHION ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Tilt seat cushion forward. 2. Lift cushion lock handles. 3. Remove seat cushion assembly Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 11943 Page 14526 Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3) Page 8702 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8434 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6798 Case 3 Page 6210 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13216 INSTALLATION 1. Install the regulator assembly. a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window motor or crank assembly to install the assembly in the door. b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom front regulator bolt. d. Install the bottom rear regulator bolt. e. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. f. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. g. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt h. Install the rear window motor or crank assembly bolt. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) 2. If equipped, connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass bolts. Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. On the drivers door, reset the motor (if equipped). Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". 6. Install the inside seal. 7. Install front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". Page 890 Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 2141 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13678 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13718 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 5474 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Interior Room Lamp Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9125 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 14187 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH The illumination control switch is a function of the combination meter, and not serviced separately. For replacement, refer to "COMBINATION METER". Page 7339 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 4344 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 4211 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 14469 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 3874 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 6496 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 10744 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Adjustments Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T). 4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 6446 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 598 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9116 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1458 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 9076 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2617 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 1895 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. Page 8628 EC-APPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 5978 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 8840 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 7719 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11444 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 10819 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4736 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8742 a. Remove quick connector cap. b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. c. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool on that position. CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further. d. Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube. CAUTION: ^ Pull quick connector holding it at the "A" position, as shown. ^ Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged. ^ Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out. ^ Avoid fire and sparks. ^ Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage and entry of foreign materials. 3. Remove PCV hose between rocker covers (right and left banks). 4. Disconnect harness connector from fuel injector. 5. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown, and remove fuel tube and fuel injector assembly CAUTION: Do not tilt it, or remaining fuel in pipes may flow out from pipes. Page 5133 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8009 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 7607 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1797 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 11281 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12533 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5680 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14147 Page 1780 Page 4136 2. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as shown. NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal. 3. Remove gaskets. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) ^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION (RIGHT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Exhaust Manifold Gasket Install in direction as shown. Page 1626 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12490 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 1413 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2101 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3642 Page EM-15 Page 4330 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Universal Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 2181 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4002 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8477 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1793 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 4885 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 2173 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9350 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 11548 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 9336 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6271 Page 11177 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 1014 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11777 CAUTION: Do NOT damage the condenser fins when positioning the protective covering and clamp. 6. Drill 1/4 inch (6mm) holes at the marked locations (see Figure 5). ^ For further protection, slip a piece of suitable hose over the drill bit (see Figure 6). 7. Remove any burrs with sand paper or suitable tool. 8. Apply Zinc-Rich Primer (see PARTS INFORMATION) within 12 mm (approx. 1/2 inch) in and around the drilled area, allow to dry. ^ Place suitable covering in front of the condenser prior to applying Primer. 9. Apply Bitumen Wax (see PARTS INFORMATION) within 12 mm (approx. 1/2 inch) in and around the drilled area, allow to dry. ^ Follow instructions on the label of Bitumen Wax. ^ Place suitable covering in front of the condenser prior to applying Bitumen Wax. ^ Wipe off any excess. Specifications Pressure Plate: Specifications Pressure plate Pre-tighten the bolts and install Tool. Then tighten the clutch cover bolts evenly in two steps in the order shown. First step ........................................................................................................................ ...................................................... 15 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) Final step ........................................ ..................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (2.6 kg-m, 19 ft. lbs.) Page 12911 3. Disconnect the connector and remove the subwoofer. INSTALLATION - SUBWOOFER (PREMIUM SYSTEM) Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 10649 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 2. Using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4. Remove union bolt, and then remove brake hose from caliper assembly INSTALLATION 1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on caliper assembly, and tighten union bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Hydraulic Circuit". NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer. 2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten flare nut to the specified torque using a flare nut wrench or suitable tool. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Page 8381 Canister Vent Valve: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9553 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3292 ^ Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal with micrometer. Standard: No. 1: 25.935 25.955 mm (1.0211 - 1.0218 inch) No.2,3,4: 23.445 - 23.465 mm (0.9230 - 0.9238 inch) CAMSHAFT BRACKET INNER DIAMETER ^ Tighten camshaft bracket bolt with the specified torque. Refer to "INSTALLATION" for the tightening procedure. ^ Measure the inner diameter "A" of camshaft bracket with bore gauge. Standard: No. 1: 26.000 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 23.500 - 23.521 mm (0.9252 - 0.9260 inch) CAMSHAFT JOURNAL OIL CLEARANCE ^ (Oil clearance) = (Camshaft bracket inner diameter) - (Camshaft journal diameter). Standard: No. 1: 0.045 - 0.086 mm (0.0018 - 0.0034 inch) No. 2, 3, 4: 0.035 - 0.076 mm (0.0014 - 0.0030 inch) Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) ^ If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head. NOTE: Camshaft bracket cannot be replaced as a single part, because it is machined together with cylinder head. Replace whole cylinder head assembly. Camshaft End Play ^ Install dial indicator in thrust direction on front end of camshaft. Measure the end play of dial indicator when camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard: 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 inch) Limit: 0.24 mm (0.0094 inch) Page 9551 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11508 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 8949 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5491 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1889 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 4671 Page 5771 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12321 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 6816 Case 2 Page 5784 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 3039 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 11942 Page 1754 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 4718 Page 3804 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6621 CAN System (Type 9) Schematic Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4077 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9719 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9337 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 436 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 9030 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1927 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2260 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 4856 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10716 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 159 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11578 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 3233 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 12983 LT-T/TOW-01 Page 524 b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a). c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed. ^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer. d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2. 2. Record the radio station presets: 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). NOTE: Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding. Page 4967 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4043 Radiator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way. REMOVAL 1. Remove engine cover with power tool. 2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to "ENGINE COOLANT". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 3. Remove air duct and air cleaner case assembly. 4. Remove reservoir tank hose. 5. Removal radiator hoses (upper and lower) and reservoir tank hose. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow engine coolant to contact drive belts. 6. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly Refer to "ENGINE COOLING FAN 7. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler hoses. (A/T models) ^ Install blind plug to avoid leakage of A/T fluid. Page 13767 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 786 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8764 CAUTION: ^ Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves. ^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. ^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent. ^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. ^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly into fuel tube. ^ Insert new O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not twist it. b. Install spacer to fuel damper. c. Insert fuel damper straight into fuel tube. CAUTION: ^ Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up. ^ Do not pressure-fit with excessive force. Reference value: 130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lbs.) ^ Insert fuel damper until "B" is touching "A" of fuel tube. d. Tighten bolts evenly in turn. ^ After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between fuel damper cap and fuel tube. 2. Install new O-rings to fuel injector, paying attention to the following. CAUTION: ^ Upper and lower O-rings are different. Be careful not to confuse them. Fuel tube side: Blue Nozzle side: Brown ^ Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves. ^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. ^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent. ^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. ^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly into fuel tube. ^ Insert O-ring straight into fuel injector. Do not twist it. 3. Install fuel injector to fuel tube as follows: a. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector. Insert clip so that protrusion "A" of fuel injector matches cutout "A" of clip. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one. ^ Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If interference occurs, replace O-ring. Page 1592 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4112 a. Loosen clip of timing chain tensioner (primary), and release plunger stopper. (1) b. Insert plunger into tensioner body by pressing slack guide. (2) c. Keep slack guide pressed and hold plunger in by pushing stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove. (3) d. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the timing chain tensioner (primary) side is loose. e. Remove bolts and remove timing chain tensioner (primary). CAUTION: Be careful not to drop bolts inside timing chain case. 7. Remove water pump as follows: a. Remove three water pump bolts. Secure a gap between water pump gear and timing chain, by turning crankshaft pulley counterclockwise until timing chain looseness on water pump sprocket becomes maximum. Page 9674 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 14033 Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: - The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. - Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. - Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. - Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. - Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. - Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. - When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (semitransparent colored retainer). - To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. Page 7451 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 6989 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9285 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Service and Repair Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair CLUTCH PIPING Removal and Installation Carefully observe the following during clutch tube removal and installation. CAUTION: Do not spill brake fluid onto painted surfaces. If it spills, wipe up immediately and wash the affected area with water. ^ When installing the clutch hose to the bracket, align the clutch hose metal fittings with the bracket positioning emboss, then install the lock plate to secure. CAUTION: ^ Do not damage the clutch hose. ^ Make sure the clutch hose is not bent or twisted. ^ Tighten the clutch tube and hose fittings to the specified torque. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse the copper washer. ^ Do not damage the clutch tube fittings or clutch tube. ^ After installation, bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to "Bleeding". Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 2701 Idle Speed: Adjustments Basic Service Procedure Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T). 4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 6882 Case 4 Page 13079 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5729 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4000 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8947 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 4688 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10839 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5499 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5358 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11479 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 12120 3. Tighten the new piston rod lock nut to specification. Refer to "Components". ^ Use a new piston rod lock nut for assembly. Inspection After Disassembly INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shock Absorber Assembly ^ Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. ^ Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. ^ Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary. Coil Spring ^ Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. ^ Check the free spring height. Front spring free height 2WD: 345.4 mm (13.6 inch) 4WD: 356 mm (14.0 inch) Page 3823 Page 7037 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 13180 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 9162 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Locations Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Page 2511 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Page 4502 Page 8263 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4195 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Page 5574 OVERALL SEQUENCE Page 6970 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2171 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8316 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace Vent Control Valve 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. ^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information. Install Filter Kit 1. Remove the spare tire. Page 9433 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 11108 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. Display Item List NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: - CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU". 5. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Page 14760 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3687 CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage front timing chain case and crankshaft. - Press-fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil seal. 3. Install water pump cover and chain tensioner cover to front timing chain case, if removed. - Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Tool number : WS39930000 4. Install idler pulley, if removed. 5. Install front timing chain case as follows: a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case back side as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Tool number : WS39930000 Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 14049 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7571 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5893 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4676 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14164 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 2515 7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". Page 2642 Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster CAMBER AND CASTER Page 1549 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 568 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 7746 Page 8423 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 13504 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 7511 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 9903 Differential Cover: Service and Repair M226 With Electronic Locking Differential Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. Refer to "DRAINING". Page 4762 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9652 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14577 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1831 Page 9552 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 1973 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 8171 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 381 Diagrams Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8436 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1935 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 1881 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 10946 Page 7872 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6897 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 6) Page 10335 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5056 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5682 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6908 Case 6 Page 4625 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9 Page 1353 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 14524 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking System 4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 5313 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9106 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 12722 - After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 632 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 11384 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5229 Page 9694 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 8546 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents Classification: HA09-001A Reference: NTB09-028A Date: November 17, 2010 LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60) IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator freeze-up. AND The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form on the evaporator. NOTE: The incident may be described as: ^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low. AND ^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity. ACTION ^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure below. Page 5836 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 3179 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base) Page 13116 BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 2 Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 1546 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1354 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14151 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 9010 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6010 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Front Suspension Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension Page 1031 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6818 Case 4 Page 12682 6. Turn the ignition OFF. 7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows: The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment. ^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON). ^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed. ^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the sensor is completely installed. ^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing. 8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2). 9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3. ^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused. 10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover. Page 937 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 4222 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9170 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6008 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7521 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 14) Diagnostic Procedure Page 13746 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5108 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 5295 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6676 Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2 Input/output signal chart TYPE 8/TYPE 9 Page 9739 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 9065 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5915 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5381 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6631 LAN-CAN-07 Page 11475 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5730 Page 14851 1. Connect the harness connector and install the regulator assembly. a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window motor or crank assembly to install the assembly in the door. b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom regulator bolt. d. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. e. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. f. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt. g. Install the front window motor or crank assembly bolt. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass bolts. Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) 3. Install the partition sash 4. Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. Install the inside seal. 6. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14643 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12671 Page 753 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Page 5944 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation" in General Information. 7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear wiper arm. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment of Rear Wiper Arm Stop Location". 2. If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. 3. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors. 4. Remove the high mount stop lamp. Page 8892 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6398 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 4723 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 6395 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. 3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to "CLUTCH PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes With Manufacturer's Scan Tool CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 11675 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2036 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8712 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11579 Page 3789 Mating mark (F) Yellow link Copper link - When it is difficult to align mating marks (A) with (B) and (E) with (F) of the primary timing chain with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft to align it with the mating marks. - During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary timing chains. 4. Install internal chain guide. Page 6141 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8944 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 13704 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5749 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3974 Cooling Fan Motor The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as shown. The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under middle speed condition. Page 5450 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9580 Page 5385 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 10814 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3528 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F) API Certification Mark API grade SG, SH or SJ, Energy Conserving II or API grade SL, Energy Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III Page 13186 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420 A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 316 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3846 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. 2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as given. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step. 3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. 4. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed. Page 12788 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 11027 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 6679 System Diagram System diagram Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Page 6887 Case 9 Page 11819 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9018 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 3425 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Rotate the drive belt auto-tensioner in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) as shown, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the tool accidentally comes off. 3. Remove the drive belt. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys. Page 14571 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9600 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 9294 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1203 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9168 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 13844 IMPORTANT: If your dealership uses "magnetic hats" for vehicle identification, remove the hat from the vehicle before performing the following steps. Do NOT put the hat back on the vehicle after the procedure is completed. Disclaimer Page 7796 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3883 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Service and Repair Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Removal and Installation WARNING: Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil and engine coolant are hot. REMOVAL NOTE: When removing oil cooler only, step 1 is unnecessary. 1. Drain engine coolant from radiator and cylinder block. Refer to "ENGINE COOLANT" and "DISASSEMBLY". NOTE: Perform this step when removing water pipes. 2. Remove oil filter. CAUTION: Do not spill engine oil on drive belts. 3. Disconnect water hoses from oil cooler. ^ When removing oil cooler only, pinching water hoses near oil cooler to prevent engine coolant spilling. CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 4. Remove connector bolt, and remove oil cooler. CAUTION: Do not spill engine oil to rubber parts such as drive belts and engine mounting insulator. 5. Remove water pipes, as necessary Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 12655 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove center console. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: - Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG)". Page 7196 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 1 Page 11242 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 7027 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1730 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 525 5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box. 6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is easily accessible. 7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3). 8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4). Page 5264 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 11418 Power Distribution Module: Locations Page 549 Page 3453 2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1). ^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top. 3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1). 4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and remove the hose (see Figure 2). Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve. Page 8051 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 14438 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 1340 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 4605 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 9887 shown. First step: 15 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) Final step: 25 Nm (2.6 kg-m, 19 ft. lbs.) Tool number: ST20630000 (J-26366) 3. Install the manual transmission. Refer to "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD models)" or "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD models)". Page 9384 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 10806 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 435 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 6528 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1 Page 13485 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1464 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 6837 Case 2 Page 9028 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 12098 2. Apply MOLYKOTE 7(TM) grease between the wind-up clip and the spring leafs. ^ Use a flat metal ruler to spread the grease. ^ Make sure the grease covers the entire contact surface between the plastic cover and the spring leafs. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each side of both leaf springs. (Grease applied to 4 places) 4. Confirm the squeak is not present by compressing the suspension. Disclaimer Page 7757 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 3738 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 7739 Page 12593 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 907 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 9977 Part 2 Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the propeller shaft. 2. Put matching mark on the end of the drive pinion. The matching mark should be in line with the matching mark A on companion flange. CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion. NOTE: The matching mark A on the final drive companion flange indicates the maximum vertical runout position. 3. Remove the drive pinion lock nut using Tool. Tool number: KV38108300 (J-44195) 4. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool. Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 6824 Case 11 Case 12 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 9601 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 4848 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14580 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 1175 Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Page 9305 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. 3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as shown. 4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 7. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part. Page 7574 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 935 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9250 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair IGNITION COIL Removal and Installation REMOVAL (LEFT BANK) 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Remove air cleaner case (upper), air duct and resonator assembly. (At the left bank side, remove ignition coil) 3. Move aside harness, harness bracket, and hoses located above ignition coil. 4. Disconnect harness connector from ignition coil. 5. Remove ignition coil. CAUTION: Do not shock it. INSTALLATION (LEFT BANK) Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL (RIGHT BANK) 1. Remove intake manifold collector with power tool. 2. Move aside harness, harness bracket, and hoses located above ignition coil. 3. Disconnect harness connector from ignition coil. 4. Remove ignition coil. CAUTION: Do not shock it. INSTALLATION (RIGHT BANK) Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6442 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 340 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 13588 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2362 Page 9614 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Engine Control Component Parts Location Power Distribution Module: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2196 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7958 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Tightening Torques & Sequences Intake Manifold: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences Intake Manifold ^ If stud bolts were removed from cylinder head, install them and tighten to the specified torque. Intake manifold studs .................................................................................................................................................... 11.0 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft. lbs.) ^ Tighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque in two or more steps in numerical order as shown. Intake manifold bolt and nuts 1st step ..................................................................................... ..................................................................................... 7.4 Nm (0.75 kg-m, 5 ft. lbs.) 2nd step and after ....................................................................................................................................................... 29.0 Nm (3.0 kg-m, 21 ft. lbs.) Page 12147 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack LIFTING POINT Pantograph Jack WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. Page 6507 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1 Page 9214 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9549 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9528 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5914 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 1732 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 6202 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Classification: EC04-025 Reference: NTB04-126 Date: October 29, 2004 MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284 IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor) ^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor) ACTIONS: 1. Repair the vehicle as necessary. ^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information. 2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning. IMPORTANT: If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared: ^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists. ^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair). CLAIMS INFORMATION The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a separate repair item. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284). ^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle. ^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information. Page 616 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Timing Chain: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9545 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 9032 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9172 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7759 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 2587 Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9249 CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. - It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. 17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. CONDENSER-1 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance............................................................................................................................................ ....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F) Page 11889 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 2073 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 2818 14. Coat/spray the bracket bolt and the frame around the bolt with Nissan Bitumen Wax (P/N 999MP-9G001P). 15. Reinstall the EVAP canister mounting bolt. 16. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. Disclaimer Page 14587 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8153 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 2593 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 1409 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 14558 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 1963 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12286 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Nut Torque ............................................................................................................................... ....................................... 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft.lb) Page 11835 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1798 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4538 Disclaimer Page 3630 Page EM-3 Page 2600 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 5862 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 11342 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6093 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4296 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 14685 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7926 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6753 Case 4 Page 5457 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1041 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 11227 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Locations SRS Components Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3232 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 11445 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8026 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9873 Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the clutch pedal bracket nuts from inside the engine compartment. 2. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch and ASCD clutch switch, then remove the wiring harness from the pedal assembly. 3. Remove the snap pin and clevis pin. 4. Remove the pedal bracket bolt and then remove the clutch pedal assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Inspect the clutch pedal for bends, damage, or cracked welds. Replace if necessary ^ Make sure that the assist spring and return spring have not lost their spring. Replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ After installation, inspect and adjust the clutch pedal as necessary Refer to "On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment". NOTE: Tighten the clutch interlock switch and ASCD clutch switch lock nuts to the specified torque after inspecting and adjusting the clutch pedal assembly. Page 1869 Page 3259 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5542 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9467 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4616 Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Terminals and Reference Value PREPARATION 1. ECM located in the engine room passenger side behind reservoir tank. 2. Remove ECM harness connector. 3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. - Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. - Data is for comparison and may not be exact. Page 4474 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 8932 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6173 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 13791 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8121 Page 14688 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6172 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 7395 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 10821 Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR Component Description The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And Charging. CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then the battery discharge may occur. Page 1091 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 8182 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 13601 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4496 Page 11532 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 9287 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 11989 Lot Number Locations. Page 212 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 7698 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 14419 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to "CLUSTER LID C". 2. Disconnect the hazard switch connector. 3. Remove the screws and remove the hazard switch. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6127 EC-MIL/DL-01 Page 11500 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11871 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10880 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4015 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6052 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 5671 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 10300 11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. 12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. 13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Page 4988 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 643 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 10 ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 14218 Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HEADLAMP BULB Removal NOTE: Reach through engine room for bulb replacement access. 1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Rotate the headlamp bulb retaining ring counterclockwise and remove. 4. Pull the headlamp bulb straight out from the headlamp assembly. CAUTION: - Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass portion could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance. - Do not leave headlamp assembly without bulb for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the lamp body may affect the performance. Remove the bulb from the assembly just before replacement bulb is installed. - After installing the bulb, be sure to install the retaining ring securely for watertightness. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 8699 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4606 Engine Control Module: Electrical Diagrams Additional Diagrams Additional related diagrams can also be found at the vehicle level Diagrams By Diagram Name EC Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-ECM/PW EC-ECM/PW-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 7205 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description Refer to INFORMATION BUS". Page 4499 Page 13953 3. Unwind the harness. 4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows: a. Press in on the lock tab. b. Slide the sender unit off. C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor. 5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order. Page 4890 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7026 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11539 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 6423 Attachment General Procedure Page 11154 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7382 Page 10258 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 4442 Page 1863 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3982 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection COOLING FAN MOTOR 1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. 2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation. Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor. Page 7701 Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Page 14244 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11132 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10843 Page 8156 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 5269 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1408 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation Trailer Hitch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 05V458000: Potential Trailer Hitch Separation MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Xterra 2005 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 05V458000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: September 30, 2005 COMPONENT: Trailer Hitches POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 12500 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with a Nissan accessory tow hitch, inadequate quality of some welded joints in the hitch assembly may result in separation of the hitch from the vehicle when being used to tow. CONSEQUENCE: This could result in the trailer separating from the vehicle and cause a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the tow hitches. The recall is expected to begin on October 24, 2005. Owners should contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers can contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236; (TTY:1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Exhaust System Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System Removal and Installation Exhaust System CAUTION: ^ Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape. ^ Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled. The system will be hot just after the engine stops. ^ Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge. REMOVAL Remove exhaust system components using power tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ^ Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling. ^ Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean and lube the exhaust tube threads using tool. Tool number A: (J-43897-18) B: (J-43897-12) ^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; install a new one. ^ Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. ^ If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the mounting insulators, clean and inspect them. ^ Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the mounting bolts on the vehicle side. Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to specification. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ^ With the engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises. Page 11361 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5743 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 5431 EC-TPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS3 Page 14708 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8972 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14399 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7752 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 5897 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 8673 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Locations Page 10957 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 835 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7927 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10986 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Impact Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 08V690000: Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Nissan/Frontier 2005-2009 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2009 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: December 18, 2008 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V690000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Air Bags: Frontal POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 242720 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 242,720 M/Y 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Frontier and Xterra vehicles originally sold in or currently registered in the states of Connecticut, Delaware, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, West Virginia, Wisconsin, and The District of Columbia. In those areas of the country which use heavy concentrations of road salt in the winter, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front Crash Zone Sensor (CZS) housing. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. CONSEQUENCE: This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash, increasing the risk of personal injury. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the front CZS with a redesigned sensor. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule for this campaign. Owners in the other states will receive extended warranty coverage for the sensor to 10 years. These owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and will receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 5871 Repair Flow Chart Page 2599 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 9231 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7969 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as shown. 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897- 18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Page 3399 Page 11181 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. Display Item List NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: - CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU". 5. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Page 602 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9544 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6932 Case 5 A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 9595 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 4906 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 13800 Page 8494 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7844 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8023 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 9166 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2191 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 8143 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation TP SENSOR Component Description Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. Page 13374 Paint: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 05-003 Date: 050112 Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Classification: WT04-010 Reference: NTB05-003 Date: January 12, 2005 NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers) to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven. Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires. If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied, consider the following: 1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings. 2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires grooves/treads. 3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 05-003 Date: 050112 Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Classification: WT04-010 Reference: NTB05-003 Date: January 12, 2005 NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Page 6437 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 4148 ^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above. Page 1247 Page 10987 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5876 8. Connect the fuse end of the BCM Sub-Harness to the BCM as shown in Figure 7. ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place) to the BCM. 9. At the other end of the BCM Sub-Harness: ^ Connect the White Connector to the vehicle-side harness white connector (see Figure 8a). ^ Then connect the Black Connector to the vehicle-side harness black connector (see Figure 8b). ^ Make sure the connectors are securely connected ("snapped" in place). Page 7705 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 6418 Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 4809 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4264 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT ITEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information to check CONSULT II data link connector (DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Data Link Connector Schematic 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Page 1679 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8080 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 13031 Trip Computer: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Strategies SEGMENT CHECK The board computer segment display can be checked by entering combination meter self-diagnostic mode. Refer to "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION". Diagnosis Procedure Page 14679 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 9396 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1030 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 12588 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8087 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to "WARNING LAMPS". 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. Page 11820 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4722 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 4497 Page 11945 LINK REPLACEMENT 1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement: Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for link replacement information. ^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts Information. ^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only. ^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations. Page 1641 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7630 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1806 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS1 EC-TPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS2 Page 1328 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14923 Wiper Arm: Adjustments Rear ADJUSTMENT INSTALLATION 1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF" (auto stop). 2. Clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce the possibility of wiper arm looseness. 3. Install rear wiper arm and blade so that the blade is parallel with the lower edge of back glass as shown and tighten wiper arm nut to specification. Rear wiper arm nut: 5.4 Nm (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb) Diagram Information and Instructions Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4018 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 14150 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter VISCOUS PAPER TYPE NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). 4. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 5. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 6. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 9211 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8645 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7425 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 12050 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair On-Vehicle Inspection and Service On-Vehicle Inspection and Service Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear, damage) are within specifications. Refer to "Ball Joint". Page 11317 Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 9193 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 8234 When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 13713 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. Page 1236 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. Page 13244 1. Connect the harness connector and install the regulator assembly. a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window motor or crank assembly to install the assembly in the door. b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom regulator bolt. d. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. e. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. f. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt. g. Install the front window motor or crank assembly bolt. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb) 2. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass bolts. Glass bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) 3. Install the partition sash 4. Check the glass alignment. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. Install the inside seal. 6. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". Page 12697 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to "REMOVAL" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat cushion. Page 2460 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Wheel Balance Adjustment". 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 12530 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 11051 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5721 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Axle Nut ............................................................................................................................................... .................................... 137 Nm (14kg-m, 101 ft.lbs) Page 13359 6. Press (snap) the sections of mirror in place in the order (1, 2, 3, 4) shown in Figure 6. ^ A "snap" can be heard when pressing each section to verify it has been fitted correctly. 7. Use a plastic trim tool to gently lift the lower corners of the mirror to confirm that it is securely snapped into place. ^ If the mirror unsnaps when you're doing this check, go back to step 6, above. NOTE: Plastic "Trim Tool Set" J46534 (an "essential tool") is available from TECH-MATE. Disclaimer Page 3241 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4804 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 9654 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4246 BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 2 Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 9794 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7956 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9962 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Page 4773 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 9071 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4331 Page 3128 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 7524 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 14273 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 8822 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7777 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 10303 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes With Manufacturer's Scan Tool CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 5727 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6780 Case 9 Page 5543 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5205 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 14644 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 1939 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-APPS1 EC-APPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS2 Page 838 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4870 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3861 Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20) Page 11152 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6601 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 1625 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 10599 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 7217 11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. Page 1450 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 2244 SRS Components Parts Location Page 844 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 688 Spark should be generated. CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. - It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. 17. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. CONDENSER-1 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance............................................................................................................................................ ....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F) Page 13877 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5582 Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28) Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11011 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8506 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 275 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10264 Page 6428 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 3253 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Diagram Information and Instructions Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 11143 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 593 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14001 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8124 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 4022 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3158 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation Rotation ^ Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". ^ Do not include the spare tire when rotating the tires. CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. Wheel nut torque: 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.) Page 13271 Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Components Removal and Installation of Front Fender Protector REMOVAL 1. Remove screws. 2. Remove pushpins. 3. Remove front fender protector. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2264 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 13516 Cowl Weatherstrip: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420 A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5430 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS1 EC-TPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS2 Page 4815 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 14050 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4720 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12501 recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". NOTE: At temperatures below 16 °C (61 °F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) pressure. 4. Perform the leak test from the high-pressure side (A/C compressor discharge "a" to evaporator inlet "f") to the low-pressure side (A/C evaporator drain hose "g" to shaft seal "k"). Refer to MTC-96, "Components". See: Diagrams/Exploded Views Clean the component to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe completely around the following connections and components. Check the compressor shaft seal - Check the high and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, relief valve, and compressor shaft seal - Check the liquid tank - Check the refrigerant pressure sensor - Check all around the service valves. Check that the service valve caps are screwed tightly on the service valves (to prevent leaks). NOTE: After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue from the service valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). - Evaporator With engine OFF, turn blower fan on "High" for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly drain hose. NOTE: Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose. 5. If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the suspected leak, then repeat the leak check. 6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. 7. If no leaks are found, perform steps 8 - 11. 8. Start the engine. 9. Set the heater A/C controls as follows: NOTE: For the automatic system, turn OFF the automatic controls and set the heater A/C controls manually. a. A/C switch to ON b. Air flow to VENT mode c. Intake position to RECIRCULATION mode d. Temperature to MAX cold e. Blower speed to HIGH 10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes. 11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above. Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning the engine OFF. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after the refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when the pressure is high. 12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity. 13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment. 14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. 15. Discharge the A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. Page 7708 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 9044 Throttle Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T). 5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the given conditions. 6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. 7. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 8. Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning Page 10827 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8360 Page 1579 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9997 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately. Page 7029 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4159 ^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are located (see Figure 1 and 2 above). > The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield. > If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply. 5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1 above for example. WARNING: Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube. ^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb) 6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end. ^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within 5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for example). Page 6389 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 571 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Camshaft bracket bolts Step 1: (bolts 7 - 10) ...................................................................................................................................................... 1.96 Nm (0.2kgf-m,17 inch lbs.) Step 2: (bolts 1 - 6) ....................................................................................................................................................... 1.96 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 3 .............................................................................................. .............................................................................. 5.88 Nm (0.6 kg-m, 52 inch lbs.) Step 4 ............... ............................................................................................................................................................. 10.4 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 92 inch lbs.) Page 1035 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8228 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 5061 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12331 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 3786 NOTE: - Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary). - There are two types of mating marks, circle (7), (10) and oval (4), (5) types. They should be used for the right and left banks, respectively. Right bank : Use circle type (7) and (10). Left bank : Use oval type (4) and (5). - Align dowel pin (3) and pin hole on camshafts with the groove (11) and dowel pin on sprockets, and install them. - On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft front end with dowel pin (3) on the back side of camshaft sprocket, and install them. - On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove (11) on camshaft sprocket, and install them. - In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin do not fit on mating parts, make fine adjustment to the position by slightly turning camshaft(s). - Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins. d. Confirm the mating marks are aligned, then finger tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. Final tightening will be done with all timing chains installed. e. Remove stopper pins out from timing chain tensioners (secondary). Page 1654 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 5625 Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9) Page 14498 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6530 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3 Page 3894 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 6764 Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2) IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 1) IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 910 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1837 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 9888 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Inspection and Adjustment After Removal INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT AFTER REMOVAL Clutch Disc ^ Check the clutch disc for wear of facing. Wear limit (depth to rivet head): 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) ^ Measure the circumference runout at the point indicated. If it is outside the specification, replace the clutch disc. Runout limit/diameter of the area to be measured: 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) or less/250 mm (9.84 inch) dia. ^ Measure the backlash of the clutch disc spline at the circumference of the disc. If it is outside the specification, replace the clutch disc. Maximum backlash of spline (at outer disc edge): 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) Clutch Cover With the clutch cover installed on the vehicle, check the diaphragm spring toe height for unevenness. If they exceed the tolerance, adjust the height using Tool. Uneven limit of diaphragm spring toe height: 0.7mm (0.028 inch) Tool number: ST20050240 (-) ^ Check clutch cover thrust ring for wear or breakage. If wear or breakage is found, replace clutch cover assembly. NOTE: ^ Worn thrust ring will generate a beating noise when tapped at the rivet with a hammer. ^ Broken thrust ring will make a clinking sound when cover is shaken up and down. ^ If a trace of burn or discoloration is found on the clutch cover pressure plate to clutch disc contact surface, repair the surface with emery paper. If surface is damaged or distorted, replace the assembly. Flywheel Page 5681 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7980 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13046 5. Remove the LH Instrument Lower Cover next to the Accelerator Pedal (see Figure 5). ^ Carefully pull outward to release the Securing Clips. 6. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 8 (below). ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 6). ^ Install new BCM. ^ Reconnect the top connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 6). 7. If the BCM does not need to be replaced, ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two vertical Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 6). Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 6855 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 1847 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10523 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ This service bulletin does not require the replacement of the brake pads or machining of the rotors. It is up the technician to determine the need to replace the brake pads and/or machine the brake rotors on a case-by-case basis. ^ Follow all Service Manual Cautions and Warning when removing and replacing brake pads. ^ If needed, use an environmentally appropriate brake cleaner to clean brake parts. Consult local environmental regulations to decide which brake cleaner to use. ^ DO NOT GET ANY GREASE ON THE BRAKE PAD "FRICTION" SURFACES. 1. Remove the front brake calipers. ^ Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for front brake service information. Page 8899 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13701 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8031 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 2546 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 3227 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 273 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 6710 Combination Meter Circuit Inspection Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection Locations Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Locations Page 1905 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8508 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. Page 609 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12373 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7087 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 2376 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4783 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 7055 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 4873 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Diagram Information and Instructions Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10984 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Service and Repair Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair RUNNING BOARDS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove screws and remove mud flaps (if equipped). 2. Remove bolts and remove running board rail from running board brackets. 3. Remove bolts and nuts, then remove running board brackets from chassis. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 6101 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 9800 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5090 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9195 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PHSB1 EC-PHSB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-PHSB2 Page 5927 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 1 Page 2192 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 4210 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 12595 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6524 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7) Page 6334 Page 14385 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Service and Repair Fuel Rail: Service and Repair FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: ^ Put a "CAUTION INFLAMMABLE" sign in the workshop. ^ Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and furnish workshop with a C02 fire extinguisher. ^ Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area. ^ To avoid the danger of being scalded, do not drain engine coolant when engine is hot. 1. Remove intake manifold collector. CAUTION: Perform this step when engine is cold. 2. Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side. ^ Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector. Tool number: (J-45488) Page 8068 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 5409 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5356 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8642 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9604 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 11550 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 6367 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 9539 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11828 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6936 Case 9 Page 4596 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 1 Page 3393 15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield. 16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved. Page 7999 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5281 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7084 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 5330 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4945 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1126 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9282 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 3997 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5180 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 7717 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9109 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 10150 ^ Make sure that oil is not leaking from the transmission or around it. ^ Check oil level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. ^ Set a gasket on the filler plug and install it to the transmission. Tighten the filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to Case Components. CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Page 9085 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 13943 Make sure: ^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected. ^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together. ^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip. ^ Sender unit is locked in place. ^ Temp sensor is clipped in place. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit. 6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit. ^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place. ^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place. ^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly. ^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no interference. Page 14513 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9534 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9183 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 10157 ^ When shift lever assembly is shifted to each position, make sure there is no binding or disconnection in either boot. ^ When shifted to each position, make sure there is no noise, bending, and backlash. Especially when shift lever assembly is shifted to 5th, 6th without pressing downward, check for bending. ^ When shift lever assembly is shifted to 1st, 2nd side and 5th, 6th side, confirm shift lever assembly returns to neutral position smoothly. ^ In any position other than reverse, confirm that shift lever assembly can be pressed downward. ^ With shift lever assembly pressed downward, confirm that it can be shifted to reverse. ^ When shifted from reverse to neutral position, confirm shift lever assembly returns to neutral position smoothly with spring power. ^ Without shift lever assembly pressed downward, confirm that it cannot be shifted to reverse. Page 7148 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 9457 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11741 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1685 Page 1397 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Classification: WT04-010 Reference: NTB05-003 Date: January 12, 2005 NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers) to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven. Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires. If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied, consider the following: 1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings. 2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires grooves/treads. 3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely. Disclaimer Page 8083 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4126 2. Loosen nuts with power tool in reverse order as shown. NOTE: Disregard the numerical order No. 7 and 8 in removal. 3. Remove gaskets. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ^ Check the surface distortion of the exhaust manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler gauge. Limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) ^ If it exceeds the limit, replace exhaust manifold. INSTALLATION (RIGHT BANK) Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Exhaust Manifold Gasket Install in direction as shown. Page 1012 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 10581 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 1366 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4713 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 14819 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 11557 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 6829 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection Page 14569 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7181 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts Classification: FA05-004D Reference: NTB05-099D Date: January 19, 2011 2005-2011 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2011 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2011 Frontier (D40) APPLIED DATE Vehicles built on or after August 15, 2005 IF YOU CONFIRM An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted, NOTE: Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for the lower link (lower control arm) mounting. ACTIONS 1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side. ^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt locations. 2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts. ^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin. NOTE: Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber. 3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1752 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11300 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 3290 2. Remove camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (right and left banks) from cylinder head back side. CAUTION: ^ Handle carefully to avoid dropping and shocks. ^ Do not disassemble. ^ Do not allow metal powder to adhere to magnetic part at sensor tip. ^ Do not place sensors in a location where they are exposed to magnetism. 3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valves. ^ Discard intake valve timing control solenoid valve gaskets and use new gaskets for installation. 4. Remove camshaft brackets. ^ Mark camshafts, camshaft brackets and bolts so they are placed in the same position and direction for installation. ^ Equally loosen camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in reverse order as shown. Page 8397 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 3515 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Page 9456 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1163 e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver. f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the pocket screwdriver was inserted. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. 10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 4960 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. On-Board Inspection Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair On-Board Inspection LEAK INSPECTION ^ Check for leaks at master cylinder to brake booster attachment point, reservoir tank, and brake tube connections. Page 1475 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 14602 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 12364 6. Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance: 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) 7. If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer to readjust. 8. Connect the compressor electrical connector. 9. Install the drive belt. Refer to "DRIVE BELTS". 10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield. BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 7740 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 823 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Interior Room Lamp Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11549 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 6778 Case 7 Page 2885 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant Type Use Genuine Nissan Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water when adding or replacing coolant. Page 7905 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 4943 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 2375 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 1331 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 298 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SET". 6. The setting will be changed and "RESETTING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END". Display Item List Page 5107 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Page 2400 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 11091 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 4068 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12590 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1011 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 4615 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 14) Diagnostic Procedure Page 1201 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6817 Case 3 Page 9421 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 13721 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2) Page 1308 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1998 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 7567 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6216 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 4865 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 14909 Washer fluid reservoir screws: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb) Page 657 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 3 Page 14060 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 11129 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6109 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 12896 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 10608 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 2788 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 7938 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11283 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown C200 Differential Cover: Service and Repair C200 Part 1 Page 5773 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7780 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 14733 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5076 EC-O2H2B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2S2B1 Page 13560 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825 Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm Reference: NTB10-071A Date: August 25, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION LOWER LINK This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049 NHTSA# 10E-019 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification. Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know whether a lower link was replaced during that time. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin. Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. Page 9602 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 5185 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1241 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 5372 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7874 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1834 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 10148 Fluids and Lubricants Oil" capacity. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". 2. After refilling the oil, check oil level. Set a gasket to the filler plug, then install it to the transmission. Tighten the filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to "Case Components". CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Page 576 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 1394 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 4359 Page 11610 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 7013 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 12382 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3909 Detailed Procedure (Steps 19 - 20) Page 3685 23. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front timing chain case. 24. Remove idler pulley, if necessary. 25. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from front and rear timing chain cases, oil pan (upper), and liquid gasket mating surfaces. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket fragments to enter oil pan. - Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole and thread. 26. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from water pump cover, chain tensioner cover (if necessary) and intake valve timing control covers. INSTALLATION Page 5683 Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 13725 Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10542 Brake Pad: Specifications Front brake Pad Length x width x thickness ...................................................................................................... 111.0 x 73.5 x 11.88 mm (4.73 x 2.894 x 0.468 inch) Rear brake Pad Length x width x thickness ........................................................................................................ 83.0 x 33.0 x 11.0 mm (3.268 x 1.299 x 0.433 inch) Page 5467 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6595 Page 6458 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 7854 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 13832 Display Item List Page 10305 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Page 4860 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8304 2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1). ^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top. 3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1). 4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and remove the hose (see Figure 2). Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve. Page 14905 Windshield Washer Motor: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation of Rear Washer Motor REMOVAL 1. Remove washer tank. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir". 2. Slide retaining ring upward to release front and rear washer motor. 3. Pull out the front and rear washer motor and remove from the washer tank. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 14596 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 599 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 14734 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 1824 Page 7496 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Specifications Transfer Case: Specifications TX15B .................................................................................................................................................. ..................... 2.0 Liters (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) Page 12739 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Top Tether Strap Child Restraint TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT Removal and Installation NOTE: The Top Tether Strap Child Restraint system is not serviceable. Page 10268 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1178 WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General Precautions". 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". 3. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. NOTE: Fuel will be spilled when removing the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly for the fuel level is above the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly fuel tank opening. - As a guide, the fuel level reaches the fuel gauge position as shown, or less, when approximately 15 l (4 US gal, 3 1/4 Imp gal) of fuel are drained from the fuel tank. - If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe. c. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. 4. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 5. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 6. Disconnect the lower fuel filler hose from the fuel tank, the EVAP hose, and the vent pipe quick connector. - Disconnect the fuel feed hose from the molded clip in the side of the fuel tank. Disconnect the quick connector as follows: - Hold the sides of the connector, push in the tabs and pull out the tube. - If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. CAUTION: Page 7045 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 12721 Side Air Bag: Service and Repair SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced. - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Remove headlining. 2. Disconnect front and rear side curtain air bag module connectors. - For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". 3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the side curtain air bag module. CAUTION: - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. - Do not disassemble air bag module. - Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90 °C (194 °F). - Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors". Page 10635 CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten bolts to specification. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer for union bolt. - Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body. 4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". 5. Install tires to the vehicle. Disassembly and Assembly Part 1 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Page 2685 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 2265 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1555 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1705 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 3235 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 6748 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 7565 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2379 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 660 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6 Page 9554 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2777 5. Using a straightedge (or other equivalent tool), visually check the power steering oil pump pulley and crankshaft pulley alignment. The pulleys should be evenly aligned as shown in Figure 1. ^ If the pulleys are not evenly aligned, go to Step 6. ^ If the pulleys are evenly aligned, go to Step 12. 6. Loosen three bolts holding heat shield to the right hand exhaust manifold. Push the heat shield out of the way and secure with a bungee cord or similar tool. 7. Loosen the two front bolts securing the power steering pump bracket to the engine block. See Figure 2. Page 2331 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4251 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch - BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table. NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) - When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. - When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. Page 13173 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 6725 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection Page 4395 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 14381 Page 3183 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection M226 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Rear Axle Parts ^ Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary. Page 7101 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 1716 EC-O2H2B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2S2B1 Page 5985 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10347 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10907 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 2550 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 12395 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 14732 Page 13757 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 424 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 2174 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 10932 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 3693 6. Remove internal chain guide. 7. Remove timing chain (primary). Caution: After removing timing chain (primary), do not turn crankshaft and camshaft separately, or valves will strike the piston heads. 8. Remove crankshaft sprocket, if necessary. 9. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: a. Attach stopper pin to the right and left timing chain tensioners (secondary). NOTE: - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts. Page 4132 Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Service Limits & General Specifications INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR, INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD Page 3622 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Testing and Inspection Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "STRANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE SIG" is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. WITHOUT CONSULT-II Set the steering wheel in a straight forward position and drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more for 10 minutes. When the procedure is complete, the SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp will turn off. Page 7815 Page 10828 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 5899 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11690 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 10794 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7103 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4) Page 10997 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4070 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 13696 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Part 2 Page 12136 9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool. Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refer to "Components for tightening torques". CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin. ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake". ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". ^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment". Inspection After Removal INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^ Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection". Page 4011 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp) Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP Removal NOTE: Reach through engine room for bulb replacement access. 1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely for watertightness. Page 6059 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7600 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1994 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1134 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 13202 6. Remove the front gasket and rear gasket. 7. Remove the door lock assembly TORX bolts (T30) and the door lock assembly. Door lock assembly bolts 7.5 Nm (0.77 kg-m, 00 in-lb) 8. While pulling outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle bracket and door lock assembly. 9. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector. INSTALLATION Installation in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt. Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 1557 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 3168 ^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the outside surface of chrome type wheels. Wheel Alignment: ^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels. ^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be used to cover the metal mounting hooks. Page 7785 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 4674 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14701 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2531 Page 11248 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 10792 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5923 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 3675 Page EM-16 Page 7665 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6742 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2) BCM Circuit Inspection Page 8181 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 115 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 1503 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 11377 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Canister Vent Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Classification: EC07-006 Reference: NTB07-058 Date: September 6, 2007 2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored: ^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. 2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin). 3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 4023 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5744 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Testing and Inspection Fuel Supply Line: Testing and Inspection FUEL SYSTEM Checking Fuel Lines Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap and fuel tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts. Page 510 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 9066 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14600 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 6590 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10171 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 12798 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 2812 2. Remove the EVAP canister mounting bolt (see Figure 1). ^ The canister will drop about 3 inches which will give you working room at the top. 3. Disconnect the vent hose (see Figure 1). 4. Reach above the EVAP canister and disconnect the vent hose at the vent control valve and remove the hose (see Figure 2). Twisting the hose at the opposite end will help loosen it at the vent control valve. Page 10766 Tool number 205-D002 Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation" (C200), or "Removal and Installation" (M226). CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 7983 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1402 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14280 License Plate Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Strategies How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. 2. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to "System Description". 3. Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-96, "Preliminary Check". See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 4. Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. 5. Do the parking, license and tail lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. 6. Inspection End. Page 14444 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8591 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5509 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 7044 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1585 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4887 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 12799 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 3329 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING ^ When lower cylinder block is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with main bearings installed, the tip end of bearing must protrude. Refer to "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure. Standard: There must be crush height. ^ If the standard is not met, replace main bearings. MAIN BEARING Page 5813 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Testing and Inspection Fuel Filler Cap: Testing and Inspection FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP) 1. Wipe clean valve housing. 2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/sq.cm, 2.22 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: -6.0 to -3.3 kPa (-0.061 to -0.034 kg/sq.cm,-0.87 to -0.48 psi) 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. Page 14611 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13187 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 14696 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 736 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 6782 Case 12 Case 13 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Page 11292 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6488 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 745 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 5222 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6761 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection Page 966 Page 4223 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Description and Operation Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. Page 9779 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6203 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1822 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 10947 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8651 Page 5458 Page 14373 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 12035 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 651 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7) Page 1485 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11399 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. Display Item List NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: - CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU". 5. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Page 9198 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 8988 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 13330 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 13214 Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Front Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 3. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) - Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". - On the drivers door, reset the motor. Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to adjust the glass position. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Front Door Glass Regulator REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. Page 8282 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 4537 2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows: [START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>. Page 11486 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6838 Case 3 Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 09-001 Date: 090124 Recall R0807 - Front Air Bag Impact Sensor Replacement Reference: NTB09-001 Date: January 24, 2009 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 FRONTIER, XTERRA, PATHFINDER, FRONT AIR BAG CRASH ZONE SENSOR CAMPAIGN ID #: R0807 NHTSA #: 08V-690 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2009 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2009 Frontier (D40) Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall on certain model year 2005 - 2009 Frontier, Xterra, and Pathfinder vehicles that are in dealer inventory and are currently registered in States that regularly use road salt in the winter ("Salt States"). In those Salt States, a mixture of snow/water and salt can enter into the front crash zone sensor ("CZS") housing during continuous driving on roads with a heavy concentration of road salt. If this occurs, the CZS may internally rust resulting in a signal interruption. If this happens, the red air bag warning light will illuminate to alert the vehicle operator. This issue could result in the non-deployment of the driver and passenger front air bags in a crash. Owners of these vehicles will be requested by mail to take their vehicle to a Nissan dealer for replacement of the front CZS with a countermeasure sensor. Eligible Vehicles Certain 2005-2009 Pathfinder, Xterra, and Frontier vehicles in dealer inventory and vehicles registered in Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, Michigan, Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa, and Missouri and the District of Columbia at the time the campaign is launched are eligible for replacement of the CZS pursuant to this campaign. Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. Vehicles registered in the other States at the time the campaign is launched are not eligible. The CZS warranty on these non-Salt State vehicles will be extended for corrosion related issues. Owners will be notified of the warranty extension by mail and receive a sticker to place in their warranty booklet explaining the extended warranty coverage. Mail notification to owners of affected vehicles begins on January 26, 2009. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number R0807 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. PARTS INFORMATION Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 11173 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - Daytime running lamps (Canada only) - Parking lamps - Tail lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger and heated mirror relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger and heated mirror relay (if equipped). 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the A/C compressor (magnetic clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the TCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control - When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown. Page 4742 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 6366 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 12603 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 9115 Page 6928 Case 1 Page 9689 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 11414 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 337 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 13164 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 12026 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 6920 Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2) IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 1) IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 1309 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 1719 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HO2S2 HEATER Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. OPERATION HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description Page 10249 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6198 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11208 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4950 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Power Door Lock System Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 13190 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420 A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 11144 Page 8120 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 3547 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Locations Air Duct: Locations Page 14277 Under this condition, the parking, side marker, license and tail lamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the parking, side marker, license plate and tail lamps are turned off. Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II. Page 4411 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 13815 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 3400 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 6615 CAN System (Type 1) Schematic CAN System (Type 2) Schematic Page 11159 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5926 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 6270 Page 4913 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8402 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11365 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9606 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5655 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine thoroughly. Then, stop it. 2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 3. Disconnect fuel pump fuse to avoid fuel injection during measurement. 4. Remove intake manifold collector. 5. Remove spark plug from each cylinder. 6. Connect engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-II). 7. Install compression tester with adapter onto spark plug hole. ^ Use compression gauge whose picking up end inserted to spark plug hole is smaller than 20 mm (0.79 inch) in diameter. Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during removal. 8. Turn ignition switch to "START" for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. Compression pressure CAUTION: Always use a fully changed battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^ If the engine speed is out of specified range, check battery liquid for proper gravity Check engine speed again with normal battery gravity ^ If compression pressure is below minimum value, check valve clearances and parts associated with combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After the checking, measure compression pressure again. ^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. ^ If the added engine oil improves the compression, piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. ^ If the compression pressure remains at low level despite the addition of engine oil, valves may be malfunctioning. Check valves for damage. Page 1378 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 4852 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 9981 Tool number: ST33290001 (J-34286) CAUTION: Do not damage axle housing. INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the new oil seal lips, and gear oil onto the circumference of the new oil seal. Install the new front oil seal into the axle housing using Tool. Tool number: ST15310000 CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse oil seal. ^ Do not incline oil seal when installing. ^ Apply multi-purpose grease onto oil seal lips, and gear oil onto the circumference of oil seal. 2. Align the matching mark of the drive pinion with the matching mark B of the companion flange, then install the companion flange. 3. Install the washer (if required), and new drive pinion nut. Tighten the nut until there is zero bearing end play using Tool. Tool number: KV40104000 (-) CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer. 4. Rotate the drive pinion using Tool. Rotating torque should be equal to the reading recorded in step 4 above during removal plus an additional Page 5315 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 12607 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7936 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 10936 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6352 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 3632 Page EM-5 Page 2329 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 7893 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations Page 2787 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 889 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR (C200) Removal and Installation It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Perform the axle shaft assembly removal procedure to replace sensor rotor. Refer to RAX-7, "Removal and Installation". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 REAR (M226) Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number 205-D002 Page 10809 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 5872 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Page 1924 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7657 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8225 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 1171 Make sure: ^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected. ^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together. ^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip. ^ Sender unit is locked in place. ^ Temp sensor is clipped in place. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit. 6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit. ^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place. ^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place. ^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly. ^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no interference. Page 558 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 888 NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number 205-D002 Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation (C200), or "Removal and Installation" (M226). CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedures Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedures Classification: EM09-012 Reference: NTB10-001 Date: January 4, 2010 2005-2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; REVISED VQ40 ENGINE TIMING CHAIN PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) - VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the VQ40 engine front timing chain case and timing chains (primary and secondary) have been updated to no longer require removal of the rocker covers and intake collector. In addition, new removal and installation procedures have been added for the timing chain tensioners (primary and secondary) and secondary timing chain tensioner shoe. Nissan Service Manuals for 2005-2010 Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown in this bulletin for any VQ40 engine front timing chain case, timing chain, or timing chain tensioner-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. ON-VEHICLE REPAIR - FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE Page 6906 Case 4 Page 11167 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 6709 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 7 - 10) Page 9969 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 5987 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 12769 Page 11621 ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 5239 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8491 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 10925 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 8674 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 406 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 5291 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9540 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10571 ^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior to the introduction of the NAO compound. ^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads. ^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance. ^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service. Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise: ^ Occurs with or without braking. ^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor. ^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop: ^ This is sometimes called "creep groan". ^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary. Groan noise during stopping: ^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking. ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes: ^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes are applied. ^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal. ^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur. ^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly. ^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information. ^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail. Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started: ^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary. ^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started. Rear Brake Squeal: ^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or drums. ^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components. WARNING: Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment. Page 48 A. Carefully apply heat with a heat gun. Keep the heat gun's nozzle at least 12" (305 mm) away from the side rail (see Figure 3). CAUTION: Too much heat will damage the paint. Only an experienced paint technician, who is familiar with paint temperature limitations, should use a heat gun. Also, do not use a heat gun on painted plastic body components (i.e., roof rack mounting bases, roof rack air dam, etc.). Important Points ^ DO NOT overheat the side rail, it is painted. Paint damage may result. Heat the area just enough to soften the decal for easy removal. ^ The heat gun "wattage" should not exceed 1400 watts. ^ Do not hold the heat gun nozzle closer than 12" (305 mm) from the side rail surface. Also, do not hold the heat gun in one position. Keep the nozzle moving from side to side to evenly heat the decal. B. Peel away the damaged decal. C. Clean the side rail with Isopropyl Alcohol to remove any glue residue, oil, and dirt. CAUTION: DO NOT use lacquer thinner. New Decal - Apply: 5. Remove the decal backing paper by peeling it away from the decal (see Figure 4). Page 6978 Page 1602 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 650 Wiring Diagram Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3) Page 5445 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 1987 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode. 4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Without CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts Page 5776 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 13003 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6063 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Description and Operation Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation ISC SYSTEM Description The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). Page 9756 7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". Page 14496 Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir REMOVAL 1. Remove front fender protector RH. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Front Fender Protector". 2. Remove front and rear washer hoses from washer motor; allow washer fluid to drain. 3. Disconnect front and rear washer motor and washer fluid level switch connectors. 4. Remove clip, then remove filler neck from washer fluid reservoir. 5. Remove washer fluid reservoir screws and remove from vehicle. INSTALLATION CAUTION: After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer fluid reservoir filler neck, and check for water leaks. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1734 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 7561 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 9571 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. Page 4242 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 12916 Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3) Page 12200 Page 13606 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Electrical Diagrams EC-ASC/BS EC-ASC/BS-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-ASCBOF Page 6341 Page 8447 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 3043 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. 2. Disconnect the lighting and turn signal switch connector. 3. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and release from the steering column. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3838 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Systems Controlled By BCM Directly Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY - Power door lock system. Refer to "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM". - Remote keyless entry system. Refer to "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM". - Power window system. Refer to "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM". NOTE - Room lamp timer. Refer to "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP". - Warning chime system. Refer to "WARNING CHIME". - Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS". - Rear wiper and washer system. Refer to "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM". NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. Mode Door Motor Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Mode Door Motor Mode Door Motor Circuit SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Mode door control system components are: - Front air control - Mode door motor - PBR (built into mode door motor) - Intake sensor System Operation The mode door position (vent, B/L, foot, D/F, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of the mode door motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is applied to one circuit of the mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the mode door position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Mode Door Motor The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit. It rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet as indicated by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode door. Page 11077 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1376 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7455 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 5376 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification Idle Speed: Adjustments Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Page 14795 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9432 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2914 ^ Make sure that oil is not leaking from the transmission or around it. ^ Check oil level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. ^ Set a gasket on the filler plug and install it to the transmission. Tighten the filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to Case Components. CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Page 7501 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 10484 NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary. NOTE: When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and cylinder body from torque member. 4. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: REfill with new brake fluid. Refer to Fluids and Lubricants. - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install sliding pin bolts and torque member to caliper, if removed. Refer to Components. 3. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque. Refer to Components. CAUTION: When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wiper any oil off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. - Do not reuse cylinder body torque member bolts. 4. Install brake hose to cylinder body, If removed, then tighten union bolt to the specified torque. Refer to Components. CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt. - Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union bolt and washers. 5. REfill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to Bleeding Brake System. 6Installtall wheel and tire. Refer to Rotation. Disassembly and Assembly Page 10434 Repair Flow Chart Page 6518 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation ECM Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. Page 9238 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 11400 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. 3. Touch "START". Page 6758 Case 9 Case 10 Page 13831 Audible Warning Device: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Data Monitor DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BUZZER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "DATA MONITOR" screen. 4. If "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch the item you desire to monitor. If "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all control items are monitored. 5. Touch "START". 6. During monitoring, touching "RECORD" can start recording the monitored item status. Display Item List Active Test ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BUZZER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation. 4. During the operation check, touching "OFF" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Self-Diagnostic Results SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Self-diagnostic results are displayed. Page 378 Page 974 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 14835 Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Front Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 3. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) - Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". - On the drivers door, reset the motor. Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to adjust the glass position. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Front Door Glass Regulator REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. Page 11515 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Page 5758 b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 7. Perform step 2 and 3 again. 8. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Page 2554 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 6848 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2) BCM Circuit Inspection Page 1757 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 3302 Available Valve Lifter VQ40DE Page 10043 9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool. Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refer to "Components for tightening torques". CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin. ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake". ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". ^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment". Inspection After Removal INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^ Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection". Page 7088 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13066 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 3465 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace Vent Control Valve 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. ^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information. Install Filter Kit 1. Remove the spare tire. Page 1411 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 11464 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo) - Daytime running lamps (Canada only) - Parking lamps - Tail lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger and heated mirror relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger and heated mirror relay (if equipped). 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the A/C compressor (magnetic clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the TCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control - When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown. Page 7609 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7394 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 1495 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9720 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8071 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7164 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8198 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 2284 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 12827 11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4. 12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor. 13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order. ^ Reuse the original cover. ^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor. ^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb). 14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the codes: ^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function, SELF-DIAG [PAST]. 15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows: a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure 5). b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF. c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the Service Manual for diagnosis and repair. ^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this bulletin. 16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector. Page 6677 System Diagram System diagram Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Page 13812 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1721 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as shown. 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897- 18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Page 1262 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 7244 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7732 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagnostic Aids Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 13025 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 7178 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 303 6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation". 7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. 8. Touch "YES". For canceling, touch "NO". 9. Using the given flow chart, identify the correct model and configuration list. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item according to the configuration list. Depending on CONSULT-II software version being used, some or all of the write configuration items shown in the following configuration lists may be displayed. If an item does not appear on the CONSULT-II "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen(s), then it is an auto setting item and it cannot be manually set or changed. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation". 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. Page 5298 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4758 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 3877 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 8217 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 14836 3. for power windows, operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. Remove the inside seal. 6. Remove the glass bolts. 7. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 8. If equipped, disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 9. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part Page 10271 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 5099 Page 7803 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1964 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 7797 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 4306 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 7268 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 1912 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 567 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 9334 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1170 3. Unwind the harness. 4. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit from the fuel pump assembly as follows: a. Press in on the lock tab. b. Slide the sender unit off. C. Unclip the fuel temperature sensor. 5. Install the new fuel level sender unit in reverse order. Page 12072 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10587 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Rear DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, install disc rotor to wheel hub. (2 or more positions.) 2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. [Measured at 10 mm (0.39 inch) inside disk edge.] Runout limit (on vehicle): 0.07 mm (0.0028 inch) NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specification before measuring runout. Refer to "On-Vehicle Inspection and Service". 3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake lathe. Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is either at or below the wear limit, or exceeds maximum uneven wear, replace disc rotor. Standard thickness: 18.0 mm (0.709 inch) Wear limit: 16.0 mm (0.630 inch) Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions): 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Page 12575 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Intake Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Page 2469 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7413 Page 8987 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6269 Page 4665 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8162 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5632 Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33) DETAILED PROCEDURE Page 7475 Page 1896 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. 2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the given conditions. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). 4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Page 9782 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8722 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3015 Fuse: Testing and Inspection Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 8490 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 6571 Information Bus: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 2043 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 1339 EC-APPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Service and Repair Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 320 Page 14661 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5192 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1967 Page 388 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 6120 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 7405 Page 11803 15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield. 16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved. Page 5421 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 8629 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 9801 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 523 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 7858 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 7110 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 10841 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5164 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 13045 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 9877 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Install the release bearing to release bearing sleeve using suitable tool, as shown. ^ Clean old grease and abrasive materials off the grease application areas. ^ Apply grease to the specified points as shown. ^ Apply approximately 1 mm (0.04 inch) thick coat of clutch sleeve grease to withdrawal lever and holder spring frictional surfaces. ^ Apply a coat of clutch sleeve grease to ball pin contact surface of the withdrawal lever and inner slots of the release bearing. The grease surface should be level with the surrounding area. ^ Apply a thin coat of clutch sleeve grease to the release bearing frictional surface. After grease application, Install release bearing. Wipe off excess grease forced out during bearing installation. CAUTION: ^ Before installing the manual transaxle to the vehicle, check that each sliding surface slides smoothly by operating withdrawal lever. ^ Be careful not to bring any grease into contact with the clutch disc facing, pressure plate surface, or flywheel surface. ^ When assembling, make sure that both ends of the snap spring touch the end face of the withdrawal lever. ^ Be careful with the orientation of the installation. Page 7353 Page 4621 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5 Page 7477 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7696 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4874 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 957 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 2356 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1688 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 23 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 7512 Engine Control Module: Electrical Diagrams Additional Diagrams Additional related diagrams can also be found at the vehicle level Diagrams By Diagram Name EC Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-ECM/PW EC-ECM/PW-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Description and Operation Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation ISC SYSTEM Description The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). Page 11287 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7310 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 8825 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 3234 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 14829 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Oil Filter: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 11008 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9463 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 1421 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 14067 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7440 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 8981 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 5027 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 12528 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8432 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 10902 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 10770 Installation 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 4994 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 5940 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations FIRING ORDER 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 8188 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations Page 13614 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6) Page 13185 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 2099 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12958 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14729 Power Window Motor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Locations Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 6913 Case 11 Case 12 Page 9209 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8001 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 1437 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1587 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5841 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 12004 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9619 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-234, "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ^ Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole. ^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. Page 1678 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 228 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Page 3422 Drive Belt: Specifications DRIVE BELT Page 1583 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1268 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking System 4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Page 4678 Page 12979 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 13179 Page 6700 Case 4 Page 13574 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7824 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 7505 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4 Page 6051 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14268 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9295 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5015 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 8990 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 3815 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7647 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3910 Detailed Procedure (Steps 21 - 24) Page 7653 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13806 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Service and Repair Antenna Amplifier: Service and Repair How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp. NOTE: - If NATS antenna amp. is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS) system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show "LOCK MODE" or "CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY". - Initialization is not necessary only when NATS antenna amp. is replaced with a new one. Page 9477 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812 Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises Classification: EM-10-009 Reference: NTB10-094 Date: August 12, 2010 EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM: A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle. ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION). ^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE. NOTE: Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure WARNING: Page 2969 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection ENGINE OIL LEVEL Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking. 1. Pull out oil level gauge and wipe it clean. 2. Insert oil level gauge and make sure the engine oil level is within the range as indicated on gauge. 3. If the engine oil is out of range, add oil as necessary. ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE ^ Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination. ^ If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair or replace damaged parts. Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. Page 4114 2. Install water pump. CAUTION: Do not allow timing chain case to nip O-rings when install water pump. ^ Make sure that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged. ^ Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly. 3. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows: a. Remove dust and foreign material completely from backside of timing chain tensioner (primary) and from installation area of rear timing chain case. b. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the timing chain tensioner (primary) side is loose. c. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) with its stopper pin attached. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop bolts inside timing chain case. d. Remove stopper pin. e. Make sure again that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged. 4. Install chain tensioner cover and water pump cover as follows: a. Before installing, remove all traces of old liquid gasket from mating surface of water pump cover and chain tensioner cover using scraper. Also remove traces of old liquid gasket from the mating surface of front timing chain case. Component Tests and General Diagnostics Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT EC-MAIN-01 Page 5344 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 13050 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 14750 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 611 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 10545 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Rear PAD WEAR INSPECTION Part 1 - Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Standard thickness: 11.0 mm (0.433 inch) Repair limit thickness: 2.0mm(0.079 inch) Page 189 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Housing Assembly HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 7675 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1452 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1681 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. 2. Disconnect the lighting and turn signal switch connector. 3. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and release from the steering column. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 7954 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 12862 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to "REMOVAL" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat cushion. Page 5333 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations PG-POWER-09 Page 6949 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 6) Page 4571 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2129 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 2045 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Power Steering Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Classification: EM06-004B Reference: NTB06-072B Date: September 3, 2009 DRIVE BELT NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION, and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008 IF YOU CONFIRM: A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the morning especially in cold or damp conditions. OR A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1) hour. AND In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt. ACTION: ^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed. ^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, if needed. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VSS Description The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. Page 7953 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 3911 Detailed Procedure (Steps 25 - 28) Page 6839 Case 4 Page 7352 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 153 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 7800 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 3810 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 8458 d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. Page 10467 CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released. 6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Page 3942 Valve clearance ^ By referring to the figure, measure the valve clearances at locations marked "x" as shown (locations indicated in the figure) with feeler gauge. ^ No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC c. Rotate crankshaft by 240° clockwise (when viewed from engine front) to align No. 3 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke. NOTE: Crankshaft pulley bolt flange has a stamped line every 60°. They can be used as a guide to rotation angle. Page 11682 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 1223 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Back-Up Lamp Switch BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH ^ Check continuity. Page 6460 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 5559 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Classification: EC07-006 Reference: NTB07-058 Date: September 6, 2007 2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored: ^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. 2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin). 3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 14506 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5788 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 3736 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 4346 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 4859 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8496 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 5959 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 5324 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 11624 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 2186 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7364 2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows: [START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>. Page 5373 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 10124 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 13769 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 861 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11732 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 14248 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 7658 Page 621 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2355 Page 5403 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7436 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 10918 Alternator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the fan shroud. 3. Remove the drive belt. 4. Remove generator stay, using power tools. 5. Remove the generator upper bolt, using power tools. 6. Disconnect the generator harness connectors. 7. Remove the generator. GENERATOR PULLEY INSPECTION Perform the following. - Make sure that the generator pulley does not rattle. - Make sure that the generator pulley nut is properly tightened. Generator pulley nut : 118 Nm (12.0 kg-m, 87 ft-lb) INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the generator and check tension of drive belt. Refer to "Tension Adjustment". Terminal "1" nut : 10.8 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb) CAUTION: Be sure to tighten terminal "1" nut carefully. - For this model, the power generation voltage variable control system that controls the power generation voltage of the generator has been adopted. Therefore, the power generation variable voltage control system operation inspection should be performed after replacing the generator, and then make sure that the system operates normally. Refer to SC-33, "Power Generation Variable Voltage Control System Inspection". See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Non-Trouble Code Procedures/Power Generation Variable Voltage Control System Inspection Page 3640 Page EM-13 Page 2079 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6185 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 1342 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning DESCRIPTION Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 217 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 4899 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14578 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2291 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 1465 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2161 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3858 Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9) Diagram Information and Instructions Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 10950 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8426 Page 4761 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Service Limits & General Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Service Limits & General Specifications CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION ^ Check with connecting rod aligner. Bend: Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) per 100 mm (3.94 inch) length Torsion: Limit: 0.30 mm (0.0118 inch) per 100 mm (3.94 inch) length ^ If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly. CONNECTING ROD BOLT OUTER DIAMETER ^ Measure the outer diameter "d" at position shown. If the reduction appears in a position other than "d", regard it as "d". Limit: 7.75 mm (0.3051 inch) ^ When "d" exceeds the limit (when it becomes thinner), replace connecting rod bolt with new one. CONNECTING ROD Page 8558 Detailed Procedure (Steps 6 - 9) Page 11196 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6443 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 1313 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8050 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 3669 Page EM-10 Page 6849 Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection Page 4172 Repair Flow Chart Page 12461 Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE Components Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY". See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair 2. Remove the three screws and remove the heater core cover. 3. Remove the heater core and evaporator pipe bracket. 4. Remove the heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core. INSTALLATION Page 14078 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 14581 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 1886 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14475 LT-T/TOW-03 Page 12201 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". NOTE: Always replace the seal after every disassembly. Page 4763 Page 11262 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 18.1 Nm, 13 ft lb Page 14071 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 1608 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 12566 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy. 5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical connector. 6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal. Page 11944 Page 7242 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 3713 19. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case. 20. Remove water pump cover and chain tensioner cover from front timing chain case, if necessary ^ Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. 21. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage front timing chain case. 22. Use a scraper to remove all traces of old liquid gasket from front and rear timing chain cases and oil pan (upper), and liquid gasket mating surfaces. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow gasket fragments to enter oil pan. ^ Remove old liquid gasket from bolt hole and thread. Page 6617 CAN System (Type 5) Schematic Page 10813 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 10274 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 6669 System Diagram System diagram Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Page 11296 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3700 c. Install timing chains (secondary) (8) and camshaft sprockets [INT (1) and EXH (9)]. - Left bank mating marks (6) - Align the timing chain mating marks (secondary) (2) with the ones on camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH) (4), (5), (7) and (10) (punched), and install them. Model Year 2005 - 2007 2008 - 2010 Mating mark (2) Copper link Blue link Page 3189 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear C200 Removal and Installation The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/C200 CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. M226 Removal and Installation The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/M226 CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle bearing. The axle bearing must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 6653 LAN-CAN-29 Page 9807 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5092 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 463 Page 7062 EC-O2H2B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2H2B2 Page 1776 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 1093 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 10934 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2163 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 8599 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4700 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 2216 6. Turn the ignition OFF. 7. WARNING: Prep the vehicle for Crash Zone Sensor replacement as follows: The following are VERY IMPORTANT to prevent unexpected air bag deployment. ^ Remove the ignition key / Intelligent Key from the cabin of the vehicle and set aside, away from the vehicle (this will prevent accidentally turning the ignition ON). ^ Make sure the ignition remains OFF until after the new sensor is completely installed. ^ Make sure no one is in the vehicle cabin and no one enters the vehicle cabin until after the sensor is completely installed. ^ Wait for all control units to "power down" (at least 1 minute) before continuing. 8. Locate the Crash Zone Sensor (see Figure 2). 9. Remove the 2 Crash Zone Sensor nuts shown in Figure 3. ^ Discard these nuts. They will not be reused. 10. Remove the Crash Zone Sensor Cover. Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the heater and cooling unit assembly. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Open the lower glove box and press in on the sides so that it will open completely allowing it to hang by the cord. 2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the heater and cooling unit housing. Page 13053 Page 8220 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 6256 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Page 14687 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 12532 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 10169 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Removal and Installation Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Page 5273 Page 10233 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. 3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse O-ring. ^ Apply ATF to O-ring. Component Tests and General Diagnostics Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT EC-MAIN-01 Air Bag System Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Air Bag System Repairs and Inspections Required After A Collision COLLISION DIAGNOSIS For Frontal Collision Check the SRS components using the given table. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Part 1 Page 3565 ^ Insert Tool between oil pan (upper) and lower cylinder block. Slide Tool by tapping on the side of Tool with hammer. Remove oil pan (upper). Tool number KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage mating surfaces. 16. Remove O-rings from bottom of lower cylinder block and oil pump. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean oil strainer if any object attached. INSTALLATION (UPPER) 1. Install oil pan (upper) as follows: a. Use scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces. ^ Also remove the old liquid gasket from mating surface of lower cylinder block. ^ Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt holes and threads. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket. b. Install new O-rings on the bottom of lower cylinder block and oil pump. Page 4591 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 4198 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 6027 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Universal Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 7612 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8441 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt. Crankshaft bolt torque ...................................................................................................................................................... 44.1 Nm (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft. lbs.) Put a paint mark on crankshaft pulley aligning with angle mark on crankshaft pulley bolt. Then, further retighten bolt by 60° (equivalent to one graduation). Front Windshield Washer Motor: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation of Front Washer Motor REMOVAL 1. Remove washer tank. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Fluid Reservoir". 2. Slide retaining ring upward to release front and rear washer motor. 3. Pull out the front and rear washer motor and remove from the washer tank. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 10346 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Environmental Impact Information Engine Oil: Environmental Impact Information ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal facilities. It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions. Page 4724 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 2434 Page 8097 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1398 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11150 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13952 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. 2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector. Page 1528 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9327 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 1979 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 8613 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11359 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14622 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 2470 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3772 CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage front timing chain case and crankshaft. - Press-fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil seal. 3. Install water pump cover and chain tensioner cover to front timing chain case, if removed. - Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Tool number : WS39930000 4. Install idler pulley, if removed. 5. Install front timing chain case as follows: a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to front timing chain case back side as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Tool number : WS39930000 Page 2303 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 8719 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Classification: RA09-003 Reference: NTB10-008 Date: January 15, 2010 2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for identification), AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. Page 4079 Page 3701 NOTE: - Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary). - There are two types of mating marks, circle (7), (10) and oval (4), (5) types. They should be used for the right and left banks, respectively. Right bank : Use circle type (7) and (10). Left bank : Use oval type (4) and (5). - Align dowel pin (3) and pin hole on camshafts with the groove (11) and dowel pin on sprockets, and install them. - On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft front end with dowel pin (3) on the back side of camshaft sprocket, and install them. - On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove (11) on camshaft sprocket, and install them. - In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin do not fit on mating parts, make fine adjustment to the position by slightly turning camshaft(s). - Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins. d. Confirm the mating marks are aligned, then finger tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. Final tightening will be done with all timing chains installed. e. Remove stopper pins out from timing chain tensioners (secondary). Page 13417 4. Remove the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube. 5. Apply thread locker to each of the 4 screws that attach the synchronization tube. 6. Reinstall the synchronization tube using the screws with thread locker applied. Torque screws to: Page 3359 10. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. 11. Start the engine, and check for unusual noise and vibration. Page 6991 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 9678 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 7880 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2011 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1541 Page 1962 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6257 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 4867 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10369 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to "Removal". 4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 5. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. Page 7485 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 749 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Page 8816 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14334 Page 7105 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13552 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 1333 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6658 LAN-CAN-34 Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to Drain and Refill. NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle. 3. Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body from the vehicle. Page 6324 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 2182 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9501 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 9730 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 4439 Locations Battery Current Sensor: Locations Page 3771 1. Hammer dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in order to shorten protrusion length. 2. Install new front oil seal on the front timing chain case. - Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip. - Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. - Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with front timing chain case end face using suitable drift [outer diameter: 60 mm (2.36 in)]. - Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted. Page 12258 Wheels: Testing and Inspection WHEEL Inspection 1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. a. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. b. Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration. Refer to "Road Wheel". 3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. 4. Check front suspension for looseness. Page 11499 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12007 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 9129 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7290 Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Evaporative Canister Filter: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Classification: EC07-006 Reference: NTB07-058 Date: September 6, 2007 2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored: ^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. 2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin). 3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 311 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 11428 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13752 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 2791 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Checking Drive Belts Drive Belt Routing WARNING: Be sure to perform the inspection when the engine is stopped. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet) when inspecting the drive belt. 2. Visually check the entire drive belt for wear, damage or cracks. Page 11907 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly CAUTION: ^ Secure the gear housing assembly with a vise. Use copper plates or equivalent to prevent it from being damaged. Do not grip the cylinder with a vise. ^ Before performing disassembly, clean the gear housing assembly. Be careful not to allow any cleaner to contact the discharge and return port connectors. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the cylinder tubes from the gear housing assembly. 2. Loosen the lock nuts of the outer sockets, then remove the outer sockets from the inner sockets. 3. Remove the boot clamps from the boots, then remove the boots from the inner sockets and gear housing assembly. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse the large-diameter boot clamps. ^ Do not damage the boots, inner socket or gear housing assembly. If they are damaged, replace them. 4. Remove the inner sockets. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Boot Check boot for tears, cracks and deformation. Replace if necessary. Gear Housing Assembly Check gear housing assembly for dents, cracks or damage. Replace as an assembly if necessary. Outer Socket and Inner Socket Page 2305 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 2548 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 12909 Speaker: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Speaker REMOVAL - FRONT DOOR SPEAKER 1. Remove door finisher. Refer to "DOOR FINISHER". 2. Remove the front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the connector and remove speaker from front door. INSTALLATION - FRONT DOOR SPEAKER Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front door speaker screws : 3.5 Nm (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) REMOVAL - REAR DOOR SPEAKER 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR". 2. Remove the rear door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the connector and remove speaker from rear door. INSTALLATION - REAR DOOR SPEAKER Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear door speaker screws : 3.5 Nm (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) REMOVAL - FRONT TWEETER 1. Remove the front tweeter grille. Page 6483 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 9406 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7550 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 11627 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 7618 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5198 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 7293 Page 5025 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 7875 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1995 Optional Splice Part 1 Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair Classification: BR00-004d Reference: NTB00-033d Date: August 8, 2007 ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur. ^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories: a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or released. b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the brakes are applied. c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer. 2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above. 3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident. BRAKE NOISE ^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no repair action should be taken. ^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate repair: Squeak noise when the brakes are cold: ^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning. ^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary. Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures: ^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident. ^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures. Notes about brake pads and brake noise: Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory. ^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of the art resistance to squeal noise. ^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the terms of the Nissan new car warranty. Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very attractive price. Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 9803 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 2702 OVERALL SEQUENCE Page 8399 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 12649 10. Using CONSULT-II, erase any DTCs that are stored in the air bag control unit. Page 10297 REPAIR FLOW CHART Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 66 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". NOTE: If the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position". Page 230 hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 3). ^ Remove two Screws at the lower corners of the Lower Cover. ^ Carefully pull the cover rearward to release the securing clips. ^ Disconnect all wire harness connectors from the panel. 4. Remove four Bolts and remove the Driver's Side Lower Knee Protector (see Figure 4). Page 6871 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Combination Meter Circuit Inspection Page 11635 1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to specification. Camber: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". 2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the adjusting bolts in the front lower link. CAUTION: After adjusting the camber then check the toe-in. NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) minutes with each graduation of one adjusting bolt. Refer to table for examples of lower link adjusting bolt effect on camber and caster. 3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to Components. Page 9270 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7157 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. - If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to GI-37, "CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM". See: Diagrams/Diagnostic Aids/CONSULT-II Checking System Page 1657 Knock Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MOhms. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 KOhms [at 20 °C (68 °F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. Page 8668 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 649 EC-MAIN-02 Page 11541 Page 8833 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 9277 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6931 Case 4 Page 10752 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS On-Vehicle Service Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ^ The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to "CONSULT-II. BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE". 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. G Sensor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console. Refer to "CENTER CONSOLE". Page 14562 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13581 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3112 Page 1271 Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 4 - 5) Page 6280 Attachment General Procedure Page 5144 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6585 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 14604 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 11507 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11189 Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation Page 3683 b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt so that there is a 10 mm (0.39 in) gap between bolt and crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping. c. Pull crankshaft pulley with both hands to remove it. 19. Loosen two bolts in front of oil pan (upper) in reverse order as shown. Page 775 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 3682 - Perform this step when engine is cold. - Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 4. Remove engine cooling fan (Motor driven type). 5. Disconnect engine harnesses and remove harness brackets from front timing chain case. 6. Remove EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, if necessary. 7. Remove drive belt. 8. Remove power steering oil pump from bracket with piping connected, and temporarily secure it aside. 9. Remove power steering oil pump bracket. 10. Remove generator. 11. Remove water bypass hoses and water hose clamp. 12. Remove engine cooling fan (Crankshaft driven type) and fan bracket. 13. Remove water hose at oil cooler. 14. Remove oil cooler water bypass pipe from front timing chain case. 15. Remove right and left intake valve timing control covers. - Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown. - Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Shaft is internally jointed with camshaft sprocket (INT) center hole. When removing, keep it horizontal until it is completely disconnected. 16. Remove collared O-rings from front timing chain case (left and right side). 17. Remove A/C compressor bolts and temporarily secure A/C compressor aside. 18. Remove crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Remove access plate and install Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Tool number : (J-48761) Page 6807 BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Combination Meter Circuit Inspection Page 9673 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 5881 ^ Reconnect the RH connector ONLY (as viewed in Figure 15.) 9. If the BCM does not need to be replaced: ^ Install the new Sub-Harness. ^ Start by disconnecting ONLY the two horizontal Connectors at the BCM (see Figure 15). 12. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness by snapping the Attachment Clip into the Instrument Panel Bracket Hole (see Figure 18). 13. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 14. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 15. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 16. Re-program all radio station presets. 17. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEADLAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Page 14491 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 8993 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 2066 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 839 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13108 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8878 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. CAN System (Type 1) Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4085 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2995 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair LUBRICANT Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: - Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) LUBRICANT Name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type R (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGR0 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: Test Condition - Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm - A/C switch: On - Blower speed: Max. position - Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30 °C (77° to 86 °F)] - Intake position: Recirculation ( ) - Perform lubricant return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the given table. Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system. Amount of Lubricant to be Added Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement 1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/ recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the lubricant from the "old" (removed) compressor into graduated container and recover the amount of lubricant drained. 6. Drain the lubricant from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this lubricant to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. Page 383 Attachment General Procedure Page 4007 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 10627 Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Rear CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. - Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. - Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. - Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them. Page 13664 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 227 Repair Flow Chart Page 7470 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 3534 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Changing Engine Oil WARNING: ^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. ^ Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Warm up engine, put vehicle on flat and level surface then check for engine oil leakage from engine components. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE". 2. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 3. Loosen oil filler cap and then remove drain plug. 4. Drain engine oil. 5. Install drain plug with new washer. Refer to "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER". CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug: 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.) 6. Refill with new engine oil. Engine oil specification and viscosity: Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Engine oil capacity (Approximate) CAUTION: ^ When filling engine oil, do not pull out oil level gauge. ^ The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. ^ Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in engine. 7. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 8. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 9. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL". Page 6337 Page 7246 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Specifications Page 196 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 747 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 11289 Page 11257 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using the claims coding shown. Disclaimer Procedure A PROCEDURE A: TRAILER LIGHTS WIRING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CHECK Check the condition of the BCM by performing a terminal check at the Trailer Lights Wiring Connector (near the trailer hitch) as follows. Procedure A (Terminal Check) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For vehicles with a 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 4914 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8744 CAUTION: ^ Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves. ^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. ^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent. ^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. ^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly into fuel tube. ^ Insert new O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not twist it. b. Install spacer to fuel damper. c. Insert fuel damper straight into fuel tube. CAUTION: ^ Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up. ^ Do not pressure-fit with excessive force. Reference value: 130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lbs.) ^ Insert fuel damper until "B" is touching "A" of fuel tube. d. Tighten bolts evenly in turn. ^ After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between fuel damper cap and fuel tube. 2. Install new O-rings to fuel injector, paying attention to the following. CAUTION: ^ Upper and lower O-rings are different. Be careful not to confuse them. Fuel tube side: Blue Nozzle side: Brown ^ Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves. ^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. ^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent. ^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. ^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly into fuel tube. ^ Insert O-ring straight into fuel injector. Do not twist it. 3. Install fuel injector to fuel tube as follows: a. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector. Insert clip so that protrusion "A" of fuel injector matches cutout "A" of clip. CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one. ^ Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If interference occurs, replace O-ring. Page 11117 Page 6705 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 13539 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 9070 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7829 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 1817 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 12984 LT-T/TOW-02 Page 7020 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. Page 210 Repair Flow Chart Page 14764 Page 12592 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 133 Locations Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 7495 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5003 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2529 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Service and Repair Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP Removal NOTE: Reach through engine room for bulb replacement access. 1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely for watertightness. Page 1801 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 3828 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Locations Evaporative System Service Port: Locations Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8783 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. 2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector. Page 5250 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6065 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 13515 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Page 8274 Page 10863 Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ^ Check continuity. Page 11869 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 9770 Shifter A/T: Adjustments Adjustment of A/T Position 1. Loosen nut of control cable. 2. Place the manual lever and selector lever in "P" position. 3. Push the control cable in the direction shown with a force of 9.8 N (1 kg, 2.2 lbs.), release it. This is in the natural state, tighten control cable nut to specifications. Control cable nut: 14.5 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) Page 11426 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1968 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4303 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2057 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 1474 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 1213 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 1613 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1374 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 3316 Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences Rod Bearing Cap Tighten connecting rod bolts. Connecting rod bolt .......................................................................................................................................................... 19.6 Nm (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.) Then tighten all connecting rod bolts 90° clockwise. Page 9970 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-008 Date: 100115 Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Classification: RA09-003 Reference: NTB10-008 Date: January 15, 2010 2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for identification), AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. Page 8610 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 11617 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 11063 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 10939 Page 13707 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9025 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 13724 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 10 - 13) Diagnostic Procedure (Step 14) Page 1597 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6923 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 6 - 8) Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Classification: GI99-001F Reference: NTB99-020F Date: August 8, 2008 LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009 SERVICE INFORMATION This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing"). CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual. 1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT): ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components. 2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: ^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward. ^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH. ^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission. ^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position. Page 2761 15. Install air duct and exhaust heat shield. 16. Check to make sure the incident has been resolved. Page 9599 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 8545 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 1423 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5844 Battery Current Sensor: Description and Operation BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR Component Description The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the battery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the power generation voltage variable control is performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power generation voltage based on the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation command value to IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to Starting And Charging. CAUTION: Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The connection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then the battery discharge may occur. Page 3257 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 13786 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 13945 c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock ring holder as shown in Figure 8. NOTE: The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring. NOTE: ^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring. ^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring. ^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). Page 7476 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 13870 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5382 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2143 Page 13555 9. Press on the top of the foam, making sure its adhesive sticks to the body (see Figure 7). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between the foam and the body. 10. Install the cowl top. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 11. Replace the blower motor. ^ For installation procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. Technical Service Bulletin # 10-055 Date: 100420 A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 8155 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3766 Timing Cover: Removal and Replacement "The content of this article/image reflects the changes identified in TSB-NTB10-001" ON-VEHICLE REPAIR FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE 1. O-ring 2. Collared O-ring 3. Intake valve timing control cover (RH) 4. Idler pulley 5. Drive belt auto tensioner 6. Intake valve timing control cover (LH) 7. Collared O-ring 8. O-ring 9. Chain tensioner cover 10. Cooling fan bracket 11. Crankshaft pulley 12. Front oil seal 13. Water pump cover 14. Front timing chain case 15. O-ring A. Refer to Installation Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1.Remove engine room cover. 2.Drain engine oil. CAUTION: - Perform this step when engine is cold. - Do not spill engine oil on drive belts. 3. Drain engine coolant from radiator. CAUTION: - Perform this step when engine is cold. Page 6113 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 3249 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6455 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 605 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 13324 Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Steps 2 - 4) Page 10120 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 1821 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3767 - Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 4. Remove engine cooling fan (Motor driven type). 5. Disconnect engine harnesses and remove harness brackets from front timing chain case. 6. Remove EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, if necessary. 7. Remove drive belt. 8. Remove power steering oil pump from bracket with piping connected, and temporarily secure it aside. 9. Remove power steering oil pump bracket. 10. Remove generator. 11. Remove water bypass hoses and water hose clamp. 12. Remove engine cooling fan (Crankshaft driven type) and fan bracket. 13. Remove water hose at oil cooler. 14. Remove oil cooler water bypass pipe from front timing chain case. 15. Remove right and left intake valve timing control covers. - Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown. - Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Shaft is internally jointed with camshaft sprocket (INT) center hole. When removing, keep it horizontal until it is completely disconnected. 16. Remove collared O-rings from front timing chain case (left and right side). 17. Remove A/C compressor bolts and temporarily secure A/C compressor aside. 18. Remove crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Remove access plate and install Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Tool number : (J-48761) Page 5447 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8741 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: ^ Put a "CAUTION INFLAMMABLE" sign in the workshop. ^ Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and furnish workshop with a C02 fire extinguisher. ^ Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area. ^ To avoid the danger of being scalded, do not drain engine coolant when engine is hot. 1. Remove intake manifold collector. CAUTION: Perform this step when engine is cold. 2. Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side. ^ Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector. Tool number: (J-45488) Page 5167 EC-TPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS3 Page 6879 Case 1 Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 10940 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 9572 8. Install bolts A, B and in control valve with TCM. 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 -> 2 -> 3). Then tighten other bolts. 10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". 11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. 13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. 15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". Page 4527 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 3205 Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances. Speed: Below 95 km/h (60 MPH) Distance: Less than 800 km (500 miles) Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) - Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. - Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems - Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a sideways angle. - Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing or recovery. CAN System (Type 1) Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11229 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9629 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications A/T Fluid: ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. Nissan Matic Fluid J NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Page 14860 Front Door Window Regulator: Overhaul DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Remove the regulator motor or crank assembly from the regulator assembly. Page 9279 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5328 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Power Steering Pump: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Classification: EM06-004B Reference: NTB06-072B Date: September 3, 2009 DRIVE BELT NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION, and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008 IF YOU CONFIRM: A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the morning especially in cold or damp conditions. OR A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1) hour. AND In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt. ACTION: ^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed. ^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, if needed. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 11026 Fuse And Fusible Link Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 7348 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036. 1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM. a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other damage. Page 14798 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11620 Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. Page 14766 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 537 Page 14664 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 10299 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Straighten the terminal clip to free the terminal cord assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. 8. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. 9. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. 10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. Page 11489 Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4091 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6945 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2) BCM Circuit Inspection Page 569 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 178 Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation Page 5256 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one. 2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the given conditions. CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. - Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). 4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Page 6034 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9053 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6892 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) TCM Circuit Inspection Page 4401 2. Clear the engine Self-Learning. Use CONSULT-II as follows: [START (Nissan)] >> [ENGINE] >>. Page 12572 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE ^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement. ^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement. 1. Remove six bolts from the glove box. 2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box. 3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. Page 11032 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 1352 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 11353 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8226 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 3421 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 8269 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 10277 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 7406 Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Injector: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 6689 Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced 1. Put a check mark to "No indication" if some of unit names listed on the column of diagnosis system selection screen of a check sheet table are not displayed on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen attached to the check sheet. NOTE: Put a check mark to "No indication" of BCM because BCM is not displayed on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. Page 14872 condition. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify wiper scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Inspect the wiper paths (may be a single scratch of a group of scratches) ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify metal object scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from metal objects such as keys and metal buttons. ^ These scratches are typically sharp and can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify scratches caused by a contaminated towel as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from wiping the glass with a towel that has sand particles or dirt on it. Page 797 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 1169 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump assembly from the vehicle and place it in a clean working area. ^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information. ^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions. 2. At the top of the fuel pump assembly, disconnect the brown connector. Page 373 Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 7862 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation IAT SENSOR Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor 1. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 8922 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 13661 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1219 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE SWITCH Description Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. Page 6568 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 9284 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 9541 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 157 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 9723 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11940 Lot Number Locations. Page 2202 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Diagram Information and Instructions Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 2924 2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. 3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Diagram Information and Instructions Cruise Control Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8024 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 10111 Page 5095 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 13097 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7935 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4844 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4765 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 8535 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 4480 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 10955 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12388 Page 8142 EC-TPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 6890 Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1) Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4) Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 434 REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389) Repair Overview PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION Page 4258 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 3723 ^ Install timing chain (primary) so the mating mark (punched) on camshaft sprocket is aligned with the copper color link on timing chain, while the mating mark (notched) on crankshaft sprocket is aligned with the gold one on timing chain, as shown. ^ When it is difficult to align mating marks of timing chain (primary) with each sprocket, gradually turn camshaft using wrench on the hexagonal portion to align it with the mating marks. ^ During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of timing chains (secondary). 8. Install internal chain guide, slack guide and timing chain tensioner (primary). CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a gap to exist under the bolt seats when bolts are tightened to specification. ^ When installing timing chain tensioner (primary), push in plunger and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. ^ Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of timing chain tensioner (primary). ^ After installation, pull out stopper pin by pressing slack guide. 9. Make sure again that the mating marks on camshaft sprockets and timing chain have not slipped out of alignment. 10. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. 11. Install new front oil seal on front timing chain case. ^ Apply new engine oil to both oil seal lip and dust seal lip. Page 2230 11. Disconnect the electrical connector shown in Figure 4. 12. Remove the old Crash Zone Sensor. 13. Install the new Crash Zone Sensor in reverse order. ^ Reuse the original cover. ^ Make sure to use the new nuts included with the new sensor. ^ Torque nuts to 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb). 14. If DTC B1033, B1034, or B1035 was stored in the Air Bag control unit, use C-III to erase the codes: ^ Make sure to erase DTCs in current SELF DIAG RESULTS, and, under Special function, SELF-DIAG [PAST]. 15. Check the Air Bag warning light as follows: a. Sit in the driver seat and watch the air bag warning light as you turn the ignition ON (see Figure 5). b. The air bag warning light should turn ON for 5 - 7 seconds, and then go OFF. c. If the air bag warning light does not turn ON at all, does not turn OFF, or blinks, refer to the Service Manual for diagnosis and repair. ^ Diagnosis and repair beyond replacement of the Crash Zone Sensor is not covered by this bulletin. 16. Make the old Crash Zone Sensor unusable by breaking its electrical connector. Page 14375 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 3621 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3764 b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool to intake valve timing control covers as shown. Tool number: WS39930000 Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". c. Install new collared O-rings in front timing chain case oil hole (left and right sides). d. Being careful not to move seal ring from the installation groove, align dowel pins on front timing chain case with the holes to install intake valve timing control covers. e. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. 7. Install crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Install crankshaft pulley, taking care not to damage front oil seal. ^ When press-fitting crankshaft pulley with plastic hammer, tap on its center portion (not circumference). b. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt. Crankshaft bolt torque: 44.1 Nm (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft. lbs.) c. Put a paint mark on crankshaft pulley aligning with angle mark on crankshaft pulley bolt. Then, further retighten bolt by 60° degrees (equivalent to one graduation). 8. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly 9. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal after this step. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Page 1666 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 7982 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Page 13023 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 926 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 9335 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 8785 Make sure: ^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected. ^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together. ^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip. ^ Sender unit is locked in place. ^ Temp sensor is clipped in place. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit. 6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit. ^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place. ^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place. ^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly. ^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no interference. Page 4257 ITEMS OF EACH PART With Generic Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Without Scan Tool Information is not supplied by the manufacturer. Page 380 Page 13112 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 11369 Page 11598 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1318 Page 10854 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 10328 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 266 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7365 Disclaimer Page 2179 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6515 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9 Page 1021 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 11161 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 12252 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 5831 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Page 6727 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 6) Page 10281 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 5679 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 12838 CLAIMS INFORMATION Service Procedure 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Connect C-III to the vehicle. 3. Use C-III to check for Air Bag DTCs. a. Navigate C-III to Air Bag Direct Diagnostic Mode. b. Make sure to check both SELF DIAG RESULTS and SELF-DIAG [PAST]. ^ SELF-DIAG [PAST] is under Special function. ^ If there are any DTCs stored for AIR BAG other than B1033, B1034 and/or B1035, perform repairs as needed, and then erase DTC before continuing with this procedure. ^ Diagnosis and repair for DTCs other than B1033, B1034, and/or B1035 is not covered by this bulletin. NOTE: All DTCs (except B1033, B1034, and B1035) must be repaired and erased before continuing with this procedure. 4. Disconnect C-III from the vehicle. 5. Start the engine and let it idle for about 5 seconds. Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3012 Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) - Terminal Arrangement Page 8677 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MAF SENSOR Component Description The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 4074 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14619 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 392 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 9084 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 5339 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5188 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 6457 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 4785 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 9559 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair REAR OIL SEAL Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove dust seal and rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: ^ Do not damage rear extension assembly. ^ Do not reuse dust seal and rear oil seal. INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. ^ Drive the new dust seal and rear oil seal using suitable tool. Dimension A: 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.020 0.059 inch) Dimension B: 1.2 - 2.2 mm (0.047 - 0.087 inch) CAUTION: ^ Do not reuse dust seal and rear oil seal. ^ Apply multi-purpose grease to seal lips before installing. ^ Do not incline the dust seal and rear oil seal during installation. ^ Check the transmission oil level after installation. Refer to "Checking". Page 6126 Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Wiring Diagram Page 4209 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 13489 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14871 ^ A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify impact marks that may be less than 1 mm in diameter. NOTE: A lead, or crack from an impact point can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Compound crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass This type of crack is always caused by impact to the glass. The point of impact is located where the crack "branches out". Cracks that are only in the middle of the glass This type of crack does not begin or end at the edge of the glass. ^ These cracks are always caused by an impact to the glass and are not covered under warranty. 2) How to determine if glass damage is due to a scratch in the glass surface. Cracks from a scratch in the glass surface Glass is produced by fusing together various raw materials such as silica, soda ash, and limestone, and has a hardness of 5 to 6 on the Mohs scale (for reference, a diamond has a hardness of 10 on the same scale). Since earth and sand can contain substances harder than that of glass, glass can be easily scratched by: ^ Fine sand particles ^ Hard metal ^ Rubbing action of contaminated wiper rubbers, or sand partials caught between the wiper and the glass, especially when operating the wipers in a dry Page 7286 Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 5081 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as shown. 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897- 18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Page 6562 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. Page 5623 Detailed Procedure (Steps 1 - 2) Page 9088 EC-TPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS3 Page 10707 SERVICE PROCEDURE Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P1273/P1283/P1274/P1284 Classification: EC04-025 Reference: NTB04-126 Date: October 29, 2004 MUST CLEAR SELF-LEARNING AFTER REPAIRING DTC P1273/P1283 OR P1274/P1284 AIR FUEL LEAN OR RICH SHIFT APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan's with DTC's P1273/P1274/P1283/P1284 IF YOU CONFIRM: A MIL "ON" with any of the following DTC(s) stored: ^ P1273/P1283 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Lean Monitor) ^ P1274/P1284 (A/F Sensor Bank-1/2-Rich Monitor) ACTIONS: 1. Repair the vehicle as necessary. ^ Refer to ASIST for diagnostic and repair information. 2. Clear the engine ECU Self-Learning. IMPORTANT: If Self-Learning Is Not Cleared: ^ The DTC may be stored again; even if no malfunction exists. ^ This could result in the customer returning with the same incident ("come-back" repair). CLAIMS INFORMATION The procedure to clear ECU Self-Learning is part of the DTC repair and should not be claimed as a separate repair item. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Repair the source of the lean condition (P1273/P1283) or rich condition (P1274/P1284). ^ Check ASIST for any specific incident bulletins that may apply to your vehicle. ^ As necessary, follow Service Manual (ESM) diagnostic and repair information. Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Classification: WT04-010 Reference: NTB05-003 Date: January 12, 2005 NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers) to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven. Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires. If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied, consider the following: 1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings. 2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires grooves/treads. 3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely. Disclaimer Page 6050 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3629 Page EM-2 Page 5895 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 5950 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of BCM REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower knee protector. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH". 3. Remove screws and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: - When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-105, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System - NATS) - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT-12, "ID Registration Procedure". Page 342 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 812 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 2976 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Leakage Checking Fluid Leakage Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. 1. Run the engine until the fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F) in the reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle. CAUTION: Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank frequently and add fluid as needed. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the right and left several times. 3. Hold the steering wheel at each locked position for five seconds to check for fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that the oil pump may be damaged.) 4. If fluid leakage at a connection is noticed, loosen the connection and then retighten. Do not over-tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. Refer to "POWER STEERING OIL PUMP" and "HYDRAULIC LINE". 5. If fluid leakage from the oil pump is noticed, check the oil pump. Refer to "POWER STEERING OIL PUMP". 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid, indicating a leak from the steering gear. CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers. Page 3820 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 538 Page 2630 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Page 12573 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Page 1259 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Mechanical Specifications Wheel Bearing: Mechanical Specifications FRONT WHEEL HUB AND ROTOR DISC Wheel Bearing (Front) / 2WD MODELS Wheel bearing axial end play............................................................................................................... ................................................................ 0 mm (0 in) Wheel bearing lock nut Tightening torque Nm (kgf-cm, ft. lbs.)....................................................................................................................................... 34 - 39 (3.5 - 4.O, 25 - 29) Return angle degree ............................................................................................................................ ..................................................................... 45° - 60° Wheel bearing starting torque At wheel hub bolt With new grease seal N (kg, lb)............................................................................................................. 9.8 - 28.4 N (1.0 - 2.9, 2.2 6.4) With used grease seal N (kg, lb).............................................................................................................................................. 9.8 23.5 (1.0 - 2.4, 2.2 - 5.3) Disassembly and Assembly Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Remove the regulator motor or crank assembly from the regulator assembly. Page 14698 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4798 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 480 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 1956 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4743 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12276 9. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 10. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. 11. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool. Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01) 12. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^ Refer to "Components for tightening torques". CAUTION: Always replace drive shaft lock nut and cotter pin. ^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to "Front Disc Brake". ^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". ^ Perform wheel alignment. Refer to "Front Wheel Alignment". Inspection After Removal INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary ^ Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to "Inspection". Page 6343 Page 2323 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 8364 12. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Pay attention to the position of paint marks on the hose ends (paint marks face UP). 13. Attach the Filter to the bracket and connect the hoses as shown in Figure 9. Reach above the EVAP canister to connect the vent hose to the vent control valve. Page 968 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 14784 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 3532 Engine Oil: Application and ID GASOLINE ENGINE OIL ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F). ^ Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy. Specifications Page 1571 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Service and Repair Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 COMPONENTS CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 8233 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation IVT CONTROL Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Description Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. Page 14452 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6947 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection Page 10387 Page 8979 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13863 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 566 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 14704 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 9795 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7468 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 4620 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 4 Page 1454 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1092 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Page 10630 NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary. NOTE: When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and cylinder body from torque member. 4. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: REfill with new brake fluid. Refer to Fluids and Lubricants. - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install sliding pin bolts and torque member to caliper, if removed. Refer to Components. 3. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque. Refer to Components. CAUTION: When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wiper any oil off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. - Do not reuse cylinder body torque member bolts. 4. Install brake hose to cylinder body, If removed, then tighten union bolt to the specified torque. Refer to Components. CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt. - Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union bolt and washers. 5. REfill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to Bleeding Brake System. 6Installtall wheel and tire. Refer to Rotation. Disassembly and Assembly Page 12245 c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. 3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. 5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams (0.18 ounces) each or below. ^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures. Wheel balance (Maximum allowable imbalance) Page 14782 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Environmental Impact Information Engine Oil: Environmental Impact Information ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal facilities. It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions. Page 7295 Page 1920 Page 3264 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5318 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 4556 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations Page 1750 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7049 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5533 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11088 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9288 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 14048 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1246 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1198 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Page 4565 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Locations Fuse Block: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 3945 Valve Clearance: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT ^ Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter. 1. Measure the valve clearance. Refer to "INSPECTION". 2. Remove camshaft. 3. Remove valve lifters at the locations that are out of the standard. 4. Measure the center thickness of removed valve lifters with micrometer. 5. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation: t=t1 + (C1-C2) t =Valve lifter thickness to be replaced t1 = Removed valve lifter thickness C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance: Intake: 0.30 mm (0.012 inch)* Exhaust: 0.33 mm (0.013 inch)* *: Approximately 20°C (68°F) ^ Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Intake Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 inch) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to "Available Valve Lifter". ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Steering Angle Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - VDC/Slip Light ON/DTC C1143/C1144/C1156/C1163 Classification: EC08-003A Reference: NTB08-027A Date: August 26, 2008 2005 - 2008 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; VDC & SLIP LIGHT ON & DTC C1143, C1144, C1156, C1163 This bulletin contains amended Service Procedure and Parts Information. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2008 Xterra (N50) 2005-2008 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The VDC and SLIP lights are ON, and one or more of the following DTCs are stored in the ABS control unit: C1143 (ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT) C1144 (ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL) C1156 (ST ANG SEN COM CIR) C1163 (ST ANGL SEN SAFE) ACTIONS Refer to the Service Procedure. NOTE: Do Not replace the Steering Angle Sensor unless the diagnostic inspection leads to its replacement. Page 4717 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 5117 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8222 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Oil Capacity Drain and refill (Approximate) With oil filter change .......................................................................................................................................................... 5 3/8 qt. (4 1/2 Imp qts., 5.1 L) Without oil filter change ...................................................................................................................................................... 5 1/8 qt. (4 1/4 Imp qts., 4.8 L) Page 5040 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Service and Repair Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage REMOVAL 1. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Remove the cowl top. Refer to "COWL TOP". 3. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 4. Remove wiper frame assembly mounting bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 5. Remove wiper motor to linkage nut and washer from wiper motor pivot. 6. Remove wiper motor from wiper frame assembly. INSTALLATION CAUTION: - Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. - Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary. 1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install link to wiper motor pivot with nut and washer. 4. Install wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install assembly into the vehicle. 5. Connect wiper motor connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 6. Install cowl top. Refer to "COWL TOP". Page 14146 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7091 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 11608 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 5038 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 7426 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 7585 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-APPS1 EC-APPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS2 Page 1367 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 10938 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4547 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 3746 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 11511 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9574 7. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Installation 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. 4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to "Installation". 6. Connect the negative battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage. Refer to "Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)". Page 7065 EC-O2S2B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 5461 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 11184 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 13906 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 9099 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 13583 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 14803 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7304 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Description and Operation Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. Page 7782 Page 12020 Page 10515 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Front Brakes 1. Replace the front brake pads and brake hardware using all of the parts in the hardware kit. ^ Make sure to use the new brake pads and new brake pad shims (included in the hardware kit). ^ Refer to section BR in the Service Manual (ESM) for brake pad replacement and brake service information. IMPORTANT: Page 6806 ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ECM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection Page 10021 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. ^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. 3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly. ^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions. 4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools. CAUTION: ^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately. Engine Control Component Parts Location Power Distribution Module: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 13572 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 4572 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7363 Page 6720 Case 7 Case 8 Page 5973 Page 7722 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. Page 6607 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1818 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 7892 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 13115 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 1 Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Page 8149 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 9603 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 11250 Page 2146 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 9543 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 972 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 4438 Page 6305 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 6340 Page 1948 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5912 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4947 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 14356 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection Brake Switch STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. 3. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 2 again. Page 5621 Idle Speed: Adjustments Basic Service Procedure Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T). 4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 14472 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams Trailer Tow Schematic LT-T/TOW Page 184 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10117 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake Cold ..................................................................................................................................................... ................ 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Hot* (reference data) ....................................................................................................................................... 0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 inch) Exhaust Cold ..................................................................................................................................................... ................ 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) Hot* (reference data) ................................................................................................................................... 0.0308 - 0.0432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 inch) *: Approximately 80°C (176°F) Available Valve Lifter Page 9735 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7169 Page 687 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. 3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as shown. 4. If NG, Replace ignition coil with power transistor. If OK, go to next step. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 7. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 13. Crank engine for five seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded part. Page 8889 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5427 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10673 Parking Brake Shoe: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Lining Thickness Inspection ^ Check thickness of lining. Standard thickness "A": 5.15 ± 0.25 mm (0.203 ± 0.010 inch) Repair limit thickness "A": 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) Drum Inner Diameter Inspection ^ Check drum inner diameter. Standard inner diameter: 205 ± 0.13 mm (8.07 ± 0.01 inch) Maximum inner diameter: 205.7 mm (8.10 inch) Other Inspections ^ Check shoe sliding surface for excessive wear and damage. ^ Check anti-rattle pin for excessive wear and corrosion. ^ Check return spring for sagging. ^ Check adjuster for rough operation. ^ When disassembling adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or equivalent to the adjuster threads. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". ^ Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any excessive wear, cracks, or damage inside drum. Page 3644 Page EM-17 Page 14771 Page 334 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 1766 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions. Page 11218 Relay Box: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 8403 Canister Vent Valve: Description and Operation EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP Control System diagnosis. Page 4955 Page 5538 Page 5199 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 12028 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7315 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 3390 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove engine cover. Refer to the appropriate ESM if needed. 2. Remove air duct. 3. Rotate the drive belt auto tensioner counterclockwise (loosening direction of the tensioner) using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not move it clockwise. 4. Remove drive belt. Page 4243 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3262 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 4543 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 2982 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Checking for Refrigerant Leaks Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220). If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component. CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector 1. Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve). 2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis. 4. Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak repair using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). NOTE: - Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean. - Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air. - Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector. Dye Injection NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has seized and must be replaced. 1. Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi). 2. Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) into the HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye injector (J-41459). CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures. 3. Connect the refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve. 4. Start the engine and switch the A/C system ON. 5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC- 134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions. 6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an A/C system leak and become visible. Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR NOTE: When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set properly according to the manufacturer's operating instructions. Page 12031 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 5270 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5544 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Diagram Information and Instructions Battery Current Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 12985 LT-T/TOW-03 Page 7988 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6659 LAN-CAN-35 Page 32 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 6119 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 10333 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 4069 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2097 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Diagram Information and Instructions Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification Idle Speed: Adjustments Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: - Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not be illuminated. - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II, and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Page 661 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 7 Page 5142 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 2104 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 2060 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9264 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8818 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8907 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 5791 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14697 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3994 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 14281 Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Steps 1 - 3) Parking, Side Marker, License Plate And/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Step 4) A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Cowl Weatherstrip: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Is Inoperative Classification: HA10-003 Reference: NTB10-055 Date: April 20, 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, AND FRONTIER; BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT WORK APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) APPLIED VINS: 2005 - 2009 Pathfinder / Xterra / Frontier - All 2010 Pathfinder-vehicles built before 5N1(*)R1N(*)(*)AC 619353 2010 Xterra-vehicles built before 5N1AN0N(*)(*)AC 517065 2010 Frontier-vehicles built before 1N6(*)D0(*)(*)(*)AC 428831 APPLIED DATE: All vehicles built before March 29, 2010 IF YOU CONFIRM: The blower motor for heater and air conditioner does not operate. AND There are signs of water intrusion in the blower motor. ACTION: Install the Service Kit listed in PARTS INFORMATION shown in this bulletin. ^ For installation procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE. Replace the blower motor. ^ For replacement procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 13719 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10) Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11) Page 10123 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6766 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 5) Page 8042 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2012 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 10438 Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to "Drain and Refill". 3. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ^ To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 4. Disconnect the brake tubes. 5. Remove three bolts and then the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ^ Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE". ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to "Bleeding Brake System". Page 1802 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 2913 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Oil Leakage and Oil Level Checking OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL Page 3954 2. Install water pump. CAUTION: Do not allow timing chain case to nip O-rings when install water pump. ^ Make sure that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged. ^ Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly. 3. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows: a. Remove dust and foreign material completely from backside of timing chain tensioner (primary) and from installation area of rear timing chain case. b. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the timing chain tensioner (primary) side is loose. c. Install timing chain tensioner (primary) with its stopper pin attached. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop bolts inside timing chain case. d. Remove stopper pin. e. Make sure again that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged. 4. Install chain tensioner cover and water pump cover as follows: a. Before installing, remove all traces of old liquid gasket from mating surface of water pump cover and chain tensioner cover using scraper. Also remove traces of old liquid gasket from the mating surface of front timing chain case. Locations Battery Current Sensor: Locations Service and Repair Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair High-Mounted Stop Lamp BULB REPLACEMENT The high-mounted stop lamp bulbs are not serviceable. Page 5811 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 659 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 5 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222 Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement Reference: NTB10-137B Date: December 22, 2010 VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006 FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068 NHTSA#: 10V-517 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles, oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed. Page 4001 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Service and Repair Courtesy Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair CARGO/PERSONAL LAMP Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool, release the pawls and remove the cargo/personal lamp lens. 3. Release the cargo/personal lamp bulb retainers (1), then pull bulb (2) straight out to remove. Cargo/personal lamp bulb: 12 V - 8 W Page 10884 Page 1502 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Body - Windshield Cracking Information Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Cracking Information Classification: BT09-052 Reference: NTB09-091 Date: August 25, 2009 WINDSHIELD CRACKING APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models SERVICE INFORMATION The Purpose of this bulletin is to give Nissan dealers guidelines to help determine if windshield breakage is covered under warranty or is the customer's responsibility. Nissan North America (NNA) is not responsible for damage to glass that is a result of objects striking or scratching the glass. However, NNA is responsible for manufacturing issues such as distorted glass and cracks that are due to improper installation or damage to the glass during vehicle assembly. NNA typically does not find any type of cracks in the windshield due to stress in vehicles with over 5000 miles. Glass damage can be categorized in 3 general areas: 1. Cracks due to objects striking the glass. 2. Cracks due to scratch in glass surface. 3. Distortion or cracks due to manufacturing issues. CLAIMS INFORMATION Part Return Process Reminder Refer to WB/07-010: Nissan is announcing a new requirement in the process for parts return to assist engineers in analyzing part issues. Dealers are now required to mark glass and other components returned that have "visible issues" using a grease pencil or similar instrument to highlight the area damaged. 1) How to determine if glass damage is due to objects striking the glass. Cracks from objects striking the glass Page 13738 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 12008 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 6713 Check Sheet Part 2 Check Sheet Results (Example) Page 1561 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. LAN System Component Parts Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Testing and Inspection Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Testing and Inspection PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. Page 1701 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14062 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7125 ^ Section 2: For vehicles with a 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector. NOTE: For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, the BCM condition will be checked later in Procedure B. Section 1: Vehicles Equipped With 4-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 3 and # 4 (see Figure 1). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Section 2: Vehicles Equipped With 7-terminal Trailer Lights Wiring Connector 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Make sure the combination switch and hazard switch are OFF. 3. Using a Test Light, check for power at terminals # 2 and # 5 (see Figure 2). ^ If there is power at either terminal, replace the BCM. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. ^ If there is NO power at either terminal, the circuit is OK. Return to the Repair Flow Chart for further instructions. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Procedure B PROCEDURE B: BCM SUB-HARNESS INSTALLATION & BCM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Procedure B (Sub-Harness Install/BCM Replace) is split up into two sections: ^ Section 1: For Titan/Armada vehicles. ^ Section 2: For Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra vehicles. CAUTION: Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpet, trim, etc. when performing this procedure. Section 1: Titan/Armada Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one Page 6365 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 399 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Page 1322 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3269 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. 2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve as given. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If OK, go to next step. 3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. 4. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals and then interrupt it. Make sure that the plunger moves as shown in the figure. CAUTION: Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more. Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve timing control solenoid valve. If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. NOTE: Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control solenoid valve is removed. Page 625 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 4699 EC-APPS3-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 6535 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8 Page 14815 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4440 Page 6102 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3298 to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". ^ Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. Turn ignition switch "ON" (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. ^ Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. ^ Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. ^ Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. ^ After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the specified level, if necessary. Summary of the inspection items Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006 Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time, the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM relay contact due to arcing. CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 8617 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9178 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 238 Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation Page 7689 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 6861 Case 5 Page 12383 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 ASCD Brake Switch Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection ASCD Brake Switch STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again. Page 13617 Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2) Page 3952 a. Loosen clip of timing chain tensioner (primary), and release plunger stopper. (1) b. Insert plunger into tensioner body by pressing slack guide. (2) c. Keep slack guide pressed and hold plunger in by pushing stopper pin through the tensioner body hole and plunger groove. (3) d. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the timing chain tensioner (primary) side is loose. e. Remove bolts and remove timing chain tensioner (primary). CAUTION: Be careful not to drop bolts inside timing chain case. 7. Remove water pump as follows: a. Remove three water pump bolts. Secure a gap between water pump gear and timing chain, by turning crankshaft pulley counterclockwise until timing chain looseness on water pump sprocket becomes maximum. Page 10414 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 255 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8347 Page 10996 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9453 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 13006 Trip Computer: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9933 3. Apply sealant to drain plug. Install drain plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". FILLING 1. Remove filler plug. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug hole. Oil grade and Viscosity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". Oil capacity: Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants". 2. After refilling oil, check oil level. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Page 1016 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7745 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 439 12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install. 13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides. 14. Reinstall the IPDM cover. 15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first. 16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets. 17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset their ADP settings (ADP memory). Page 7250 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14148 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14027 e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver. f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the pocket screwdriver was inserted. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. 10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 7889 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 11028 Fuse: Testing and Inspection Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 6529 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 2 Page 14606 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 2136 Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Canister Vent Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's P0442/P0455/P0456/P1446 Classification: EC07-006 Reference: NTB07-058 Date: September 6, 2007 2005 - 2007 XTERRA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P04421 P04551 P0456 / P1446 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2007 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(S) stored: ^ P0442 / P04551 P0456 / P1446 AND ^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed. ACTIONS 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. 2. Install the Filter Kit (refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin). 3. Clear any DTCs stored in the ECM. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure (starting on page 3) as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 4216 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 10130 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate Page 12647 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first). 3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any air bag connectors. 4. From under the front of the driver seat, drill 2 holes in the connector bracket as shown in Figure 2. ^ The seat does not need to be removed. ^ Use a 1/4 inch drill bit. CAUTION: Make sure to use a rag or other suitable material to catch the metal shavings from the drilled holes. Don't let the shavings fall into the electrical connectors, carpet, seat track or other components that are under the seat. Page 2276 Page 789 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 9586 Page 7758 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 6230 Disclaimer Removal and Installation Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Removal and Installation CLUTCH DISC, CLUTCH COVER Removal and Installation CAUTION: ^ Do not clean the clutch disc with solvent. ^ When installing, do not get grease from the main drive shaft onto the clutch disc friction surface. ^ If the flywheel is removed, align the dowel pin with the smallest hole of flywheel. Refer to "ASSEMBLY". REMOVAL 1. Remove the manual transmission from the vehicle. Refer to "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD models)" or "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD models)". 2. Remove the clutch cover bolts using power tool. Remove the clutch cover and clutch disc. INSTALLATION 1. Apply recommended grease to clutch disc and main drive shaft spline. CAUTION: Do not allow grease to contaminate the clutch facing. 2. Install clutch disc and clutch cover. Pre-tighten the bolts and install Tool. Then tighten the clutch cover bolts evenly in two steps in the order Page 1835 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2044 Page 12981 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 24 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4714 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 8552 6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure. 8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Without CONSULT-II NOTE: - It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. - It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, then turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. Page 3291 7. Remove timing chain tensioner (secondary) from cylinder head. Remove timing chain tensioner (secondary) with its stopper pin attached. NOTE: Stopper pin was attached when timing chain (secondary) was removed. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 4 journal of camshaft. CAUTION: Do not support journal No. 1 (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a different diameter from the other three locations. 2. Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal. 3. Turn camshaft to one direction with hands, and measure the camshaft runout on dial indicator. (Total indicator reading) Standard: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) Limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) 4. If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft. Camshaft Cam Height 1. Measure the camshaft cam height with micrometer. Standard: Intake: 45.465 - 45.655 mm (1.7900 - 1.7974 inch) Exhaust: 45.075 - 45.265 mm (1.7746 - 1.7821 inch) Limit: Intake: 45.265 mm (1.7821 inch) Exhaust: 44.875 mm (1.7667 inch) 2. If wear exceeds the limit, replace camshaft. Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance CAMSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER Page 5465 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 8799 e. Once the lock ring is in the locked position remove the pocket screwdriver. f. Make sure the locating tab is touching the lock ring holder on the opposite side from where the pocket screwdriver was inserted. 9. Reinstall the fuel tank back into the vehicle in reverse of removal. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. 10. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly. Page 13833 Audible Warning Device: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Terminals And Reference Value For BCM Part 1 Page 2185 Page 2059 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 5880 7. Remove two Bolts and remove the Knee Protector Brace (see Figure 14). 8. If the BCM needs to be replaced as confirmed by Procedure A Terminal Check, go ahead and replace the BCM now. Then continue with step # 10. ^ Remove all three Harness Connectors from the BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Remove the two BCM Mounting Bolts and remove BCM (see Figure 15). ^ Install the new BCM. Page 10415 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 2067 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 6704 Case 9 Case 10 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit. Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Step 1) Page 4940 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 9688 Control Module: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Page 13224 SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). - Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the glass. - Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. Page 5071 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-AF1B1 EC-AF1B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1B2 Page 14759 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 4778 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 543 Page 1507 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Service Precautions Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions Precautions for Three Way Catalyst If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions. - Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst. - When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary. - Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst. Page 12335 Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection Front Blower Motor Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor. - Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit. - Apply 12 volts to terminal 2 and ground to terminal 1 and verify that the motor operates freely and quietly. Page 7712 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 1929 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 11380 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 14267 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7843 Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 6828 Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 1) Combination Meter Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection Page 3851 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains sealability. NOTE: - Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because N50 models do not have fuel return system. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to "INTAKE MANIFOLD". - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. - Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. - During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi) 7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 4291 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4081 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6706 BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 13754 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3587 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Release fuel pressure. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove intake manifold collector. 3. Remove fuel tube and fuel injector assembly. 4. Loosen nuts and bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown to remove intake manifold. 5. Remove gaskets. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ^ Check the surface distortion of the intake manifold mating surface with straightedge and feeler gauge. Limit: 0.1 mm (0.004 inch) ^ If it exceeds the limit, replace intake manifold. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Page 7163 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 10465 CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released. 6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Page 9352 Camshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-PHSB1 EC-PHSB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-PHSB2 Page 6815 Case 1 Page 14028 Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations Page 13768 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Checking Fluid Level Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Level Checking Fluid Level Check fluid level, referring to the scale on the reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F). CAUTION: ^ Do not overfill. ^ Do not reuse any power steering fluid. ^ Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Page 5934 5. Operation mode - Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current- consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption. 1. CAN communication status - With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. - Control by BCM is being operated properly. - When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. - Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status - This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. - It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. - Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status - With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. - With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. - Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status - BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. Page 427 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 6533 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 6 Page 10840 Neutral Safety Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 7108 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways Seat Back Frame: Customer Interest Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways Classification: BT05-050 Reference: NTB05-092 Date: October 7, 2005 RIGHT FRONT SEAT BACK ASSEMBLY RATTLES AND EXCESSIVE SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (1A60) (Applies ONLY to vehicles with Manual seats WI Fold Flat Feature) APPLIED VINS: Frontier, Xterra, & Pathfinder: ALL Titan: vehicles built before 1N6AAO6A * 6N507692 Armada: vehicles built before 5N1AAO8B * 6N704123 IF YOU CONFIRM An unoccupied front passenger seat back rattles and moves side-to-side when driven ^ Over speed bumps at 5 mph or above ^ On bumpy roads at 15 mph or above ACTION ^ Remove the seat from the vehicle. ^ Remove the seat cushion, apply thread locker to 4 existing screws, and reinforce the seat by adding pop rivets as per the Service Information section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2619 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 10993 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 3244 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8386 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7554 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 6163 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 10590 NOTE: When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and cylinder body from torque member. 4. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: REfill with new brake fluid. Refer to Fluids and Lubricants. - Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install sliding pin bolts and torque member to caliper, if removed. Refer to Components. 3. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque. Refer to Components. CAUTION: When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wiper any oil off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. - Do not reuse cylinder body torque member bolts. 4. Install brake hose to cylinder body, If removed, then tighten union bolt to the specified torque. Refer to Components. CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt. - Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union bolt and washers. 5. REfill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to Bleeding Brake System. 6. Install wheel and tire. Refer to Rotation. Page 1000 Page 1736 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Classification: RA09-003 Reference: NTB10-008 Date: January 15, 2010 2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for identification), AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way. ^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions. Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations PG-POWER-09 Page 12505 Refrigerant: Service and Repair HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. Page 1708 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9171 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 13805 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 7490 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 6597 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 4446 Page 10786 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 2274 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2343 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 663 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9 Page 11812 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5488 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 2001 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 10189 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8267 Page 13193 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 11347 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 6976 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9742 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 12450 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Intake Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. Page 10965 Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation PNP SWITCH Component Description When the selector lever position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to "WARNING LAMPS". 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. Page 4466 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 10959 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 1879 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 218 4. Carefully reposition the Driver's Door Rubber Welt away from the Instrument Panel Side Trim (see Figure 11). 5. Carefully remove the Front Pillar Lower Finisher by pulling it rearward to release the Securing Clips (see Figure 12). 6. Remove two Screws and remove the Drivers Side Instrument Panel Lower Cover (see Figure 13). ^ Carefully pull the Cover rearward to release the Securing Clips. ^ Disconnect all Harness Connectors from the Lower Cover. Page 1913 Page 1759 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations FIRING ORDER 1-2-3-4-5-6 Removal and Installation Steering Gear: Service and Repair Removal and Installation POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Removal and Installation CAUTION: Spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the steering column is separated from the steering gear assembly. Therefore secure the steering wheel to avoid turning. REMOVAL 1. Set front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the front tires from the vehicle, using power tool. 3. Remove the engine undercover, using power tool. 4. On 4WD models, remove the front final drive, then support the drive shafts, using suitable wire. 5. Remove the stabilizer bar brackets and reposition the stabilizer bar. 6. Remove the cotter pins at the steering outer sockets. CAUTION: Do not reuse the cotter pins. 7. Remove the outer socket nuts. 8. Remove the steering outer sockets from the steering knuckles, using Tool. Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A) CAUTION: ^ Do not damage the ball joint boots. ^ Do not damage the ball joint threads. Thread the ball joint nut onto the end of the ball joint during removal. Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Warning Light After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off. This light warns of low tire pressure. NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and Owner's Manual. The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound for about 10 seconds. Page 13699 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 12589 Page 3836 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 13657 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Diagram Information and Instructions Canister Vent Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 5177 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2038 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 13452 26.5-35.4 in-lb/ 3.5 +/- 0.5 Nm. 7. Turn the seat over to access the bottom surface of the U-brackets. Clamp one U- bracket with narrow nose locking pliers so that it flexes and contacts the synchronization tube as shown in Figure 5. 8. Using a center punch, mark the spot on the bottom surface of the U-bracket 10 mm/0.39 inch from the each edge and drill an 1/8 inch hole that passes through the U-bracket and the wall of the synchronization tube (see Figure 6). 9. Repeat the procedure on the top surface of the U-bracket. 10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9 on the other end of the synchronization tube. Page 12765 Seat Belt: Testing and Inspection Seat Belt Inspection AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: - The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). - The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide). - The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. - Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. - The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows: a. Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should sound for about seven seconds. b. Fasten driver's seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop. 2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag warning lamp. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function ( AIR BAG)". 3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. 4. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely. 5. Check retractor operation: a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the "SEAT BELT TAPE SET" and perform the following steps. Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt. 4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening. NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling. 6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts. Page 11220 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 12013 Page 5798 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 1382 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 12212 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 6099 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 2606 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 13683 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Service and Repair Access Cover: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove bolts using power tool. 2. Lift up on engine room cover firmly to dislodge snap fit mounts. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch cover when installing or removing. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1007 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 13013 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 10408 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1742 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7978 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 4308 Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. Page 1633 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 6199 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1486 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 4687 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 8991 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 14387 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 9121 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 5840 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8845 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: By Symptom Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4564 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Specifications Page 1124 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Blower Switch Check continuity between terminals at each switch position. Page 2712 Detailed Procedure (Steps 32 - 33) DETAILED PROCEDURE Page 2381 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation PSP SENSOR Component Description Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. Page 3258 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 22 Locations Location of Electrical Parts Page 4677 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13014 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 10911 Battery Current Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR 1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. 2. Disconnect battery negative cable. 3. Install jumper cable between battery negative terminal and body ground. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. 5. Check voltage between ECM terminal 71 (battery current sensor signal) and ground. Voltage: Approximately 2.5 V 6. If NG, replace battery negative cable assembly. Page 10958 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 13554 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 3266 EC-IVCB2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 3676 Page EM-17 Page 2614 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 13639 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 6593 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 4817 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8538 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 5286 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Locations Fuse Block: Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11349 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 11093 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake Cold ..................................................................................................................................................... ................ 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Hot* (reference data) ....................................................................................................................................... 0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 inch) Exhaust Cold ..................................................................................................................................................... ................ 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) Hot* (reference data) ................................................................................................................................... 0.0308 - 0.0432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 inch) *: Approximately 80°C (176°F) Available Valve Lifter Page 9932 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair M226 Without Electronic Lock Differential Changing Differential Gear Oil DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. Page 1961 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 7727 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 2944 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tool where shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (see Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION: Tighten the bolt no more than necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Torque the camshaft sprocket bolts with all timing chains installed and Tool J-48761 holding the crankshaft. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 6331 Page 7951 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 13741 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 6152 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 14333 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 7069 6. Select "FUEL INJECTION" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode, and select "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. 7. Check "HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)" at idle speed when adjusting "FUEL INJECTION" to ±25%. CAUTION: - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.68 V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.68 V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (A/T), 3rd gear position (M/T). The voltage should be below 0.18 V at least once during this procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. Page 6377 Disclaimer Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VSS Description The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. Page 5473 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 14653 Page 575 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 1453 Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3507 1. Write down all radio station presets. 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-48761 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets. Figure 1 shows J-48761 installed on an AWD vehicle. NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioner plungers. Figure 3 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE: The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. Service and Repair Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the manual transmission from the vehicle. Refer to "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 2WD models)" or "Removal and Installation from Vehicle (For 4WD models)". 2. Remove the release bearing sleeve assembly, holder spring, and withdrawal lever from inside the clutch housing. 3. Remove the dust cover. 4. Remove the snap spring from the withdrawal lever. 5. Remove the release bearing from release bearing sleeve using suitable tool. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ^ Replace the release bearing if it is seized, damaged, faulty in rotation direction, or has poor aligning function. ^ Replace the withdrawal lever if its contact surface is worn abnormally. ^ Replace the dust seal if it is deformed or cracked. INSTALLATION Locations Battery Current Sensor: Locations Page 11991 Page 6614 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams CAN System (Engine Controls) EC-CAN-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Testing and Inspection Check Valve: Testing and Inspection Check Valve - A check valve is provided in the washer tube fluid line. Be careful not to connect check valve to washer tube in the wrong direction. Page 6475 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11681 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 12295 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Air Mix Door Motor (Front) Air Mix Door Motor (Front) Circuit SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Air mix door control system components are: - Front air control - Air mix door motor (front) - PBR (built into air mix door motor) - Intake sensor System Operation The front air control receives data from the temperature selected by the driver. The front air control then applies a voltage to one circuit of the air mix door motor, while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the air mix door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the air mix door positions by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each door. Air Mix Door Control Specification COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Page 3023 Fuse And Relay Box - Terminal Arrangement Page 6192 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 7285 Page 13553 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 11125 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 14699 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 10783 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 7057 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6166 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2372 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 11083 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 12329 CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the cowl top. ^ For removal procedure, refer to the appropriate section of the ESM, if needed. 2. Clean off the flange of the air intake hole (located at right side of cowl area) with a suitable cleaner. See Figure 1. Page 2108 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 777 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 11375 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 361 Page 7925 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 9656 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6410 Page 7594 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3776 1. Internal chain guide 2. O-ring 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Slack guide 10. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) (LH) 13. O-ring 14. Tension guide Removal and Installation CAUTION: - After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. - When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. - Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft pulley. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the rocker covers or intake manifold collector to remove or install the timing chain(s). REMOVAL Page 10886 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 7416 Page 9647 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6430 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 7096 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5710 EC-APPS2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS3 Page 9225 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4583 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 6681 System Diagram System diagram Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1 Page 10341 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1269 Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Page 3582 Intake Manifold: Specifications Service Limits & General Specifications INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR, INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD Page 3248 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 6784 Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit (Steps 2 - 3) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 1) ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Page 262 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 1984 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1324 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 5407 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 7064 EC-O2S2B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2S2B2 Page 2114 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10953 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3855 OVERALL SEQUENCE Page 13124 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description Refer to INFORMATION BUS". Page 585 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 10572 ^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads, caliper parts, and hardware. CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface. BRAKE JUDDER ^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out. Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see Figure 1). Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation (see Figure 2). ^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering wheel. Vehicle Storage: ^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the brake pads will rust. ^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface will be different. ^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off. Lug Nut Overtorque: ^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over tightened, especially with an air impact Page 3903 OVERALL SEQUENCE Page 6335 Page 7410 Page 1243 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8085 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11839 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 9476 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7615 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7053 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8980 Page 6142 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7239 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 4273 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 8427 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6297 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 5696 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 11392 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status - Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 3 seconds have elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status - IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description Refer to Information Bus. Page 10280 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Drive Belt Tensioner: Customer Interest Engine - Drive Belt Chirp/Squeak On Start Up Classification: EM06-004B Reference: NTB06-072B Date: September 3, 2009 DRIVE BELT NOISE This bulletin has been amended. The Service Procedure, Applied Vehicles / VIN / Date, ACTION, and Claims Information have been revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2008 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2008 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2008 Frontier (D40) APPLIED ENGINE: VQ40 engine ONLY APPLIED VINS: Xterra: Vehicles built before 5N1AN0(***)8C 531034 Pathfinder: Vehicles built before 5N1AR18(**)8C 656034 Frontier: Vehicles built before 1N6AD0(***)8C 437234 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before March 5, 2008 IF YOU CONFIRM: A chirping or "squeak" noise is coming from the engine area, usually occurring at start-up in the morning especially in cold or damp conditions. OR A squealing or chirping noise occurs when the vehicle has been driven for awhile (an extended period of time). Duplication of the noise may require operation of the engine for at least one (1) hour. AND In either of these cases the noise is heard coming from the drive belt. ACTION: ^ Inspect power steering oil pump pulley alignment. Realign the pump bracket, if needed. ^ Replace the Auto-Tensioner and Drive Belt with the ones listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin, if needed. ^ Refer to the Service Procedure in this bulletin for details. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5321 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Testing and Inspection Key Switch (Insert) Check (Steps 1 - 2) Page 7552 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Diagram Information and Instructions Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 461 Page 10450 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair HDC/HSA/VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw(s). When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor". 2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ Do not pull on the sensor harness. 3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION ^ Before installing wheel sensors, Inspect wheel sensor assembly and replace if damaged. - Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. - Install a new wheel sensor O-ring then apply a coat of suitable grease to the O-ring and mounting hole. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". ^ Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. REAR Removal 1. Remove axle shaft assembly. NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. 2. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number 205-D002 Installation Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 9034 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 3506 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on November 5, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account will be charged $29.85 plus applicable taxes and freight. Essential Tool J-48761 (VQ40 Ring Gear Stop) was sent to dealers May 2007. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 8014 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and let it idle. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the given conditions. Page 321 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 600 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Locations SRS Components Parts Location Page 12412 Control Assembly: Description and Operation Control Operation Control Operation TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (TEMPERATURE CONTROL) Increases or decreases the set temperature. RECIRCULATION () SWITCH - When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC. - When REC switch is turned OFF, air inlet is set to fresh. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again. - REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position or at the floor position. DEFROSTER SWITCH Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position and compressor is enabled. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH When switch is ON, rear window is defogged. OFF SWITCH (BLOWER SPEED SET TO 0) The compressor and blower are OFF. A/C SWITCH The compressor is ON or OFF. MODE DIAL Controls the air discharge outlets. BLOWER CONTROL DIAL Manually controls the four blower speeds and turns blower off and on. Page 9583 Page 6809 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2) Locations Battery Current Sensor: Locations Page 12405 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 5888 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 9160 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 5834 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 7038 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 11680 Page 7041 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 11836 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6401 Page 13879 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1438 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 13823 Audible Warning Device: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, and turn ignition switch ON. 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". Page 8537 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 1207 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Drive/Propeller Shaft: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration Classification: PD10-001 Reference: NTB10-052 Date: April 8, 2010 NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL BEARINGS) APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an Applied Vehicle. Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced. ACTION Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings). ^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions. NOTE: Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement can resolve the incident, should it occur. PARTS INFORMATION U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and appropriate coding for repairs preformed. Page 13599 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5112 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 14196 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 1360 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 12606 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 4463 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 4010 Page 5077 EC-O2S2B1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-O2S2B2 Page 4483 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 4614 Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11) Page 12684 Page 6134 Page 6609 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 13443 11. Install an 1/8 inch short steel blind rivet (Marson Klik-Fast (5B4-2) 1/8" diameter 1/8" grip Steel or equivalent) in the 4 holes drilled in Steps 7, 8 and 9. 12. Reassemble the seat base, install the seat in the vehicle, attach the battery cables (negative cable last), and reset the radio stations. Disclaimer Page 12036 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 6523 Wiring Diagram Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3) Page 2814 5. Cut out the template and place it on the frame rail as shown in Figure 3. ^ Make sure the template is aligned (straight) with the frame rail. 6. Center punch and drill a 13/32 (10 mm) hole at the location shown. 7. Prep the hole you just drilled as follows: Page 9112 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 9664 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 14269 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 261 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 2157 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 4111 Water Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation CAUTION: ^ When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belts. ^ Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. ^ After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using tool. REMOVAL 1. Remove undercover with power tool. 2. Remove drive belts. 3. Drain engine coolant. Refer to "ENGINE COOLANT". CAUTION: ^ Perform this step when engine is cold. ^ Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. 4. Remove radiator hoses (upper and lower) and cooling fan assembly. Refer to "ENGINE COOLING FAN". 5. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover from front timing chain case, using Tool. Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228) 6. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows: Page 8054 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS1 EC-TPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS2 Page 1985 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5728 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 6901 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 8088 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 9290 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 641 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 8 Page 11738 Page 12963 Page 8881 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 10108 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 2373 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 477 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 12519 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Connector Locations Page 11200 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4384 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 4679 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 7901 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 11514 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 6007 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Specifications Firing Order: Specifications FIRING ORDER 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 6876 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 8 - 10) IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Page 14858 INSTALLATION 1. Install the regulator assembly. a. Loosely install the top rear regulator bolt to use along with the temporary holds on the window motor or crank assembly to install the assembly in the door. b. Install the top front regulator bolt. c. Install the bottom front regulator bolt. d. Install the bottom rear regulator bolt. e. Tighten the top rear regulator bolt. f. Install the top window motor or crank assembly bolt. g. Install the lower window motor or crank assembly bolt h. Install the rear window motor or crank assembly bolt. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) 2. If equipped, connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Lower the glass and ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass bolts. Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) 4. Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". 5. On the drivers door, reset the motor (if equipped). Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". 6. Install the inside seal. 7. Install front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". Page 8179 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 11398 Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Page 8139 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6005 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6159 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 53 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 984 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3165 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 3824 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 1539 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9314 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 8073 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 14392 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Seat Cushion Trim and Pad Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Trim and Pad SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD CAUTION: - Front passenger seat is equipped with an Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove the trim as this will affect the Occupant Classification System calibration. - Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly. - When removed, the passenger seat cushion must always be placed pan side UP to prevent damage. - During installation, the wire harness clips must be reinstalled in the holes they were originally in. Do not add additional clips. - The Occupant Classification System control module can only be replaced as part of the seat cushion assembly. 1. Remove the recline release lever. 2. Remove four bolts and the seat cushion assembly. - On the fold flat passenger seat it is necessary to unclip the rear flap j-clip from the seat pan. 3. On the drivers seat only, after removing the seat cushion trim and pad, remove the hog rings to separate the trim cover from the pad. Page 5410 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 8709 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 12010 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 14349 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER ^ Measure the outer diameter of crankshaft main journals with micrometer. Standard: 69.951 69.975 mm (2.7540 - 2.7549 inch) dia. ^ If out of the standard, measure the main bearing oil clearance. Then use undersize bearing. Refer to "MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE". CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER ^ Measure the outer diameter of crankshaft pin journal with micrometer. Standard: 53.956 - 53.974 mm (2.1242 - 2.1250 inch) dia. ^ If out of the standard, measure the connecting rod bearing oil clearance. Then use undersize bearing. Refer to "CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE". CRANKSHAFT OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER ^ Measure the dimensions at four different points as shown in the figure on each main journal and pin journal with micrometer. ^ Out-of-round is indicated by the difference in the dimensions between "X" and "Y" at "A" and "B". ^ Taper is indicated by the difference in the dimensions between "A" and "B" at "X" and "Y". Limit: Out-of-round (Difference between "X" and "Y"): 0.002 mm (0.0001 inch) Taper (Difference between "A" and "B"): 0.002 mm (0.0001 inch) ^ If the measured value exceeds the limit, correct or replace crankshaft. ^ If corrected, measure the bearing oil clearance of the corrected main journal and/or pin journal. Then select the main bearing and/or connecting rod bearing. Refer to "MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE" and/or "CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE". CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT ^ Place V-block on precise flat table, and support the journals on the both end of crankshaft. ^ Place dial indicator straight up on the No. 3 journal. ^ While rotating crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer on dial indicator. (Total indicator reading) Standard: Less than 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) Limit: 0.10 mm (0.0039 inch) ^ If it exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft. Page 7467 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 7531 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Part 9 Page 14337 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8829 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 7491 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6877 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 7442 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 5007 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 14518 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 5299 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-APPS1 EC-APPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-APPS2 Locations Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4872 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 14492 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 7625 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Description and Operation Ignition Control Module: Description and Operation IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. Page 6097 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5151 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 914 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 8389 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 10101 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2594 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 5006 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10260 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 8846 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FTT SENSOR Component Description The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 7129 10. Secure the new BCM Sub-Harness to the Existing Vehicle Harness (see Figure 9). ^ Use the Tie Wrap that comes already attached to the new Sub-Harness. 11. Re-connect the negative battery cable. 12. Confirm the installed BCM Sub-Harness does not interfere with the operation of the adjustable pedal assembly. NOTE: It is okay if the BCM Sub-Harness has slight contact with the adjustable pedal assembly when the pedal assembly is adjusted to the end of its upward travel (closest to the driver). 13. For vehicles without a trailer lights wiring connector, confirm BCM operation as follows: a. Turn the ignition switch ON. b. Place your hand on the new BCM Sub-Harness. c. Activate the left turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the left turn indicator light flashes. d. Activate the right turn indicator (blinker) and confirm a "click" is felt / heard each time the right turn indicator light flashes. e. Apply the brake pedal and confirm a "click" is felt / heard when the brake lights come on. ^ If you feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, go to the next step. ^ If you do not feel / hear a "clicking" noise when performing steps c, d, and e, replace the BCM, then go to the next step. 14. Re-install all components in reverse order of removal. 15. Re-program all radio station presets. 16. If the BCM was replaced, you'll need to do the following: IMPORTANT: You MUST perform the following steps according to the applicable service manual to ensure the new BCM is properly programmed to the original vehicle settings. ^ BCM "Write Configuration" using CONSULT-II. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" of the applicable service manual. ^ Initialization of NATS System and Registration of all NATS Ignition Key I.D.s. Refer to Nissan Technical Bulletin NTB03-031b. ^ I.D. Registration Procedure of the Low Tire Pressure Warning System. Refer to "I.D. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE" in section "WT" of the applicable service manual. ^ Register I.D. Code for Remote Keyless Entry Keyfobs. Refer to section "BL" of the applicable service manual. Page 1652 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8034 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 9355 Camshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 1833 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 11334 Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement Page 14706 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 6477 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 8621 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 1692 Page 6693 NOTE: There is a case that some of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" and "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" are not needed for diagnosis. In the case, "UNKWN" and "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" in "Check sheet results (example)" change to "-". Then, ignore check marks on the check sheet table. 2. For the selected possible causes, it is expected that malfunctions have been found in the past. Page 12022 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 2201 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 10100 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1509 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 12468 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Flexible A/C Hose Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible A/C Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 2. Remove the front right mud guard. 3. Remove the front right splash shield. 4. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 5. Remove the low-pressure flexible A/C hose. Refer to "Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible A/C Hose". INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components". CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible A/C hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it for installation. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 3562 Oil Pan: Service and Repair OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Removal and Installation REMOVAL (LOWER) WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, do not drain engine oil when engine is hot. 1. Drain engine oil. Refer to "Changing Engine Oil". 2. Remove oil pan (lower) as follows: a. Loosen bolts with power tool in reverse order as shown to remove. Page 6993 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 2985 16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no refrigerant leaks. 17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to "Operational Check". Page 13641 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6619 CAN System (Type 7) Schematic Page 7213 4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 6. Touch "R51/D40/N51" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to "Model Variation" in General Information. 7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen. Page 13737 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 3295 ^ Follow your identification marks made during removal, or follow the identification marks that are present on new camshafts for proper placement and direction. ^ Install camshaft so that dowel pin hole and dowel pin on front end face are positioned as shown. (No. 1 cylinder TDC on its compression stroke) NOTE: ^ Large and small pin holes are located on front end face of camshaft (INT), at intervals of 180°. Face small dia. side pin hole upward (in cylinder head upper face direction). ^ Though camshaft does not stop at the portion as shown, for the placement of cam nose, it is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same direction as shown. 4. Install camshaft brackets. ^ Remove foreign material completely from camshaft bracket backside and from cylinder head installation face. ^ Install camshaft bracket in original position and direction as shown. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 4) Preliminary Inspection Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Inspection PRELIMINARY INSPECTION WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface. NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts before making any adjustments. 1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. Unladen conditions means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions. 2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. Refer to "Inspection". 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION". 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height. Refer to "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)". Page 7272 ^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay. 9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5). IMPORTANT: ^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay. ^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals. 10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6). 11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs. Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper and washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base, then slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1680 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 1335 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Interior Room Lamp Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 967 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 4357 Page 12033 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Locations Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Page 8470 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6904 Case 2 Page 12792 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 14163 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 13853 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 3035 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 10409 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 7106 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 4901 Page 14341 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 2682 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 14510 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 12322 b. Apply the film: half on the inside, half on the outside (see Figure 5). 6. Remove the remaining adhesive covering from the foam assembly (see Figure 6). 7. Put the foam assembly in position again (see Figure 7). 8. Carefully press down on each clip, securing it to the flange (see Figure 7). ^ Before pressing down, make sure the film is underneath each clip. Page 9869 Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment 1. Check to see if the clevis pin floats freely in the bore of the clutch pedal. It should not be bound by the clevis or clutch pedal. a. If the clevis pin is not free, check that the ASCD clutch switch is not applying pressure to the clutch pedal causing the clevis pin to bind. To adjust, loosen lock nut and turn ASCD clutch switch. b. Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque. c. Verify that the clevis pin floats in the bore of the clutch pedal. It should not be bound by the clutch pedal. d. If the clevis pin is still not free, remove the clevis pin and check for deformation or damage. Replace clevis pin if necessary. Leave pin removed for step 2. 2. Check clutch pedal stroke for free range of movement. a. With the clevis pin removed, manually move the clutch pedal up and down to determine if it moves freely. b. If any sticking is noted, replace the assembly. Page 13086 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 5905 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 14825 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 8425 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4839 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 2544 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged Roof Rack Frame: Customer Interest Body - Roof Rack Front Decal Damaged Classification: BT06-026A Reference: NTB06-093A Date: January 5, 2010 2005 - 2010 XTERRA AND FRONTIER; ROOF RACK DECAL DAMAGE This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and the Parts Information have been updated. No other changes have been made. Please discard the earlier version of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The "NISSAN", "FRONTIER", or "XTERRA" roof rack decal(s) need to be replaced for any reason. ACTIONS 1. Use a heat gun to carefully remove the damaged decal. 2. Clean the side rail or air dam surface. 3. Apply a new decal listed in the Parts Information. NOTE: Do not replace the roof rack, rails, or air dam for damaged decals. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service\ Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: Page 13416 NOTE: Place the seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt/and or scuff marks. 3. Remove the seat cushion assembly from the seat by removing the mounting bolt from each corner (see Figure 1). Page 7616 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5166 Throttle Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-TPS1 EC-TPS1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-TPS2 Page 5252 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 9505 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Service and Repair Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair SPIRAL CABLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the steering wheel. 3. Remove the column cover upper and lower. 4. Disconnect wiper and washer switch connector. Then while pressing tabs, pull wiper and washer switch away from spiral cable to remove. Page 13450 NOTE: Place the seat on a clean surface to prevent dirt/and or scuff marks. 3. Remove the seat cushion assembly from the seat by removing the mounting bolt from each corner (see Figure 1). Page 14265 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 1255 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 14075 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 7849 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 6485 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8005 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 14582 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 4690 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1363 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 8503 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 564 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 7919 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 6077 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 6287 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 9715 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 1982 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 9902 3. Connect the brake tube and parking brake cable to the carrier cover and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to PB-4, "Components". See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair 4. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug hole. Refer to "Checking Differential Gear Oil". Page 6790 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 4 - 6) Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Low Tire Pressure Warning Light After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off. This light warns of low tire pressure. NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and Owner's Manual. The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound for about 10 seconds. Page 4740 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 11304 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 14776 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 6952 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 12 - 14) IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. - IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection". - Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START". Page 6702 Case 6 Page 13573 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Page 14064 Page 1614 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation IAT SENSOR Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor 1. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 11881 SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 5181 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1237 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 7628 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Specifications Firing Order: Specifications FIRING ORDER 1-2-3-4-5-6 Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations Page 13018 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 14670 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 9234 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 7742 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 1760 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 244 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 6813 Check Sheet Part 1 Page 6987 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 10855 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 9430 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 9216 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 145 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal. Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. - Disconnect the battery negative cable. Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Technical Service Bulletin # 05-086 Date: 050922 Campaign - Body Control Module Repl./Sub Harness Install Reference: NTB05-086 Date: September 22 2005 VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN BODY CONTROL MODULE SUB-HARNESS CAMPAIGN I.D. # : P5234 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-05 Titan (A60) 2004-05 Armada (TA60) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Xterra (N50) APPLIED VINS: Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**4N500014-593471 Titan King Cab: 1N6*A06**5N500006-547508 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**4N055132-593472 Titan Crew Cab: 1N6*A07**5N500000-547507 Armada: 5N1*A08**4N057073-747082 Armada: 5N1*A08**5N700000-725222 Frontier King Cab: 1N6*D06**5C400026-437197 Frontier Crew Cab: 1N6*D07**5C400012-437203 Pathfinder: SN1 *R18**5C700001-748937 Xterra: 5N1*N08**5C600000-621507 NOTE: Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility. INTRODUCTION Nissan is committed to providing the highest levels of product quality and customer satisfaction. We know that towing a trailer may have been an important consideration in the customer's purchase decision. In new Titan, Armada, Frontier, Pathfinder, and Xterra vehicles, Nissan recently introduced enhanced electronic circuitry which may help further protect a vehicle from damage or fire caused by a short circuit in the electrical system of a towed trailer due to problems with the trailer's wiring or mis-installation of trailer lighting or electrical accessories. Nissan is making this production enhancement available to owners of previously purchased vehicles so that they will have the same protection should they ever tow a trailer with a defective electrical system. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number P5234 to this campaign. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign. NUMBER OF VEHICLES IN THIS CAMPAIGN The number of vehicles in this campaign is 304,000. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the Nissan dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (P5234) that enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a Nissan dealer's inventory. Page 4304 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 14877 adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Page 11044 Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. Page 13222 3. for power windows, operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. For manual windows, temporarily reinstall the window crank handle and lower the window until the glass bolts can be seen. 5. Remove the inside seal. 6. Remove the glass bolts. 7. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 8. If equipped, disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 9. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. - Wire wear - Regulator deformation - Grease condition for each sliding part Removal and Replacement Front Door Window Regulator: Removal and Replacement FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Front Door Glass REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch. 3. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) - Check the glass for proper fit. Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION". - On the drivers door, reset the motor. Refer to "SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". FITTING INSPECTION - Check that the glass fits securely into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to adjust the glass position. Regulator and motor or crank assembly bolts: 5.7 Nm (0.58 kg-m, 50 in-lb) Glass bolts: 6.1 Nm (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Front Door Glass Regulator REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to "FRONT DOOR". 2. If equipped, temporarily reconnect the power window switch. Page 1704 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1359 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 12127 Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base) Page 3230 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 1334 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways Seat Back Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Right Front Seat Back Rattles/Moves Sideways Classification: BT05-050 Reference: NTB05-092 Date: October 7, 2005 RIGHT FRONT SEAT BACK ASSEMBLY RATTLES AND EXCESSIVE SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2006 Frontier (D40) 2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (1A60) (Applies ONLY to vehicles with Manual seats WI Fold Flat Feature) APPLIED VINS: Frontier, Xterra, & Pathfinder: ALL Titan: vehicles built before 1N6AAO6A * 6N507692 Armada: vehicles built before 5N1AAO8B * 6N704123 IF YOU CONFIRM An unoccupied front passenger seat back rattles and moves side-to-side when driven ^ Over speed bumps at 5 mph or above ^ On bumpy roads at 15 mph or above ACTION ^ Remove the seat from the vehicle. ^ Remove the seat cushion, apply thread locker to 4 existing screws, and reinforce the seat by adding pop rivets as per the Service Information section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 581 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 14691 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 140 Page 7170 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 6472 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 6480 Page 6870 BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1) BCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2) Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection Page 9086 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 7209 Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures CONSULT-II Function (BCM) CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) Page 322 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 5903 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 2319 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 10772 1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. 2. Install axle shaft assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Page 467 Page 11694 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 11590 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 909 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6964 Part 2 DESCRIPTION Harness Indication Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 284 BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic Part 2 Page 7809 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. 2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Page 4738 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5302 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation APP SENSOR Component Description The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. Page 8700 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 5325 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 2002 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 40 6. Carefully apply the decal to the side rail (see Figure 5). NOTE: Use the pencil marks you made on the side rail in step 2, to align the decal. 7. Without removing the decal's protective covering, apply pressure all along the decal with a squeegee (3M(TM) Scotchcal(TM) Squeegee (blue), P/N 051141-71601 or equivalent). Pay close attention to the edges of the label (see Figure 6). 8. Carefully peel away the decal's protective covering, making sure not to peel away the edges of the decal (see Figure 7). Page 865 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 14730 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10846 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 6988 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Tighten oil pan bolts in numerical order as shown. Oil pan bolts ........................................................ .......................................................................................................... 7.9 Nm (0.81 kg-m, 70 inch lbs.) Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Specifications Page 7731 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 1882 - Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) - Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. - Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) - Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) - Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. - Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. - Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. - With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). - Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). - Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD - Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. - Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. - With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Page 13084 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 282 Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement Page 10942 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams How to Read Wiring Diagrams CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. Page 112 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5911 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 8383 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 13028 Trip Computer: Description and Operation BOARD COMPUTER System Description FUNCTION The board computer can indicate the following items. - DTE (distance to empty) - Trip distance - Trip time - Average fuel consumption - Average vehicle speed DTE (DISTANCE TO EMPTY) INDICATION The range indication provides the driver with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The range is calculated by signals from the fuel level sensor unit (fuel remaining), ECM (fuel consumption) and the ABS actuator and electric unit (vehicle speed). The indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds. When fuel remaining is less than approximately 11.6 (3 1/8 US gal, 2 1/2 Imp gal), the indication will blink as a warning. If the fuel remaining is less than approximately 9.6 (2 1/2 US gal, 2 1/8 Imp gal), the indication will show "---". In this case, the display will change to the DTE mode even though the display is showing a different mode. When the battery is disconnected and reconnected, DTE mode will display "---" until the vehicle is driven 0.3 miles (0.5 km). TRIP DISTANCE Trip distance is calculated by signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (vehicle speed). If trip distance is reset, trip time will be reset at the same time. TRIP TIME Trip time displays cumulative ignition switch ON time. If trip time is reset, trip distance will be reset at the same time. AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION Average fuel consumption indication is calculated by signals from the ABS actuator and electric unit (vehicle speed) and the ECM (fuel consumption). The indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds. AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED Average vehicle speed indication is calculated by running distance and running time. The indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds. If average vehicle speed is reset, average fuel consumption will be reset at the same time. After resetting, the display will show "---" for 30 seconds. HOW TO CHANGE/RESET INDICATION Indication can be changed in the following order by momentarily depressing the board computer switch. Trip distance -> dte -> Average vehicle speed -> Average fuel consumption -> Trip time ->. Holding the switch for more than 1 second will reset the indication of the currently displayed mode (trip distance, trip time, average vehicle speed or average fuel consumption). NOTE: After the display changes automatically, the indication can be changed to the next mode by pushing the board computer switch. CAN Communication System Description Refer to Information Bus. Page 950 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 12993 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 6417 Page 1385 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and select "DATA MONITOR" mode. 4. Select "MAS A/F SE-B1" and check indication under the given conditions. 5. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts b. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. 6. Turn ignition switch OFF. 7. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. 8. Perform step 2 to 4 again. 9. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Without CONSULT-II 1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. 4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. a. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. - Crushed air ducts - Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element - Uneven dirt of air cleaner element - Improper specification of intake air system parts Page 2436 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPONENT INSPECTION PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 4568 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 9736 CONSULT-II Checking System CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description - CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. - Refer to "CONSULT-II Operator's Manual" for more information. Function and System Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 570 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 10232 15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 16. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. 17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool. 18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. Installation Page 12512 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair LUBRICANT Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: - Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) LUBRICANT Name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type R (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGR0 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: Test Condition - Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm - A/C switch: On - Blower speed: Max. position - Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30 °C (77° to 86 °F)] - Intake position: Recirculation ( ) - Perform lubricant return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the given table. Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system. Amount of Lubricant to be Added Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement 1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/ recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant". 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the lubricant from the "old" (removed) compressor into graduated container and recover the amount of lubricant drained. 6. Drain the lubricant from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this lubricant to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. Page 5839 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 10025 ^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately. 6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly. 7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary. 8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member. 9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft housing. 10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. Technical Service Bulletin # 10-008 Date: 100115 Drivetrain - Rear Differential Axle Seal Leaks Classification: RA09-003 Reference: NTB10-008 Date: January 15, 2010 2005-2010 FRONTIER AND XTERRA; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) - with M226-style axle 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) with M226-style axle IF YOU CONFIRM The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal, AND The vehicle is equipped with a M226-style axle (see the RAX section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for identification), AND No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings. ACTION Install the new axle shaft assembly which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing cage, and ABS rotor listed in the Parts Information table. NOTE: Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 8092 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5556 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 8213 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 10937 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 13803 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 8329 Page 9579 Page 11417 Engine Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 5746 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Interior/Audio - Rear Door Speaker Grille Availability Speaker: Technical Service Bulletins Interior/Audio - Rear Door Speaker Grille Availability Classification: BT06-019 Reference: NTB06-068 Date: September 28, 2006 2005 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA; REAR DOOR PANEL SPEAKER GRILLE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 Frontier (D40) 2005 Xterra (N50) IF YOU CONFIRM The rear door panel speaker grille needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION ^ Replace the rear door panel speaker grille. ^ The rear door panel speaker grille is now available as a separate part. Do not replace the door panel assembly. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. Page 7652 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 3531 Engine Oil: Technician Safety Information Precautions for Engine Oils Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS - Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. - Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. - Do not put oily rags in pockets. - Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. - Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. - First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. - Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. - Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. - Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin. - If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. - Where practical, degrease components prior to handling. - Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. Page 5740 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 9526 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 12997 In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. Page 11190 Page 14710 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 10894 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7219 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of BCM REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower knee protector. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH". 3. Remove screws and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: - When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-105, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System - NATS) - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT-12, "ID Registration Procedure". Page 7851 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 7174 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 9342 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 12759 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 10994 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine From Timing Chain Area Classification: EM09-007A Reference: NTB09-128A Date: May 25, 2010 PATHFINDER / XTERRA / FRONTIER; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) VQ40 engine ONLY 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) VQ40 engine ONLY IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 9391 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 5073 EC-AF1HB1-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name EC-AF1HB2 Page 14640 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: - ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines Page 6640 LAN-CAN-16 Page 7130 ^ BCM Headlamp Configuration. Refer to "HEAD LAMP" information in section "LT" of the applicable service manual. Section 2: Pathfinder/Frontier/Xterra Procedure 1. If you determined the BCM needs to be replaced (from Procedure A Terminal Check), ^ First perform BCM "Read Configuration" using CONSULT-II. ^ To do this, refer to "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" in section "BCS" in the applicable service manual. 2. Record all radio station presets and then disconnect the negative battery cable. CAUTION: The complete repair needs to be conducted within one hour of disconnection of the battery. If the battery is left disconnected for longer than one hour, the idle setting may be lost and the vehicle may have difficulty starting. 3. Remove the Driver's Front Kick Plate (see Figure 10). ^ Carefully lift upward to release the securing clips. Page 1727 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 272 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 6637 LAN-CAN-13 Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 13667 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ASCD STEERING SWITCH 1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable). 2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 17 and 18 with pushing each switch. Page 2360 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 5412 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 14570 Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 9926 2. Check oil level from filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. 3. Apply sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug to final drive assembly and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS". ^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Page 12493 4. Heater core and evaporator pipes grommet 5. A/C drain hose grommet 6. A/C drain hose 7. Heater core pipe mounts 8. Heater core pipes 9. Heater and cooling unit assembly 9. Remove the RH heater core pipes nut. 10. Disconnect the heater core hoses from the heater core. 11. Disconnect the high- and low-pressure A/C pipes from the expansion valve. 12. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track. 13. Remove the instrument panel and console panel. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL" and "CENTER CONSOLE". See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair 14. Remove the two front floor ducts. 15. Remove the steering column. Refer to "STEERING COLUMN". 16. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse block (SMJ) electrical connectors. Refer to "Harness Layout". 17. Remove the covers then remove the three steering member bolts from each side to disconnect the steering member from the vehicle body. 18. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member. - Use suitable plugs on the heater core pipes to prevent coolant leakage. 19. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure A/C pipe and high-pressure A/C pipe with a new one, and apply compressor oil to the O-ring for installation. - After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks". NOTE: - Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT". - Recharge the A/C system. Refer to "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant". Page 4830 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 2497 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 6449 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 2361 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 633 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 13748 Cruise Control Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Adjustments Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T). 4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 11372 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 7668 - Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. - Install only parts specified for a vehicle. - Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. - Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. - If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. - Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. - For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. - For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. Page 5971 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 7686 Optional Splice Part 1 Testing and Inspection Condenser: Testing and Inspection CONDENSER-1 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. 3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance............................................................................................................................................ ....................Above 1 MOhms at 25 °C (77 °F) Page 1444 CONNECTOR SYMBOL Harness Connector Descriptions HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration given. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. Page 8787 c. Insert a pocket screwdriver between the fuel pump assembly plastic locating tab and the lock ring holder as shown in Figure 8. NOTE: The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). d. Hold the pocket screwdriver in place while installing / tightening the lock ring. NOTE: ^ Use Special Tool J-45722 to install the lock ring. ^ DO NOT use an impact wrench to install the lock ring. ^ The pocket screwdriver will hold the plastic locating tab to the left (counterclockwise) while turning the lock ring to the right (clockwise). Page 1494 Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2 Page 5401 Abbreviations How to Read Harness Layout Harness Layout HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment), Generator Sub-harness, and Trailer Tow Relay Sub-harness - Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment) - Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness - Chassis Harness - Body Harness - Body No. 2 Harness - Room Lamp Harness - Back Door Harness - Back Door No. 2 Harness - Rear Window Sub-Harness - Rear Window Defogger Sub-Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 8625 installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 6718 Case 5 Page 6775 Case 4 Page 7322 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 3702 3. Install timing chain (primary) as follows: a. Install crankshaft sprocket. - Make sure the mating marks on crankshaft sprocket face the front of engine. Page 6189 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 14335 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident Page 8903 Checking Equipment When ordering the equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. CONSULT-II Start Procedure NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. 2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VECL)" or "System Shortcut ENGINE) on the screen. Consult-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 8303 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace Vent Control Valve 1. Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V. ^ Refer to section EC in the Service Manual for replacement information. Install Filter Kit 1. Remove the spare tire. Page 3840 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak Classification: WT08-005 Reference: NTB08-032 Date: March 10, 2008 TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS SERVICE INFORMATION When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now available separately. Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information. Disclaimer Specifications Fuel Injector: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Injector Resistance [at 10 - 60 °C (50 - 140 °F)]............................................................................................... .........................................................11.1 - 14.5 Ohms Page 7753 VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD - Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. - Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). - With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. - With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. - With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in General Information. Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Page 3254 Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD - Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. - Operate the circuit. - The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Page 2634 Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter VISCOUS PAPER TYPE NOTE: ^ The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). 4. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 5. Install the air cleaner case (upper). 6. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). Page 5455 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 10128 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Interior - Rear Cup Holder Repair Procedure Drink Holders: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Rear Cup Holder Repair Procedure Classification: BT09-072 Reference: NTB09-145 Date: December 15, 2009 2005 - 2010 PATHFINDER, XTERRA, FRONTIER; REAR CUP HOLDER REPAIR APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2010 Xterra (N50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40) IF YOU CONFIRM The rear cup holder needs to be replaced for any reason, ACTION Replace only the rear cup holder - the rear cup holder is available as a separate part. NOTE: ^ Do not replace the entire center console when only the cup holder will solve the incident, if one should occur. ^ If a cup holder has been accidently snapped out of place: 1. Inspect the cup holder for damage. 2. If no damage is found, snap the cup holder back in place. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Open the rear cup holder. 2. Hold both sides of the cup holder and pull it (snap it) out of the center console. ^ If the cup holder is being replaced because it was broken, remove any pieces that may be inside the center console. Page 1487 - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1215 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 8430 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 7123 Repair Flow Chart Page 6086 Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Location Page 312 Optional Splice Part 1 Page 8554 Idle Speed: Adjustments Basic Service Procedure Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in P or N position (A/T), Neutral position (M/T). 4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn OFF headlamp, heater blower. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Page 5386 FEMALE TERMINAL - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. Page 6570 Component Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 4692 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the given items. NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. Ground Inspection Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: - Remove the ground bolt or screw. - Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. - Clean as required to assure good contact. - Reinstall bolt or screw securely. - Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. - If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution". How to Check Terminals SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Page 2285 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 5736 - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text Page 6604 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 13700 Control Unit Circuit Test INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Control Units and Electrical Parts PRECAUTIONS Page 2293 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly Page 1842 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 13171 3. Insert the clips into foam A and B (see Figure 2). 4. Remove foam A's adhesive covering where it contacts foam B, and then put the two pieces together (see Figure 2). ^ Make sure there are no gaps between foam A and B. 5. Apply both pieces of the body protector film (film) where the clips will secure to the air intake hole. a. To locate the positions of the film, rest the foam assembly with clips on top of the flange where it is to be installed (see Figure 3 and 4). CAUTION: Do not press down on and secure the clips at this time. Page 5054 Work Flow WORK FLOW INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load Page 509 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures Description and Operation Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. Page 11204 Components Parts And Harness Connector Location Page 5338 - Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. - Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. - Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. - Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. - Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. - When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. - When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange "fulltight" mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ: 3 - 5 Nm (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. Page 2035 GI-EXAMPL-02 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - Page 7966 EC-O2S2B2-01 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name Page 5408 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis How to Follow Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Matrix Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Page 7716 How to Check Terminal CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. Probing from Terminal Side Page 6626 LAN-CAN-02 Page 4953 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration Page 10105 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green BR = Brown Page 14727 OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1 Page 6862 Case 6 Page 2968 Engine Oil: Application and ID GASOLINE ENGINE OIL ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F). ^ Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy. Page 6768 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 9 - 11) Page 5240 Heat Sensitive The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60 °C (140 °F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 7943 - Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 14013 Make sure: ^ Sender connector and fuel pump connector are securely connected. ^ Fuel pump harness and sender harness are wrapped / twisted together. ^ Sender and temp sensor wires are inside guide clip. ^ Sender unit is locked in place. ^ Temp sensor is clipped in place. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm when handling the new fuel gauge sender unit. 6. Install the sender unit cover over the sender unit. ^ Slide cover on until it snaps in place. ^ Make sure the 2 clips at the top of the cover are snapped / locked in place. ^ Make sure the lower flange is under the bottom of the fuel pump assembly. ^ Carefully move the float arm through its entire range of motion making sure there is no interference.